Skip to main content

Full text of "ti :: asc :: 930038-2 ASC JSL Jan74"

See other formats


JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 
REFERENCE MANUAL 






Texas Instruments 

INCORPORATED 



Equipment Group 
P.O. Box 2909 
Austin, Texas 78767 




JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 
REFERENCE MANUAL 





INCORPORATED 



930038-2 
January 1974 



1 948 



©Texas Instruments Incorporated 197 4 

All Rights Reserved 

The information and/or drawings set forth 1n this document and all rights in and 
to inventions disclosed herein and patents which might be granted thereon disclos- 
ing or employing the materials, methods, techniques or apparatus described herein 
are the exclusive property of Texas Instruments Incorporated. 

No disclosure of the information or drawings shall be made to any other person or 
organization without the prior consent of Texas Instruments Incorporated. 



LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES 



IES| 



INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES DESTROY SUPERSEDED PAGES 



Note: The portion of the text affected by the changes is 
indicated by a vertical line in the outer margins of the 
page. 



DATES OF ISSUE FOR ORIGINAL AND CHANGED PAGES ARE: 
ORIGINAL . . . FEBRUARY 1 974 



Page 

No. 


Change 

No. 


Page 
No. 


Title 


. . . 




A page 


. . . 




Notice 


. . . 




iii - xiv .... 


. . . 




1-1 - 1-8 


. . . 




2-1 - 2-15. . . 


. . . 




3-1 - 3-5 ... 


. . . 




4-1 - 4-10 . . 


. . . 




5-1 - 5-32. . . 


. . . 




6-1 - 6-36. . . 


. . . 




7-1 - 7-82. . . 


. . . 




8-1 - 8-29. . . 


. . . 




9-1 - 9-34. . . 


. . . 




A-l - A-44 . . 


. . . 




Al-1 - Al-20. 


. . . 




A2-1 - A2-10. 


. . . o 




B-l - B-9 . . . 


. . . 




C-1 - C-6 . . . 


. . . 




D-l - D-5 . . . 


. . . 




1-1 - I-2L . . . 


. . . 




Updates . . . . 


. . . 





Change Page 
No. No. 



Change 

No. 



'Th# o(t»r.ik mdicaUi pagat cHongad, addad, or dalctad by the currant rnange 




THE JSL REFERENCE MANUAL 

-NOTICE- 

This revision of the Job Specification Reference 
Manual includes new statements, macros and ex- 
amples. However, the following items are not 
yet available for use in the ASC Operating System: 

SETUP statement 
SETUP parameter, FD statement 
DEVICE TYPE (DTYP) parameter, FD state- 
ment 

Also, DTYP parameter applies only to tape and 
direct secondary disc use for applicable statements, 

When these features are effective in OS there will 
be a notice to that effect. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS 



Paragraph 



Title 



Page 



SECTION I. INTRODUCTION 



1-1 

1-2 

1-3 

1-4 

1-5 

1-6 

1-7 

1-8 

1-9 

1-10 

1-11 

1-12 

1-13 

1-14 

1-15 

1-16 

1-17 

1-18 

1-19 

1-20 

1-21 



2-1 
2-2 

2-3 

2-4 

2-5 

2-6 

2-7 

2-8 

2-9 

2-10 

2-11 

2-12 

2-13 



General 

Lanuuasze Elements 

Character Set 

Valid ASC Symbols 

Constants 

Character Strings 

Job Specification Variables . . „ 

Job Specification Indicators 

Lists 

Statement Format 

Identifier /Lab el Field 

Job Specification Identifier 

Label 

Operation Field 

Operands Field 

Positional Parameters 

Tagged Parameters , 

Continuation Lines , 

Card Image Format Restrictions , 

Convention for Describing Language Statements, 
Comments Statement (COM) , 

SECTION II. DEFINING THE JOB 

General , 

The JOB Statement , 

Job Name , 

Account Number , 

User Code < , 

Category (CAT) , 

Location (LOC) 

Option (OPT) 

JOB Statement Interactions , 

Example of JOB Statements , 

The EOJ Statement 

EOJ Statement Interact! on b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , 

Job Blocks 



1-1 
1 = 1 
1-1 
1-1 
1-2 
1-2 
1-3 
1-4 
1-4 
1-4 
1-5 
1-5 
1-5 
1-5 
1-5 
1-6 
1-6 
1-7 
1-7 
1-7 
1-8 



2-1 
2-1 
2-2 
2-3 
2-3 
2-3 
2-4 
2-5 
2-6 
2-6 
2-7 
2-7 
2-8 



in 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 



Paragraph 



Title 



Page 



2-14 
2-15 
2-16 
2-17 
2-18 



3-1 

3-2 

3-3 

3-4 

3-5 

3-6 

3-7 

3-8 

3-9 

3-10 

3-11 



4-1 

4-2 

4-3 

4-4 

4-5 

4-6 

4-7 

4-8 

4-9 

4-10 

4-11 

4-12 

4-13 

4-14 

4-15 

4-16 

4-17 



The LIMIT Statement 

Account Number (ACCT) 

Catalog User (USCO) 

Disc Reservation (SECT or BAND) 

Central Processor Time (SEC or MIN) 

SECTION III. PROGRAM PROCESSING 

General 

The XQT Statement 

Access Name. 

Load Time Parameter (LTP) 

Run Time Parameters (RTP) 

Options (OPT) 

CP Options (CPOPT) 

Central Processor Time (CPTIME) 

Additional Memory Size (ADDMEM) 

Character String (CHAR) 

Statement Interactions 

SECTION IV. PROGRAM FLOW SPECIFICATION 

General 

Job Specification Variables 

Job Blocks 

The SET Statement 

Variable 

The IF Statement 

Condition 

Label 

The GOTO Statement 

Label 

The PRINT Statement 

Variable (JSLV) 

Message (MESG) 

Option (OPT) 

Parameter Interactions 

Statement Interactions 

Examples 



2-9 

2-10 

2-11 

2-11 

2-13 



3-1 

V 1 
3-1 
3-2 
3-3 
3-3 
3-4 
3-4 
3-4 
3-5 
3-5 



4-1 
4-2 
4-2 
4-3 
4-3 
4-5 
4-5 
4-6 
4-7 
4-7 
4-8 
4-8 
4-8 
4-9 
4-9 
4-9 
4-10 



IV 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 



r-aragrapn 



Titl< 



Page 



SECTION V. FILE DESCRIPTION 



5-1 

5-2 
5-3 

5-4 
5-5 

5-6 

5-7 

5-8 

5-9 

5-10 

5-11 

5-12 

5-13 

5-14 

5-15 

5-16 

5-17 

5-18 

5-19 

5-20 

5-21 

5-22 
5-23 
5-24 
5-25 
5-26 
5-27 
5-28 

5-29 
5-30 
5-31 
5-32 
5-33 



Introduction 

File Specification 

The FD Statement . . . . 

A „ „ ^ r, ^ ivr„ , 

ii\.l.COD i.NCtJ.JLlC • •••••.,..,.... 

Disc Space Reservation (SECT, BAND, WORD or 

BYTE) 

File Organization (FORG) 

Block Size (BKSZ) 

Record Length (LREC) 

Record Format (RCFM) 

Buffering Type (BFTK) 

Buffer Alignment (BFAL) 

Buffer Length (BUFL) 

Buffer Number (BUFN) 

Error Option (EROP) 

Position (POS) 

Device Type (DTYP) 

Setup Identifier (SETUP) 

Log of Events (LOE) 

Parameter Interactions 

Statement Interactions 

Reserving File Access Name for CP Step 

Execution 

Input of Cataloged Files 

Input of Non-Cataloged Files - via FIT Statement. 

Output of Non- Cataloged Files 

START Statement [[ 

Access Name (ACNM) 

Block Size (BKSZ) ] . 

Disc Reservation (SECT, BAND, WORD or 

BYTE) 

File Organization (FORG) 

Parameter Interactions 

Statement Interactions 

Examples 

The STOP Statement 



5-1 

5-1 
5-6 
5-8 

5-8 

5-10 

5-10 

5-10 

5-11 

5-12 

5-13 

5-13 

5-13 

5-14 

5-14 

5-15 

5-17 

5-17 

5-17 

5-18 

5-19 
5-19 
5-20 
5-21 
5-27 
5-28 
5-28 

5-28 
5-29 
5-29 
5-29 
5-30 
5-32 



Equipment Group 




Paragraph 



TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Title Page 

SECTION VI. FILE INPUT AND OUTPUT 



6-1 General 6_1 

6-2 Cataloged File Assignment (INPUT) 6-2 

6-3 The ASG Statement 6-3 

6-4 Access Name 6-3 

6-5 Pathname 6-3 

6-6 Version (VERS) 6-4 

6-7 File Use (USE) 6-5 

6-8 Statement Interactions 6-5 

6-9 The PD (Path Definition) Statement 6-7 

6-10 Synonym Parameter 6-7 

6-11 Pathname Parameter 6-7 

6-12 Non- Cataloged File Input from Tape 6-9 

6-13 The FIT Statement 6-9 

6-14 Access Name 6-10 

6-15 External File Identification (EFID) 6-10 

6-16 Label (LABL) 6-11 

6-17 Retry (RTRY) 6-12 

6-18 Parity Error Option (PRTY) 6-12 

6-19 Tape Density (DEN) 6-13 

6-20 Tape Recording Tracks (TRKS) 6-13 

6-21 Recording Control (RCTL) 6-13 

6-22 Location (LOC) 6-14 

6-23 Parameter Interactions 6-14 

6-24 Statement Interactions ; 6-15 

6-25 Examples 6 ~ 16 

6-26 Non-Cataloged File Output 6-21 

6-27 The FOT Statement 6-21 

6-28 Access Name 6-22 

6-29 External File Identification (EFID) 6-22 

6-30 Label (LABL) 6-23 

6-31 Scratch Volume Count (SVC) 6-24 

6-32 Option (OPT) 6-25 

6-33 Retention Period (RETP) 6-25 

6-34 Retry (RTRY) 6-25 

6-35 Parity Error Option (PRTY) 6-26 

6-36 Location (LOC) 6-26 

6-37 Destination (DEST) 6-27 

6-38 Tape Density (DEN) 6-27 

6-39 Recording Tracks (TRKS) 6-27 



V1 A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Paragraph Title Page 

6-40 Recording Control (RCTL) 6-28 

6-41 Parameter Interactions 6-28 

6-42 Statement Interactions 6-29 

6-43 Examples 6-30 

6-44 The FOSYS Statement 6-31 

6-45 Access Name 6-32 

6-46 Type (TYPE) 6-32 

6-47 External Identification (EXID) 6-32 

6-48 Location (LOC) 6-33 

6-49 Form (FORM) 6-33 

6-50 Print Space (PRTS) 6-35 

6-51 Copies (COPIES) 6-36 

6-52 Option (OPT) 6-36 

SECTION VII. CATALOG MANAGEMENT 

7-1 Catalog System 7-1 

7-2 Catalog Structure 7-1 

7-3 Definitions 7_1 

7-4 Edgename 7_1 

7-5 Pathname and Nodename 7_1 

7-6 Synonym 7.3 

7-7 Access Name 7-3 

7-8 Versions 7-4 

7-9 Catalog Privacy 7-4 

7-10 Access Control List ; 7-4 

7-11 Reference Control 7-6 

7-12 Access Control 7-6 

7-13 Son-Add Control 7-7 

7-14 The CATBLD Statement 7-9 

7-15 Edgename 7-9 

7-16 Maximum Versions (MXVR) 7-10 

7-17 Access Control State (ACST) 7-10 

7-18 Reference Control State (RFST) 7-11 

7-19 Son-Add Control State (SON) 7-11 

7-20 Access Control Information (ACIN)* 7-11 

7-21 Parameter Interactions 7-12 

7-22 ACIN and ACST 7-12 

7-23 ACIN and RFST 7-13 

7-24 ACIN and SON . . . . . . ...... . . . .' . . . . ."' . . . 7-13 

7-25 RFST, ACST and SON 7-13 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 



Paragraph 



Title 



Page 



7-26 The CATN Statement 7-14 

7-27 Pathname 7-14 

7-28 Maximum Version (MXVR) 7-15 

7-29 Access Control State (ACST) 7-15 

7-30 Reference Control State (RFST) 7-16 

7-31 Son-Add Control State (SON) 7-16 

7-32 Access Control Information (ACIN) 7-16 

7-33 Parameter Interactions 7-17 

7-34 ACIN and ACST 7-17 

7-35 ACIN and RFST 7rl8 

7-36 ACIN and SON 7-18 

7-37 RFST, ACST and SON 7-19 

7-38 The CHG Statement 7-20 

7-39 Pathname 7-21 

7-40 Maximum Version (MXVR) 7-21 

7-41 Flagged Version (FLVR) 7-21 

7-42 Version Retention Period (RETP, VERS) 7-21 

7-43 Automatic Version Sequencing (ASEQ) 7-22 

7_44 Access Control State (ACST) 7-23 

7-45 Reference Control State (RFST) 7-23 

7-46 Son-Add Control State (SON) 7-23 

7-47 Access Control Information (ACIN) 7-24 

7-48 Parameter Interactions 7-25 

7-49 ACIN and ACST 7-25 

7-50 ACIN and RFST 7-25 

7-51 ACIN and SON 7-26 

7-52 RFST, ACST and SON 7-26 

7-53 The DEL Statement 7-27 

7-54 Pathname 7-27 

7-55 The CAT Statement 7-28 

7-56 Normal Node Creation and Cataloging Functions . . . 7-30 

7-57 Pathname 7-31 

7-58 Access Name (ACNM) 7-31 

7-59 Maximum Versions (MXVR) 7-31 

7-60 Access Control State (ACST) 7-32 

7-61 Reference Control State (RFST) 7-32 

7-62 Son-Add Control State (SON) 7-33 

7-63 Access Control Information (ACIN) 7-33 

7-64 Parameter Interactions 7-34 

7-65 ACIN and ACST 7-34 

7-66 ACIN and RFST 7-34 



Vlll 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Paragraph Title Page 

7-67 ACIN and SON 7-35 

7-68 RFST, ACST and SON 7.35 

7-69 Device Type (DTYP) 7.35 

7-70 Retention Period (RETP) 7.37 

7-71 Source (SRC) 7-37 

' ' " upcv-i.a.x \jataivjgmg x un^nOri • ••••••»••••••••• ( — .5 

7-73 File Organization (FORG) 7-38 

7-74 External File Identification (EFID) 7-39 

7-75 Label (LABL) 7.39 

7-76 Tape Density (DEN) 7_40 

7-77 Tape Recording Tracks (TRKS) 7-40 

7-78 Recording Control (RCTL) 7-41 

7-79 Disc Reservation (SECT, BAND, WORD or 

BYTE) 7.42 

7-80 Parameter Interaction Summary 7-42 

7-81 SRC = DSEC 7_42 

7-82 SRC = TP or FT 7.43 

7-83 Examples 7-43 

7-84 The CATV Statement 7.49 

7-85 Normal Cataloging Functions 7-51 

7-86 Pathname 7-51 

7-87 Access Name (ACNM) 7-52 

7-88 Device Type (DTYP) 7.52 

7-89 Retention Period (RETP) 7.54 

7-90 Source (SRC) 7-54 

7-91 Special Cataloging Function : 7-54 

7-92 File Organization (FORG) 7-55 

7-93 Label (LABL) 7.55 

7-94 External File Identification (EFID) 7-56 

7-95 Tape Density (DEN) 7.57 

7-96 Recording Tracks (TRKS) 7-57 

7-97 Recording Control (RCTL) 7-58 

7-98 Disc Reservation (SECT, BAND, WORD or 

BYTE) 7_58 

7-99 Parameter Interaction Summary 7-59 

7-100 SRC = DSEC 7_59 

7-101 SRC = TP or FT 7-59 

7-102 Examples 7-60 

7-103 The DELV Statement 7-64 

7-104 Pathname . .7. . 77. . . 7T7 7 77 77. .7.7.. . 7 7-64 

7-105 Version Number (VERS) 7-64 



ix 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Title Page 

Option (OPT) 7-65 

Parameter Interactions 7-65 

Examples 7-65 

The RPLV Statement 7-67 

Normal Cataloging Functions 7-69 

Pathname 7-69 

Access Name (ACNM) . 7-70 

Version (VERS) 7-70 

Device Type (DTYP) 7-70 

Retention Period (RETP) 7.-72 

Source (SRC) 7-72 

Special Cataloging Function 7-73 

File Organization (FORG) 7-73 

Label (LABL) 7-74 

External File Identification (EFID) 7-75 

Tape Density (DEN) 7-75 

Tape Recording Tracks (TRKS) 7-76 

Recording Control (RCTL) . . . 7-76 

Disc Reservation (SECT, BAND, WORD or 

BYTE) 7-76 

Parameter Interactions 7-77 

SRC = DSEC 7-77 

SRC = TP or FT 7-78 

Examples 7-78 

SECTION VIII. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 

8-1 General 8-1 

8-2 The REL Statement 8-1 

8-3 Access Name 8-2 

8-4 The RENAME Statement 8-3 

8-5 Access Name 1 8-3 

8-6 Access Name 2 8-3 

8-7 Multi-File Requests 8-5 

8-8 The MFR Statement 8-5 

8-9 Multi-File Identification 8-6 

8-10 External File Identification (EFID) 8-6 

8-11 Label (LABL) 8-7 

8-12 Tape Density (DEN) 8-8 

8-13 Tape Recording Tracks (TRKS) 8-9 

8-14 Recording Control (RCTL) 8-9 



Para 


graph 


7- 


•106 


7- 


• 107 


7- 


• 108 


7- 


■ 109 


7- 


-110 


7- 


-111 


7- 


■ 112 


7- 


•113 


7- 


-114 


7- 


-115 


7- 


-116 


7- 


-117 


7- 


-118 


7- 


-119 


7- 


-120 


7. 
i 


-121 


7- 


-122 


7- 


-123 


7- 


-124 


7- 


-125 


7- 


-126 


7- 


-127 


7- 


-128 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Paragraph Title Page 

8-15 Scratch Volume Count (SVC) 8-9 

8-16 File Retention Period (RETP) 8-10 

8-17 Location (LOC) 8-10 

8-18 Destination (DEST) 8-10 

8-19 Parameter Interactions 8-11 

8-21 MFR Examples 8-12 

8-22 The MFRE Statement 8-14 

8-23 Examples 8-14 

8-24 Concatenation Statements (CNT and CNTE) 8-17 

8-25 Statement Interactions 8-18 

8-26 Examples 8-18 

8-27 Deferred Job Processing 8-19 

8-28 The JOBX Statement 8-19 

8-29 The EOJX Statement 8-20 

8-30 Examples 8-20 

8-31 The CJSL Statement 8-22 

8-32 Access Name 8-22 

8-33 Examples 8-22 

8-34 The PJSL Statement 8-23 

8-35 Access Name 8-23 

8-36 Example 8-23 

8-37 The Setup Statement 8-24 

8-38 Setup ID 8-24 

8-39 Channel Specification 8-24 

8-40 External File Identification (EFID) : 8-25 

8-41 Scratch Volume Count (SVC) 8-25 

8-42 Write Protection (PROTECT) 8-25 

8-43 The BATINT Statement 8-27 

8-44 Presession Start Time (PST) 8-27 

8-45 Session Start Time (SST) 8-27 

8-46 Session Duration (SDM) 8-28 

8-47 Terminal Identifier (TMID) 8-28 

8-48 Parameter Interactions 8-28 

8-49 Statement Interactions 8-2 8 

8-50 User Interface 8-28 

8-51 Operator Interface 8-29 

SECTION IX. THE MACRO LANGUAGE 



9-1 Introduction 9-1 

9-2 Terminology 9-1 



xi 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

Paragraph Title Page 

9-3 Macro Language Statements 

9-4 Macro Processing 

9-5 Macro Parameters 

9-6 Formal Parameters 

9-7 Actual Parameters 

9-8 Macro File Definition and Manipulation 

9-9 The MACBLD Statement 

9-10 Access Name 

9-11 Base Parameter 

9-12 Parameter Interaction 

9-13 Statement Interactions 

9-1 3A MACBLD Examples 

9-14 The MACASG Statement 

9-15 Access Name 

9-16 Pathname 

9-17 Version Number 

9-17A MACASG Examples 

9-18 Macro Definition 

9-19 Macro Delimiting Statements 

9-20 Macro Generation Statements 

9-21 Macro Sequence Control Statement 

9-22 Parameter Modification Statements 

9-23 The Macro Statement 

9-24 Macro Name 

9-25 Parameters 

9-26 Macro Example : 

9-27 The MEND Statement 

9-28 Label 

9-29 Macro Name 

9-30 Mend Example 

9-31 The BUILD Statement 

9-32 Position Parameter 

9-33 Substitution String 

9-34 Build Examples 

9-35 The GEN Statement 

9-36 Position Parameter 

9-37 Substitution String 

9-38 Gen Examples 

9-39 Macro Model Statements 

9-40 Verb 

9-41 Substitution String 



9- 


3 


9- 


3 


9- 


4 


9- 


5 


9- 


7 


9- 


7 


9- 


8 


9- 


8 


9- 


8 


9- 


9 


9- 


9 


9- 


9 


9- 


10 


9- 


10 


9- 


11 




11 


9- 


11 


9- 


12 


9- 


12 


9- 


12 


9- 


12 


9- 


12 


9- 


13 


9- 


13 


9- 


13 


9- 


14 


9- 


15 


9- 


15 


9- 


15 


9- 


15 


9- 


16 


9- 


16 


9- 


16 


9- 


17 


9- 


18 


9- 


18 


9- 


18 


9- 


19 


9- 


20 


9- 


20 


9- 


21 



Xll 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 



Paragraph 


9 


-42 


9' 


-43 


9- 


-44 


4< 


-45 


9- 


-46 


9. 


-4? 


9- 


-48 


9- 


-49 


9- 


-50 


9- 


-51 


9- 


-52 


9- 


-53 


9- 


-54 


9- 


-55 


9« 


• 56 


9- 


■57 


9- 


•58 


9- 


•59 


9- 


■60 


9- 


•61 



Title i^age 

Model Examples 9-21 

The JUMP Statement 9_22 

Label 9_22 

Boolean Expression 9-22 

True or False 9-24 

Tumn Fvamnloo n O A 

** *^— .-.-■-£* -~- .* ».*»«..■. .*..•. jwr.i.w I-- •••••••••••••••••••••«« "7 — £-r*dr 

The PRESET Statement 9-25 

Parameters 9-25 

PRESET Examples 9-26 

The INC Statement 9-27 

Formal Parameter 9-27 

INC Examples 9-27 

Special Function Statements 9-2 3 

The DMACRO Statement 9-29 

DMACRO Examples 9-29 

Verb Synonym Statement (VERBSYN) 9-30 

Synonym 9-30 

Operand ..... 9-30 

VERBSYN Examples 9.30 

Macro Examples 9-31 



APPENDIX A. STATEMENT SUMMARIES 

APPENDIX Al. SYSTEM MACRO(S) SUMMARY 

APPENDIX A2. MACRO EXAMPLES 

APPENDIX B. GLOSSARY OF JSL TERMS 

APPENDIX C. WORDS, SECTORS, BANDS CONVERSIONS 

APPENDIX D. STATEMENT USES 

INDEX TO JSL REFERENCE MANUAL 



Xlll 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 

Figure Title Page 

2-1 Defining Job Blocks in Job Input Stream 2-8 

6-1 Data Conversion 6-14 

7-1 Graphic Representation of the Catalog Tree Structure. . . . 7-2 



LIST OF TABLES 

Table Title Page 

1-1 Printable Special Characters 1-2 

4-1 SET Statement Values 4-4 

4-2 IF Statement Relational Operators 4-6 

5-1 Standard-Access -Named Files and Their Characteristics . 5-3 

5-2 FD and ASG Placement in Job Input Stream . 5-22 

5-3 FD and FIT Placement in Job Input Stream 5-24 

•8-1 MFR Parameters for Enclosed JSL Statements 8-13 



X1V Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION I 
INTRODUCTION 



1-1 GENERAL 

Processing requirements are specified to the control components of the ASC 
Operating System through programs written in a special purpose language. 
This language is known as the ASC Job Specification Language (JSL). 

All Job Specification Language programs are processed by the Job Specifica- 
tion Language Translator. The Translator is a Central Processor step whose 
execution is initiated by the Command Controller component of the ASC Op- 
erating System. The Translator translates the user's job specification pro- 
gram into an object format compatible with the Command Controller. The 
execution of the job specification object program is an interpretive process. 

The Job Specification Language is composed of job definition statements, pro- 
gram processing statements, file input and output statements, file cataloging 
statements, control statements, special function statements, and a macro 
language. 

1-2 LANGUAGE ELEMENTS 

The language elements for the Job Specification Language consist of lists, 
symbols, character strings, variables, constants, and the characters that 
represent them. 

1-3 CHARACTER SET 

The ASC recognizes the EBCDIC character set as standard notation. Refer- 
ences in this manual are made to alphabetic characters (A through Z and $), 
numeric characters (0 through 9), special characters (all the rest), and al- 
phanumeric characters which is the set of both alphabetic and numeric char- 
acters . 

Table 1-1 contains a list of all the printable special characters and their 
names. The printable special characters are that subset of the EBCDIC set, 
aside from the alphanumerics, that is practical for use in coding. 

1-4 VALID ASC SYMBOLS 

A valid ASC symbol is a string of from one to eight characters, the first of 
which must be alphabetic. The remaining characters may be any sequence of 
alphanumeric characters, and the special character ". " (period). 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




Table 1-1. Printable Special Characters 



CHARACTER 


NAME 


CARD 
CODE 


CHARACTER 


NAME 


CARD 
CODE 




blank 


blank 


- 


hyphen, or 
minus sign 


11 


i 


cent sign 


12-8-2 


/ 


slash 


0-1 


, 


period 


12-8-3 


9 


comma 


0-8-3 


< 


less than 


12-8-4 


7o 


percent sign 


0-8-4 


( 


left 
parenthesis 


12-8-5 


- 


horizontal 
bar 


0-8-5 


+ 


plus sign 


12-8-6 


> 


greater than 


0-8-6 


1 


vertical bar 


12-8-7 


? 


question mark 


0-8-7 


& 


ampersand 


12 


t 


vertical arrow 




! 


exclamation 


11-8-2 


: 


colon 


8-2 




point 










* 


asterisk 


11-8-4 


# 


number 


8-3 


) 


right 


11-8-5 


@ 


at 


8-4 




parenthesis 




■ 


apostrophe 


8-5 


» 


semicolon 


11-8-6 


= 


equals 


8-6 


~n 


not sign 


11-8-7 

.... 


n 


quotation mark 


8-7 



1-5 CONSTANTS 

In the Job Specification Language, a constant is a signed or unsigned decimal 
or hexadecimal integer. It is represented as a string of numeric characters. 
Hexadecimal integers must be preceded by a number sign (# ). 

The limits of the value of a constant are dictated by the specific parameter 
for which the constant is supplied. 

1-6 CHARACTER STRINGS 

A character string is a variable number of printable characters that are 
translated into their literal EBCDIC representations. 

A character string is delimited either by being enclosed in quotation marks 
or is delimited by the Job Specification Language delimiters of the operands 
field; viz., commas or slashes. 



1-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




If a character string is enclosed in quotation marks, any blanks in the string 
will be retained in the internal representation of the string; if a character 
string is not enclosed in quotation marks, any blanks in the string will be re- 
moved and will not appear in the internal representation of the string. 

Restrictions : A pair of adjacent quotation marks appearing within a quoted 
string will not terminate the string; the result is one quotation mark (") 
embedded in the string. 

A character string that is not enclosed in quotation marks cannot contain an 
embedded comma or slash; the comma or slash will terminate the parameter 
or subparameter, respectively. 

Limitations: The number of characters permitted in any given character 
string is a function of the parameter for which the character string is sup- 
plied. 

1-7 JOB SPECIFICATION VARIABLES 

A Job Specification Variable is a value represented in the Job Specification 
Language by a symbol. 

The Job Specification Language provides 27 variables. Each variable is rep- 
resented symbolically by a single alphabetic character (viz., A through Z and 
$) and retains that symbolic identity for the duration of a job. 

Variables may be set to positive or negative integer values either within job 
specification processing or within a job step. 

Variables may be used in the programming of job execution flow with the Job 
Specification Language control statements, Section IV. 

Variables may provide communication between job steps or between a job 
step and job control. Communication between job steps is achieved by assign- 
ing the same variable to both steps as run time parameters. Communication 
between job steps and job control is achieved by assigning the same variable 
to both job step(s) and job control statements ). The value of a variable ac- 
quired during processing is available to job steps through service calls de- 
signed for that purpose. 

Limitations: The range of values that a variable may have is: 
-231 < v < 2 31 . i. 

Default: The initial values of the variables at the beginning of a job are zero 
and are changed only by programmed specification. 

NOTE 

Do not confuse the Job Specification variables 
with the options of the various JSL statements 
that are also represented by single alphabetic 
characters. 



1 -3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




1-8 JOB SPECIFICATION INDICATORS 

There are two Job Specification Indicators represented in the Job Specifica- 
tion Language by the character strings TERM and STATUS. 

The purpose of the TERM indicator is to communicate TERM ination data 
from a central processor step to the Job Specification. The value of TERM 
can only be modified by the Operating System. TERM is set to zero at the 
beginning of each step, to the value specified by the step at step termination, 
or upon abnormal termination it is set to 10 by the operating system. 
TERM is set to zero at the beginning of each step and is set to the value 
specified by the step at step termination. 

The purpose of STATUS is to communicate information concerning the status 
of the Operating System to the Job Specification and to central processor 
steps . 

Job Specification Indicators can be used in the programming of job execution 
flow with the Job Specification Language control statements, Section IV. 

i-9 LISTS 

A list is a string of elements separated by commas. In the trivial case, a 
list may be a single element. 

A sublist is a list enclosed in parentheses. A sublist may be a single ele- 
ment or it may be an element in a list. 

The operands field of a Job Specification Language statement is a list. 
1-10 STATEMENT FORMAT 

The Job Specification Language (JSL) is coded in the form of statements. 

A statement consists of three fields: (1) an identifier /label field, (2) an op- 
eration field, and (3) an operands field. 

The fields are of variable length and are terminated by at least one blank. 
Each field may be divided into subfields and the subfields may be further sub- 
divided. 

The general form of a Job Specification Language statement is: 



LABEL 
J 



/ j [symbol] 



T 1 1 

I OPERATION | , OPERANDS 
J + _ | 



16 | verb j tf | [positional params][, keyword params] 

! ■ ' 

I i L 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




NOTE 

No remark field is permitted in Job Specification 
Language statements. 

1-11 IDENTIFIER/LABEL FIELD 

The identifier /label field comprises two subfields: (1) the Job Specification 
Language statement identifier, and (2) an optional label. 

i t ^ t^t> fi -rvrr< /-<m rri A rriT/"MVT TT^vTPTVTrnTTT'TTT'TJ All - ~ 1- n »./.:(:^.(.:n M «■, 4-« 4-«.~^,-. *-.*-,-, 

l-LC JKJD Dl'Jlj^ir lom 1VJ1N iJ^/JiiiN J. 1X iJiiXV. . /Hi J*-»u opo-un.ai.ivju o louciiic j.j.uo 

are identified by placing a slash, /, in the first column of the first line of the 
statement. This identifier subfield is mandatory to identify the statement as 
a Job Specification Language statement. 

More than one consecutive slash may be used in the identifier subfield, if de- 
sired. Only one, in column one, is required. 

1-13 LABEL. The label, if one is provided, serves as a name to which Job 
Specification Language control statements may refer. The label begins im- 
mediately in the second column of the statement and terminates with the first 
encountered blank. 

A label must be a valid ASC symbol. A symbol consists of from one to eight 
characters, the first of which must be alphabetic. The remaining characters 
may be any combination of alphabetic and numeric characters. 

The presence of a label is optional for those statements that permit them. 

Delimiters: A blank delimits the identifier /label field. No other delimiters 
are valid in this field group. 

Restrictions : The identifier/label field cannot contain an embedded blank. It 
will be terminated by the first blank encountered. 

Labels are not permitted on all Job Specification Language statements; 
whether a label is permitted is specified in the descriptions of the individual 
statements . 

1-14 OPERATION FIELD 

The operation field consists of the verb. The verb is mandatory; it specifies 
the operation that is to be performed by the system. The various verbs are 
identified and defined individually in this manual. 

Delimiters: The operation field is delimited by blanks. 
1-15 OPERANDS TIKLD 

The operands field consists of a list of positional and/or tagged parameters 
separated by commas. 



1 c 

1 Advanced Scientific Computer 




1-16 POSITIONAL PARAMETERS. Positional parameters are operation 
data that must be provided by the user and that must be provided in a speci- 
fied sequence. The sequence of positional parameters in each of the Job 
Specification Language statements is specified in its general form. 

If both positional and keyword parameters are allowed, the positional param- 
eters are listed first. 

Positional parameters may have subfields which specify different character- 
istics of the given parameter. The subfields are delimited by slashes, /. 

Certain positional parameters are concatenated symbols in which the catena- 
tion is indicated by a slash. 

Restriction: Positional parameters are not optional; where the general form 
of a statement indicates a positional parameter, that parameter must be 
coded. 

1-17 TAGGED PARAMETERS. Tagged parameters are operation data that 
is optional and cannot conveniently be forced to occupy a fixed coding position, 

All tagged parameters are initiated by an identifying keyword followed by an 
equal sign, =. 

There are three types of tagged parameters used in the Job Specification Lan- 
guage: (1) those in which the parameter is a keyword which is specified and 
defined internally to the system, (2) those in which the parameter is a con- 
stant, a character string, or a Job Specification Language variable assigned 
by the user, and (3) those in which the parameter comprises subparameters, 
separated by slashes, each of which may be a keyword, a constant, a char- 
acter string, or a Job Specification Language variable. 

Tagged parameters may be coded in any convenient sequence since they pro- 
vide their own identification. 

The tags and keyword parameters are specified in the general forms of the 
specific Job Specification Language statements to which they apply. 

Delimiters: The operand field is initiated by the blank that terminates the 
operation field. Its termination is indicated by the end of a line wherein the 
last character in the line is not a semicolon. 

The parameters within the operand field are delimited by commas. 

Parameters having more than one element use slashes, /, as delimiters of 
the elements . 

Certain subparameters may be conjuncted symbols in which the conjunction 
is indicated by an asterisk, *. 

Restrictio ns: Blanks may be embedded anywhere between parameters in the 
operands field, but the blanks will not be processed as information to the sys- 
tem. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




The last non-blank character of the operands field cannot be a semicolon, ;. 
A semicolon as the last non-blank character indicates that the statement is 
continued on the next line. 

1-18 CONTINUATION LINES 

A Job Specification Language statement may be continued to a second line. 

A semicolon, ;, is used to indicate that a statement is to be continued. 

A parameter can be split by the continuation character on the line. The state 
ment may continue in column one of the continuation line. 

A Job Specification Language statement ends with the first line that is not 
terminated by a semicolon. 

Restrictions ; A Job Specification Language statement cannot be continued 
prior to completion of the operation field. 

A semicolon cannot be the final character of a Job Specification Language 
statement. 

Limitations ; A Job Specification Language statement may have a maximum 
of 128 continuations. 

1-19 CARD IMAGE FORMAT RESTRICTIONS 

When the Job Control Language statements are entered in card image format, 
the following restrictions apply; 

• Information may be coded only in card columns 1 through 72. 
Card columns 73 through 80 are reserved for sequence number- 
ing information. 

• If a statement is to be continued, the semicolon must appear in 
or before column 72. 

1-20 CONVENTION FOR DESCRIBING LANGUAGE STATEMENTS 

The following conventions are observed in describing language statements: 

• Upper case letters and punctuation marks (except those enclosed 
in brackets or braces) represent information that must be coded 
exactly as shown. 

• Lower case letters and words are generic terms that represent 
information that must be supplied; i. e. , a substitution must be 
made when coding a parameter or option so represented. 

• Information within brackets, [], is optional. It may be included 
or omitted, depending upon program requirements. 



1-7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




When several choices, listed vertically, are enclosed in braces, 
{}, one of the enclosed alternatives must be selected by the 
programmer. If one of the alternatives is underlined, the 
parameter may be omitted and the system assumes the under- 
lined alternative. 

Mandatory blanks are represented by a slashed, lower-case 
letter "b" (V>). This symbol is not used to represent permissible 
blanks . 



1-21 COMMENTS STATEMENT (COM) 

The COM statement specifies narrative comments that are to be entered into 
the Job Specification Language source listing of the system output file. 

The general form of the COM statement is: 



I OPERATION 



FT 



OPERANDS 



I 



y> j com 






text 



The text of a COM statement is essentially the operands field of the state- 
ment, but the text is not processed by the system. The comment is entered 
into the system output file for documentation purposes only. 

Format : The text of a comment may contain any combination of printable 
EBCDIC characters. 

Restrictions : For card image input, the comment must terminate or be con- 
tinued with a semicolon at or before column 72. COM statements do not pro- 
vide any options and labels are permitted. A comment may contain an em- 
bedded semicolon. The entire field is read and a semicolon is interpreted as 
a continuation symbol only if it is the last non-blank character on the line. 



1-. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION II 
DEFINING THE JOB 

2-1 GENERAL 

A job is specified by a sequence of Job Specification Language statements be- 
ginning with a JOB statement and ending with an EOJ statement. Optionally, 
a job may end with the statement immediately preceding the next JOB state- 
ment. The job is the processing initiated by these JSL statements. 

The JOB statement must be the first JSL statement of a job. It provides job 
identification, accounting information, catalog use, priority and execution 
characteristics and informs the system whether the job may be restarted if 
processing fails. If an EOJ statement is used, it must be the last JSL state- 
ment of a job. 

A job must end with a card with 7/9 punched in column one. The 7/9 card is 
the absolute delimiter for the end of a job. It must be the last card in the job 
deck. In most cases, the 7/9 card will be provided by the installation oper- 
ators . 

A job may be partitioned into logical sections called blocks . The job block is 
the basic unit for programmed flow of job execution specified by the JSL con- 
trol statements. For jobs partitioned into blocks, resources can be reserved 
for those blocks of the job that need them as they need them to increase sys- 
tem efficiency. Job blocks are specified by LIMIT statements. 

2-2 THE JOB STATEMENT 

The JOB statement defines the beginning of a job. 
The general form of the JOB statement is: 



1 1 

LABEL | I OPERATION 
I I 



/ 



:»: 

I 
1 



JOB 



T 



OPERANDS 



job name, acctnum, user code 

[, CAT = category] [, LOC = location] 

[, OPT = (option codes)] 



2-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




JOB 



The JOB statement cannot be labeled. It must contain the verb JOB in the 
operation field. It must also contain a valid job name, account number and 
user code in the operands field. These parameters are positional - they are 
mandatory and must be coded in the order shown. The statement may contain 
optional keyword parameters specifying priority and execution characteris- 
tics, output location and restart options. Keyword parameters may be coded 
in any convenient order. 

If a previously existing job had no end-of-job definition (EOJ) statement, the 
occurrence of a JOB statement in the job input stream implicitly defines the 
end of that job, as well as initiating the new job. All job termination pro- 
cessing for the previous job will be initiated. 

2-3 JOB NAME 

Each job must have a name. It must appear first in the operands field. 

Format: Job name is any combination of from one to 16 alphanumeric char - 
acters. The job name can begin with an alphabetic character, dollar sign 
character ($), or a numerical digit. It is assigned by the programmer. Two 
jobs can have the same name since more than one job can be stacked in the 
job input stream and executed at a time. 

Default: None. Job name is mandatory. 

The following are examples of naming jobs on JOB statements: 

/#JOBtfCST13710 

/tfJOBtfTIMEANAL31072 tf = mandatory blanks that must be 

/tfJOBtf$1310AB$ESTTIME coded 

/tfJOBtfJOBNAMEJOE 

The following examples show incorrect job names: 

/tfJOBtf*132&T2 

/tf JOBtfCST137l£ $ = mandatory blanks that must be 

/#JOBtf% JOB TIME coded 

/l^JOB#PAYROLL=YRTODATE 

These names contain invalid symbols and will cause the job to terminate. 
2-4 ACCOUNT NUMBER 

Accounting information is supplied by the account number parameter. Each 
job must have an account to which job charges are billed. Installation ac- 
counting information is accumulated and processed by a job accounting func- 
tion of the Operating System. The information is available to the installation 
for its use for billing functions . 



2 - ^ Advanced Scientific Computer 




JOB 



Format: The account number may be any combination of from one to 16 al- 
phanumeric characters (alphabetic characters, dollar sign character and 
numerical digits). It is assigned to the customer by installation accounting. 
The account number is separated from the job name with a comma. 

Default: The account number must be the second parameter - it cannot be 
omitted. 

The following examples show how to code account numbers and the job name 
/tf JOBtfCST13710, T134276 



/^JCTr > >T5^/'T , T■^/^T^ , am a t -2 i n79 <fcT?TT'\/rr'n,d.n 

/tfJOBtf$1310AB$ESTTIME, 12345 

/tf JOBtf JOBNAME JOE, ACCTNUMBER 



lX — rnandator' vr blanks 
that must be coded, 



2-5 USER CODE 

The user code identifies and qualifies a specific user to the catalog system. 

Format: The user code may be any combination of from one to eight alpha- 
numeric characters (alphabetic, dollar sign character and numerical digits). 

Default: The user code must be the third parameter; it cannot be omitted. A 
mandatory comma separates the user code from the account number. 

The following examples show how to code job names, account numbers and 
user codes: 

/# JOBtfCST13710, T134276, SMITH 

/tf JOBbTIMEANAL31072, $REMC040, BARTON tf = mandatory blanks 
/tf JOBtf$1310AB$ESTTIME, 12345, 98765 that must be coded. 

/# JOBtf JOBNAMEJOE, ACCTNUMBER, USER001 

2-6 CATEGORY (CAT) 

The category parameter, identified by the keyword CAT, specifies the prior- 
ity of service and the execution characteristics of the job. 

Job execution priority and characteristics specify when a job should be sched- 
uled for execution. The installation defines the values that specify priorities 
and job types at system generation. The Operating System uses these values 
to balance the mix of jobs and to schedule job execution. 

Format: The category parameter value is an unsigned constant that describes 
the priority and type of job. 

Default: The parameter may be omitted if the installation-defined default 
values are satisfactory. 

The installation determines the job classifications and priority of service 
within a framework of three types. Any combination of execution functions 



2-3 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




JOB 



available in a computer system may be specified. For example, an installa- 
tion may assign a class (or category) to the following types of jobs: 

• I/O-bound jobs 

• Computation-bound jobs 

• Mixture of these. 

The installation may define these jobs in any manner up to a maximum of 
three. The numbers are restricted by the parameter value (which is less 
than or equal to 256). 

The CAT parameter specifies two related functions: 

• Priority of service - level of importance and sequence in which 
job is executed. 

• Execution characteristics - maximum of three job classifica- 
tions that the installation defines for the Operating System to 
use in determining maximum utilization of system resources 
when scheduling job execution. 

The following examples show how to code job name, account number, user 
code and category: 

/tf JOBtfCST13710, T134276, SMITH, CAT=3 

/tf JOBtfTIMEANAL31072, $REMC040, BARTON, CAT=72 

where CAT=3 and CAT=72 mean that the jobs belong to category 3 and 72, re- 
spectively, and that these are the installation-defined categories. 

2-7 LOCATION (LOC) 

The location parameter (LOC) specifies the installation at which the output 
for the job will be produced, if there is no explicit specification oh the JSL 
print and punch output statement (FOSYS). 

Format : The location parameter is an optional, keyword parameter identified 
by the keyword LOC. The parameter value is a string of one to eight alpha- 
numeric characters. The central installation assigns the location identifiers 
to the various terminal installations. 

Default: The LOC parameter may be omitted. The default is the location 
where the job was submitted. 

The following examples illustrate use of the LOC parameter: 

/tf JOBtfCST13710, TI34276, SMITH, CAT=3, LOC = T3300 

where T3300 is the location identifier of the terminal installation where the 
output is produced. 

/tfJOBtfCST 13710, TI34276, SMITH, CAT = 3 



A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




JOB 



Since the LOC parameter has been omitted, the job's output is produced at 
the location where the job was submitted. 

2-8 OPTION (OPT) 

The option parameter (OPT) specifies options used by the Operating System 
pertaining to job processing upon abnormal termination of a job step, or the 
restart of an active step after system failure. It can also specify that a PMD 
is not to be FOSYSed. 

Format ; The requested options are denoted by the appropriate letters, sep- 
arated by commas, and the entire parameter enclosed in parentheses. The 
parameter is identified by the keyword OPT and is optional. 

The following options are defined for the JOB statement: 

C - Specifies job processing is to continue although the user's CP 
step indicated by the XQT statement may have terminated ab- 
normally. When specified on the JOB statement this option 
applies to each step in the job. However, if a loader error 
occurs, job processing is terminated. 

D - Specifies that the PMD, if requested for a step, is not to be 

automatically FOSYSed. This implies that the user will handle 
the disposition of the PMD. When present, this option implies 
the PMD is written to a file with an access name of SYS. PMD 
and with the following characteristics: 

FORG = PS 

LREC = 133 

BKSZ = 7392 

RCFM = FBSA 

JSL variable D is set to a 1 when the PMD is taken so the user 
should avoid use of this variable when using the D option. 

R - Specifies to restart an active step after system failure. 

Default. Any or all of the options can be omitted. If C is omitted and a 
loader error occurs, no further JSL statements are processed. If a step 
terminates abnormally, only FOSYS statements from the remaining JSL state- 
ments will be processed. If D is omitted and a PMD is requested it will be 
automatically FOSYSed. If R is omitted, an active step will not be restarted 
after system failure. If all the options are omitted the OPT keyword should 
not be used. 



2 S 

A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




JOB 



The following examples illustrate the use of the OPT parameter: 

/tf JOBtfCST13710, T134276, SMITH, CAT = 3, LOC=T3300, OPT = (C, D, R) 

/tf JOB#CST13710, T134276, SMITH, CAT = 3, LOC = T3300, OPT = (C, D) 

/tf JOBtfCST13710, T134276, SMITH, CAT = 3, LOC=T3300 

In the first example all options are specified and each option causes the 
actions previously defined for each option. In the second example a restart 
will not be made for the job after system failure. In the third example all 
defaults, as previously defined, will occur. 

2-9 JOB STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The JOB statement is explicitly interactive with the LIMIT statement (see 
topic 2-14). The amount of disc reserved on the LIMIT statement is for the 
job specified by the JOB statement. If no disc space is reserved on LIMIT 
or there is no LIMIT statement, the Operating System reserves the amount 
defined at system generation for the entire job. In addition, installation ac- 
counting information specified on the JOB statement is overridden by LIMIT 
statement specifications, for the job block defined by the LIMIT statement. 

The JOB statement is implicitly interactive with the EOJ statement. If a pre 
vious job has not specified an end-of-job, the JOB statement for the new job 
defines the end of the old job, as well as initiating the new job. All job ter- 
mination processing for the previous job is activated when the new job state- 
ment is encountered. 

The JOB statement must always be used to define a job. It always appears 
first in the sequence of JSL statements specifying the JOB to be executed. 

2-10 EXAMPLE OF JOB STATEMENTS 

JOB Statement - All Defaults Operative 
/ JOB PROJECTX, S13, COMP12 
Parameter Interpretation 

PROJECTX Job name 

SI 3 Account number 

COMP12 User code 

Default Values 

CAT - installation-defines values 

LOC - location where job was submitted 



^ " " Advanced Scientific Computer 




JOB 



OPT - job cannot be restarted after a system failure 

- if requested, a PMD will be automatically FOSYSed 

- upon abnormal termination only. FOSYS statements from 
remaining JSL will be processed. 



2 7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




EOJ 



2-11 THE EOJ STATEMENT 

The EOJ statement defines the end of JSL statements and data associated 
with a job during job input. EOJ also initiates job termination processing 
when it is encountered during job execution. The EOJ statement functions at 
two levels: (1) it defines the end of a job source at the input level and (2) it 
initiates termination of the job's execution at the processing level. 

Normally, a job is ended with an EOJ statement and a 7/9 punched card. 

The EOJ is written in the general form: 



LABEL i l OPERATION i , OPERANDS 



X 



, j-i 

[Symbol] | t I EOJ , tf I None 

■ ! i I 



There are no operands in the EOJ statement. The verb EOJ must appear in 
the operation field. The statement may be labeled. 

The EOJ statement must be coupled with a JOB statement; these two state- 
ments define the boundaries of a job. If an EOJ statement is used, it must 
be the last JSL statement in the sequence of JSL statements specifying a job. 
If EOJ is omitted, the job is assumed to terminate immediately after a 7/9 
punched card and prior to the next JOB statement in the job input stream. 

The example shows a labeled and an unlabeled EOJ statement for two jobs: 

/tfEOJ and /TlOtfEOJ 

2-12 EOJ STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The EOJ is interactive with the JOB statement and the JSL control statements 
The EOJ statement is used only with a JOB statement. 

EOJ communicates with JSL control statements through the label/identifier 
field. The label provides a name to which the control statements can refer. 
The label must be a valid ASC symbol. 



2-: 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



2-13 JOB BLOCKS 



A job may be partitioned into logical sections called blocks. A job block is 
the basic unit for programmed flow of job execution. Partitioning jobs into 
blocks allows resource reservation for job blocks that need specific re- 
sources at a specific time. This technique improves system efficiency. 

Job blocks are defined explicitly through the JSL LIMIT statement. A block 
begins with a LIMIT statement and ends with the JSL statement immediately 
preceding the next LIMIT statement or with the end of the job, specified by 
the EOJ statement (see figure 2-1). The end of the job terminates the last 
job block defined in the job. If the JOB statement is not followed immediately 
by a LIMIT statement, the first job block extends to the JSL statement im- 
mediately preceding the first LIMIT statement. If a job does not have a 
LIMIT statement, the JOB statement starts the block and EOJ and/ or the 7/9 
punched card terminates it. 



job 

BLOCK 



JOB 
BLOCK 



FIRST 

JOB 

BLOCK 



rAl 1 19476 




Figure 2-1. Defining Job Blocks in Job Input Stream 



2-9 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



The following examples show different job blocks: 



or 



job 
block 



job 
block 



job 
block 



job 
block 



/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTNUMBER, USERCODE 
/ LIMIT 

/ (JSL) 

/ (JSL) 

/ LIMIT ACCT=ACCTNUMBER 
/ (JSL) 
/ (JSL) 

/ LIMIT ACCT=ACCTNUMBER 
/ (JSL) 
/ EOJ 

/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTNUMBER, USERCODE 
/ (JSL) 
/ EOJ 



or 



job 
block 



/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTNUMBER, USERCODE 
/ LIMIT ACCT=ACCTNUMBER 

/ (JSL) 

/ EOJ 



2-14 THE LIMIT STATEMENT 

The LIMIT statement defines the beginning of a job block and terminates a 
preceding job block. LIMIT also specifies the cumulative resource alloca- 
tion permitted the job steps within the job block it defines. 



2-10 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



The general form of the LIMIT statement is: 



i LABEL | « OPERATION i , OPERANDS 


/ . [Symbol] | tf | LIMIT tf 1 [ACCT=account number][,USCO=user 
1 1 ' 1 1 \ code] 

1 1 ' 1 1 r (SECT ) > 
1 ■ | i l» i RAwnr disc space reservation] 

I | ! 1 I ) word[ 

| | ! Ill BYTE J 

1 ' | ! if' (min) =time] 



The verb LIMIT must appear in the operation field. The parameters in the 
operands field are optional, keyword parameters. They may be coded in any 
convenient form. The LIMIT statement has no positional, mandatory param- 
eters. The operation and operands fields must be separated by at least one 
blank . 

The LIMIT statement may be labeled if communication with programming flow 
control statements is desired. The label must be separated from the verb, 
LIMIT, by at least one blank. 

The parameters on LIMIT specify accounting information, catalog user, re- 
source reservation, and maximum CP execution time for the block. 

2-15 ACCOUNT NUMBER (ACCT) 

The account number parameter, identified by the keyword ACCT, provides 
accounting information. Each job block may have an account number to which 
charges for the block are billed. This account number may be different from 
that specified on the JOB statement or on any other LIMIT statement. If the 
account number is the same as that on the JOB statement or a previous 
LIMIT statement, the parameter may be omitted. 

Format: The account number may be any combination of one to 16 alphanu- 
meric characters (alphabetic characters, dollar sign character and numeri- 
cal digits). It is assigned to a customer by installation accounting. 

Default: The last account number specified on a JOB statement or a previous 
LIMIT statement is billed when the account number parameter is omitted. 
The account number to be billed is the last specified number. 



2-11 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



2-16 CATALOG USER (USCO) 

The user code identifies a specific user to the system for the job block. 
User code also specifies qualified catalog access. The user code may be dif- 
ferent from that specified on the JOB statement or on any other previous 
LIMIT statement. 

The catalog system maintains a list of user codes, each of which is associ- 
ated with a list of attributes. The list of codes is used for catalog privacy 
purposes. The catalog system permits a user to reference a cataloged file 
if his user code is identified in the access list. Other access attributes as- 
sociated with the user control code shows how the user accesses the catalog 
once a reference is successful. 

Format: The user code parameter is identified by the tag USCO. The param- 
eter value may be any combination of from one to eight alphanumeric charac- 
ters (alphabetic, dollar sign character and numerical digits). 

Default: The user code last specified on either a previous LIMIT statement 
or on the JOB statement is used if the USCO parameter is omitted. 

The following example illustrates correct coding of account numbers and user 
codes on LIMIT statements. 



job 
block 

job 
block 



/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTN01 , USECODE1 

/ LIMIT ACCT=ACCTN02, USCO = USECODEl 

/ EOJ 



The next example illustrates a LIMIT statement with the account number and 
user code defaults operative: 

/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTN01, USECODE1 
/ LIMIT 
/ EOJ 

where the default values for the job block defined by the LIMIT statement are: 
ACCT the account number specified on the JOB statement: ACCTN01 

USCO the user code specified on the JOB statement: USECODE1. 

2-17 DISC RESERVATION (WORD OR BYTE) 

Format : The disc reservation parameter is identified by the keywords SECT, 
BAND, WORD or BYTE. The parameter value is the maximum amount of 
disc space allocated to the job block. This value is an unsigned constant of 
one to six digits. 



2-12 Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



r f a _ i . _ , ,"L T£ 



SECT specifies that the parameter value is expressed in sector units 

(1 sector=64 words). The amount reserved is in units of 64 sectors t 

the requested number of sectors is not a multiple of 64 sectors, the system 

rounds the specified number upward to the next-higher multiple of 64. 

BAND specifies that the parameter value is expressed in band units (1 band= 
256 sectors). 

WORD specifies that the parameter value is expressed in word units given in 
thousands (WORD=15 is 15, 000 words). When the value specified is not an 
even multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

BYTE specifies that the parameter value is expressed in byte units given in 
thousands (BYTE = 12 is 12,000 bytes). When the value specified is not an 
even multiple of 64 sectors, it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

During the processing by the defined job block, the disc space actually allo- 
cated to the files (including processing program files) cannot exceed the 
amount reserved. If it does, the job is terminated. 

Default; The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the Operating System 
uses the disc reservation most recently specified. If no disc reservation has 
been previously specified within the job, the Operating System provides a 
value defined by installation at system generation for the entire job. 

The following examples illustrate the disc reservation parameter: 



job 
block 



job 
block 



/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTN01, USECODE1 

/ LIMIT ACCT=ACCTN02,USCO=USECODE1,SECT = 192 

/ (JSL) 

/ LIMIT ACCT=ACCTN02 I USCO=USECODE1",BAND = 1 

/ EOJ 



The maximum amount of disc reserved for the first job block is 192 sectors 
The maximum amount of disc reserved for the second job block is 1 band. 

An example with defaults operative is: 

/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTN01, USECODE1 

( / LIMIT 
J ob | 

blOCk /EOJ 



2-13 Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



The defaults are: 

ACCT the account number specified on the JOB statement: 

ACCTN01 

US CO the user code specified on the JOB statement: 

USECODE1 

Disc Reservation an installation-defined value. 

Multiple LIMIT statements: 

/ JOB JOBNAME, ACCTN01, USECODE1 
/ LIMIT BAND=2 

/ (JSL) 
/ LIMIT 

/ EOJ 

where the values are 

1st LIMIT statement 

The maximum amount of reserved disc space is specified as two bands. 

Default values : 

ACCT the account number specified on the JOB statement: 

ACCTN01 

USCO the user code specified on the JOB statement: 

USECODE1 

2nd LIMIT statement 

Default values: 

ACCT the account number specified on the JOB statement: 

ACCTN01 

USCO the user code specified on the JOB statement: 

USECODE1 

disc reservation the amount specified on the preceding LIMIT state- 

ment: two bands . 

2-18 CENTRAL PROCESSOR TIME (SEC OR MIN) 

The Central Processor time parameter specifies the maximum, cumulative 
amount of CP execution time allowed for the defined job block. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keywords SEC and MIN. The 
parameter value is an unsigned constant of one to four digits, not to exceed 
30 hours . 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT 



SEC specifies that the parameter value is expressed in units of seconds. 
MIN specifies that the value is expressed in units of minutes. The Operating 
System terminates the job if the specified execution time is exceeded. 

Default; If the CP execution time is omitted, the Operating System imposes 
an installation-defined amount of time for the block. 



2-15/2-16 Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION III 
PROGRAM PROCESSING 



3-1 GENERAL 

The JSL XQT statement provides for the execution of any load module. Sys- 
tem macros, however, are available to request execution of frequently used 
load modules such as the Language Translators. In addition, system macros 
also provide for multiple -step execution such as compile -linkage edit- 
execute. 

3-2 THE XQT STATEMENT 

The XQT statement is the basic load module execution statement. It initiates 
the execution of a load module. 

The general form of the XQT statement is: 



LABEL 



[symbol] 



I OPERATION 



tf 



XQT 



16 



OPERANDS 



access name 

[, LTP - (load time parameters)] 

[, RTP = (run time parameters)] 

[, OPT = (options)] 

[, CPOPT = (CP options)] 

[, CPTIME = central processor 

execution time] 
[, ADDMEM = size] 
[, CHAR = character strings] 



The statement is written with a slash, followed by an optional label (a valid 
ASC symbol), followed by the verb XQT embedded between blanks, followed 
by the parameter list. The parameter list begins with a mandatory, posi- 
tional parameter; the remainder is a list of optional keyword parameters. 

3-3 ACCESS NAME 

The access name positional parameter on the XQT statement refers to the 
access name of a direct secondary file containing the load module or it can 



3-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




XQT 



refer to the member name within a partitioned direct secondary file contain- 
ing the load module. If the user supplies a partitioned direct secondary file 
containing the load module, that file must have the access name of JOBLIB. 
If the user wishes to access a load module in the system partitioned direct 
secondary file, all that is required is the specification of the member name 
on the XQT statement. 

The load module search order is: 1) non-partitioned direct secondary load 
module file, 2) user's JOBLIB file, and 3) the system partitioned direct 
secondary file. 

Format: The access name or member name must be a valid ASC symbol. 
It is positional and must appear as the first operand. 

Default : None. Access name or member name must be specified. 

3-4 LOAD-TIME PARAMETER (LTP) 

The load-time parameters are the load values used to specify memory al- 
location, number of FORTRAN I/O files required, number of FORTRAN I/O 
errors allowed before aborting the step and pass initial values to the load 
module. For Fortran programs, this specification is provided through the 
Fortran PROGRAM statement. Non-Fortran load modules cannot access 
load-time parameters. These parameters are unsigned constants for Job 
Specification Language variables. They are written in a list, separated by 
commas, and the list must be enclosed in parentheses. The parameters are 
identified by the keyword LTP. The first two of these parameter values are 
positional and specify the number of Fortran I/O files required by the step 
(1-99) and the number of Fortran I/O errors allowed before the step will 
abort. Following these two positional parameters are the parameter values 
that correspond to the arguments specified in the Fortran PROGRAM state- 
ment. For example, parameter value number three of the LTP set corre- 
sponds to argument number one of the Fortran PROGRAM statement, value 
number four to argument number two, etc. 

Default : If the XQT statement does not contain load-time parameters but 
the load module uses load -time parameters, the load module's load -time 
parameter table contains whatever was in that area of memory before the 
load module was loaded. Such load-time parameter values will cause un- 
predictable results at execution. Default values of zero can be assigned to 
the load-time parameters by specifying OPT = (Z) on the XQT statement, 
hence preloading the entire memory load area with zeros. If the XQT state- 
ment specifies load-time parameters, but the load module does not have 
provisions for them, the XQT statement is not executable. Default values 
for the first two positional values (no LTP option) will cause 99 Fortran I/O 
files to be allocated for the step and 10 Fortran I/O errors allowed before 
the step will abort. 



3-2 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




XQT 



3-5 RUN TIME PARAMETERS (RTP) 

The run time parameters are the values that the load module obtains when 
the S$RUNV Service Call is issued. 

Format: These parameters are unsigned constants or Job Specification 
Language variables. They are written in a list, separated by commas, and 
the list is enclosed in parentheses. The parameters are identified by the 
keyword RTP. 

Default : If the parameter is unspecified, no run time parameters are passed 
to the program load module. If a load module issues a S$RUNV service call, 
but run time parameters are not specified in the XQT, the service call re- 
turns an error code in its completion code (sixth) parameter, and execution 
of the load module continues. If the XQT statement specifies run time param- 
eters, but they are never accessed from the load module with a service call, 
load module execution occurs without reference to the run time parameter 
values. 

3-6 OPTIONS (OPT) 

The options specified by this parameter are used by the Operating System to 
determine whether a dump is to be taken at load module termination, and how 
the memory of the load module is to be preloaded, to see if processing is to 
continue upon abnormal termination and whether or not a page load message 
is desired. 

Format : The requested options are denoted by the appropriate letters, sep- 
arated by commas, and the entire parameter enclosed in parentheses. The 
parameter is identified by the keyword OPT. 

The following options are defined for the XQT statement: 

OPTION FUNCTION 

A Specifies that a post-mortem dump is to be 

taken on abnormal termination of execution. 

B Specifies that a post-mortem dump is to be 

taken on normal termination of execution. 

C Specifies job processing is to continue although 

the step may terminate abnormally. 

I Specifies that the memory load area is to be 

preloaded with indefinite form data. 

P No protect. 



3-3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




XQT 



OPTION FUNCTION 

Y Produces page load message indicating pages 

of memory in which CP step was loaded. 

Z Specifies that the memory load area is to be 

preloaded with zeros. 

Options I and Z are mutually exclusive; I overrides Z if both are present. 

Default : If the option is omitted, the memory load area retains any coinci- 
dental data until it is overwritten (I or Z), a post-mortem dump is not taken, 
(A) (B) a page load message will not appear (Y) only FOSYS statements are 
processed if step terminates abnormally (C) but if there is a loader error, 
termination occurs immediately. 

3-7 CP OPTIONS (CPOPT) 

The options specified by this parameter are obtained by the load module us- 
ing the S$OPTN Service Call. The option may vary from step to step depend- 
ing on the particular users requirements and how the options are used in the 
program. 

Format : The requested options are denoted by the appropriate characters 
(A-Z, $), separated by commas, and the entire parameter is enclosed in 
parentheses. The options are identified by the keyword CPOPT. 

Default : If the parameter is unspecified, a CP options word filled with zeros 
is passed to the load module. If the XQT statement specifies CP options, but 
the load module never accesses them, load module execution continues 
without reference to the XQT statement's CP options. 

3-8 CENTRAL PROCESSOR TIME (CPTIME) 

The Central Processor time parameter specifies the amount of Central 
Processor execution time that is allowed for the step. 

Format : This parameter is a positive constant which is identified by the 
keyword CPTIME. The value is expressed in hundredths of seconds, not 
to exceed 30 hours. 

The range of values of the time parameter, t, is: 0^t^2 24 - 1. 

Default : If the parameter is unspecified, the step is allowed an installation- 
defined Central Processor execution time. 

3-9 ADDITIONAL MEMORY SIZE (ADDMEM) 

The additional memory size parameter specifies the number of additional 
words of central memory that should be reserved for the step. This does 



3_4 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




XQT 



not include the load module and the variable dimensioned arrays (if any), but 
does include space for I/O buffers. In order for the step to get to this mem- 
ory, it invokes the GETMAIN procedure. 

Format ; This parameter is a positive constant, a constant followed by K 
(K denotes thousands), or a JSL variable. The parameter is identified by 
the keyword ADDMEM. The value is expressed in words. 

Default ; If this parameter is not specified, the System gives the step an 
installation-defined default value for additional memory. 

3-10 CHARACTER STRING (CHAR) 

The character string parameter allows the user to pass arbitrary character 
strings to a load module. These strings are obtained using the S$CHRV 
Service Call. 

Format ; This parameter is a sequence of character strings individually en- 
closed in quotation marks (" ) and separated by slashes (/). The sequence is 
identified by the keyword CHAR. 

Default ; If this parameter is not present, no character strings are passed 
to the load module. If the load module issues a S$CHRV service call, but 
the XQT statement does not specify a character string for it to access, 
S$CHRV returns an error code in its completion code (sixth) parameter, and 
execution of the load module continues. If the XQT statement specifies a 
character string, but the load module fails to access it with a S$CHRV ser- 
vice call, load module execution continues without reference to the XQT- 
defined string. 

3-11 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The XQT statement interacts with other JSL statements, particularly in re- 
gard to input and output of files. The user must use RENAME statements 
for these files if their access names are not standard access names. In ad- 
dition, if more than one step will access files via the standard access names, 
the user should specify REL statements for these files before the next step 
needs the standard names. See sections 5-2, 8-2 and 8-4. 



3 " ' Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION IV 
PROGRAM FLOW SPECIFICATION 



4-1 GENERAL 



The Job Specification Language program flow statements enable the user to 
direct the flow of execution within a job. These statements allow conditional 
bypass of statements within a job and non-sequential job termination through 
conditional and unconditional branching capabilities. Only forward branch- 
ing is allowed. Control can be transferred to any subsequent labeled state- 
ments within a job block or to labeled job blocks. 

The JSL statements that enable program flow specification are the IF, GOTO, 
SET, and PRINT statements. The IF and GOTO statements provide condi- 
tional and unconditional branches, respectively, to labeled statements or 
labeled job blocks. The SET statement provides the means of assigning and 
modifying the values of job specification variables. The PRINT statement 
provides a means of determining the current values of the job specification 
variables at the time the PRINT statement is processed. 



4-1 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




PROGRAM FLOW 



4-2 JOB SPECIFICATION VARIABLES 

Conditional branches depend on the values of job specification variables (JSL 
variables). A job specification variable is a value represented in JSL by a 
symbol. JSL provides 27 JSL variables, each represented symbolically by 
a single alphabetic character (A through Z, and $). 

JSL variables provide communication between steps when the same variable 
is assigned to several steps as a run time parameter. Assigning the same 
variable to steps and program flow specification statements allows commu- 
nication between steps and job control. The value of a variable acquired 
during processing is available to steps through the S$JSLV and S$RUNV ser- 
vice calls. 

The Operating System initializes all 27 JSL variables to zero at the start of 
each job. Their values can be changed by a step within the S$JSLV service 
call. The JSL SET statement can also change the contents through the use 
of the variables. The user can display the values of the JSL variables at 
any point with the S$JSL PRINT statement, which gives the values of one or 
more variables on the job activity file. 

Each job specification variable is a word of central memory. Its value can 
be a constant, real, or literal. JSL program flow statements, however, 
deal with JSL variables as if they were exclusively integers. Non-integer 
values for a JSL variable must originate in a step and be written to the JSL 
variable with the JSLV service call. The tests used in the IF conditional 
branch instruction are based on bit -by-bit logical comparison; hence, if 
integer and non-integer data are compared, the internal representation of 
the non-integer data influences the result. 

4-3 JOB BLOCKS 

Either a LIMIT statement or a JOB statement defines the beginning of a job 
block. A JSL program flow specification statement can transfer control to 
any subsequent, labeled JSL statement in the same job block. It cannot refer 
to any statement, labeled or not, in another job block. Job control refer- 
ences between blocks can only be made through the names (labels) of the 
blocks specified on their respective defining LIMIT statements. 

Job termination can be programmed for any job in which the EOJ statement 
has a label to which a branch can be made. An EOJ statement might be 
viewed as a job block that initiates all job termination processing. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SET 



4-4 THE SET STATEMENT 

The SET statement assigns a value to a JSL variable. 
The general form of the SET statement is: 



/ 



LABEL | l OPERATION 
I 1 



I I 

[Symbol] , 16 | SET 



± 



I OPERANDS 



t | variable = [±]n [±m] 
I 



The label field begins with a slash, which may be followed by the statement 
label (any valid ASC symbol, 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters beginning with 
an alphabetic [A-Z,$] character). The verb SET, preceded and followed by 
delimiting blanks, must follow the label field. The remaining operand field 
contains the name of the variable to be assigned a value, an equals sign, and 
an expression defining the value to be assigned to the variable. 

4-5 VARIABLE 

The variable parameter specifies a JSL variable and specifies the value to 
be assigned to that variable. The parameter is in the form of an assignment 
equation. 

Format : The JSL variable (stated first in the field and followed by an equals 
sign) is one of the alphabetic characters A-Z and $. The equals sign is fol- 
lowed by an expression composed of: 

n a signed or unsigned constant 

a signed or unsigned JSL variable 

a signed or unsigned job specification indicator (TERM or 
STATUS) 

m a constant or null. 

The value of the JSL variable is limited in range to -2 J1 ^ v^ 2 -1. The job 
specification indicators are read-only values. The m component is an op- 
tional modifier of the n component. The n is mandatory. 

Default : If a JSL variable is not assigned a value by the SET statement or 
by a step, it has a value of zero. 

NOTE 

The specified JSL variable acquires the SET- 
assigned value upon processing of the SET 
statement. The variable retains that value for 
the current job until it is redefined. 



4-3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




SET 



The following correctly-coded SET statements, if executed in the order 
shown, would produce the results indicated in table 4-1. 

Table 4-1. SET Statement Values 



Statement 


Value of 


A 


B 


C 


D 


/LABEL1 0SET0A=1 

/0SETJ6B=A+5 

/LABEL2 0SET|0A=A+1 

/0SET)*B=A+5 

/J6SET0O-A 

/0SET|dD=-A-5 


1 
1 
2 
2 
2 
2 



6 
6 
7 
7 
7 






-2 
-2 







-7 



4-4 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




IF 



4-6 THE IF STATEMENT 

The IF statement specifies a conditional forward branch of execution to a 
specified statement within a job block, or to another job block. 

The IF statement is written: 



T 1 1 

I LABEL | l OPERATION i , OPERANDS 

j i_i ,_2 



/ [ [Symbol] ; t | IF \ t I condition, label 



i 



J_ 



The statement's label field begins with a slash, which may or may not be 
followed by a label. The verb IF, surrounded by single blanks, appears in 
the operation field. The operand field contains two parameters. The first 
defines a condition to be tested; the result of this comparison determines 
whether execution will be transferred. The second parameter is the label 
of the statement to which execution is transferred if the condition parameter 
evaluates to TRUE. 

4-7 CONDITION 

The condition parameter specifies the condition under which transfer of ex- 
ecution is to be made. 

Format: The condition parameter is a mandatory positional parameter that 
must appear as the first operand. If the condition is TRUE, execution trans- 
fers to the statement or job block specified by the label. If the condition is 
FALSE, the next sequential JSL statement in the job input stream is executed. 

The condition parameter is written in the format as a. op.b, where a and b 
can each be one of the following: 

a,b constant, 

JSL variable, 

job specification indicator (TERM or STATUS) 

Op can be one of six valid relational operators, as shown in Table 4-2. 

The value of the relational expression is the logical result of an algebraic 
comparison of a JSL variable, a constant, or a job specification indicator 
to another JSL variable, constant, or job specification indicator. If the 
condition parameter evaluates to TRUE, execution is transferred to the 
statement specified by the label parameter; if it evaluates to FALSE, ex- 
ecution passes to the next sequential JSL statement in the job input stream. 

The condition parameter is restricted to one relational expression; no com- 
bination of conditions is permitted. 

Default: None. 



4-5 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




IF 



Table 4-2. IF Statement Relational Operators 



Operation 



a.GT.b 

a.GE.b 

a.EQ.b 
a.NE.b 
a.LE.b 

a.LT.b 



Condition 



TRUE if a is greater than b; FALSE if a is less than or equal 
to b 

TRUE if a is greater than or equal to b; FALSE if a is less 
than b 

TRUE if a is equal to b; FALSE if a is not equal to b 
TRUE if a is not equal to b; FALSE if a is equal to b 

TRUE if a is less than or equal to b; FALSE if a is greater 
than b 

TRUE if a is less than b; FALSE if a is greater than or equal 
to b 



4-8 LABEL 

The label parameter is the label of a JSL statement to which execution is to 
be transferred when the condition specified by the condition parameter eval- 
uates to TRUE. 

Format: The label must be a valid ASC symbol. The label parameter is a 
positional, mandatory parameter that must appear as the second operand. 
The label is separated from the condition parameter by a comma. 

The label parameter must identify a JSL statement in the same block with 
the IF statement, a LIMIT statement that defines another job block, or the 
EOJ statement that terminates the job. A branch cannot be made from a de- 
fined job block to an initial default job block initiated by only a JOB state- 
ment; however, branches can be made within such a job block and from such 
a block to any labeled block. If no reachable statement has the label spec- 
ified in the label parameter, the job terminates, and a message appears in 
the user's job activity file. 

Default: None. A label must be specified. 



4-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




GOTO 



4-9 THE GOTO STATEMENT 

The GOTO statement directs an unconditional forward branch of execution to 
a specified statement within a job block, or to another job block. 

The general form of the GOTO statement is: 

1 



T 1 1 

I LABEL | I OPERATION 

J L_l _ 



/ J [Symbol] , % | GOTO 



± 



I 



OPERANDS 



ti I label 

_i 



The GOTO statement's label field begins with a slash; the slash may be fol- 
lowed by a statement label. The operation field contains the verb GOTO, 
and is delimited by blanks. The single operand is the label of the statement 
to which execution is to be transferred when the GOTO statement is pro- 
cessed. 

4-10 LABEL 

The label parameter specifies the JSL statement to which execution is to be 
transferred. 

Format : The label parameter is a mandatory, positional parameter. The 
label must be a valid ASC symbol. Only one label can be specified. 

The label parameter must point to a JSL statement within the same job block 
as the GOTO statement, a LIMIT statement that defines another job block, or 
the EOJ statement that terminates the job. Forward branches can be made 
within an unnamed job block or they can be made from an unnamed job block 
to any named job block. If the label parameter points to an unreachable or 
undefined statement, the job terminates and a message is written .on the job 
activity file. 

Default : None. The label must be specified. 



4-7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




PRINT 



4-11 THE PRINT STATEMENT 

The PRINT statement specifies that the current values of one or more or all 
of the 27 JSL variables or the job specification indicators (TERM or STATUS; 
be written to the system output file. This valuation occurs when the PRINT 
statement is encountered in the job input stream; the user does not become 
aware of the results until job termination, when part of the system output 
file is printed as the job activity file. 

The general form of the PRINT statement is: 



LABEL 



i. 



/ [Symbol] 
\ 



I 



14 



OPERATION 



PRINT 



OPERANDS 



t | [ JSL V= variable 1 [/variable 2[/. . . 
| [/variable n]]]] 

I [, MESG=message] 

| [, OPT= (options)] 



The PRINT statement begins with a slash and an optional label, followed by 
PRINT delimited at each end by blanks. PRINT'S parameters allow specify- 
ing the variables to be printed, specifying a message to be printed with them, 
and indicating whether the variables are to be printed in decimal or hexa- 
decimal. 

4-12 VARIABLE (JSLV) 

The variable parameter names the variables whose values are to be printed. 
It is a list of subparameters separated by slashes, preceded by the tag JSLV. 

Format : Each subparameter may be one or all of the JSL variables denoted 
by the alphabetic characters A-Z and $ or may be one or both of the job 
specification indicators denoted by the character strings TERM or STATUS. 
The options parameter can affect which values are printed. 

Default : The JSLV parameter is optional. If variables are specified, the 
values entered will be the values of the variables current at the time the 
PRINT statement is executed. 

4-13 MESSAGE (MESG) 

The message parameter specifies a user-supplied message for output in the 
job activity file, via the system output file. 

Format: The message starts immediately after the keyword MESG and an 
equals sign. It is a string of up to 128 characters. Embedded blanks are 
dropped unless the string is enclosed in quotation marks. 



4-8 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




PRINT 



Default : The message parameter is optional. If the user provides no mes- 
sage on the PRINT statement, no message is placed in the system output file. 
A message may he specified with or without the JSLV parameter, 

4-14 OPTION (OPT) 

The option parameter, identified by the tag OPT, enables the user to indicate 
whether all variables or only specified variables are printed and what notation 
is used. 

Format : The value of the option parameter is either or both of the alphabetic 
codes A and H. The parameter value must be enclosed in parentheses. If 
both parameter values are used, they must be separated by a comma and the 
entire list enclosed in parentheses. 

If option A is chosen, the values of all the variables are printed in decimal 
notation. If option H is chosen, the values of the variables specified in the 
JSLV parameter are printed in hexadecimal. Option A overrides the JSLV 
parameter. If both A and H are used, the values of all the variables are 
printed in hexadecimal notation. 

Default : The OPT parameter is optional. If OPT is not used, the default 
provides that the values of only the variables specified by the JSLV param- 
eter are printed and in decimal notation. 

4-15 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

If no parameters are specified on the PRINT statement, an error message is 
generated. At least one type of parameter must be used. 

The JSLV parameter may be used without a MESG or OPT parameter. The 
values of the specified variables are printed in decimal notation. 

The MESG parameter may be used without a JSLV or OPT parameter. The 
user-supplied message is written to the system output file. 

The OPT=A parameter may be used without a JSLV or MSG parameter. 
OPT=H requires either a JSLV or OPT=A specification or both. OPT=H 
cannot appear by itself. 

4-16 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The IF and GOTO statements may point to other JSL statements within a job 
block or may point to a LIMIT or EOJ statement. The IF and GOTO may not 
point to a default job block initiated by a JOB statement. 



4-9 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




PRINT 



4-17 EXAMPLES 

Directory Job Flow with a Program-Computed Variable 

A sample JSL deck appears below. The object of this block of code is to 
execute program BRANCH, followed by UPDATE or REPORT, the choice 
depending on the value of JSL variable Z. Program BRANCH computes the 
value for Z, then uses the S$JSLV service call to store that value in Z. 



JSL Statement 
/ JOB DEMO, 12345, NAME 

/BLOC1 LIMIT 
/ XQT BRANCH 



/ PRINT JSLV=Z 



/ IF Z.GT.50,BLOC3 



/BLOC 2 LIMIT 
/ XQT UPDATE 
/ GOTO EXIT 

/BLOC3 LIMIT 
/ XQT REPORT 
/EXIT EOJ 



Explanation 

Initiate job input stream; account num- 
ber is 12345, usercode is NAME. 

Start first job block. 

Commence file needed to execute 
BRANCH (includes passing integral 
value to JSL variable Z). 

Output value of Z at this point to sys- 
tem output file for later printing. 

If Z is greater than 50, go to BLOC3 
and execute REPORT; if less than or 
equal to 50, go to BLOC2 and execute 
UPDATE. 

Start second job block. 

Start file needed to execute UPDATE. 

Having executed UPDATE, skip execu- 
tion of REPORT and branch directly to 
job termination (EOJ). 

Start third job block. 

Start file needed to execute REPORT. 

Terminate job input stream. 



4-10 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION V 
FILE DESCRIPTION 

5-1 INTRODUCTION 

File description is one factor to be considered in specifying input and output 
of files for the executing job. The FD and START/STOP statements are file 
description statements describing and defining the logical characteristics of 
the file identified by an access name. The FD statement pertains to files on 
the secondary disc, either as a result of creation on or transfer to the disc. 
The START/STOP statements define files embedded in the job input stream, 
i. e. , card files located in a JSL program deck. 

5-2 FILE SPECIFICATION 

All CP steps reference files via access names. CP steps using Fortran I/O 
require files with standard access names for file input and output. Fortran 
I/O file standard access names are of the form: 

FTxxFyyy 

Where: 

xx - corresponds to the file reference number (logical unit number) 
that is identified in the Fortran program unit I/O statements. 

yyy - corresponds to the file number beginning with 001 and incre- 
menting by 1 after each ENDFILE and successive writing of 
additional records to the next file of the appropriate logical 
unit. 

The file reference number can be any integer value from 01-99. The Fortran 
programmer can read or write po any of these files on disc and, using the 
appropriate JSL FD, I/O, and cataloging statements, handle the files as re- 
quired by the program unit. The default access name for the old Fortran II, 
or on-line READ statement, is FT05F001, for the PRINT statement, 
FT06F001, and for the PUNCH statement, FT07F001. The remainder of 
the discussion in this paragraph deals with CP steps that use standard access 
name s . 

If an XQT statement is used to execute any CP steps using Fortran I/O, the 
user must rename all his files with standard access names before the next 
XQT statement, a macro call generating an XQT statement, or a system use 
of standard-named files.- .AtlXQT statement executing a load module not us - 
ing Fortran I/O does not require standard access names for its I/O files. 
The system macros do not require renaming of files with standard access 



5-1 Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



names; they handle this function automatically. Table 5-1 summarizes the 
standard-named files available to CP steps and shows their characteristics. 

SYS. IN is a standard access name not described in table 5-1. It is used to 
refer to files read in through the job input stream but not assigned an access 
name. Multiple files may be input in a single job specification, and the user 
need not give them access names. However, only one name SYS. IN is avail- 
able to a single job specification, so a bookkeeping procedure is necessary 
to identify the unnamed file to which SYS. IN refers at any given time. 

The user need not worry about SYS. IN and its uses unless he uses his own 
XQT statements to govern the steps in processing his program or enters two 
or more unnamed files through the job input stream. In any other case, the 
user's files are automatically made available to his CP steps. 

When the System encounters a START statement that does not specify an ac- 
cess name, it creates a file into which it reads everything it finds after the 
START statement, until it finds a STOP statement; it assigns the file a de- 
fault access name. When the System encounters anything other than a JSL 
statement in the job input stream, it assumes it is dealing with an unnamed 
input file; it reads the encountered non-JSL record, and everything following 
it until a JSL statement is found, into a file to which is assigns a default ac- 
cess name. Default access names are of the form 

DEF. nnn 
where nnn is an integer indicating the order in which the unnamed file identi- 
fied was encountered in the job input stream. Hence, the first unnamed file 
found would be given the default access name "DEF. 001/' the second 
"DEF. 002", and so forth. 

Files embedded in the job input stream are removed from it when the System 
first encounters them. Henceforth, they are referenced by default access 
names or by user-assigned access names (assigned on START statements). 
The System replaces unnamed files embedded in the job input stream with 
JSL statements associating the default access name of the replaced file with 
the standard access name SYS. IN. The System inserts, before the statement 
immediately before the file, a RENAME statement replacing the file's default 
access name with SYS. IN. The System also inserts a statement releasing 
SYS. IN in the place the unnamed file was embedded. Since statements which 
reference unnamed files are followed by them in the job stream, and, since 
statements which reference unnamed files actually refer in default to SYS. IN, 
the statements inserted accomplish the required association. 

To illustrate this process, consider the following job specification. It com- 
piles a Fortran source program and generates a punched object deck. 



D ~ Advanced Scientific Computer 



Table 5-1. Standard-Access -Named Files and Their Characteristics 




Standard 

Access 

Name 


File 
Name 


File 
Organization 


Record 
Format 


Record 
Length 


Block Size 


Other 
Requirements 


Allowed 


Default 


SYS.AIN 


Assembler 


Sequential 


Fixed, 


80 bytes 


Integral mul- 


4,000 bytes 


Must exist prior 




Source Input 


file 


blocked 




tiple of rec- 


(or 50 logi- 


to execution of 




File 




(FB) 




ord length 


cal records) 


Assembler 


SYS. FIN 


Fortran 


Sequential 


Fixed, 


80 bytes 


Integral mul- 


4,000 bytes 


Must exist prior 




Source Input 


file 


blocked 




tiple of rec- 


(or 50 logi- 


to execution of 




File 




(FB) 




ord length 


cal records) 


compiler 


SYS. PRT 


Print Output 


Sequential 


Fixed, 


136 


3, 944 bytes 


3, 944 bytes 


If stacking de- 




File (used 


file 


blocked, 


bytes 


(or 29 logi- 


(or 29 logi- 


sired, execute 




by Compiler, 




using 




cal records) 


cal records) 


FD statement 




Assembler 




USASI 








setting POS= 




and Linkage 




control 








MOD after last 




Editor) 




charac- 
ters 
(FBA) 








file update, be- 
fore Assembler 
execution 


SYS.USPL 


User Source 


Partitioned 


Fixed, 


80 bytes 


Integral mul- 


None 


Must exist prior 




Program 


Direct 


blocked 




tiple of rec- 




to execution of 




Library 


Secondary 
file 


(FB) 




ord length 
(Efficient 
blocking is 
4, 000 bytes 
[or 50 logi- 
cal rec- 
ords]) 




Assembler 



I— I 

It 1 
M 

a 

H 
en 
O 

1—4 

H 

o 

2 




Table 5-1. Standard-Access -Named Files and Their Characteristics (Continued) 



4^ 



s 

"S3 

C 



Standard 

Access 

Name 


File 
Name 


File 
Organization 


Record 
Format 


Record 
Length 


Block Size 


Other 
Requirements 


Allowed 


Default 


SYS. OMOD 


Object 
Module File 


Sequential 
file 


Fixed, 
blocked 


80 bytes 


4,000 bytes 
(or 50 logi- 


4, 000 bytes 
(or 50 logi- 


If stacking de- 
sired, execute 




(output by 
Assembler, 
or Com- 
piler; input 
to Linkage 




(FB) 




cal records) 


cal records) 


FD statement 
setting POS = 
MOD after last 
file update, be- 
fore execution 




Editor) 














SYS. LEIN 


Linkage 
Editor Con- 
trol Input 
File 


Sequential 
file 


Fixed, 

blocked 

(FB) 


80 bytes 


Integral mul- 
tiple of rec- 
ord length 


4, 000 bytes 
(or 50 logi- 
cal records) 


Must exist prior 
to execution of 
Linkage Editor 


SYS. OLIB 


System Ob- 
ject Library 


Partitioned 
Direct 
Secondary 
file 


Fixed, 

blocked 

(FB) 


80 bytes 


Integral mul- 
tiple of rec- 
ord length 
(Efficient 
blocking is 
4, 000 bytes 
[or 50 logi- 
cal records]) 


None 


User libraries 
may also be 
used. They 
must have the 
same charac- 
teristics as 
SYS.OLIB. 
User libraries 
are searched 
before 
SYS.OLIB. 



O 

2 




Table 5-1. Standard-Access -Named Files and Their Characteristics (Continued) 



Standard 

Access 

Name 


File 
Name 


File 
Organization 


Record 
Format 


Record 
Length 


Block Size 


Other 
Requirements 


Allowed 


Default 


SYS. LMOD 


Linkage 
Edited Load 
Module 


Direct Sec- 
ondary file 
(DS) 


Record, block organization not maintained in 
direct secondary files. 


None 



f 
w 

d 

H 
m 
O 

i— i 

i— i 
O 
2 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



/ JOB FORTJOB, 12345, USERNAME 
/ FTN OBJ=OUTDEK 

PROGRAM SIMPLE 
100 FORMAT (IX, 13) 

INT = 50 

WRITE (6, 100) INT 

END 
/ FOSYS OUTDEK, TYPE = PUNCH, OPT = (R) 
/ EOJ 

The CP step here is generated by the macro FTN. For the moment, consider 
only that it is a macro which elicits code to compile a Fortran source deck, 
that "OBJ=OUTDEK" identifies the object code file, and that the required in- 
put file specification defaults to the unnamed file following the FTN statement 
in the job input stream. 

When the Job Input Stream Processor works on this file, it removes the 
records 

PROGRAM SIMPLE 
100 FORMAT (IX, 13) 
INT = 50 

WRITE (6, 100) INT 
END 

placing them in a file with a default access name of DEF.001. In their place, 
it inserts the required RENAME and REL statements. Macro expansion is 
also accomplished at this time. 

5-3 THE FD STATEMENT 

The FD statement, File Description, describes the characteristics of a job 
local file. It defines logical file characteristics during execution of the CP 
step and the characteristics of the file being created on or transferred to 
disc. More than one FD statement may be used to redefine parameter values 
before the CP step is executed. The FD statement also supplies the secon- 
dary disc allocation for the file when the installation default, the value sup- 
plied by a job block, or the catalog entry value are not appropriate. The FD 
statement also specifies which device the file is allocated to. 

The characteristics of the file and the access method must be defined before 
any input/output requests are made to the secondary disc file by the CP step. 
The FD statement parameters are used during the merge actions which oc- 
cur when the CP step opens the file. Merging allows parameters from var- 
ious sources, i.e. , File Control Block (FCB), FD statement and File Infor- 
mation Block (FIB), to be combined to produce a File Control Block which 
fully defines the file characteristics and any user processing options. 



5-6 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



The parameter values of each FD statement are placed in a File Descriptor 
Block (FDB). Except in the case of concatenation, only one File Descriptor 
Block is generated for each access name within a job. Subsequent FD state- 
ments in the job's JSL input stream referencing the same access name, re- 
define the values for each parameter that is coded. Thus, the user can 
modify file characteristics from step to step with JSL. 



The general form of the FD statement is: 






! OPERATION 



T 



[Symbol] 



ti 



FD 



t 



nPFRANns 



access name 

!SECT \ 
BAND( ....,, . / 

word) = imtial / maximum / 
BYTE) increment l 

[,FORG = |^g|] [,BKSZ = number] 
[, LREC = number] 

(acc| 

[,EROP = JSKP> ] 

(ABE) 
[, RCFM = 



'F 


"B " 

BS 

_S . 


[D] 

> 


U 


u 






[, BFTK = S] [, BFAL = 



[, BUFL = number] 
[, BUFN = number] 

tDTTP= |^h/[f CNTG 

PAD f 
OPID J 
/ [operator id] 
[, SETUP = set up id] 



fNOCNTG 



)] 



5-7 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Since the merging actions of the file opening processes use parameters from 
sources other than the FD statement to complete the File Control Block, the 
FD statement may not be required to build the FCB for all files. Addition- 
ally, since other File Management statements also pertain to the file trans- 
fer between peripheral devices and the secondary disc, the FD statement 
may not be required to accomplish the disc file creation. Therefore, only 
under certain circumstances is the FD statement needed. 

When the FD statement is used, the location of the FD statement in the job 
input stream of JSL statements determines when the File Definition Block 
values are initially set, or updated. Therefore, the FD statement must pre- 
cede any other JSL statement which is dependent upon the values within the 
File Definition Block.' This is particularly important when the file will be 
opened during the execution of a particular job step with the intention of de- 
fining certain File Control Block parameters through the FD parameter 
values during the OPEN merge. 

The FD statement contains both positional and keyword parameters. The 
positional parameter is mandatory and must appear in the first position. 
The keyword parameters are optional and may be coded in any convenient 
order. The FD statement may be labeled if communication with the JSL con- 
trol statements is desired. 

5-4 ACCESS NAME 

The file must be named to be accessible to the job. JSL statements refer- 
encing the same file within the job use the specified access name. 

Format : The access name is mandatory and must appear first in the oper- 
ands field. Access name is a valid ASC symbol assigned by the user. 

Default ; None. Access name must be specified. 

The following is an example of naming a file: 

/#FDl6MAINFILE V) = mandatory blanks that must be coded. 

The FD statement may be labeled: 

/FL20tfFDtfMAINFILE 

5-5 DISC SPACE RESERVATION (SECT, BAND, WORD OR BYTE) 

The disc space parameter specifies the management of disc space for the 
named file throughout the job. This parameter is optional. 

Format : The disc space parameter is identified by one of the keywords 
SECT, BAND, WORD or BYTE. The parameter consists of three subparam- 
eters separated by slashes. Each subparameter value is an unsigned con- 
stant. The subparameters within the parameter are positional. They must 
be coded in the order: initial/maximum/increment. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



SECT specifies the sub parameters in sector units (64 words each). BAND 
specifies the subparameters in band units (256 sectors each). WORD speci- 
fies that the parameter value is expressed in word units given in thousands 
(WORD = 15 is 15, 000 words). BYTE specifies that the parameter value is 
expressed in byte units given in thousands (BYTE = 12 is 12,000 bytes). 
When the value specified (WORD or BYTE) is not an even multiple of 64 sec- 
tors it is rounded up to the next even multiple. 

Subparameter Set : The first sub parameter, initial , specifies the initial 
amount of disc space allocated to the file. 

The second subparameter, maximum , specifies the maximum amount of disc 
space that can be allocated to the file at any time during the job. The amount 
that can be specified by this subparameter cannot exceed the space allocated 
in the LIMIT statement or, by LIMIT'S default, the installation -defined value. 
The LIMIT statement identifies the job block in which the file is defined. 

The third subparameter, increment , specifies the amount of space to be 
added to the file's initial allocation whenever a write request to the file 
causes the file to use more than the initially allocated space. 

Limits : The minimum disc space that can be allocated is 64 sectors (1/4 
band). In this case, the amount must be coded in sector units, word units 
or byte units. 

The maximum amount of space that can be allocated is the amount specified 
in the LIMIT statement, or, by LIMIT'S default, is the installation-defined 
value. 

Sector allocations specified by SECT are in units of 64 sectors for each sub- 
parameter. If any of the three subparameters is not a multiple of 64, the 
system rounds the value upward to the next higher multiple of 64. 

Default : The entire set of subparameters must be coded or none coded. The 
entire set must be omitted if all disc space defaults are acceptable. 

The initial amount of space allocated is not incremented if the maximum al- 
location is exceeded. 

If a cataloged file is referenced, the default value is the file size specified 
in the catalog. 

Examples : The following examples show a tape file with disc space allocated 
in sector units and band units, respectively: 

/tfFDtfMAINFILE, SECT = 128/192/64 

The file named MAINFILE will use initial disc space of 128 sectors (2 x 64 
sectors). It cannot exceed 192 sectors (3 x 64 sectors) during execution of 
the job. If a write to the file causes the file to exceed the 128 sectors ini- 
tially allocated, the file space can be incremented by 64 (1 x 64 sectors) 
sectors, but cannot exceed the maximum of 192 sectors. 



5-9 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



/tfFDtfMAINFILE, BAND = 1/2/1 

The file named MAINFILE will use initial disc space of one band (1 band = 
256 sectors). It cannot use more than two bands (512 sectors) during execu- 
tion of the job. If a write to the file causes the file to use more than one 
band initially allocated, the space can be incremented by one band, but can- 
not exceed the maximum of two bands. 

5-6 FILE ORGANIZATION (FORG) 

The file organization parameter specifies the organization of the file on the 
secondary disc. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the tag FORG. It consists of one 
subparameter selected from four keywords: PS and DS. 

PS - the file on disc is organized sequentially 

DS - the file on disc is organized as direct secondary 

Default : If the file organization parameter is omitted and the value is not 

supplied from any other source, the system does not supply default values. 

5-7 BLOCK SIZE (BKSZ) 

The block size parameter specifies the maximum number of bytes in a block 
within the file. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keyword BKSZ and must be 
coded as shown. The value of the parameter is an unsigned constant. 

Restrictions : (a) Direct Secondary Files FORG - all input files on tape must 
have a block size in multiple of sectors except for the last block, (b) Se- 
quential FORG - block size must be specified for unlabeled input tapes. 

Specifications : Block length is utilized in the user's opening merge during 
CP execution for files with a block organization on disc. For unlabeled tape 
files, the length is used to input the tape to the disc. 

32 
Limits : The subparameter value must be within the range, l<b<2 -1. 

Default : If block size is omitted and the value is not supplied from any other 
source (e.g., FCB procedure or tape labels), the system does not supply 
default values. Exception: Direct Secondary files are defaulted to 4096 for 
tape output. 

5-8 RECORD LENGTH (LREC) 

The record length parameter specifies the maximum length, in bytes, of any 
logical record in the file. 



5-10 

A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword LREC. The keyword 
LREC must be coded as shown. The value of the parameter is an unsigned 
constant. 

Restrictions : Record length is valid only for those file organizations that 
support a record structure on the disc. 

Specifications : Record length is used in the user's opening merge during CP 

execution. 

1 / 
Limits : The parameter value must be within the range, 0< r<2 -1. 

Default: If the record length parameter is omitted and the value is not sup- 
plied from any other source, e.g. , FCB procedure or tape labels, the system 
does not supply default values. 

5-9 RECORD FORMAT (RCFM) 

The record format parameter specifies the format of the logical records 
within the file on disc. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keyword RCFM and must be 
coded as shown. The parameter contains one to three subparameters with 
no separators. Each subparameter is a keyletter. The subparameters are 
optional. They must be coded in the order shown if specified. Omit those 
subparameters not required. It is not necessary to indicate omitted sub- 
parameters. 

Restrictions : Record format is utilized during the user's opening merge 
during CP execution for those disc files with a record structure. The allow- 
able combinations of subparameters follows: 

[m] [m] 




[m] 

[A] V 




[A] U[A] 



Specifications : The meaning of these subparameters are: 

Character Meaning 

F The records are of fixed length. 

V The records are of variable length. 

U The records of undefined length. 

B The records are blocked. 

S For fixed-length records, the records are written as 

standard blocks, i. e. , no truncated blocks or unfilled 
tracks within the file, with the exception of the last 
block or track. 

For variable -length records, a record may span more 
than one block. 

5-11 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Character Meaning 

A The records contain USASI control characters. This 

subparameter specifies that the first character in 
each record is a carriage control character. 

M The records contain machine control characters. 

The subparameter specifies that the first character 
in each record is a carriage control character. 

NOTE 

See File Management Guide for a more detailed 
discussion. 

The record format parameter may also define the records of the file on a 
tape volume if this information is not available to the system from any other 
source. This condition occurs for unlabeled tape input files only. 

The control character subparameter is valid for print files only. 

Default : If the record format parameter is omitted and the information is 
not supplied by any other source, the system supplies no defaults. 

The subparameter defaults, when the record format parameter is coded, are 
supplied as: 

Length: invalid if not coded 

Blocking: no blocking 

Structure: no spanning, not standard, as applicable 

Control Character: none present. 

Examples : The following example illustrates the named tape file that is input 
to the secondary disc. The amount of disc allocated is expressed in sector 

units. 

/#FDl6MAINFILE,SECT=128/192/64,FORG=PS, BKSZ = 64, LREC=16, ; 
RCFM=FBA 

The file name MAINFILE initially uses 128 sectors of disc. The space may 
be incremented by 64 sectors, not to exceed a maximum of 192 sectors. The 
file on disc is sequentially organized. The file records, 16 bytes in length, 
are in blocks 64 bytes in length. The records are fixed length, blocked, and 
contain ANSI control characters in the first character of each record. 

5-10 BUFFERING TYPE (BFTK) 

The buffering type parameter, identified by the keyword BFTK, defines the 
type of buffering to be used during CP step use of the file. 



5 12 

Advanced Scientific, Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Format : The parameter is the single keyletter S, which denotes simple buf- 
fering. Only simple buffering is supported. 

Restrictions : The BFTK parameter does not affect the transfer of a file to 
the disc, nor the structure of the file on the disc. In addition, BFTK is not 
applicable for processing direct secondary organized files. 

Default : The parameter may be omitted. If so, no buffer type is specified. 
Buffer management depends on the methods that the executing CP step uses 
to access the file. 

5-11 BUFFER ALIGNMENT (BFAL) 

The buffer alignment parameter, identified by the keyword BFAL, defines 
the alignment desired for each buffer used by the executing CP step use of 
the file. 

Format : The parameter value is one of the single keyletters F, D, or O. 
F denotes fullword buffer alignment; D, doubleword alignment; and O, octet 
alignment. 

Restrictions : The BFAL parameter does not affect the transfer of a file to 
disc, nor the structure of the file on the disc. In addition, BFAL is not ap- 
plicable for processing direct secondary organized files. 

Default : The parameter may be omitted. If so, no buffer alignment specifi- 
cation is made. Buffer management depends on the methods that the execut- 
ing CP step uses to access the file. 

5-12 BUFFER LENGTH (BUFL) 

The buffer length parameter, identified by the keyword BUFL, defines the 
length of each buffer used by the executing CP step. 

Format : The parameter value is an unsigned constant. The range is 
1 < n< 2!6-l bytes, where n is the number. The buffer length specified must 
be large enough to contain the maximum block length of the file being pro- 
cessed. 

Restriction : The BUFL parameter does not affect the transfer of a file to 
disc, nor the structure of the file on the disc. In addition, BUFL is not ap- 
plicable for processing direct secondary organized files. 

Default : The parameter may be omitted. If so, no buffer length is specified. 
Buffer management depends on the methods that the executing CP step uses 
to access the file. 

5-13 BUFFER NUMBER (BUFN) 

The buffer number parameter specifies the number of buffers desired for 
processing the file during CP execution. 



5-13 

Advanced Scientific Computer 






\p\ FILE DESCRIPTION 

^y 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keyword BUFN. Its value is an 
unsigned constant that must be in the range 1 s n^ 255, where n is the number. 

Restriction : The BUFN parameter does not affect the transfer of a file to 
disc, nor the structure of the file on the disc. In addition, BUFN is not ap- 
plicable for processing direct secondary organized files. 

Default : The parameter may be omitted. If so, no buffers are reserved for 
CP use of the named file. Buffer management depends on the access methods 
used by the executing CP step in using the file. 

5-14 ERROR OPTION (EROP) 

For certain access methods, the Operating System must be told what action 
to take if an uncorrectable I/O error occurs; for other access methods, the 
Operating System automatically performs error processing actions as pre- 
scribed by the access method. The FD statement provides this information 
for files being accessed through QSAM techniques. 

Format: The error option parameter, identified by the keyword EROP, 
specifies the action required of the Operating System if an uncorrectable I/O 
error occurs. The parameter value is one of three keywords: ACC, SKP, 
or ABE. ACC instructs the Operating System to accept the data block caus- 
ing the error and to continue processing. SKP instructs the Operating Sys- 
tem to skip the error-causing data block and continue; ABE specifies termi- 
nation of the step processing the error-causing data block. 

Default : The error option parameter may be omitted. If the parameter is 
not used, any processing option by the Operating System should be specified 
by another source. The System does not supply a default value when pro- 
cessing options are not supplied. 

5-15 POSITION (POS) 

When the executing CP step opens a specified file that exists on magnetic 
tape, it must know the position of the tape before it can access the proper 
file. Files with standard labels convey the information through their labels. 
Files with no labels do not contain this information; thus, the position param- 
eter on the FD statement must be used to transmit this information. If file 
positioning has been specified previously, the parameter changes the pre- 
vious specification. 

Format : The position parameter specifies the initial position of a tape file 
when an executing CP step opens the file. The parameter is identified by 
the tag POS. Its value is one of two keywords -- NEW or MOD. 

NEW specifies that the file is positioned at its beginning. This condition al- 
lows the user to overwrite existing information. MOD specifies that file 
positioning is at the end of the file to be modified. This condition enables 



5-14 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



the executing CP step to add data to the file without destroying existing in- 
formation. 
It is implicit that the position parameter applies only to sequential files. 

Default : The position parameter is optional and may be omitted. If the 
parameter is not specified, the Operating System assumes that a previously 
specified condition does not change. If the POS parameter has not been 
specified previously, the system assumes NEW as the default value. 

Examples : In using the POS parameter, consider the following example: 

/l6FDl6MAINFILE,SECT=128/192/64, POS=MOD 

The file named MAINFILE initially will use 128 sectors of disc. The file 
cannot exceed 192 sectors, but can use an additional 64 sectors (beyond 128) 
if writes to the file during CP step use of the file cause the file to exceed the 
initial allocation. The file will be positioned to the end of file when the ex- 
ecuting CP step accesses it. 
If the position parameter is defaulted, then 

/16FD^MAINFILE,SECT=128/ 192/64 
The Operating System positions the file according to two criteria: 

• If the file position has been specified previously, the Operating 
System assumes the former condition and positions the file ac- 
cordingly. 

• If the file position has not been specified previously, Operating 
System assumes a value of NEW and positions the file to the 
beginning of the specified file. Any writes to the file will de- 
stroy existing information. 

5-16 DEVICE TYPE (DTYP) 

The device type parameter is identified by the keyword DTYP and specifies 
if the file is to be allocated on the head-per-track disc, position-arm-disc, 
or the device specified in the Operating System default parameter table, or 
a specific channel or module specified by the third subparameter. It also 
indicates whether or not the file can be allocated without regard to physical 
contiguity on disc. 

Format : The parameter value is a set of three subparameters separated by 
slashes. The first subparameter value pertains to file allocation and is one 
of the keywords DSEC, HPT, PAD, or OPID. The meaning of these sub- 
parameters is: 

DSEC - allocate the file on the device specified in the system de- 
fault parameter file (default table) 



5 " 15 Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



HPT - allocate the file on the head-per-track disc 

PAD - allocate the file on the Positioning -arm-disc 

OPID - allocate the file on the specific channel or module given by 
the third sub parameter. 

The second sub parameter pertains to physical contiguity of the file on disc 
and its value is one of the keywords NOCNTG, or CNTG where: 

NOCNTG - file can be allocated without regard to contiguity. This 
is the default value. 

CNTG - File must be allocated on physically contiguous disc; if 
the file is greater than or equal to a module; allocation 
on each module will be contiguous and the allocation will 
start at the beginning of each module. 

The third subparameter is used in conjunction with the OPID keyword of the 
first subparameter and must be specified if OPID is used. The operator ID 
is a character string indicating a specific device related channel or module. 

Examples: 

"DM0" indicates H/T module 0, channel 

"DCHO" indicates H/T channel 

"PADO" indicates PAD spindle 0, 980-0, and TCC-0 

"PCH0" indicates 980-0, and TCC-0. 

Default : The DTYP parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the Operating 
System assumes DSEC and NOCNTG, which indicates the file will be allo- 
cated on the device specified in the system default parameter table and the 
file may be allocated without regard to contiguity. 

Restrictions : If the OPID keyword is used as the first subparameter, the 
third subparameter, Operator ID, must be specified. Otherwise the third 
subparameter must not be specified. 

Examples: 

DTYP=OPID/CNTG/DM0 

DTYP=HPT 

DTYP=/CNTG 

DTYP=OPID//DCH0 

In the first example the file will be contiguous on the head-per-track disc 
module 0. In the second example the file will not necessarily be contiguous 
on the head-per-track disc. In the third example the file will be contiguous 
and on the device specified in the system default parameter table. In the 
fourth example the file will not necessarily be contiguous on the head-per- 
track disc channel 0, 



5-16 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



5-17 SETUP IDENTIFIER (SETUP) 

The SETUP parameter allows reference to a SETUP statement through use 
of the SETUP statement label as the SETUP parameter value. This param- 
eter is an optional parameter identified by the keyword SETUP. The file 
defined by the FD statement will be allocated on the same channel as was 
selected by the SETUP statement. Any other location information, such as 
DTYP, specified on the FD statement is overridden when the SETUP param- 
eter is present. 

Format: The parameter is identified b"* the keyword SETUP and its value 
must be a valid ASC symbol that represents the SETUP statement label. 

Default : The parameter can be omitted. There is no default value for this 
parameter. When omitted the location of the file is determined by the DTYP 
parameter or by default values. 

5-18 LOG OF EVENTS (LOE) 

The log of events parameter, identified by the keyword LOE, specifies the 
access name of a file to be used as log -of -error events for the file specified. 

Format : The parameter value for the keyword LOE is a valid ASC symbol 
designating the access name of the user file that is used as a log -of -error 
events for the file specified. 

Default : The parameter is optional and if omitted, a log is not compiled and 
as a result termination of file transfer can result upon error detection. 

5-19 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The file organization parameter (FORG) is interactive with the disc file 
parameter on the ASG and FIT statements, the block length parameter, and 
the record length parameter on the FD statement. The FORG parameter is 
used only to specify the file organization for non-cataloged tape input files. 
Valid combinations are defined below. 



File Organization 


Disc File 


Block Length 


Record Length 


PS 
DS 


FULL 
FULL 


(D 
(2) 


(3) 
(4) 



5-17 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



NOTES 

1. Block length parameter is used both for transfer of the external 
file and for the file's organization. 

2. Block length parameter is used only for transfer of the external 
file. 

3. Record length parameter is used only for the file' s organization, 

4. Record length is not required. 

5-20 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The FD statement describes a file on the secondary disc, describes input of 
a file from an unlabeled tape volume, reserves a file access name, changes 
characteristics of a file and specifies buffering requirements for CP step 
use. The FD statement should not be used with the START/STOP pair in 
describing a file embedded in the job input stream. The FD statement is 
used in the following cases. It is not otherwise required. 



Type Of File 



All 



Input, non-cataloged tape 
file with no labels 



FD Statement Function 

The FD statement supplies, or 
changes from step to step, logical 
file characteristics. 

The FD statement specifies initial 
disc allocation parameters for the 
named file when the installation 
default, the catalog default or the 
File Control Block values for out- 
put files are not appropriate. 

FD supplies the physical block 
size, record length and record for> 
mat of the file on tape 

If the organization of the file on 
disc is not to be sequential, FD 
specifies the file organization de- 
sired. 



Input, non-cataloged tape 
file with standard labels. 



1. If the organization of the file on 
disc is not to be sequential, FD 
specifies the desired organization. 



5-18 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



5-21 RESERVING FILE ACCESS NAME FOR CP STEP EXECUTION 

FD may be used to reserve an access name for CP step execution. The fol- 
lowing conditions must be met to achieve this function: 

• FD specifying the access name must be used alone 

• No other File Management Input JSL statements may specify 
the same access name. 

The results of reserving an access name are: 

• No disc space is allocated for the file when FD is executed 

• No transfer of a file on an external device is made to disc 

• File is not defined until CP step execution 

• Access name is reserved until CP step opens the file referenced 
by that access name or the file is released through a JSL REL 
statement (specifying same access name) or is renamed by a 
JSL RENAME statement 

• If a CP step does not open the file, the file reserved by the ac- 
cess name is not available for processing. 

5-22 INPUT OF CATALOGED FILES 



The FD statement specifies use of cataloged files, both resident and non- 
resident, in making data available for processing by the CP step. It is ap- 
plicable for all file organizations. The type of cataloged files and the func- 
tions of the FD' statement in relation to them can be summarized in the fol- 
lowing list: 



Type Of File 

CATALOGED, 
standard labeled 
tape 



Function Of FD 

1. changes logical characteristics for CP step 
use of file 

2. changes disc allocation if value in version 
entry is not appropriate 

3. provides buffering techniques for CP step 
execution 



CATALOGED, 
unlabeled tape 



1. provides logical characteristics of file on 
secondary disc 

2. provides disc allocation for file if default 
values are unacceptable 

3. provides buffering techniques for CP step 
execution 



5-19 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Type Of File 



CATALOGED, 
disc resident 



Function Of FD 

4. provides logical characteristics for CP 
step use of file 

5. provides organization of file 

1. changes logical characteristics for CP step 
use of file 

2. provides buffering techniques for CP step 
execution 



The FD statement interacts with the JSL ASG statement in use of cataloged 
files. FD provides disc space management and interfaces with CP step 
processing of a file; ASG handles the physical transfer of the file. The 
catalog information describes the file on the secondary disc. FD describes 
nonresident, unlabeled tape files when they are transferred to the disc. 
Again, ASG handles the actual transfer. 

The position of the FD statement in the job input stream in relation to the 
ASG statement determines how FD functions (see table 5-2). 

5-23 INPUT OF NON-CATALOGED FILES - VIA FIT STATEMENT 

FD describes logical characteristics of a non-cataloged file transferred to 
disc from a non-labeled tape volume. FD also may change the character- 
istics specified in the tape label of standard-labeled tapes for CP use of 
file. It is applicable for all file organizations. FD specifies the disc space 
allocation required to contain the incoming file if default values are not ac- 
ceptable. FD changes file organization if default of sequential is not accept- 
able for processing of the file. The types of non-cataloged files and the 
functions of the FD statement in relation to them can be summarized in the 
following list. 

Functions of FD 



Type of File 

Standard-labeled 
tape file 



Unlabeled tape 
file 



1. FD specifies the amount of disc space 
needed to contain incoming file if defaults 
are not satisfactory. 

2. FD changes logical characteristics for 
CP step use of file. 

3. FD provides buffering techniques for CP 
step execution. 

1. FD specifies the amount of disc space 

needed to contain incoming file if system 
defaults are unsatisfactory. 



5-20 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Type of File Functions of FD 

2. FD provides logical characteristics and 
file organization of file on disc and for 
CP step use of file. 

3. FD provides buffering techniques for CP 
step execution. 

The FD statement interacts with the JSL FIT statement during input of non- 
cataloged files. FD provides disc space management, interfaces with CP 
step processing of a file and specifies logical characteristics and file organ- 
ization for unlabeled tape files. FIT is the peripheral utility that handles 
the physical transfer of the tape file to disc. For standard-labeled tape 
files, the characteristics of the file on disc come from the tape label. The 
relative placements of these statements in the job input stream and the func- 
tions of the FD statement under these conditions are summarized in table 
5-3. 

5-24 OUTPUT OF NON-CATALOGED FILES 

The FD statement may be used in conjunction with the JSL FOT and FOSYS 
statements to provide logical characteristics not provided by any other 
source (e.g., as a result of a file OPEN). These characteristics are placed 
in the File Descriptor Block (FDB) to be used when the file is output. The 
FD should be used with caution when a file is created with certain logical 
characteristics. Therefore, the FD statement, if used, must specify the 
same logical characteristics as already exist in the files information block. 



5-21 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Table 5-2. FD and ASG Placement in Job Input Stream 



Type of File 



Non-resident 
standard 
labeled tapes 



Position of FD 

and ASG 

Statements 



FD precedes ASG 



Function of 
FD Statement 



ASG precedes FD 



Changes disc alloca- 
tion if system de- 
fault value is un- 
acceptable and 
logical character- 
istics of the file 
for CP step use. 
Block size (BKSZ) 
parameter must agree 
with catalog entry 

for sequential files. 
File organization 
(FORG) parameter 
must agree with 
catalog entry on all 
f i 1 es . 

Catalog entry sup- 
plies logical char- 
acteristics for 
file on disc. 



Function of 
ASG Statement 



Transfers file 
to secondary 
disc. 



Same as above, ex- 
cept space alloca- 
tion cannot be 
changed from that 
in catalog entry. 



Transfers file 
to secondary 
disc. 



5-22 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Table 5-2. FD and ASG Placement in Job Input Stream (Continued) 



Type of File 


Position of FD 
and ASG 
Statements 


Function of 
FD Statement 


Function of 
ASG Statement 


Unlabeled tapes' 


FD precedes ASG 


Supplies logical 


Specifies transfer 






characteristics of 
file on disc, disc 
allocation if sys- 
tem default value 
is unacceptable 
and logical char- 
acteristics for CP 
step use of file. 


of file to disc. 


ASG cannot pre- 


Changes logical 






cede FD since 


characteristics 






FD supplies 


for CP step use 






logical char- 


of file. 






acteristics 






Resident files 


FD precedes ASG 


Changes file organ- 


Specifies disc 






ization and logical 


copy of file; 






characteristics for 


catalog entry 






CP step use of file. 


provides logical 






No disc allocation 


characteristics. 






is required. 






ASG precedes FD 


Same as above. 


Same as above. 



5-23 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Table 5-3. FD and FIT Placement in Job Input Stream 



Type of File 



Standard-labeled 
tape file 



Position of FD 
And FIT Statements 



FD precedes FIT 



FIT precedes FD 



Function Of . 
FD Statement 



Function Of 
FIT Statement 



Changes logical 
characteristics 
for CP step use 
of file. 

Changes file or- 
ganization if de- 
fault of sequen- 
tial is not accept- 
able. 

Supplies buffering 

techniques for CP 

step execution. 
Specifies disc 

space allocation 
if system default 
value is not ac- 
ceptable. 
Specifies system 

error processing 
options. 



Transfers tape file 
to secondary disc. 

Logical character- 
istics for file on 
disc are made avail- 
able from tape la- 
bel. 



Changes logical 
characteristics 
for CP step use 
of file. 

Supplies buffering 
techniques for CP 
step execution. 



Transfers tape file 
to secondary disc. 

Logical character- 
istics for file on 
disc are made avail- 
able from tape la- 
bel. 



5-24 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Table 5-3. FD and FIT Placement in Job Input Stream (Continued) 



Type of File 


Position of FD 
And FIT Statements 


Function Of 
FD Statement 


Function Of 
FIT Statement 






Changes file organ- 


Disc allocation is 






ization if default 


defaulted to system- 






of sequential is 


defined value. 






not acceptable 


File organization 








is defaulted to 
sequential . 




FD not specified; 


Not applicable. 


FORG default is 




FIT used alone 




sequential . 

Disc allocation is 
system default val- 
ue. 

Tape file trans- 








ferred to disc. 


Unlabeled tape 


FD precedes FIT 


Supplies logical 


Transfers tape file 


file 


(at least one FD 


characteristics 


to disc. 




must precede FIT) 


of file on disc 
and CP step use 
of file. 

Changes file or- 
ganization if de- 
fault of sequen- 
tial is not ac- 
ceptable. 

Supplies buffer- 
ing techniques for 








CP step execution. 





5-25 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FILE DESCRIPTION 



Table 5-3. FD and FIT Placement in Job Input Stream (Continued) 



Type of File 


Position of FD . 
And FIT Statements 


Function Of , 
FD Statement 


Function Of 
FIT Statement 






Specifies system 
error processsing 
options. 

Specifies disc 
space allocation 
if default value 
is not acceptable. 




Subsequent FD 
following FIT 


Changes logical 
characteristics 
for CP step use 
of file. 




FD not specified 
preceding FIT 


None. 


Transfer not made. 



5-26 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




START 



5-25 START STATEMENT 

The START statement initiates the input of a file within the source job speci- 
fication. The file is embedded in the job input stream. START may specify- 
any source data including a deferred job specification source file. Also, 
any input card not preceded with a slash is treated as a separate START 
file. 

Files specified by the START statement cannot be nested or overlapped. 
These files cannot be cataloged files. The files are job local; they are avail- 
able only to the current job. Their allocated disc space is released during 
job termination unless previously released through the REL statement. 

The system creates a disc file for the file specified by START that has these 
characte ristic s : 

• File organization is sequential or direct secondary. 

• If sequential: record format is fixed-length, blocked standard 
format and record length is 80 bytes (20 words). 

To reference the file in the CP program, the user opens the file using the 
access name and supplying those File Control Block values required for CP 
step use of the file. The logical characteristics of the disc file (created by 
the System) are contained in the disc file's File Information Block and may 
be merged into the File Control Block when the file is opened. 

The general form of the START statement is: 



LABEL 



1* 



1 



OPERATION 



START 



t 



OPERANDS 



[ACNM = access name] 
[, BKSZ = number] 
*SECT~ 



,< 



BAND 
WORD 
BYTE 



►= initial /maximum/ 
increment 



FORG = 



■®i] 



START must contain the verb START in the operations field. It cannot be 
labeled. The parameters in the operands field are optional keyword param- 
eters. The parameters may be coded in any convenient order. The keywords 
must be coded as shown. 

No blanks beyond the first parameter are permitted in the START statement. 
The first blank encountered after "the "first" parameter terminates processing 
of the statement. 



5-27 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




START 



5-26 ACCESS NAME (ACNM) 

The access name parameter, ACNM, specifies the local name by which the 
file is known to the job. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keyword, ACNM. Access name 
must be a valid ASC symbol. It cannot be SYS. IN. 

Default : The access name parameter is optional. If the parameter is omit- 
ted, the file is available only as input to the step defined by the step JSL 
statement immediately preceding the START statement. The System re- 
names the file SYS. IN prior to execution of the preceding JSL statement. 
The unnamed file is released after execution of that step and is no longer 
available to the remainder of the job. 

5-27 BLOCK SIZE (BKSZ) 

The block size parameter, BKSZ, specifies the maximum number of bytes in 
a block within the file on disc. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keyword, BKSZ. Its value is an 
unsigned constant. 

Limits : The value of the block size must be within the range: 1 < b < 2 -1. 
The value must be a multiple of the logical record length of 80 bytes. 

Default : If the block size parameter is not specified, the default value is 
an installation defined size. 

5-28 DISC RESERVATION (SECT, BAND, WORD OR BYTE) 

The disc reservation parameter specifies the management of disc space for 
the named file for the duration of the job. This parameter is optional. 

Format : The disc reservation parameter is identified by one of the keywords 
SECT, BAND, WORD or BYTE. The parameter contains a set of three sub- 
parameters, each separated by a slash. Each subparameter value is an un- 
signed constant. The subparameter s in the set are positional. They must 
be coded in the order: initial/maximum/increment. 

SECT specifies the subparameters in sector units. A sector is 64 words. 
BAND specifies the subparameters in band units. A band is 256 sectors. 
WORD specifies the subparameters in word units. BYTE specifies the sub- 
parameters in byte units. 

Subparameter Set : The first subparameter, initial , specifies the initial 
amount of disc space allocated to the file. 

The second subparameter, maximum , specifies the maximum amount of disc 
space that can be allocated to the file at any time during the job. The amount 



5 28 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




START 



that can be specified by this subparameter cannot exceed the space specified 
in the LIMIT statement or, by LIMIT'S default, the installation-defined value, 
The LIMIT statement identifies the job block in which the file is defined. 

The third subparameter, increment , specifies the amount of space to be 
added to the file's initial allocation whenever a write request to the file 
causes the file to use more than the initially allocated space. 

Specifications : Sixty-four sectors (1/4 band) is the minimum disc space that 
can be allocated for the file. In this case, the amount must be expressed in 
sector units, word or byte units. 

The maximum allocation is the amount specified in the LIMIT statement, or 
by LIMIT'S default, is an installation -defined value. 

Default : If the disc reservation parameter is omitted, the default value is 
the installation -defined value expressed in sector units. 

5-29 FILE ORGANIZATION (FORG) 

The file organization parameter, FORG, specifies the organization of the 
file on the secondary disc. 

Format : The parameter is identified by the keyword, FORG. The param- 
eter consists of one subparameter. The subparameter is one of two key- 
words. The keyword PS specifies the file is sequentially organized. The 
keyword DS specifies the file is direct secondary organized. 

Default : If FORG is omitted, the file is sequentially organized. 
5-30 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The file organization and block size parameters are interactive. 

If FORG = PS, block size (BKSZ) must be coded, unless the default 
installation -defined value is acceptable. If FORG is omitted, the file organ- 
ization default is sequential. BKSZ must be coded unless the default value 
is used. 

If FORG = DS, block size (BKSZ) may be used. It is treated only as an 
OPEN-merge characteristic. 

5-31 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The START statement may be used in conjunction with a STOP statement; 
however, a file initiated by a START statement may also be terminated by 
an EOJ statement or another START statement. Both statements must not 
be embedded in a JOBX/EOJX statement pair. 



5 29 

7 Advanced Scientific Computer 




START 



The START statement is also interactive with JSL step-execution statements 
in the case where an access name is not specified. Unnamed embedded files 
are associated with an immediately preceding execution statement and must 
follow that statement. Named files may appear anywhere in the job input 

stream. 

The START statement is not interactive with the FD statement. The results 
are unpredictable if an FD statement specifies the same file as the START 
statement. 

5-32 EXAMPLES 

The following examples illustrate how to use the START statement. 

1. Job Local File - No Defaults Operative 

/ JOB JOBNAMEJOE,ACCTNUMBER,USER001 

(JSL) 
/ START ACNM=FILEONE,BKSZ = 2400,BAND=l/2/l,; 
FORG=PS 

(source input data) 
/ STOP 

(JSL) 
/ EOJ 

where 

ACNM=FILEONE identifies the file by the name 

FILE ONE and specifies the file as 
job local 

BKSZ = 2400 specifies the block size of file on disc 

as 2400 bytes 

BAND=l/2/l allocates one band of initial disc space 

that may be incremented by one band 
not to exceed a maximum of two bands. 
This parameter specifies the disc 
space required by the file on disc. 

FORG=PS specifies that the disc file is sequen- 

tially organized. 

2. Job Local File - All Defaults Operative 

/ JOB JOBNAMEJOE,ACCTNUMBER, USER001 

(JSL) 
/ START ACNM=FILEONE 

(source input data) 
/ STOP 

(JSL) 
/ EOJ 



c on 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




START 



where 

ACNM=FILEONE identifies the file named FILE ONE 

and specifies the file as job local 

The default values are 

BKSZ = default value of 4000 bytes 

SECT 

BAND .„.,,..,, 

TIT .__^ = installation-defined value expressed in sector 

WORD _. t 

„,.,.___ UiiIlS 

BYTE 

FORG = file organization is sequential 

3. Unnamed Source File in Job Input Stream 

/ JOB JOBNAMEJOE,ACCTNUMBER, USER001 
/ START BKSZ = 2400,BANDl/2/l,FORG = PS 
/ STOP 

The absence of the ACNM parameter specifies the file as an 
unnamed file. Other parameter values are as specified or are 
defaulted. 

4. Job Local File - Direct Secondary Organization 

/ START ACNM=FILEONE, BAND=l/2/l, FORG=DS 
BKSZ may be omitted for direct secondary organized files. 



Advanced Scien tific Computer 




STOP 



5-33 THE STOP STATEMENT 

The STOP statement is the ending delimiter of a file contained within the 
source job specification. STOP is used only in conjunction with the START 
statement. It always appears at the end of the file. 



The general form of the STOP statement is 



LABEL 



/ 



16 



OPERATION 



T — r 
i i 



OPERANDS 



STOP 



:•! 



None 



The STOP statement must have the verb STOP in the operations field. It 
does not have any parameters in the operands field. STOP cannot be labeled. 



STOP is coded as 
/tfSTOP 



where tf = a mandatory blank that must be coded. 



5-32 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION VI 
FILE INPUT AND OUTPUT 

6-1 GENERAL 

The basic structure of the file system is independent of the machine and de- 
vices so that the user need only be aware of symbolic addresses. All physi- 
cal addressing of external devices (e.g. , tape) is performed by the Operating 
System. 

Before a file can be used within a job, the file must be specified as being 
available to the job and must be given an access name by which it will be 
known to that job. 

Cataloged files are specified as a pathname to the job and are given an access 
name with the ASG statement. A detailed discussion of cataloged files and 
catalog management is presented in Section VII. 

A file is a non-cataloged file with respect to a given job if, before the start 
of that job, the file is contained on some external medium (such as magnetic 
tape or cards) or is contained in the job specification source file; i. e. , is in 
the job input stream. 

At the end of the job, all non-cataloged files are released and are not recover 
able for subsequent jobs unless they have been cataloged or they still exist on 
an external medium. 

Since a program step can only access data on the disc, a non-cataloged file 
must be transferred to disc before initiation of the step that refers to the file. 
The file input statement (FIT) initiates the various disc input/output tasks 
that transfer the file from the external device and specifies the access name 
the file is to have on disc. 

Non-cataloged files contained in the job specification source file are given 
access names in the operands fields of the START statements that initiate 
them. A data file in the job specification source file is delimited by a 
START /STOP statement pair. Note that non-cataloged files of this nature 
are actually on the disc at the time of initiation of the job, but they are still 
from the viewpoint of the job - on the logical job input device. 

Non-cataloged file transfers between disc and peripheral devices are speci- 
fied by the file input/output Job Specification Language statements. The de- 
vices supported are: card reacler, card punch, line printer, and 7 and 9- 
track half-inch tape drives with 200, 556, 800, or 1600 bits per inch. 



6 1 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FI/FO 



The ASC Operating System supports both labeled and unlabeled files for half- 
inch tape file input/output (either 200, 556, 800, or 1600 bits per inch tapes). 

Unlabeled tape files may have either fixed, undefined or variable length rec- 
ords. The user must specify the format of the tape physical records for 
both input and output of unlabeled files. Unlabeled tapes must have a file 
mark specifying the end of the data. 

Labeled files are those that are provided by the ASC Operating System with 
standard ASC labels. The label of a labeled file is the first record of the 
file and specifies the Logical Input /Output characteristics, if any, of the file. 

On input, before data is transferred, file marks may be skipped to position 
the tape to the desired'data. When labeled tapes are used, the skipping of 
file marks produces a skip of an entire file. File mark skips with unlabeled 
tapes result in the skipping of the specified number of file marks. 

On output, files may be added or appended to existing tape files, or may be 
started on new tapes. 

Refer to the START and STOP statements for non-cataloged files included in 
the job input stream. 

The card punch output supports the punching into cards of a file of logical 
records formatted as card images. Both variable and fixed length images 
are supported but are truncated or" blank-filled (as required) to 80 bytes of 
data. 

Requests to punch a file into cards are not honored at the time of processing 
of the FOSYS statement but are recorded and are activated during the system 
output for the specific job at job termination. This aids in identification of 
output card files. 

The printer file output supports the printing of a file of logical records for- 
matted as print line images. Both variable and fixed length images are sup- 
ported, but are truncated or blank-filled (as required) to 132 data bytes. 

Requests to print a file are not honored at the time of processing of the 
FOSYS statement but are recorded and are activated during the system out- 
put for the specific job at job termination. This aids in identification of 
print files. 

6-2 CATALOGED FILE ASSIGNMENT (INPUT) 

Before a cataloged file can be accessed by a CP step, it must be made avail- 
able to the job. This process, known as catalog file assignment, is specified 
by the JSL ASG statement. Any special conditions for the transfer from an 
external device to the secondary disc are also specified through the assign- 
ment statement. 



D A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




ASG 



6-3 THE ASG STATEMENT 

The ASG statement performs these functions: 

• Specifies the file as cataloged and as input 

• Transfers a file from an external device to the secondary disc 

• Links the user to the catalog system's security system. 

The position of ASG in the job input stream determines when a file is made 
available. The only stipulation for assigning cataloged files is that the node 
containing the requested file must exist for the job when the ASG statement 
is encountered in the job input stream. Any type of cataloged file -- sequen- 
tial, or direct secondary -- can be assigned through the ASG statement. A 
file may be assigned several times during a job through multiple ASG state- 
ments. 

The general form of the ASG statement is: 



t r 

I LABEL i 
J 1 



OPERATION 



I 



OPERANDS 



I I 

/ | Symbol | 

i ' 

i « 



ASG 



# laccess name, pathname 

J [.VERS = version ][» USE = {^}] 



The verb ASG must appear in the operation field. The operation field must 
be separated from the operands field with at least one blank. The operands 
field contains both mandatory positional parameters and optional keyword 
parameters. 

6-4 ACCESS NAME 

The requested file must be identified to the job. The access name provides 
the link with the job. 

Format: The access name is a valid ASC symbol. The name is valid only 
for the duration of the job and originates when the ASG statement is encoun- 
tered. Thus, the ASG statement specifying the name must precede (in the 
job input stream) any statements that specify intended use of the file. 

Default: None. Access name must appear in the first position in the oper- 
ands field; it is mandatory and cannot be omitted. 

6-5 PATHNAME 

The pathname represents the file name in the catalog. The pathname param- 
eter is mandatory and must appear as the second parameter. The pathname 
is separated from the access name by the comma. 



6-3 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASG 



Format: The pathname is a concatenation of from one to ten edgenames, 
each separated by a slash. The first edgename may be a synonym defined by 
a PD statement. 

All edgenames constituting the pathname must exist in the catalog prior to 
using the ASG statement. The creator /owner of the catalog supplies the 
pathname. However, a synonym for the first edgename may be defined by 
the current user through the PD statement. 

Default: None. Pathname must be specified. 
6-6 VERSION (VERS) 

A cataloged file may have versions at its node. All versions of the file are 
associated with the same catalog node. The name of a version is the path- 
name of the file's node with an index which identifies the version. The user 
may specify that a particular version of a file be assigned at the job. The 
version parameter specifies which version of the file defined by the pathname 
is to be assigned. 

Format: The version parameter, identified by the keyword VERS, identifies 
the desired version. The parameter value is either a signed or unsigned 
decimal integer, or a signed or unsigned JSL variable. 

An unsigned parameter value references the absolute version number of the 
file. The absolute version number is determined modulo N, where N is the 
maximum number of versions allowed the file. A signed value references a 
version of the file relative to the flagged version. 

Limits: The absolute value of a signed integer, i, must be within the range 
0<|i|<63. 

The value of an unsigned integer cannot exceed the maximum number of ver- 
sions, N, minus one. The range is therefore, < i < N-l. 

An unsigned JSL variable refers to an absolute version. Its value has the 
same limits as an unsigned integer; < v < N-l. 

The maximum number of file versions and the absolute number of the current 
flagged version are provided by the creator/owner of the catalog. 

Default: The version parameter may be omitted. The flagged version of the 
file is assigned if no specific version is named. The flagged version is gen- 
erally the version most recently cataloged. If automatic sequencing of ver- 
sions has been deactivated, the version last numbered at deactivation is the 
constant flagged version that is assigned. 



/ 4 

D A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




ASG 



6-7 FILE USE (USE) 

When a file (or one of its versions) is assigned to a job, the user may deter- 
mine whether to share the disc file with other jobs or reserve it for exclu- 
sive use by his job. File use applies only to file sharing at the job level. It 
does not apply to step level sharing. 

Sharing a file is most likely if a file is used for read only purposes. Writing 
to a file in shared mode produces unpredictable results because users may 
be updating the file while other users are accessing the data contained in the 
file. In addition, a resident cataloged file may be unpredictably and perma- 
nently affected if used in a shared mode. In these cases, exclusive use is 
recommended. 

Format: The file use parameter, identified by the keyword USE, specifies 
whether the file is assigned in the shared or exclusive mode. The parameter 
value is either the keyword SHR or the keyword EXC. SHE. specifies shared 
use; EXC exclusive use. 

Default: The parameter may be omitted. Exclusive use, EXC value, is the 
default. 

If the user assigns the same file more than once within the same job under 
different access names and declares conflicting file uses, the Operating Sys- 
tem assumes the more restrictive EXC mode. 

6-8 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

When used in conjunction with the assignment of other cataloged files, the 
FD statement specifies disc space allocation if the value in the catalog or the 
system default value is unsatisfactory. In addition, FD may change file log- 
ical characteristics for CP step use of the file. FD may also specify buffer- 
ing techniques required during CP execution and error option processing. 

The following examples illustrate the relative positions of the FD and ASG 
statements in the job input stream when assigning various types of files: 

FD preceding ASG 

/tfFDtfANAME, BAND=4/4/0 
/tfASGtfANAME, A/B/C/D, USE=SHR 

The parameter values supply the following information: 

ASG FD 

Access name of file is ANAME. Access name of file is ANAME. 

Pathname of file is A/B/C/D. Four bands of disc space are 

File will be shared among jobs. allocated for the file on disc. 



/ r 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




ASG 



ASG preceding FD 

/#ASGtfALPHA,A/B/C,USE=SHR 
/tfFDtfALPHA, RCFM=FM, BKSZ=l600, LREC=80 



FD 

Access name of file is ALPHA. 
Changes logical characteristics 
of file for CP executing program 
use of the file. 



ASG 

Access name of file is ALPHA. 
Pathname of file is A/B/C. 
File will be shared among jobs. 

ASG Without FD 

/tfASGtfANAME, A/B/C 

Access name is ANAME. 

Pathname is A/B/C. 

Disc allocation sufficient to contain length of file last cataloged - an FD 
statement is not required. 

File is used in exclusive mode by default to EXC of omitted USE parameter. 



6-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




PD 



6-9 THE PD (PATH DEFINITION) STATEMENT 

The PD statement defines a synonym for the pathname of a catalog node that 
exists at the time the synonym is referenced. The function of the PD state- 
ment is to permit access to catalog nodes that are greater than ten edge- 
names deep. An unlimited number of levels can be accessed by defining syn- 
onyms in terms of preceding synonyms. 

A pathname that defines a synonym does not have to be valid at the time the 
PD statement is encountered. It can reference nodes that are not currently 
defined. The only exception is the first edgenarne; it must either be a cur- 
rently defined synonym name, or a catalog name which will exist at the time 
the synonym is used by another JSL. statement. However, at the time the 
synonym is used with other JSL statements, all edgenames must be valid 
nodes. 

The general form of the PD statement is: 



I 1 

I I OPERATION 
I I 



|V I PD 



j. 



T 



OPERANDS 



V> I synonym, pathname 



There cannot be a label in the label field. The verb PD must appear in the 
operation field. The operation field must be separated from the operands 
field by at least one blank. The operands field contains the synonym param- 
eter and the pathname parameter. 

6-10 SYNONYM PARAMETER 

The synonym parameter specifies the symbolic name by which the pathname 
is to be known to the remainder of the job. See paragraph 7-6. 

Format: The synonym is a valid ASC symbol. 

Source: The synonym is created by the user and originates with this state- 
ment for the remainder of the job. 

Restrictions: The synonym is valid only for the current job. 

6-11 PATHNAME PARAMETER 

The pathname parameter specifies the pathname that is to be given the syn- 
onymous name. 



6-7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




PD 



Format: The pathname consists of one to ten edgenames catenated by slashes 
(/). The first, and only the first, edgename in the pathname can be a syn- 
onym that has been defined in a preceding PD statement. Otherwise, it must 
be a catalog name. 

Source: The pathname is a valid pathname in a catalog that exists at the 
time the synonym is referenced. 

Restrictions: The edgenames of the pathname must have been created in the 
catalog by the time the synonym is used in another statement. 

If another synonym is used as the first edgename in this pathname, that syn- 
onym must have been defined in a preceding PD statement in the current job. 
The synonym must also be unique with respect to other synonym and catalog 
names referenced within the job. 

Note: Security controls on nodes referenced by the PD statement must be 
passed by the user at the time the synonym is referenced by another JSL 
statement. An intermediate node having full reference control requires the 
user to have the reference attribute at that node. The use of the terminal 
node and its control state determines any other attribute requirements. 



L Q 

° " Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



6-12 NON-CATALOGED FILE INPUT FROM TAPE 

Peripheral utilities handle the physical transfer of a file from tape to second- 
ary disc. The File In Tape utilities specify input of a non-cataloged tape file 
when the transfer request is made. There is one File In Tape utility: FIT 
reads a file from a half-inch magnetic tape and places the file on disc. 

6-13 THE FIT STATEMENT 

The File In Tape statement (FIT) initiates the utility that reads a non- 
cataloged file from half -inch magnetic tape and places the file on secondary 
disc. This statement provides through its parameters necessary information 
to input a file. The position of the statement in the job input stream indicates 
when the transfer takes place. All files input under control of the FIT state- 
ment are job local files and may be accessed by any step in the job until the 
file is released. 

The general form of the FIT statement is: 



1 

' LABEL 
J 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



Symbol 



FIT 



access name 

[EFID=tape idl[/tape id2[/. . . 
[/tape id n]]] 

[,LABL=r :- 1 

L LpositionJ 



/ 



NL 
IBLP 



[,RTRY=number] [, PRTY= {f|§}] 



,DEN= 



1600 
800 

556 

' ET 
E 
,RCTL=( O 
T 
C 
[, LOC=dest code] 



[.TRKS={i}] 



6-9 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



The verb FIT must appear in the operation field. 

The operands field contains both positional and keyword parameters. The 
positional parameters are mandatory and must be coded in the first and sec- 
ond positions. The keyword parameters are optional.' They may be coded 
in any convenient order. The FIT statement may be labeled jif communica- 
tion with JSL control statements is desired. 

6-14 ACCESS NAME 

The file being transferred to disc must be named so that it is accessible to 
the job. JSL statements and the CP step reference the file through the spec- 
ified access name. 

Format: The access name is mandatory and must appear first in the oper- 
ands field. Access name must be a valid ASC symbol. It is assigned to the 
file by the user. The file retains the access name until the file is renamed 
through the RENAME statement or released from the job. 

Default: None. Access name must be supplied. 

Example: The following example illustrates a named file: 

/tfFITtfT APE FILE initiate the transfer of the tape file named 

TAPEFILE. 

The FIT statement may be labeled: 

/ALPHAtfFIT#TAPEFILE 

6-15 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The external file identifiers must be specified so that the system knows the 
location of the specified file. The external file identification (EFID) param- 
eter supplies the identifiers. This parameter is identified by the keyword 
EFID. 

The identifiers of all tapes containing the file must be declared. They must 
be listed in the sequence that the files are to be read. 

External tape identification labels are assigned to reels by the installation 
at the time the tapes are submitted or when they are generated. The sys- 
tem informs the user of the external file labels at that time. 

Format: The tape identifiers are separated by slashes (/). Each tape iden- 
tifier is a string of from one to six characters. If the identifier is enclosed 
in quotation marks, blanks in the string are retained. If the string is not 
enclosed, embedded blanks are eliminated. 

Restriction: When the FIT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specifications in the MFR statement that be- 
gins the group. 



° A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




FIT 



Default : At least one tape identifier must be specified. There is no default 
for the parameter. 

Example s : The following illustrations show the use of the EFID parameter: 

JSL Meaning 

/tfFITtfTAPEFILE, EFID = 2340 initiate the transfer of the file 

named TAPEFILE. The file re- 
sides on tape volume 2340. 

/16FIT16TAPEFIL1,EFID=13/14/17 initiate the transfer of the file 

named TAPEFIL1. The file re- 
sides on three tape volumes identi- 
fied by the numbers 13, 14 and 17. 
The files will be input in the order 
shown, 

6-16 LABEL (LABL) 

The label parameter, identified by the keyword LABL, has two functions. It 
describes the type of label on the tape volume and specifies the position of 
the file to be read. 

Format : The parameter consists of two subparameters separated by a slash 
(/). The subparameters are positional within the label parameter. The first 
subparameter specifies the desired initial position of the tape file. The label 
type subparameter describes the type of label on the tape. 

The value for the position subparameter is an unsigned constant. Its range 
is 1 < n < 65, 535. The default value is n = 1; the first file on the tape volume 
will be read initially. Other files on the volume are then input sequentially. 

The value for the label type subparameter is one of two keywords: SL speci- 
fies the tape volume has standard labels; NL specifies that the tape volume 
is unlabeled. The default value is standard label (SL). 

The following list illustrates the interaction between the subparameters. 

Position Label Type Meaning 

n SL n=file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks skipped during posi- 
tioning is a function of the standard label's 
format. 

n NL n=file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks skipped during position- 
ing is n-1 . 



6-11 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



If SL is specified explicitly or by default, the System requests that the cor- 
rect tape volume be supplied. If a tape volume cannot be verified as standard 
labeled, the operator must cancel the request. If NL is specified and the 
tape volume cannot be verified as non-labeled, the operator must cancel the 
request. 

Restrictions: If SL is specified explicitly or by default or, if an EFID is 
specified, the Operating System requests that the correct tape volume be sup- 
plied. If a tape volume cannot be verified as standard labeled, the operator 
must cancel the request. 

If NL is specified and the tape cannot be verified as non-labeled, the opera- 
tor must cancel the request. 

When the FIT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this parameter (in- 
cluding all three subparameters) overrides the specifications in the MFR 
statement that begins the group. 

Default: The entire label parameter may be omitted. If so, the defaults are 
n=l and SL. The tape volume will be positioned so that the first file on the 
table will be input; other files follow sequentially. The tape volume has 
standard labels. 

Either one or both subparameters may be omitted. The defaults are n=l and 
SL. When omitting the first subparameter, the slash must be coded in front 
of the second subparameter. When omitting the second subparameter, the 
slash is not necessary. 

6-17 RETRY (RTRY) 

The retry parameter, identified by the keyword RTRY, specifies the number 
of times the System attempts to read a record from tape if a parity error has 
occurred. If the number of retries is exceeded, the System takes .corrective 
action specified by the parity error option parameter. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned constant representing the num- 

ber of read retries to be attempted. This value is limited to the range: 

< r < 15. 

Default: If the parameter is omitted, the System tries five times to read the 

record. 

6-18 PARITY ERROR OPTION (PRTY) 

The parity error option parameter, identified by PRTY, specifies whether 
the input operation continues if the permissible number of read retries is 
exceeded. 



6-12 ^ dvanced Scien tific Computer 




FIT 



Format; The parameter value is one of the keyword: ABE or ACC. The 
keyword, ABE, means that the input operation is aborted if a permanent 
parity error occurs. The keyword ACC specifies that the input operation 
continues if the error occurs. 

Default: If the parameter is omitted, the default value is ABE; the input op- 
eration aborts. 

6-19 TAPE DENSITY (DEN) 

The tape density parameter, identified by the keyword DEN. specifies the 
recording density in bits -per-track for the volumes identified by the EFID 
parameter. 

Format : The parameter value is one of the keynumbers 1600, 800, 556 or 
200. The key 1600 specifies a tape density of 1600 bpi. The key 800 speci- 
fies a tape density of 800 bpi. The densities 200 and 556 are reserved ex- 
clusively for 7-track tapes. 

Restrictions : When the FIT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specification of parameters in the MFR 
statement that begins the group. 

Default : The tape density parameter may be omitted. The default is 1600. 
If the tape density is other than specified or defaulted, the system aborts 
the input operation. 

6-20 TAPE RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) 

The tape recording track parameter, identified by the keyword TRKS, speci- 
fies if the given tape is a 7-track or a 9 -track tape. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keynumbers 9 or 7 to designate 
either the 9 -track or the 7-track tape respectively. 

Default: The tape recording track parameter can be omitted. The default is 
to 9 -track tape. If the tape recording track parameter specification or de- 
fault is different than the actual tape configuration the system aborts the in- 
put operation. 

6-21 RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) 

The recording control parameter allows for the specification of a parity, 
translation and data conversion mode. This parameter is applicable only if 
seven-track tape is being processed. It is identified by the keyword RCTL 
and the keyword values are: 

O - odd parity without translation or conversion 

E - even parity without translation or conversion 



6 13 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



T - odd parity with translation but no conversion 
C - odd parity with conversion but no translation 
ET - even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Default: If the RCTL parameter is omitted, and seven-track tape is desig- 
nated, the default is ET or even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Data Translation: Data translation refers to the ability to transform data 
recorded in BCD interchange to EBCDIC and vice versa. Since each BCD 
code is a six-bit value, upon input the six bits are translated into the cor- 
responding eight-bit EBCDIC value. For output operations the eight-bit 
EBCDIC value is translated into its six-bit BCD representation. 

Data Conversion: The data conversion option makes it possible to write 
eight-bit binary data on seven-track tape. For output operations, every 
three bytes of data are written as four tape characters. Figure 6-1 illus- 
trates this data conversion. 

6-22 LOCATION (LOC) 

The location parameter, identified by the keyword LOC, specifies the site at 
which the tape file is to be input. 

Format : The location parameter is identified by the keyword LOC and is a 
string of from one to eight alphanumeric characters. The location identifiers 
are assigned the various terminal installations by the central site. 

Restriction : When the FIT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specification in the MFR statement that be- 
gins the group. 

Default: If a location is not specified, the default value is the identifier of 
the central site. 

6-23 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The LABL and EFID parameters are interactive. The LABL parameter de- 
scribes the first tape volume of those specified by EFID. All EFID's must 



DATA BYTE 1 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 



DATA BYTE 2 
1 234 56710 



DATA BYTE 3 
12 3 4 5 6 7 



B A 8 4 2 1 
TAPE CHAR 1 



B A 8 4 2 1 
TAPE CHAR 2 



B A 8 4 2 1 
TAPE CHAR 3 



B A 8 4 2 
TAPE CHAR 4 



1 



Figure 6-1. Data Conversion 



6-14 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



be specified; however, the LABL parameter may be defaulted. The LABL 
parameter may not be specified without an EFID parameter. 

The RTRY and PRTY parameters are interactive. A parity error is perma- 
nent when all retry attempts specified by RTRY fail. The System takes the 
corrective action specified by the parity error option (PRTY) parameter when 
the error becomes permanent. 

To illustrate how to use these parameters, examples follow: 

/tfFITtfTAPEFILE, EFID = 2340, RTRY=2, PRTY=ABE 

Transfer of file named TAPEFILE is initiated. The file resides on tape vol- 
ume 2340 (EFID = 2340). If a parity error occurs, the System attempts to 
read the record two times (RTRY=2). If the record cannot be read in two at- 
tempts, the input operation (PRTY=ABE) aborts. 

/tfFITtfTAPEFILE, EFID=2340, PRTY=ACC 

Transfer of file named TAPEFILE is initiated. The file resides on tape vol- 
ume 2340 (EFID = 2340). If a parity error occurs, the System attempts to 
read the record five times (default is five attempts). If the record cannot be 
read in five attempts, the input operation (PRTY=ACC) is continued. 

6-24 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The FIT statement may interact with the MFR statement when a multi-file 
request encloses FIT statements. If an MFR statement encloses FIT state- 
ments, the parameters specified on or defaulted by the MFR statement over- 
ride any parameter specifications on the enclosed FIT statements with the 
exception of the LABL parameter. See MFR, MFRE discussion in topic 8-11. 

The FIT statement must be used to input a requested file. The statement's 
parameters explicitly describe the tape volume containing the requested file. 
It also specifies any special transfer conditions desired by the user. The 
statement indirectly specifies the organization of the file contained on the 
volume through a system default to sequential, if the volume has standard 
labels . However, the FIT statement does not describe the file's logical 
characteristics when it has been transferred and is resident on the disc. 
This information is supplied by the volume's label or by an FD statement. 
In addition, the FIT statement does not supply information for unlabeled vol- 
umes. For unlabeled volumes, the FD statement must be used in conjunction 
with the FIT statement and always precedes it. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



The following conditions determine when an FD statement must accompany 
the FIT statement. 



Standard -labeled tapes 



Unlabeled tapes 



FD statement not required. The file's or- 
ganization is sequential by system default. 
If the user wishes to change any of the 
file's logical characteristics or its or- 
ganization for CP step use of the file, 
then the FD statement is used to make 
changes in logical characteristics and file 
organization. The FD statement may pre- 
cede or follow the FIT statement in the job 
input stream. 

FD statement is required to specify the 
logical characteristics of the file. The 
FD statement must precede the FIT state- 
ment. The transfer is terminated if the 
FD is not used in this fashion. The file 
organization must also be specified. 

The FD statement may also be used to 
specify changes in the file's logical char- 
acteristics or its organization for CP step 
use of the file. Then, the FD statement 
may precede or follow the FIT statement. 



6-25 EXAMPLES 



The following examples illustrate various coding techniques for the FIT 
statement: 

1. File Residing on One Tape Volume. 

/ FIT TAPEFILE, EFID = 2340, LABL=2/SL, DEN=l600 

TAPEFILE 



EFID = 2340 

LABL=2/SL 

DEN=1600 
Default Values 
RTRY 
PRTY 



The file named TAPEFILE is to be trans- 
ferred to disc. 

TAPEFILE resides on one tape volume 
identified as 2340. 

The tape volume has standard labels. It 
is positioned to the second file on the tape. 

The tape volume density is 1600 bpi. 



default is five attempts to read a record 

system aborts the transfer when five at- 
tempts to read a record have failed. 



6-16 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



TRKS default is nine-track tape 

RCTL does not apply to nine-track tape 

2. File Residing on Multiple Volumes. 

/ FIT TAPEFILE=2340/3546, LABEL=2/NL, DEN=800, ; 
TRKS=7,RCTL=0 



TAPEFILE 
EFID=2340/2435 



LABL=2/NL 

DEN=800 

TRKS=7 
RCTL=0 



The file named TAPEFILE is to be trans- 
ferred to disc. 

TAPEFILE Tfsid^fi nn two tanp vnlnmeo 

identified as 2340 and 2435. The files on 
tape volume 2340 are read first; those on 
2435 next. 

The tape volume has no labels. It is posi- 
tioned to the second file on the volume. 

Both tape volumes have densities of 800 
bpi. 

Both tape volumes are 7-track 

Both tape volumes have odd parity without 
translation or conversion 



The defaults RTRY and PRTY are the same as the first 
example. 

3. All Defaults Operative. 

/ FIT TAPEFILE, EFID=2340 



TAPEFILE 



EFID=2340 



Default Values 
LABL 

DEN 
RETRY 



The file name TAPEFILE is to be trans- 
ferred. Access name, TAPEFILE, must 
be specified. 

TAPEFILE resides on the tape volume 
identified as 2340. All identifiers for the 
volumes containing the file to be trans- 
ferred must be declared. 



The tape volume, 2340, has standard 
labels, The tape volume is positioned to 
the first file on the volume. 

The tape volume density is 1600 bpi. 

The system tries to read a record five 
times. 



6-17 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



PRTY 



The system aborts the input operation 
when five attempts to read a record have 
failed. 



TRKS The volume is a nine-track tape. 

RCTL Not applicable for nine-track tape. 

4. Fit and FD Statement - Standard Labeled Tapes 

/ FD ANAME, SECT=64/0/64, BKSZ=1024 

/ FIT ANAME, EFID= 1234, LABL=3,DENS=800 



File name 



Disc Reservation 



Volume 
Position 

Label Type 



Density 
Tracks 

Format 



Block size 



For both FD and FIT, the access name is 
ANAME. 

Both the FD and FIT statements specify 
an input file. The FD statement specifies 
64 sectors to be used for this file on the 
secondary disc. If this proves to be in- 
sufficient, the input transfer is aborted. 

For FIT, EFID parameter = 1234 

FIT LABL first subparameter=3; there- 
fore position tape to beginning of third 
file on volume 1234. 

FIT LABL second subparameter is not 
coded; therefore, the default value, 
LABL=SL, is used to indicate standard 
labels. This means that the file charac- 
teristics are taken from the tape volume 
file label and not the FD statement. 

FIT; DENS=800, 800 bpi. 

Since TRKS and RCTL are not supplied, 
the default is to nine-track tape and RCTL 
is not applicable. 

FD RCFM is not coded. The file label in- 
formation from the tape file is used. If 
this parameter is specified on the FD 
statement, it is ignored. 

FD BKSZ=1024 (bytes). The file label in- 
formation from the tape file is used. The 
value specified on the FD statement is not 
used since the volume is SL. 



6-18 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




Organization 



Parity 



FIT 



FD FORG is not coded; therefore, the de- 

r n i /r„„ _• *- ..a;iu.. „^1..\ ~£ 

lciujLt vdiuc ^xur liipau ui.±JLiuy wnxy ; vjj. 

FORG=PS is used. This organization ap- 
plies only to the secondary disc file 
created (the tape file is always considered 
as sequential) and results in adding DDWs 
to each block on disc. 

Since FIT PRTY and RTRY parameters are 
not coded, the default values are used. 
Before a naritv error is considered Derma- 
nent, five retries are made (RTRY=5). If 
a permanent parity error occurs, the input 
request is aborted (PRTY=ABE). 



5. FIT and FD Statements - Unlabeled Tapes 

/FD BNAME, BAND=1 /l /0, FORG=DS, BKSZ= 16384, RCMF=F 
/FIT BNAME, EFID=5678, LABL= 1 /NL, PRTY=ACC, DEN=l600 



File name 



Disc reservation 



Volume 
Position 



Label Type 



Density 



Both FD and FIT access names are 
BNAME. 

Since the file is an input file, the FD 
statement has specified that one band be 
used to contain the partial file on the sec- 
ondary disc. If this proves to be insuf- 
ficient for any set of triplets, the request 
is terminated. The FD statement must 
precede the FIT statement. 

FIT EFID = 5678 

FIT LABL first subparameter=l and sec- 
ond subparameter is NL; therefore, the 
tape volume is positioned to the first data 
block on the tape volume (i. e. , no tape 
marks are skipped). 

FIT LABL second parameter has - 
LABL=/NL. This specifies that the vol- 
ume has no labels. Since the file charac- 
teristics (organization, format, block size, 
record length) are not defined by the tape 
volume, they must be explicitly defined on 
the FD statement. 

FIT, DENS=1600 bpi. 



6-19 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FIT 



Tracks Since TRKS and RCTL are not specified, 

the default is nine-track tape and RCTL is 
not applicable. 

Format FD RCFM=F specifies that the record 

format is fixed. This parameter is used 
by the input utility to indicate that the 
block length is fixed on the tape volume. 

Block size FD BKSZ= 16384 bytes specifies that the 

block length is 4096 words. This is used 
by the input utility to limit the tape block 
size to a maximum of 4096 words. 

Organization FD FORG=DS specifies the file organiza- 

tion is direct secondary. This is used by 
the input utility to transfer the sequential 
blocks on tape to the secondary disc file 
without adding DDWs. The block length 
must be a multiple of the disc sector for 
this format. 

Parity FIT PRTY=ACC specifies that a perma- 

nent parity error or a triplet truncated at 
an end-of-file (EOF) should be accepted. 
The RTRY parameter is not coded; there- 
fore, the default value, RTRY=5, is used 
to determine the number of retry attempts 
before a parity error is classed as a per- 
manent parity error. 



D A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




FOT 



6-26 NON- CATALOGED FILE OUTPUT 

Peripheral utilities handle the physical transfer of a file from secondary disc 
to magnetic tape. The File Out Tape utilities specify output of a noncataloged 
tape file when the request is made via JSL. There is one File Out Tape util- 
ity: FOT writes a specified disc file to a half -inch magnetic tape volume. 

6-27 THE FOT STATEMENT 

The JSL File Out Tape (FOT) statement initiates the utility that writes a non- 
cataloged disc file to half-inch magnetic tape volumes. This statement pro- 
vides, through its parameters, information necessary to achieve the trans- 
fer. The position of the statement in the job input stream indicates when the 
transfer takes place. All files output by FOT statements are job local and 
may be accessed by any step in the job until the file is released. 

The general form of the FOT statement is: 



LABEL 



Symbol 



I OPERATION 



tf 



FOT 



OPERANDS 



access name 



", EFID=tape idl [/tape id2 [/. . .] ] ] 

[."-QsaUt'lHI 

DM]] 

APND 

", SVC=scratch volume count J 

" N "I 

,OPT=(— ) J 

[,RETP=retention] [, RTRY= (^^ 

, PRT Y=^HJJ [, LOC=location id J 
,DEST=destination code] 



9 



,DEN= - 



, RCTL= — 




TRKS 



=i?H 



6-21 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOT 



The verb FOT must appear in the operation field. The operation and oper- 
ands fields must be separated with at least one blank. The FOT statement 
may be labeled if communication with JSL program flow statements and/or 
the macro language is desired. If the statement is labeled, a blank must 
separate the label from the verb. No blank between the slash and the label 
is allowed. 

The parameters in the operands field are both positional and keyword param- 
eters. The positional parameter is mandatory and must be coded in the order 
shown. The keyword parameters are optional and may be coded in any con- 
venient order. 

6-28 ACCESS NAME ' 

The file must be named to be accessible to the job. The access name param- 
eter specifies the name by which the file is known to the job. The name must 
have been defined within the current job. 

Format: The parameter value must be a valid ASC symbol. The parameter 
is positional and must be the first parameter. 

Default: None. Access name must be specified. 

6-29 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The external file identification parameter specifies the identification numbers 
of the tape volumes that are to contain the file. 

Format: The keyword EFID designates the external file identification param- 
eter. The value of the parameter is a character string or a series of charac- 
ter strings separated by slashes. 

Each central site identification number is a character string of one to six 
characters. If the string is enclosed in apostrophes, blanks in the string 
will be retained; if the string is not enclosed in apostrophes, any blanks 
embedded in the string will be eliminated. 

External labels are affixed to the tape volumes to provide visual identification 
of the volume and its contents. Normal tape volume control requires two 
types of external tape labels. One is a permanent label that identifies the 
volume; the other is a temporary label that identifies the contents. 

The permanent label is affixed when the tape is first received. It should con- 
tain the sequential volume serial number assigned to it. The volume serial 
numbers are used to identify the tape volume by a unique number and to file 
the tapes in the tape rack. 

The contents label is used to identify the current contents of a particular vol- 
ume. This temporary label is applied when data is written on the volume and 
contains identifying information to ensure that the contents of the volume can 



/ 22 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




FOT 



be easily distinguishable. The information entered in the label is usually- 
furnished partly by the programmer and partly by the operator. 

Restriction : When the FOT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specifications in the MFR statement that be- 
gins the group. 

Default : Should no EFID be given, the file is written to a scratch volume. 
The user is informed of the external volume identifier in his job output if the 
tape file was successfully written. 

6-30 LABEL (LABL) 

The label parameter, identified by the keyword LABL, describes three char- 
acteristics of the tape volume that will contain the file. The parameter de- 
scribes the type of label the volume will have, the position of the file to be 
written on the tape volume, and the placement of the new file on the volume. 

Format : The label parameter is comprised of three subparameters. All 
three subparameters are positional and are separated by slashes. 

Examples 

LABL=2/SL 
LABL=2/SL/APND 
LAB L= 2 //ADD 
LABL=/NL 
LABL=2 

The first subparameter specifies the desired position of the file on the tape 
volume. The value of the position subparameter is limited to the range: 
1 < n < 255. 

The second subparameter specifies the label type of the tape volume. The 
keyword SL specifies the tape volume has standard labels. The keyword NL 
specifies the tape volume has no labels. 

The third subparameter specifies whether the output file is to be placed on a 
new tape, added to an existing tape, or appended to an existing file on tape. 

The keyword NEW specifies that a scratch tape is to be made available to re- 
ceive the output file. The keyword ADD specifies that the output file is to be 
written on an existing tape as an additional file. The keyword APND specifies 
that the file is to be written on an existing file on tape as an appendage to the 
existing file (by erasing the current file mark terminating the existing file). 
Since there is no means of preventing files of inconsistent formats from being 
appended, the user must exert caution with the APND option. A mismatch of 
density, block size or record format will cause transfer to be aborted. 

This position subparameter is interactive with the label type subparameter of 
the LABL parameter. 



" " 2 3 4 dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




FOT 



Label Type Position Interpretation 

SL n n=fiie sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is a function of the standard 
label format. 

NL n n=file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is n-1. 

Restrictions: If SL is specified explicitly or by default or, if an EFID is 
specified, the System requests that the correct tape volume be supplied. If 
a tape volume cannot be verified as standard labeled, the operator must can- 
cel the request. 

If NL is specified and the tape cannot be verified as non-labeled, the oper- 
ator must cancel the request. 

When the FOT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this parameter 
(including all three subparmeters) is overridden by the specifications in the 
MFR statement that begins the group. 

CAUTION 

If APND is specified, the System will not cross 
volumes to do the appends; the file to be appended 
must be on the first volume specified by the first 
EFID. 

Default: If position is not specified, the default is 1. If label type is not 
specified, the default is SL. If placement is not specified, the default is 
NEW. NEW specifies that the file is placed on a system scratch volume. If 
an EFID parameter has been specified, the user cannot default to NEW; he 
must specify ADD or APND. 

6-31 SCRATCH VOLUME COUNT (SVC) 

The scratch volume count parameter specifies a maximum number of system 
scratch tape volumes that are to contain files or parts of files. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the tag, SVC. The parameter value 
is an unsigned constant of from one to six digits. 

System scratch volumes are provided by the system. The volume identifiers 
have been assigned by the system and registered in the Tape Volume Catalog 
as scratch volumes. 

The parameter specifies the maximum number of scratch volumes required. 
It can be used with EFID parameter if both scratch volumes and user-specified 



° A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




FOT 



volumes will be used to contain the files. It can also be used with the LABL 
parameter if non-labeled scratch volumes are desired. 

ivestrxciiuxis; vv ucxi illc .r v-/ i Bidiclnclli, u»~v-u.xo xn an j.vxi; j.v/ -lvj-jl: j.vjjj giuup, uiio 

parameter is overridden by the specification of parameters in the MFR 
statement that begins the group. 

Default: If the scratch volume count parameter is omitted, the default value 
of twelve scratch volumes is assumed. 

6-32 OPTION (OPT) 

The option parameter specifies the disposition of the file upon successful 
output of the file. 

Format: The option parameter is identified by the keyword OPT. The 
parameter value is one of the alphabetic characters N or R enclosed in pa- 
rentheses. 

The option code N specifies that the file is not to be released at this time. 
The option code R specifies that the file is to be released at this time. For 
the job to use the same access name again, new disc space must be allocated 
through the normal system open process. 

Default: If no option parameter is specified, the default is option code N. 

6-33 RETENTION PERIOD (RETP) 

The retention period parameter specifies the number of days that the output 
file will be retained. 

Format: The retention period parameter is identified by the keyword RETP. 
Retention period is an unsigned constant. 

Retention period is converted to an expiration date and is recorded in the 
Tape Volume Catalog for both SL and NL tape volumes. It is not recorded 
on the tape for NL volumes. The value indicates the number of days the file 
is to be retained. 

Restriction: When the FOT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specification in the MFR statement that be- 
gins the group. 

Default: If the retention period parameter is not specified, the default value 
is the installation default retention period. 

6-34 RETRY (RTRY) 

The retry parameter specifies the number of times the system is to attempt 
to write a block to the tape if a parity error occurs. If any write fails due to 



6-25 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOT 



a parity error, and the number of retries is not exceeded, several inches of 
tape are erased and the write operation is retried following the erased por- 
tion of tape. Thus, a RTRY=10 may try to write the block at ten different 
locations on the tape. For each different parity error, block of the file, up to 
ten locations are tried, if necessary. When the specified number of retries 
is exceeded, corrective action is taken, as stated in the PRTY parameter. 

Format: The retry parameter is identified by the keyword RTRY. The 
parameter is an unsigned constant. The value of the retry parameter is 
limited to the range: < r < 15. 

Default: If no retry parameter is specified, the system will make five at- 
tempts to write the record. 

6-35 PARITY ERROR OPTION (PRTY) 

The parity error option parameter indicates the action to be taken if the num- 
ber of permissible retry attempts is exceeded on output to tape. 

Format: The parity error option parameter is identified by the keyword 
PRTY. The parameter is one of two keywords ABE or ACC. The keyword 
ABE specifies that the output process should be aborted for a permanent 
parity error. The keyword ACC specifies that the output process should be 
continued for a permanent parity error. Any other permanent error will 
cause an abort of the output process. 

Default: If no error option is specified, the system will use the ABE option. 

NOTE 

The retry and parity error option parameters 
are interactive. When a parity error occurs, 
it is retried the number of times given. When 
all retry attempts fail, the action specified by 
the error option is taken. 

6-36 LOCATION (LOC) 

The location parameter specifies the site at which the tape file is to be out- 
put. 

Format: The location parameter is identified by the keyword LOC. The 
parameter is a string of from one to eight alphanumeric characters. 

The location identifiers are assigned the various terminal installations by 
the central site. 

Restriction: When the FOT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specification in the MFR statement that be- 
gins the group. 



6 26 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOT 



Default: If no location is specified, the default value is the identifier for 
the central site. 

6-37 DESTINATION (DEST) 

The destination parameter is transmitted to the external tape label for use in 
routing the tape after the tape has been output. 

Format: The destination parameter is identified by the keyword DEST. The 
parameter is a string of two alphabetic characters. The destination param- 

i~k4-o-K to ooGTrYvio^ Kir 4- Vi o /^anf-vo 1 onf o 
CuCi xo d 3 3 x c; ±±\^,\-l uy uuc v.>V/iii.i ax o a. u \_- • 

Restriction: When the FOT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specification in the MFR statement that be- 
gins the group. 

Default: If the destination parameter is omitted, the default is the central 
site. 

6-38 TAPE DENSITY (DEN) 

The tape density parameter specifies the recording density in bits-per-inch- 
per-track for the tape volumes shown in the EFID parameter or the scratch 
volumes specified or defaulted by the SVC parameter. 

Format: The tape density parameter is preceded by the keyword DEN. The 
density parameter allowed is either 1600, 800, 556, or 200 {bpi). 

The key 1600 specifie-s the tape density is 1600 bpi, the key 800 specifies the 
tape density is 800 bpi, etc. 

Restrictions: When the FOT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, this 
parameter is overridden by the specification of parameters in the MFR 
statement that begins the group. 

Default: If no tape density parameter is coded, the parameter value is set 
to 1600 for 9-track tape or 800 for 7-track tape. 

6-39 RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) 

The tape recording track parameter, identified by the keyword TRKS, speci- 
fies if the given tape is a seven-track or a nine-track tape. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the key numbers 9 or 7 to designate 
either the nine-track or the seven-track tape respectively. 

Default: The tape recording track parameter can be omitted. The default is 
to nine-track tape. If the tape recording track parameter specification or 
default is different than the actual tape r configuration the system, aborts the 
input operation. 



l 27 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOT 



6-40 RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) 

The recording control parameter allows for the specification of a parity, 
translation and data conversion mode. This parameter is applicable only if 
seven-track tape is being processed. It is identified by the keyword RCTL 
and the keyword values are: 

O - odd parity without translation or conversion 

E - even parity without translation or conversion 

T - odd parity with translation but no conversion 

C - odd parity with conversion but no translation 

ET - even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Default: If the RCTL parameter is omitted, and seven-track tape is desig- 
nated, the default is ET or even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Data Translation: Data translation refers to the ability to transform data 
recorded in BCD interchange to EBCDIC and vice versa. Since each BCD 
code is a six-bit value, upon input the six bits are translated into the cor- 
responding eight-bit EBCDIC value. For output operations the eight-bit 
EBCDIC value is translated into its six-bit BCD representation. 

Data Conversion: The data conversion option makes it possible to write 
eight-bit binary data on seven-track tape. For output operations, every 
three bytes of data are written as four tape characters. Figure 6-1 illus- 
trates this data conversion. 

6-41 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The EFID, LABL, DEN and SVC parameters may be interactive, depending 
on the type of tape volumes desired. The parameters may be used in various 
combinations to achieve a specific request. 

Specifying Private Volumes Only: To output files on private volumes only, 
the user should specify three parameters. 

^^^^k^M-i) ' 1£Sd) NEW is not allowed. 

EFID must be specified 

DEN is optional 

The SVC parameter cannot be used 



° Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOT 



Specifying Scratch Volumes Only . In specifying system scratch volumes, 
the user may specify the following combination. 

LABL = { ?— } / j |^ | / NEW 

I position J I NL J 

DEN is optional. 

SVC is optional. It may be used if a maximum number of scratch vol- 
umes is required. 

The EFID parameter cannot be used. 

In the above case, all parameters may be omitted. The default values pro- 
vide the proper conditions. 

Specifying Both Scratch and Private Volumes . In specifying both system 
scratch and private volumes, all three parameters should be used. 



LABL = « 



1 



position . 



/ 



SL1 f ADD 

. nlJ 



APND 



NEW is not permitted; it speci- 
fies Scratch volumes only. 



EFID must be specified. 

SVC is optional. If a maximum number of scratch volumes is desired, 
the parameter should be used. 

DEN is optional. 

The RTRY and PRTY parameters are interactive. A parity error is perma- 
nent when all retry attempts specified by RTRY fail. The System takes the 
corrective action specified by the parity error option (PRTY) parameter when 
the error becomes permanent. 

6-42 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The FOT statement may interact with the MFR statement when a multi-file 
request encloses FOT statements. If an MFR statement encloses FOT state- 
ments, the parameters specified on or defaulted by the MFR statement over- 
ride any parameter specifications on the enclosed FOT statement. 

The following parameters are affected by MFR parameter specifications or 
defaults: 

EFID 

LABL 

DEN 

TRKS 

RCTL 

SVC 

RETP 

LOC 

DEST 



" " " Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOT 



The FOT statement may also interact with the FD statement. If the user 
knows that logical characteristics are not supplied by any other source, he 
should precede the FOT statement with an FD statement describing the file's 
characteristics. If these characteristics already exist as a result of the 
file's creation, the user may use an FD statement, but must specify the same 
logical characteristics as already exist for the file being output by the FOT 
statement. 

6-43 EXAMPLES. The following examples illustrate some of the FOT state- 
ment's parameters: 

1. Output a file to a nine -track half- inch magnetic tape device -- 
all defaults operative. 

/ FOT FILEOUT 

Parameter Interpretation 

FILEOUT FILEOUT is the access name 

given to the file being output. 
This name links the file to the 
job. 

Default Values 

RETP is defaulted to an installation-defined value. The 
file will be retained for that period of time. 

2. St>ecifv a Retention Period. 

/ FOT FILETAPE, RETP=10 

Parameter Interpretation 

FILETAPE Access name identifies the 

file to the job. 

RETP The file on tape will be re- 

tained for ten days. 



° " ■* ° A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




FOSYS 



6-44 THE FOSYS STATEMENT 

The File Output to SYSt em (FOSYS) statement specifies that the file associ- 
ated with the specified access name is an output file to be printed or punched. 
The position of the statement in the job input stream determines the position 
of the output file in the system print or punch output file chain. 

Output for print and punch files is a two-step action. The first step places a 
file on an output list of print or punch files; this action is called spooling . It 
occurs when the FOSYS statement is encountered in the job input stream. 



rviiex" unc jlxxc ilcxo uggj.± isjjuuxcu, 






file's contents. The second step performs the actual physical transfer of 
spooled files to specified printers and punches. This action takes place dur- 
ing job termination processing. 

Logical characteristics of the file on disc are defined by the File Information 
Block, not the FOSYS statement. Any valid record format can be used with 
sequential file organization (FORG=PS). Only F, FB, or FBS can be used 
with direct secondary file organization (FORG=DS), and record length for 
DS organization must be a multiple of four bytes. Block size and record 
length values are used in deblocking logical records. Each logical record 
contains a) a print line image for print files, plus a control character if 
specified by the record format; or b) one card image for punch files. 

The general form of the FOSYS statement is: 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



Symbol 



y> 



FOSYS 



I access name | , TYPE= • 
I 



[■ 



PRINT 
PUNCH 



}] 



[, EXID=external file ID. 
J [, LOOlocation ID] 

[,FORM= [special forms ID] [/[car- 
riage control tape IDJ J J 
' [, PRTS=line spacing] [, COPIES=aa] 
1 [,OPT = (R)] 



The verb FOSYS must appear in the operation field. The operation and op- 
erands fields must be separated with at least one blank. The FOSYS state- 
ment may be labeled if communication with JSL program flow statements 
and/or the macro language is desired. If the statement is labeled, the label 
must be separated from the operation field with at least one blank. 

The parameters in the operands field are both positional and keyword param- 
eters. They refer to either print or punch files, or both. The parameters 
may be used to designate print files, punch files or both types. 



6-31 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOSYS 



6-45 ACCESS NAME 

The file must be named before it is accessible to the job. The access name 
parameter specifies the name by which the file is known to the job and to 
which the specified parameters refer. 

Format: The parameter value is valid ASC symbol. 

Default: This parameter is positional and mandatory. It must appear in the 
first position of the operands field and cannot be omitted. 

Example: A file named ANAME is an output file destined for a printer or 
card punch. The access name parameter may appear as: 

/tfFOSYStfANAME 
/#FOSYStfT1340 

6-46 TYPE (TYPE) 

The file is spooled to either the print or punch system output chain for sub- 
sequent printing or punching on designated devices. The type of file must be 
specified so the Operating System can spool the file to the appropriate output 
chain. 

Format: The type parameter, identified by the keyword TYPE, indicates 
whether the file is to be placed on the job's print or punch output chain. The 
parameter value is one of the keywords, PRINT or PUNCH. PRINT specifies 
the file is spooled on the job's print and output chain; while PUNCH indicates 
spooling on the punch output chain. 

Default: The parameter may be omitted in which case the System spools the 
named file on the print output chain (TYPE=PRINT). 

Example: To illustrate use of this parameter, an example follows: 

/tfFOSYStfANAME, TYPE=PUNCH 
or 

/tfFOSYStfT1340, TYPE=PRINT 

6-47 EXTERNAL IDENTIFICATION (EXID) 

If desired, the printed or punched output file may be named. The external 
identification parameter, known by the keyword EXID, names the file. For 
print files, a special line containing the output file name is printed before 
the print file image. For punch files, a card containing the name is punched 
preceding the card deck containing the file information. 

Format: The parameter value is a character string of one to eight charac- 
ters. Only one type of file can be named at a time --either a print or a punch 
file. 



L -3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOSYS 



Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, no identifying print 
line or card will be output preceding the file information. 

6-48 LOCATION (LOC) 

After the output file has been spooled to the system print or punch output 
chain, it is physically transferred to the designated output device during job 
termination processing. The location at which the file is output should be 
specified if other than the location specified on or defaulted to by the JOB 
statement. 

Format: The location parameter, identified by the keyword LOC, specifies 
the installation at which the file is to be output. The parameter value is a 
string of one to eight alphanumeric characters. The character strings al- 
lowed are assigned by the central site. They may specify terminal installa- 
tions. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the file is output at the 
location specified on the JOB statement. If a location has not been specified 
on the JOB statement, the default is the location where the job originated. 
The location parameter on FOSYS is not supported if its value differs from 
that specified by the JOB statement's location parameter. 

6-49 FORM (FORM) 

The form parameter, identified by the keyword FORM, serves two purposes. 
It is used to specify special paper and forms requirements for both print and 
punch files and printer carriage control tape identification for print files. 

Format: The parameter consists of two subparameters separated by a slash. 
Each subparameter value is a character string of one to eight characters. 
Each subparameter is positional within the optional parameter. The values 
are installation-assigned. 

The first subparameter, special forms identification, designates the type of 
cards to contain a punch file or the multi-part and paper type to use for print 
files. The second subparameter specifies the identification of the printer 
carriage control tape, used only for print files. 

Default: The form parameter is optional. Each subparameter, though po- 
sitional, is optional. If the form parameter is omitted, the specified file 
will be printed using paper and carriage control tapes in regular use at the 
installation. Punch files will be punched on standard cards in regular use at 
the installation. 

For print files, either the first or second subparameter may be omitted. 
Omi s s i on of either causes def ault to t he standard paper or carriage c ont r ol 
tape in regular use. 



A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




FOSYS 



To specify the form parameter for punch files, the first subparameter is 
coded; the second omitted. The slash must not be coded. 

To specify the form parameter for print files, the two subparameter s are 
separated by a slash. To omit the first subparameter, a slash must precede 
the second value. To omit the second subparameter, only the first value is 
used. The slash must be omitted. 

Example: To illustrate correct use of the form parameter, note the follow- 
ing examples: 

1. Punch File 

/tfFOSYStfANAME, TYPE=PUNCH, FORM=3360 
where 

the file named ANAME is a file to be punched on cards 
identified by 3360. 

The default values are 

EXID no identifying card precedes the card deck 

containing the file. 

LOC the file is punched at the location specified 

on or defaulted by the JOB statement. 

2. Print File 

/tfFOSYStfBNAME, TYPE=PRINT, FORM=2/SP12 

where 

the file name BNAME is printed on special paper identified 
by 2. The carriage control tape to be used is identified by 
SP12. 

The default values are 

EXID no identifying print line precedes the 

printed file information. 

LOC the file is printed at the location specified 

on or defaulted by the JOB statement. 

3. Print File with Default Values 

/#FOSYS#BNAME, FORM=2 
The defaults are 

TYPE default is to PRINT; file is printed 

EXID same as described previously, 

LOC same as described previously, 



° " 3 4 /\ cfvanced Scien tific Computer 




FOSYS 



2nd subparameter standard carriage control tape 



isuppucu uy iiiDt-ttiiai-iwiii 



/tfFOSYStfBNAME, FORM=/SP12 
where the defaults are 



TYPE 

EXID 

LOG 

1st subparameter 
of FORM 

or 



default is to PRINT; file is printed, 

same as previously described, 

same as previously described, 

standard forms of paper 
supplied by installation. 



/#FOSYS#BNAME 
where the default values are 

TYPE default is PRINT; file is printed, 

EXID 



LOC 
FORM 

6-50 PRINT SPACE (PRTS) 



no identifying print line precedes the 
printed file information, 

the file is printed at the location specified 
on or defaulted by the JOB statement, 

installation supplies standard forms or 
paper and carriage control tape. 



The print space parameter, identified by the keyword PRTS, specifies the 
line spacing by the printer between lines of printed code, or the card stacker 
receiving the punched cards. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned, constant according to the type 
of file being output. 



TYPE=PRINT 
TYPE=PUNCH 



1,2, or 3 
1 or 2 



The values 1,2, or 3 specify the number of lines between printouts. The 
values 1 or 2 specify the identification of the stacker receiving cards. 

Only one type of value may be used. It must correspond to the type of file 
specified by the TYPE parameter. For TYPE=PRINT, use 1, 2, or 3. For 
TYPE=PUNCH, use either 1 or 2. 



6-35 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FOSYS 



Default: The print space parameter is optional. If PRTS is not specified, 
the value for either type of file may be specified in the file. If the file does 
not contain carriage control/stacker select characters, PRTS defaults to 1 
for either type of file. 

Example: The following example illustrates the difference in using this 
parameter: 

/tfFOSYStfANAME, TYPE=PUNCH, PRTS=2 
where the stacker identified by 2 receives the cards. 

/tfFOSYStfANAME, TYPE=PRINT, PRTS=3 
where the printer spaces three lines between printouts. 

6-51 COPIES (COPIES) 

The copies parameter, identified by the keyword COPIES, specifies the num- 
ber of copies of the specified file which is to be output to the device specified 
in the TYPE parameter. 

Format: The value of the COPIES parameter is an unsigned decimal integer 
from 1 to 99. 

Default: The COPIES parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the System 
supplies one copy. 

6-52 OPTION (OPT) 

When a file has been spooled to the system output print or punch chain, the 
disc space occupied by the file may be reallocated for further use. The op- 
tion parameter, identified by the keyword OPT, specifies the disposition of 
the disc space that becomes available. 

Format: The parameter value is the alphabetic character, R, enclosed in 
parentheses. R specifies that the original file space is placed on the appro- 
priate print or punch system output chain. For the job to use the same ac- 
cess name again, new file space must be allocated through the normal system 
open process. 

Default: The parameter is optional. Currently, R is the only option code 
available. If omitted, the default value is the code R. Since R is also the 
default value, the parameter does not necessarily have to be used. The 
parameter is available because current plans provide for additional options 
in the future. 



° " A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




SECTION VII 
CATALOG MANAGEMENT 

7-1 CATALOG SYSTEM 

The catalog system in the ASC Operating System provides the following capa- 
bilities: 

• Data retrieval by symbolic name independent of device type 
and volume numbers, 

• File privacy and protection of data from unauthorized use, 

• Maintenance of successive file generations relative to a speci- 
fied file. 

7-2 CATALOG STRUCTURE 

The catalog is a tree structure with a root node from which ali other nodes 
are directly or indirectly accessible. Figure 7-1 is a graphic representa- 
tion of a catalog structure. 

Every node of the catalog tree may have files, or versions, associated with 
it, although the files may be empty. 

Each file is associated with only one node in the catalog, and any node can 
have several files associated with it. 

The version name is the node's pathname plus a modifier that identifies the 
version. 

7-3 DEFINITIONS 

The following terms are defined for describing the catalog system: 

7-4 EDGENAME. An edgename is the name of the connector between two 
adjacent nodes. An edgename must be a valid ASC symbol. No two edges 
originating from the same node may have the same name. An edgename 
need not be unique within the catalog. 

7-5 PATHNAME AND NODENAME. Each node in a catalog is identified by 
a pathname . Each file in a catalog is identified by the node's pathname plus 
the version number of the file at the node. The node accessed by a pathname 
is the terminal node of the pathname. Ail nodes whose pathnames could be 
generated by sequentially deleting one edgename from an original pathname 
greater than one edgename in length are reference nodes with respect to the 
terminal node. 



7 1 

' ~ l Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATALOG 




PATHNAME OF THIS 
NODE A/B/C/F 



I VERSION2 
| VERS ION 1 



VERS1ON0 



| VERS 



ION2 



| VERSION ! 
VERSIONO 




(A) 107854 



Figure 7-1. Graphic Representation of the Catalog Tree Structure 



7-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATALOG 



The pathname of the node is the sequential catenation of ail edgenames from 
the root node to the subject node. The catenation of the edgenames is indi- 
cated by slashes. The pathname of any given node must be unique within the 
catalog; i. e. , any given pathname must access only one mode. 

A node may have only one pathname; i.e., any given node may be reached by 
only one path; closed loops are not permitted in the catalog. 

A pathname plus version number is a valid file name only in catalog process- 
ing statements; it cannot be used as an access name. 

7-6 SYNONYM. A synonym is a single valid ASC symbol that is defined as 
equal to a given pathname in the catalog. Synonyms are defined for path- 
names by the JSL Path Definition (PD) statement. 

Once a synonym is defined for a given pathname, the synonym may be used 
as the first edgename in the pathname of another node farther down the same 
path. Synonyms are required to process nodes that are more than 10 edge- 
names deep in a catalog. Synonyms are valid only in catalog processing; 
they cannot be used as access names. 

A synonym must be defined from the root node. The synonym exists only for 
the duration of the job in which it is defined. It is a synonym only for a node, 
not for the file associated with the synonym's terminal node. 

7-7 ACCESS NAME. An access name has two uses in catalog processing: 
(1) for a cataloged file to be accessible to a job, it must have a job local 
name that links it to that job, and (2) for a version to be cataloged by a job, 
the job local name of the version must be specified to cataloging procedures. 
An access name has no meaning to the catalog itself; it only identifies files 
to the cataloging procedures. 

The JSL ASG statement assigns a cataloged file to a given job. The specified 
access name (on the ASG statement) links the file to a given job. The file 
may be shared concurrently with other jobs specifying the file, or it may be 
used exclusively by the given job. 

A given cataloged file can be given more than one access name in the job. 
The user will have access to the same physical file through all access names. 
Any file with an access name defined in a current job may be cataloged by 
that job. The file may have been a cataloged file or an external file with re- 
spect to the specific job, or it may have been created within that job. The 
CAT, CATV, and RPLV statements all use access names to define files that 
are to become versions in a catalog. 

Modification of the contents of a file specified by an access name causes the 
contents of the cataloged version to be modified, if the file is resident. To 
modify the contents of a non»resid,ent version, the RPLV must be used after 
the modification; the current access name is specified as an operand and the 
specified pathname and version must be identical to the original ASG state- 
ment specification. 



7-3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATALOG 

7-8 VERSIONS. There can be more than one version at a node. Every node 
has at least one version, although it may be a null version. The name of a 
cataloged file is the pathname of the file's node with a modifier that identi- 
fies the version. 

The maximum number of versions permitted for a node is specified by the 
JSL CAT, CATN and/or CHG statements. The maximum number, N, is a 
positive integer, where 1 < N < 64. The absolute version numbers are 
assigned in the sequence (0, 1,2,... N- 1) . 

Each file sequentially cataloged by a CATV statement is assigned an integer- 
index, beginning with zero. For example, if a node has a maximum of 5 ver- 
sions, the version numbers are assigned in the sequence: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 0, 
1, 2, 3, 4, .... As a given index recurs, the older copy of that version is 
re-placed by the newer. 

Every node has a version flagged, establishing a point of reference in the se- 
quence of versions. The flagged version is the one most recently cataloged, 
by a CATV statement, unless specified otherwise. The automatic sequencing 
feature can be deactivated to maintain a constant flagged version. If no ver- 
sions have been cataloged, the flagged version is a null version. When a 
version is not specified in catalog processing, the flagged version is accessed. 

Versions implied by the maximum version's specification, but not cataloged, 
are null versions. Deleted versions are null versions. Versions cataloged 
by the CAT, CATV, or RPLV statements are cataloged versions. They re- 
main cataloged until deleted by the DEL, DELV, RPLV statements. A cat- 
aloged version may be empty (contain no data), but not null. 

7-9 CATALOG PRIVACY 

The system provides for the protection of data from malicious or accidental 
violation. The data may be made accessible to other users on a controlled 
basis wherein users are identified to the system by user codes. Three con- 
trol states determine node characteristics that establish catalog privacy: 
reference control, access control, and son-add control. 

7-10 ACCESS CONTROL LIST. Each node contains an Access Control List 
consisting of user codes, each associated with a list of attributes. This ac- 
cess list is used for screening purposes, and the various attributes of the 
authorized users provide controlled access to the file associated with the 
node. A user possesses attributes assigned during catalog processing. The 
user's attributes are associated with his user code in the Access Control 
List of the respective node. 

The creator of a node automatically possesses the own attribute. If the cre- 
ator of the node is not listed in the access control information parameter of 
the statement that creates the node, the creator possesses all control attri- 
butes. If the creator of the node is listed, only those attributes listed are 



A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CATALOG 



assigned, plus the own attribute. The creator of a node is (by definition) the 
11 ssr c^de m^st recenti" - specified in the ^*^^ ^I^ck c , ~ v ntainin rr the st°temen** 
creating the node. 

A user may possess six attributes: own, reference, son-add, read, write, 
and execute. 

• Possession of the own attribute gives the user authority to 
change any characteristics of the node. The owner may change 
the Access Control List and the attributes of its members, the 
maximum number of versions of the node, the control states of 
the node, the flagged version number, and the retention period 
of a cataloged tape. The owner may catalog files, replace files, 
or delete the node if it is a terminal node. The access control 
list is examined for any of the above operations. 

• The reference attribute has significance only for those nodes in 
the full reference control state. For those nodes in the full 
reference state, any user's attempt to refer to the node will 
cause the system to examine the Access Control List for the 
user's possession of the reference attribute. If the user pos- 
sesses it, he is passed through the node. 

• The son- add attribute has significance only for those nodes in 
the full son- add control state. For those nodes in the full son - 
add control state, any user's attempt to add a son node will 
cause the system to examine the Access Control List for the 
user's possession of the son-add attribute. If the user pos- 
sesses it, he will be permitted to add the son node. Note that 
a user with this attribute specifies the Access Control List of 
the node he creates and is automatically an owner of the node 
he creates. 

• Possession of the read or execute attribute gives the user au- 
thority to read from the file associated with the node. For a 
node in the full access control state, possession of only this 
attribute limits the user to reading from the file. 

• Possession of the write attribute gives the user authority to 
write to the file associated with the node. For a node in the 
full access control state, possession of only this attribute limits 
the user to writing to the file. 

NOTE 

Writing to a file does not affect the con- 
tents of the file in the catalog unless the 
file is resident. A permanent change to 
a non-resident file is accomplished only 
by cataloging a version of the file with a 
Job Specification Language statement. 



7-5 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATALOG 



Such a permanent change requires that 
the user possess the own attribute. 

NOTE 

These attributes are completely disjoint; 
possession of any one attribute does not 
imply possession of any other attribute. 
For example, possession of the own attri- 
bute does not permit the user to add a son 
node. The own attribute does give the 
user possessing it the authority to change 
his attributes, including giving himself 
additional attributes. 

7-11 REFERENCE CONTROL. The concept of node reference implies only 
the process of catalog searching, not the intent to operate on the node or the 
files associated with the node. Reference control affects both access control 
and son-add control to the extent that a user must meet reference control re- 
quirements at every node searched for access or son-add purposes. 

Each node is either in the full-reference control state or the no-reference 
control state. The reference control state of a node is specified during cat- 
alog processing of the node. 

One user attribute is applicable to reference control: the reference attribute. 

Aritr v* n +£i i*£in/^n i-*-\ o ni^rl £» 1*1 +-r» o, fn 1 I _t*q t £* -*• *a-*-» /-* a r> ^-v* f -w/\l gf^^o Ann <i/\fl 4-1*. *~>. A *-% ^* £± ■"-« 
j. 111 y xv^j.K^a.^*xxv^^-» tu t*. uuuv 111 niv/ jlu.xx H j. w-t^x \^xx\^ \* \^ Unwx kjj. ouaLC v-aUDtib nig Xl-V- C. C O b 

Control List of the node to be examined. Reference to the node is permitted 
only if the user is identified in the Access Control List and if that user pos- 
sesses the reference attribute. The catalog in figure 7-1 with all the nodes 
in the full-reference control state requires a user wishing to access node 
A/B/D to possess the reference attribute at nodes 1 and 2. 

Any reference to a node in the no-reference control state is permitted. The 
Access Control List is not examined. 

A successful reference to a node -- either in the full- or no-reference con- 
trol state -- does not permit access to the node; only passage through the 
node. 

Access is granted according to the access control state and the usage attri- 
butes possessed by the user. 

7-12 ACCESS CONTROL. The concept of node access implies the intent to 
operate on the node's associated files (or versions). Node access means 
that the terminal node in the specified pathname is accessed. 



•J _L 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATALOG 



Each node is in one of three access control states: 

• Full access 

• Partial access 

• No access. 

The node's access control state is specified during catalog processing of the 

node. 

Three user attributes are applicable to access control: 

• The read attribute 

• The write attribute 

• The execute attribute. 

Any attempt to access a node in the full-access control state causes the Ac- 
cess Control List of the node to be examined. Access is permitted only to 
those users identified in the Access Control List; they are permitted only 
the type(s) of access defined by their attributes. 

Any attempt to access a node in the partial-access control state causes the 
access control list to be examined for the user's possession of the write 
attribute. If the user is in the list and has the write attribute, all three ac- 
cess types are given; otherwise, only the read and execute attributes are 
given. 

An attempt to access a node in the no-access control state does not cause the 
Access Control List of the node to be examined i. e. , all users are permitted 
to read, write, and execute the file at the node. 

For example, the catalog in Figure 7^-1 with all nodes in the no-reference 
control state requires a user wishing to refer to node A/B/D to know the 
pathname, but the user is not necessarily permitted access to node A/B/D. 
Access is determined by the state of the node: full access, partial access or 
no access. 

NOTE 

A user who wishes to access some given 
node at a catalog must pass reference 
control requirements at every node in the 
path from the root node to the object node; 
the user's attributes at the object node are 
meaningless if that user cannot refer to 
every node in the path. 

7-13 SON- ADD CONTROL. The concept of son addition to a node implies 
the intent to extend an existing pathname by one edgename and create a new 
node in the catalog. The node is identified by the new pathname. The node 



7 7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATALOG 

associated with the existing pathname is the parent node and the new node is 
the son node. The parent node becomes a reference node with respect to 
its son. 

Each node is in either the full son-add control state or the no son-add con- 
trol state. The son-add control state of a node is specified daring catalog 
processing of the node. One user attribute is applicable to son-add control: 
the son-add attribute. 

Any attempt to add a son node in the full son-add control state causes the 
Access Control List to be examined. The son node is added only if the user 
is identified in the Access Control List and possesses the son-add attribute. 

Any user may add sons to a node in the no son-add control state. The Access 
Control List is not examined. 



7-8 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATBLD 



7-14 THE CATBLD STATEMENT 

The Job Specification Language provides interfaces with the catalog system 
at the structure level through the CATalog Bui LP Statement (CATBLD). The 
CATBLD statement defines a new catalog structure within the catalog sys- 
tem. When CATBLD is used, it allocates the catalog and initializes a speci- 
fied root node of the catalog on the disc. The name of the root node is the 
catalog name. All catalog security requirements may be established for the 
root node. Once a user defines a catalog via the CATBLD statement, he is 
free to construct and manipulate the structure using other JSL catalog state- 
ments. 

The general form of the CATBLD statement is: 



I 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



/ I [Symbol] 

J 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 



CATBLD 



edgename [, MXVR=maximum number 
of versions] 



, ACST= 



NO 

PART 
FULL 



|][- 



SON= 



NO 1-1 

[FULliJ 



[• 



*»"■ K, J] 



[ , ACIN=access control information] 



The verb CATBLD must appear in the operation field. The statement may 
be labeled. The label must be separated from the operation field with at 
least one blank. The operation field must be separated from the operands 
field with at least one blank. 

The operands field contains both positional and keyword parameters. The 
positional parameter is mandatory and must be the first parameter in the 
field. The keyword parameters may appear in any convenient order or may 
be omitted. 

7-15 EDGENAME 

The catalog being defined must be identified to the catalog system. The 
edgename parameter specifies the first edgename of the catalog, The edge- 
name is the pathname of the root node. The parameter is mandatory and 
positional. The edgename cannot be a synonym defined by a PD statement. 



7-9 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATBLD 



Format: The parameter value is a valid ASC symbol. The Operating System 
enters the specified edgename in the catalog directory maintained by the Op- 
erating System. The system identifies the catalog in the system by this name, 

Default ; None. The edgename must be specified. 

7-16 MAXIMUM VERSIONS (MXVR) 

Since each node may have more than one version associated with it simul- 
taneously, the user can specify a maximum number of versions that can be 
associated with the specified root node. The maximum versions parameter, 
identified by the keyword MXVR, specifies this limit. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned constant. The range is 
1 < N < 64, where N is the parameter value. This value specifies the num- 
ber of versions allowed at the node. When CATBLD establishes the node, 
the node can be considered to contain N null versions. No version actually 
is cataloged at this time. The statement only creates null versions which 
contain no data. 

Default: The maximum versions parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the 
Operating System assumes that only one version will be permitted at the root 
node. 

7-17 ACCESS CONTROL STATE (ACST) 

The access control state parameter, identified by the keyword ACST, speci- 
fies the degree of control the System will maintain over access to the node. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keywords NO, PART, or FULL. 
NO specifies no access control; i. e., all users may read, write, and exe- 
cute versions at the node. PART specifies partial access control,, giving all 
users read and execute attributes; the write attribute is only given to quali- 
fied users. FULL specifies full access control, restricting access to the 
versions at the node to qualified users only. Qualified users are those con- 
tained in the Access Control List established by the access control informa- 
tion parameter (ACIN) or the creator of the node. 

Read, write and execute attributes are controlled through the access control 
state of the node. Changing the node's characteristics - stipulated by the 
own attribute - is not affected by the access control state of the node. Own- 
ership of the node is established through the access control information 
parameter (ACIN) or by having created the node. 

Default: The parameter may be omitted, in which case the Operating Sys- 
tem will not maintain any access control. Users have full execute, read and 
write attributes. The parameter default value is NO. This condition does 
not imply any own attribute; users cannot change the characteristics of the 
root node unless they created the node or established ownership through the 
access control information parameter (ACIN). 



7-10 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATBLD 

7-18 REFERENCE CONTROL STATE (RFST) 

The reference control state parameter, identified by the keyword RFST, 
specifies whether the Operating System will control user's attempts to pass 
through the root node during a catalog search. 

Format; , The parameter value is one of the keywords NO or FULL. NO 
specifies no reference control; any user may pass through the node during a 
catalog search. FULL specifies full reference control; only qualified users 
may pass through the node. The access control information parameter 
/Af.T'Nn misiifi^e users T">«" providing them with a reference attribute. 

Default; The parameter is optional. If the parameter is omitted, the Op- 
erating System will not maintain reference control. Any user can pass 
through the node during a search. The parameter default value is NO. This 
condition does not affect the state of access control on the node. 

7-19 SON-ADD CONTROL STATE (SON) 

The son-add control state parameter establishes the degree of control ex- 
ercised by the Operating System over the addition of nodes (called sons) to 
the root node. 

Format; The parameter is identified by the keyword SON. Its value is one 
of the keywords NO or FULL. NO specifies a no son-add control; any user 
may add son nodes to the specified node. FULL specifies full son-add con- 
trol. Only qualified users can add son nodes. The access control informa- 
tion parameter (ACIN) provides users with the proper attribute. 

Default; The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the default value is NO 
and any user can add son nodes. 

7-20 ACCESS CONTROL INFORMATION (ACIN) 

The access control information parameter, identified by the keyword ACIN, 
provides the most comprehensive security measures for the catalog being 
built. This parameter establishes valid users and determines the actions 
(attributes) each may take. 

Format; The parameter value is a set of subparameter s separated by 
slashes. Each subparameter is a valid user code, followed by an asterisk 
and one or more of the alphabetic characters E, F, O, R, S, and W, appended 
to the user code. Each character is also separated by an asterisk. The 
values are translated into an Access Control List maintained by the Operating 
System for the specified node. 

Each user code becomes the System's identifier for a user permitted activity 
at the node. The alphabetic characters appended to the user code specify the 



7-1 1 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATBLD 

action attributes being allowed the user. The attributes have the following 
interpretations: 



E 


execute 


F 


reference 


O 


own- 


R 


read 


S 


son add 



W write 

A maximum of ten user codes can be specified by the ACIN parameter. JSL 
CH anGe (CHG) statements specify additional users. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, only the creator of the 
node automatically possesses all attributes. The creator is, by definition, 
the user identified by the user code most recently specified on a JOB or 
LIMIT statement in the job which creates the node. No other users are 
qualified. 

NOTE 

The creator of the node specifies the Ac- 
cess Control List of the node he creates 
and is automatically the owner of the node. 

7-21 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 



The access control information parameter ACIN interacts with the remaining 
three security-creation parameters: access control state, ACST; reference 
control state, RFST; and son-add control state, SON. RFST restricts ACST 
and SON. 

7-22 ACIN AND ACST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies a 
valid user and the actions allowed. The Operating System examines the list 
when exercising the control specified by the ACST parameter. Operating 
System control varies according to the parameter values specified. 

When ACST specifies NO (no access control), the Operating System does not 
examine the Access Control List. 

When ACST specifies PART (partial access control), the Operating System 
examines the list for the write attribute. Only users having the write attri- 
bute, in the list, can read, write, and execute the node's file. All others 
are given read and execute only. 



7-12 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATBLD 



When ACST specifies FULL (full access control), the Operating System ex- 
amines the list for all intents. Only users identified in the list may access 
the node, They may perform only those actions specified by the list. 

7-23 ACIN AND RFST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies 
whether a user may pass through the node during a catalog search, depending 
on the RFST parameter. The Operating System exercises the control speci- 
fied by the RFST parameter and varies its action accordingly. 

When RFST specifies NO (no reference control), any user may pass through 
the node. The Operating System does not examine the list and places no re- 
strictions on passage. 

When RFST specifies FULL (full reference control), the Operating System 
examines the list to determine if the user possesses the reference attribute. 
If so, he may pass; if not, he is denied passage, regardless of the node's 
other states. 

7-24 ACIN AND SON 

The Access Control List generated by ACIN specifies a valid user and his 
assigned attributes. The SON parameter establishes control over addition 
of sons to the root node. The Operating System varies its actions according 
to the parameter values specified. 

When SON specifies NO (no son-add control) any user intending to add a son 
node may do so. The Operating System does not examine the list. 

When SON specifies FULL (full son-add control) and the user intends to add 
a son node, the Operating System examines the list to determine the user's 
validity and his possession of the son-add attribute. The user can' add a son 
node only if he possesses the correct attribute. 

7-25 RFST, ACST AND SON 

The RFST parameter restricts the ACST and SON parameters. The RFST 
parameter must allow passage through the root node before a file at the node 
may be accessed or before any son nodes can be added, regardless of the 
control states imposed by the ACST and SON parameters. 

The ACST and SON parameters have no effect on each other, on the RFST 
parameter, or on ownership of the node. 



7-13 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATN 



7-26 THE CATN STATEMENT 



The CATalog Node (CATN) statement initiates the entry of a node into an 
existing catalog. The statement also enables the user- to construct an Ac- 
cess Control List and specify node characteristics. However, file version 
cannot be cataloged at the node. The CATN statement also enables the user 
to establish an additional security level in the catalog structure, particularly 
through reference and son-add control features. Only users with the son- 
add attributes, at the parent node, can use the CATN statement. 

The general form of the CATN statement is: 



LABEL 



[Symbol] 



I OPERATION 



CATN 



OPERANDS 



pathname [, MXVR=maximum number 
of versions] 



[, ACST= 



NO 

PART 

FULL 



^ son ={I§ll]] 



[,RFST={^ TT ] ][,ACIN=access 

control informa- 
tion] 



FULLJ 



The verb CATN must appear in the operation field. The slash identifier, or 
the label symbol if the statement is labeled, is separated from the operation 
field by at least one blank. The operation and operands fields also must be 
separated by at least one blank. 

Both positional and keyword parameters are contained in the operands field. 
The former is mandatory and must appear first in the operands field, while 
the latter may be listed in any order or may be omitted. 

7-27 PATHNAME 

The pathname consists of one to ten edgenames catenated by slashes (/). 
The pathname gives the location and name of the new node in the catalog. 
Only the first edgename in the pathname may be a synonym defined in a pre- 
ceding PD statement. 

Format: The new edgename must be a valid ASC symbol. The user (user 
code specified on the most recent LIMIT or JOB statement) must have the 
son-add attribute at the node to which the new node is attached, if the parent 
node is in the full son- add control state. 



7-14 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATN 



The last edgename of the pathname leads to the new node. The pathname 

frnnrafe/l \\xr ^-Vio la of c±c\ rt pnam o r\ a -ft in a a. 4-V* ex -n r\r\ a. +■•% tttK-ii^Vi 4-V* *=* -ki ^ttt -m-^^.ci tt« 1 1 

be attached. 

All the edgenames of the pathname except the last must have been defined 
earlier to the catalog in the current or in a previous job; i. e. , only one new 
node can be created per CATN statement. 

Default; None. The pathname must be specified. 

7-28 MAXIMUM VERSION (MXVR) 

The maximum versions parameter specifies the maximum number of ver- 
sions at this node that can exist simultaneously. 

Format: The keyword MXVR precedes the maximum versions parameter 
value, which is an unsigned constant. 

The value of the maximum versions parameter specifies the number of file 
versions at this node. The file is assumed to comprise jN null versions, 
where N is the maximum number of versions. 

N' s value is limited to the range 1 < N < 64. Versions are cataloged to this 
file modulo N; i. e. , an attempt to catalog version N results in replacement 
of version by the newer version. 

No version is cataloged by this statement. Only the null versions are cre- 
ated, which contain no data. 

Default: If maximum number of versions is not specified, only one version 
of the file is permitted at this node. 

7-29 ACCESS CONTROL STATE (ACST) 

The access control state parameter, identified by the keyword ACST, reg- 
ulates the degree of control the Operating System maintains over access to 
this node. 

Format: One of the keywords NO, PART, or FULL is the parameter value. 
No indicates there is no access control, meaning users may read, write and 
execute versions at the node. PART indicates partial access control, allow- 
ing all users to read and execute any file version at this node. FULL access 
control restricts use of versions at this node to users on the Access Control 
List. 

Read, write and execute attributes are regulated through the access control 
state of the node. The user must possess the own attribute to change the 
node characteristics. Ownership of the node is established by creating the 
node or through the access control information parameter {AGIN). 



7-15 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATN 



Default: ACST may be omitted, thus removing all access control by the Op- 
erating System. In such a case, users have full execute, read and write 
attributes and the default value is NO. The default value does not imply any 
own attribute; users cannot change characteristics of the specified node un- 
less they created the node or established ownership through the access con- 
trol information parameter. 

7-30 REFERENCE CONTROL STATE (RFST) 

The reference control state parameter, identified by the keyword RFST, 
specifies whether the Operating System will control users' attempts to pass 
through the node during a catalog search. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keywords NO or FULL. NO in- 
dicates no reference control; any user may pass through the node during a 
catalog search. FULL specifies full reference control; only qualified users 
may pass through the node. The access control information parameter 
(ACIN) qualifies users by providing them with a reference attribute. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the Operating System 
will not maintain reference control. Any user can pass through the node 
during a search. The parameter default value is NO, a condition which does 
not affect the state of access control on the node. 

7-31 SON- ADD CONTROL STATE (SON) 

The son-add control state parameter establishes the degree of control ex- 
ercised by the Operating System over the addition of nodes (called sons) to 
the node. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword SON. Its value is one 
of the keywords NO or FULL. NO specifies no son-add control; any user may 
add son nodes to the specified node. FULL specifies full son-add control. 
Only qualified users can add son nodes. The access control information 
parameter provides users with the proper attribute. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the default value is 
NO and any user can add son nodes. 

7-32 ACCESS CONTROL INFORMATION (ACIN) 

The access control information parameter, identified by the keyword ACIN, 
provides the most comprehensive security measures for the node being built. 
This parameter establishes valid users and determines the actions (attri- 
butes) each may take. 

Format: The parameter value is a set of subparameters separated by 
slashes. Each subparameter is a valid user code, followed by an asterisk 



7 1 f> 

' Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATN 



and one or more of the alphabetic characters E, F, O, R, S or W appended 
to the user code i. e. user code ^E^F*. . . . These values are translated 
into the Access Control List, maintained by the Operating System for the 
specified node. 

Each user code becomes the System's identifier for a user permitted ac- 
tivity at the node. The alphabetic characters appended to the user code 
specify the attributes being allowed the user. The characters have the fol- 
lowing interpretations: 

E execute 

F reference 

O own 

R read 

S son- add 

W write 

A maximum of ten user codes can be specified by the ACIN parameter. JSL 
GH anGe (CHG) statements specify additional users. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, only the creator of the 
node automatically possesses all attributes. The creator is, by definition, 
the user identified by the user code most recently specified on a JOB or 
LIMIT statement in the job which creates the node. No other users are 
qualified. 

NOTE 

The creator of the node specifies the Ac- 
cess Control List of the node he creates 
and is automatically the owner of the node. 

7-33 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The access control information parameter ACIN interacts with the remaining 
three security-creation parameters: access control state, ACST; reference 
control state, RFST; and son-add control state, SON. RFST restricts ACST 
and SON. 

7-34 ACIN AND ACST 

The Access Control List, generated from the ACIN parameter, specifies a 
valid user and the actions allowed. The Operating System examines the list 
when exercising the control specified by the ACST parameter. Operating 
System control varies according to the parameter values specified. 



7-17 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATN 

When ACST specifies NO (no access control), the Operating System does not 
examine the Access Control List; the user gets read, write, and execute 
access automatically. 

When ACST specifies PART (partial access control), the Operating System 
examines the list for the write attribute. Write access is permitted if the 
user is identified by and possesses the write attribute specified by the Ac- 
cess Control List. The user automatically gets read and execute. 

When ACST specifies FULL (full access control), the Operating System ex- 
amines the list for all intents. Only users identified in the list and having 
read, write or execute attributes can access the node. They may perform 
only those actions specified by the list. 

7-35 ACINANDRFST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies 
whether a user may pass through the node during a catalog search, depending 
on the RFST parameter. The Operating System exercises the control speci- 
fied by the RFST parameter and varies its action accordingly. 

When RFST specifies NO (no reference control), any user may pass through 
the node. The Operating System does not examine the list and places no re- 
strictions on passage. 

When RFST specifies FULL (full reference control), the Operating System 
examines the list to determine if the user possesses the reference attribute. 
If so, he may pass; if not, he is denied passage, regardless of the node's 
other states. 

7-36 ACIN AND SON 

The Access Control List generated by ACIN specifies a valid user'and his 
assigned attributes. The SON parameter establishes control over addition 
of sons to the node. The Operating System varies its actions according to 
the parameter values specified. 

When SON specifies NO (no son-add control), any user intending to add a 
son node may do so. The Operating System does not examine the list. 

When SON specifies FULL (full son-add control) and the user intends to add 
a son node, the Operating System examines the list to determine the user's 
validity and his possession of the son-add attribute. The user can add a son 
node only if he possesses the correct attribute. 



7 1 P, 

' ~ Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATN 



7-37 RFST, ACST AND SON 

The RFST parameter restricts the ACST and SON parameters. The RFST 
parameter must allow passage through the node before a file at the node 
may be accessed or before any son nodes can be added s regardless of the 
control states imposed by the ACST and SON parameters. 

The ACST and SON parameters have no effect on each other, on the RFST 
parameter, or on ownership of this node. 



'"1° ^ dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




CHG 



7-38 THE CHG STATEMENT 

The CH anGe statement (CHG) specifies changes in the characteristics of a 
node. Only specified characteristics and user codes a.re changed; all others 
are unaffected. 

This statement enables a qualified user to modify node security, the state of 
the automatic sequencing feature, and the versions specifications. The user 
attempting to implement changes through this statement must possess the 
own attribute at the specified node; otherwise, the operation is aborted. 
The user is identified by the usercode most recently specified on a LIMIT 
or JOB statement. 

The general form of the CHG statement is: 



LABEL 



I OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[Symbol] 



CHG 



pathname [, MXVR=maximum number 

of versions] 

[, FLVR=flagged version number] 



[, ACST= 



NO 

FULL 

PART 



][' SON =lf§ L J] 



l'*-*-- IFULLJ jL---^- a - c --~ 

control informa- 
tion] 

[, RETP=retention[, VERS=version 

number]] 

t' ASEQ =fSFFl 1 



The verb CHG must appear in the operation field. The label, operation and 
operands fields each are separated with at least one blank. The label is op- 
tional; if omitted, the slash (/) must be separated from the operation field 
with at least one blank. 

The operands field contains both positional and keyword parameters. The 
positional parameter is mandatory and must appear first in the field. The 
keyword parameters are optional and may be coded in any convenient order. 



7-20 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CHG 



7-39 PATHNAME 

The node being changed must be identified to the catalog system. The path- 
name specifies the node. 

Format; The pathname consists of one to ten edgenames concatenated by- 
slashes (/). If the node is more than ten edgenames deep in the catalog, the 
first edgename may be defined as a synonym by a PD statement. The node's 
pathname must exist in the catalog by the time the CHG statement is en- 
countered. 

Default: None. The pathname parameter is both positional and mandatory. 
It must be specified so that the catalog system knows which node to change. 

7-40 MAXIMUM VERSION (MXVR) 

Since each node may have more than one version associated with it simul- 
taneously, the user can specify a maximum number of versions that can be 
associated with the specified node. 

Format: The maximum versions parameter, identified by the keyword MXVR, 
specifies this limit. 

The parameter value is an unsigned constant. The range is (M+1)<N<64, 
where N is the parameter value that specifies the number of versions allowed 
at the node and M is the largest existing version number or flagged version 
number, whichever is largest. 

Default: The maximum versions parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the 
current maximum number of versions is retained. 

7-41 FLAGGED VERSION (FLVR) 

The flagged version parameter, identified by the keyword FLVR, specifies 
the absolute number of a new flagged version. 

Format: The value of the parameter is an unsigned constant whose range is 
< f < N-l, where f is the flagged version value and N is the maximum 
number of allowed versions. The parameter value must be an absolute ver- 
sion reference. Also, the new flagged version can be a null version. 

Default: The parameter is optional. The current flagged version of the file 
does not change if the parameter is omitted. 

7-42 VERSION RETENTION PERIOD (RETP, VERS) 

The version retention period parameter specifies the number of days that a 
file version output on tape will be retained and the version number to which 
the specified retention period applies. The Operating System converts the 
specified retention period to an expiration date associated with the existing 



' - ^ 1 Advanced Scientific Computer 




CHG 



version in the Tape Volume Catalog. Retention period is not a valid param- 
eter for files on secondary disc. 

Format: The version retention period parameter consists of two subparam- 
eters separated by a comma. Retention period subparameter, identified by 
the keyword RETP, is an unsigned constant specifying the number of days 
the file version is retained. The version subparameter, identified by the 
keyword VERS, is a signed or unsigned constant or a signed or unsigned JSL 
variable specifying the number of the version to which retention period per- 
tains. 

An unsigned version integer indicates an absolute version number reference. 
The absolute number is determined modulo N, where N is the maximum. A 
signed integer refers to a version number relative to the flagged version. 

The absolute value is limited to the range 0<|i|<63, where i is a signed in- 
teger. The value of an unsigned integer cannot exceed the maximum number 
of versions, N, minus one; therefore, the value's range is 0< i < N-l. 

The value of a signed JSL variable may be any value within a variable range: 
_231< v < 231-1, where v denotes the variable. An unsigned JSL variable is 
a reference to an absolute version; its value is the same limits as an un- 
signed integer -0 < v < N-l, where v is the variable and N is the maximum 
number of versions. 

Default: The two subparameter s are dependent in the following manner. The 
RETP subparameter may be coded by itself. If the VERS subparameter is 
omitted, the system assumes that the retention period pertains to the flagged 
version. The VERS subparameter cannot be specified by itself. If RETP is 
omitted, the entire parameter has no meaning; VERS should not be used. 

7-43 AUTOMATIC VERSION SEQUENCING (ASEQ) 

When a user establishes a node in an existing catalog, the Operating System 
initiates an automatic sequencing feature for subsequently cataloged versions 
at that node. This feature is active until specifically deactivated. The CHG 
statement enables the user to specify the desired state of this feature. 

Format: The automatic version sequencing parameter, identified by the key- 
word ASEQ, specifies a change in the state of the sequencing feature. The 
parameter value is either of the keywords ON or OFF. ON specifies activa- 
tion of automatic sequencing; OFF specifies deactivation. Use of the keyword 
ON when the automatic sequencing feature is currently activated does not gen- 
erate any action. Specifying OFF when the feature has been deactivated pre- 
viously has no result. 

Default: The ASEQ parameter is optional. If it is omitted, there is no 
change in the state of automatic sequencing. 



7-22 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CHG 



7-44 ACCESS CONTROL STATE (ACST) 

The access control state parameter, identified by the keyword ACST, speci- 
fies the degree of control the System will maintain over access to the node. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keywords NO, PART or FULL. 
NO specifies no access control, i.e., that all users may read, write and 
execute versions of the file at the node. PART specifies partial access con- 
trol. This means that all users may only read and execute versions. FULL 
specifies full access control, restricting access to the versions at the node 
to qualified users only. Qualified users are those contained in the Access 
Control List established by the ACIN parameters or the creator of the node. 

Read, write and execute attributes are controlled through the access control 
state of the node. Changing the node's characteristics - stipulated by the 
own attribute - is not permitted on the sole basis of access control. Owner- 
ship of the node is established through the access control information param- 
eter (ACIN) or by having created the node. 

Default: If the parameter is omitted, the current access control state is re- 
tained. 

7-45 REFERENCE CONTROL STATE (RFST) 

The reference control state parameter, identified by the keyword RFST, 
specifies whether the Operating System will control users' attempts to pass 
through the node during a catalog search. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keywords NO or FULL. NO 
specifies no reference control; any user may pass through the node during 
a catalog search. FULL specifies full reference control; only qualified 
users may pass through the node. The access control information parameter 
(ACIN) qualifies users by providing them with a reference attribute. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If the parameter is omitted, the ref- 
erence state of the node remains unchanged. 

7-46 SON-ADD CONTROL STATE (SON) 

The son-add control state parameter establishes the degree of control exer- 
cised by the Operating System over the addition of nodes (called sons) to the 
specified node. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword SON. Its value is one 
of the keywords NO or FULL. NO specifies no son-add control; any user 
may add son nodes to the specified node. FULL specifies full son-add con- 
trol. Only qualified users can add son nodes. The access control informa- 
tion parameter (ACIN) provides users with the proper attribute. 



' " 2 ^ Advanced Scientific Computer 




CHG 



Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the son-add control 
state remains unchanged. 

7-47 ACCESS CONTROL INFORMATION (ACIN) 

The access control information parameter, identified by the keyword ACIN, 
specifies additions to the Access Control List, modification of the attributes 
of users currently in the Access Control List, or deletion of users from the 
Access Control List. 

Format; Each subparameter is a user code of from one to eight alphanumeric 
characters or is a user code followed by an asterisk and one or more of the 
letters E, F, O, R, S, or W each separated by asterisks. These values are 
translated into an Access Control List maintained by the Operating System 
for the specified node. 

Each user code becomes the System's identifier for a user permitted activity 
at the node. The alphabetic characters appended to the user code specify the 
attributes being allowed the user. The attributes have the following inter- 
pretations: 



E 


execute 


F 


reference 


O 


own 


R 


read 


S 


son-add 



W write 

An entry in the access control information parameter (ACIN) that consists 
only of a user code specifies the user code (and its attributes) to be deleted 
from the Access Control List of the node. 

A user code with attributes specifies that a new entry is to be made in the 
list. If a user code with attributes is already in the list, the attributes in 
the Access Control list will be modified to correspond to the specification 
on the CHG statement; i.e., those attributes in the list but not the parameter 
will be deleted, and those in the parameter but not the list will be added. 

Any user code currently in the Access Control List that is not listed in the 
access control information parameter (ACIN) remains unchanged in the Ac- 
cess Control List. Only those user codes in the parameter will be affected. 

Each user code in the Access Control List after the CHG statement is pro- 
cessed in the system's identifier for a user who is to be permitted activity 
at this node. In subsequent jobs, any user who wants to access, reference 
or add sons to this node must specify one of these user codes in the job block 
containing any statement referencing the node. The node must, of course, 
have appropriate access control permitting these activities. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CHG 

A maximum of ten user codes per CHG statement can be specified by the 
ACIN parameter- Additional r.Frn gfaf^T-r.«i-.f <= w -»,r k« ,,c«^ *-~ j^«;_„_i._ 
other users. 

Default; The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the contents of the 
Access Control List remain unchanged. 

NOTE 

The current user cannot himself be deleted 
from the Access Control List and his pos- 
session of the own attribute cannot be de- 
leted. The current user may delete any 
other owners. Current user is defined by 
the most recently specified user code on 
a LIMIT or JOB statement in the current 
job. 

7-48 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The access control information parameter ACIN interacts with the remaining 
three security-creation parameters: access control state, ACST; reference 
control state, RFST; and son-add control state, SON. RFST restricts ACST 
and SON. 

7-49 ACIN AND ACST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies a 
valid user and the actions allowed. The Operating System examines the list 
when exercising the control specified by the ACST parameter. Operating 
System control varies according to the parameter values specified. 

When ACST specifies NO (no access control), the Operating System does not 
examine the Access Control List; the user is given all access. 

When ACST specifies PART (partial access control), the Operating System 
examines the list for the write attribute. Write access is permitted if the 
user is identified by and possesses the write attribute specified by the Ac- 
cess Control List. 

When ACST specifies FULL (full access control), the Operating System ex- 
amines the list for all intents. Only users identified in the list may access 
the node. They may perform only those actions specified by the list. 

7-50 ACIN AND RFST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies 
whether a user may pass through the node during a catalog search, depending 



7-25 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CHG 



on the RFST parameter. The Operating System exercises the control speci- 
fied by the RFST parameter and varies its actions accordingly. 

When RFST specifies NO (no reference control), any user may pass through 
the node. The Operating System does not examine the list and places no re- 
strictions on passage. 

When RFST specifies FULL (full reference control), the Operating System 
examines the list to determine if the user possesses the reference attribute. 
If so, he may pass; if not, he is denied passage, regardless of the node' s 
other states. 

7-51 ACIN AND SON . 

The Access Control List generated by ACIN specifies a valid user and his 
assigned attributes. The SON parameter establishes control over addition 
of sons to the node. The Operating System varies its actions according to 
the parameter values specified. 

When SON specifies NO (no son-add control) any user intending to add a son 
node may do so. The Operating System does not examine the list. 

When SON specifies FULL (full son-add control) and the user intends to add 
a son node, the Operating System examines the list to determine the user's 
validity and his possession of the son-add attribute. The user may add a 
son node only if he possesses the son-add attribute. 

7-52 RFST, ACST AND SON 

The RFST parameter restricts the ACST and SON parameters. The RFST 
parameter must allow passage through the node before a file at the node 
may be accessed or before any son nodes can be added, regardless of the 
control states imposed by the ACST and SON parameters. 

The ACST and SON parameters have no effect on each other, on the RFST 
parameter, or on ownership of the node. 



7 -2f> 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




DEL 



7-53 THE DEL STATEMENT 

The DEL ete (DEL) statement initiates the deletion of a terminal node and its 
associated files from a catalog. It is implicit in the use of the DEL state- 
ment that the user possess the own attribute at the node specified by the 
pathname parameter; otherwise, the operation is aborted. 



The general form of the DEL statement is: 



T 1 1 1 1 

I LABEL | l OPERATION i OPERANDS 

J 1 1 ' 



/ j [Symbol] j tf I DEL tf I pathname 



J _1 



I 



The verb DEL must appear in the operation field. The slash identifier, or 
the label symbol if the statement is labeled, must be separated from the op- 
eration field by at least one blank. The operation and operands fields must 
be separated by at least one blank. 

The operands field contains only the pathname parameter, which specifies 
the name and location of the node to be deleted. 

7-54 PATHNAME 

The pathname consists of one to ten edgenames catenated by slashes (/). 
Only the first edgename in the pathname can be a synonym defined in the PD 
statement. 

While processing this statement, the last edgename of the pathname is de- 
leted and this pathname no longer exists in the catalog. All files associated 
with the node also are deleted. 

Only a terminal node can be deleted. An error terminates the statement if 
the node is not terminal. 



7-27 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



7-55 THE CAT STATEMENT 

The CATalog node and version statement (CAT) creates a node in an existing 
catalog and catalogs the first version of a specified file at that node. Since 
the statement deals with the catalog system on a node level, the valid user 
can specify node characteristics, construct an Access Control List, and pro- 
vide additional security levels in the catalog structure. A qualified user 
must possess the son-add attribute at the parent node to use the CAT state- 
ment if the parent node is in the full son-add control state. 

The CAT statement also serves a specialized function: it enables the user 
to catalog a tape file directly without buffering the file to secondary disc. 
The parameters applicable to this feature are exclusive; they are not valid 
for other cataloging functions. 



™ ' 2 ° Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



The general form o 



LABEL 



[Symbol] 



f the CAT statement is: 

r 



OPERATION 



CAT 



OPERANDS 



pathname [, ACNM=access name] 
[, MXVR=maximum number of ver- 
sions] 



ACST= 



NO 



;)][■ 



PART HL' RFST= ffSn)] 

IFULL 1 ' 



SON= (f§n)] [ * 



ACIN=access con- 



trol information] 



fTAPEl 



, DTYP=< 



DSEC 
HPT 
PAD 
lOPID J 



jNOCNTGl 
ICNTG J 



operator id (^ILJ 



fETl 



[,RCTL= < 



E 

O 

T 

IC 



[,TRKS={|)] 



[, RETP=retention] 
DSECV 



[■ 



SRC= 



DSEC]-| 



ji- 
lt 



FORG 



LABL 



- j_| position! J L INLJjJ 



I [, EFID= eEdl/efid2/. . . /efidn] 



DEN= 



1 1600 
|800 
1 556 } 
356 
200 



BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



\= 



num- 
ber 



7-29 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



The horizontal broken line separating parameters in the operands fields in- 
dicates special-function parameters. The parameters above the line are 
used for normal cataloging functions. Those below the line can be used only 
for special catalog processing. 

The verb CAT must appear in the operand field. The label field, if the 
statement is labeled, must be separated from the operation field with at 
least one blank. If the statement is not labeled, the identifying slash (/) 
must be separated from the operation field with at least one blank. The op- 
eration and operands fields must be separated with at least one blank. 

The parameters in the operands field are positional and keyword parameters, 
The positional parameter must be coded as the first parameter and cannot 
be omitted. The keyword parameters are optional and can be coded in any 
convenient order. 

7-56 NORMAL NODE CREATION AND CATALOGING FUNCTIONS 



Under normal circumstances, any file that is to be cataloged has been cre- 
ated on the secondary disc or is present there as a result of transfer actions 
for disc -buffering requirements of the Operating System. The CAT state- 
ment specifies the cataloging function; the Operating System handles any re- 
quired physical transfers to external devices. 

In the normal case, only certain parameters need be considered. The follow- 
ing list itemizes the applicable parameters: 

pathname 

ACNM - access name 

MXVR - maximum number of versions 

ACST - access control state 

RFST - reference control state 

SON - son-add control state 

ACIN - access control information 

DTYP - device type 

RETP - retention 

SRC - source 

The remaining parameters apply only to a special function that bypasses 
disc-buffering requirements and should not be used in conjunction with the 
above parameters. 



7-30 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 

7-57 PATHNAME 

The new node must be identified to the catalog system. The pathname param- 
eter, a positional, mandatory parameter, specifies the name and location of 
the node being created. All nodes preceding the terminal node must exist 
prior to statement execution. 

Format; The parameter value is one to ten edgenames concatenated by 
slashes (/). The first edgename may be a synonym defined in a PD state- 
ment. The pathname also specifies the location of the node in the catalog. 

Default: None. Pathname must be specified. 
7-58 ACCESS NAME (ACNM) 

The access name parameter, identified by the keyword ACNM, identifies to 
the job the file that is to be cataloged as the first version at the specified 
node. 

Format: The parameter value is the name by which the file is accessible to 
the job. Access name is mandatory for all normal cataloging functions. The 
access name must be a valid ASC symbol. 

Default: The only exception to the mandatory status of the ACNM parameter 
is the special cataloging function. When the source parameter is set to the 
value designating the source device as tape (SRC = TP or FT), ACNM be- 
comes optional. In this case, it should be omitted. ACNM has no meaning 
if a tape file is being cataloged under the special feature. The pathname, 
which is mandatory under all circumstances, identifies the file to be cata- 
loged to the catalog system. 

7-59 MAXIMUM VERSIONS (MXVR) 

Since the new node may have more than one version of a file associated with 
it simultaneously, the user can specify a maximum number of versions that 
can be associated with the specified node. The maximum versions param- 
eter, identified by the keyword MXVR, specifies this limit. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned constant. The range is 
1 < N < 64, where N is the parameter value. This value specifies the number 
of versions allowed at the node. When CAT establishes the node, only the 
first version is cataloged. Other versions may be added later through CATV 
statements, up to the maximum specified by the MXVR parameter. The ver- 
sion cataloged is absolute version 0, the flagged version. It will remain the 
flagged version until another version is cataloged through the CATV state- 
ment or until a CHG statement specifies a different flagged version. Auto- 
matic sequencing at the node is activated by creating the node. This feature 
remains active, sequencing subsequent versions cataloged by CATV state- 
ments, until it is deactivated by a CHG statement. 



7-31 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



Default: The maximum versions parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the 
operating System assumes that only one version will be permitted at the node. 

7-60 ACCESS CONTROL STATE (ACST) 

The access control state parameter, identified by the keyword ACST, speci- 
fies the degree of control the system will maintain over access to the node. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keywords NO, PART or FULL. 
NO specifies no access control; i.e., all users may read, write and execute 
versions of the file at the node. PART specifies partial access control. 
This means that all users may read and execute versions. FULL specifies 
full access control, restricting access to the versions at the node to qualified 
users only. Users are qualified by being specified in the Access Control 
List with the appropriate attributes. 

Read, write and execute attributes are controlled through the access control 
state of the node. Changing the node's characteristics, stipulated by the own 
attribute, is not permitted on the sole basis of access control. Ownership 
of the node is established through the access control information parameter 
(ACIN) or by creation of the node. 

Default: The parameter may be omitted. If the parameter is omitted, the 
Operating System will not maintain any access control. Users have full 
execute, read and write attributes. The parameter default value is NO. 
This condition does not imply any own attribute; users cannot change the 
characteristics of the node unless they created the node or have established 
ownership through the access control information parameter (ACIN). 

7-61 REFERENCE CONTROL STATE (RFST) 

The reference control state parameter, identified by the keyword RFST, 
specifies whether the Operating System will control users' attempts to pass 
through the node during a catalog search. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keywords NO or FULL. NO 
specifies no reference control; any user may pass through the node during 
a catalog search. FULL specifies full reference control; only qualified users 
may pass through the node. The access control information parameter (ACIN) 
qualifies users by providing them with a reference attribute. 

Default : The parameter is optional. If the parameter is omitted, the Oper- 
ating System will not maintain reference control. Any user can pass through 
the node during each search. The parameter default value is NO. This con- 
dition does not affect the state of access control on the node. 



7-32 ^ dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CAT 



7-62 SON-ADD CONTROL STATE (SON) 

The son-add control state parameter establishes the degree of control exer- 
cised by the Operating System over the addition, of nodes (called sons) to the 
created node. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword SON. Its value is one 
of the keywords NO or FULL. NO specifies no son-add control; any user 
may add son nodes to the node. FULL specifies full son-add control. Only 
qualified users can add son nodes. The access control information param- 
eter (ACIN) provides users with the proper attribute. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, the default value is NO 
and any user can add son nodes. 

7-63 ACCESS CONTROL INFORMATION (ACIN) 

The access control information parameter, identified by the keyword ACIN, 
provides the most comprehensive security measures for the node being cre- 
ated. This parameter establishes valid users and determines the actions 
(attributes) each may take. 

Format: The parameter value is a set of subparameters separated by 
slashes. Each subparameter is a valid user code, followed by an asterisk 
and one or more of the alphabetic characters E, F, O, R, S and W appended 
to the user code. Each character is also separated by an asterisk. These 
values are translated into an Access Control List maintained by Operating 
System for the specified node. 

Each user code becomes the System's identifier for a user permitted activity 
at the node. The alphabetic characters appended to the user code specify the 
attributes being allowed the user. The attributes have the following inter- 
pretations: 



E 


execute 


F 


reference 


O 


own 


R 


read 


S 


son add 



W write 

A maximum of ten user codes can be specified by the ACIN parameter. JSL 
CHG (CHanGe) statements specify additional users. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If it is omitted, only the creator of the 
node automatically possesses all attributes. The creator is, by definition, 
the user identified by the job block user code specified in the job which cre- 
ates the node. No other users are qualified. 



'-33 Advanced Scientific Computer 




GAT 

In subsequent jobs, any user who wants to access, reference or add sons to 
this node must specify one of these user codes in the job block containing any 
statement referencing the node. The node must, of course, have appropriate 
access control permitting these activities. 

NOTE 

The creator of a node specifies the Access 
Control List of the node he creates and is 
automatically the owner of the node. 

7-64 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The access control information parameter (ACIN) interacts with the remain- 
ing three security-creation parameters: access control state, ACST; ref- 
erence control state, RFST; and son-add control state, SON. RFST restricts 
ACST and SON. 

7-65 ACIN AND ACST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies a 
valid user and the actions allowed. The Operating System examines the list 
when exercising the control specified by the ACST parameter. Operating 
System control varies according to the parameter values specified. 

When ACST specifies NO (no access control), the Operating System does not 
examine the Access Control List; the user is given aii access. 

When ACST specifies PART (partial access control), the Operating System 
examines the list for the write attribute. Write access is permitted if the 
user is identified by and possesses the write attribute specified by the Access 
Control List. 

When ACST specifies FULL (full access control), the Operating System ex- 
amines the list for all intents. Only users identified in the list may access 
the node. They may perform only those actions specified by the list. 

7-66 ACIN AND RFST 

The Access Control List generated from the ACIN parameter specifies 
whether a user may pass through the node during a catalog search, depend- 
ing on the RFST parameter. The Operating System exercises the control 
specified by the RFST parameter and varies its action accordingly. 

When RFST specifies NO (no reference control), any user may pass through 
the node. The Operating System does not examine the list and places no re- 
strictions on passage. 

When RFST specifies FULL (full reference control), the Operating System 
examines the list to determine if the user possesses the reference attribute. 



'-34 a dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




CAT 



If so, he may pass; if not, he is denied passage, regardless of the node's 
other states, 

7-67 ACIN AND SON 

The Access Control List generated by ACIN specifies a valid user and his 
assigned attributes. The SON parameter establishes control over addition 
of son to the node. The Operating System varies its actions according to the 
parameter values specified by SON. 

When SON specifies NO (no son-add control), any user intending to add a son 
node may do so. The Operating System does not examine the list. 

When SON specifies FULL (full son-add control) and the user intends to add 
a son node, the Operating System examines the list to determine the user's 
validity and his possession of the son-add attribute. The user may add a 
son node only if he possesses the son-add attribute. 

7-68 RFST, ACST AND SON 

The RFST parameter restricts the ACST and SON parameters. The RFST 
parameter must allow passage through the node before a file at the node may 
be accessed or before any son nodes can be added, regardless of the control 
states imposed by the ACST and SON parameters. 

The ACST and SON parameters have no effect on each other, on the RFST 
parameter, or on ownership of the node. 

7-69 DEVICE TYPE (DTYP) 

The device type parameter is identified by the keyword DTYP and specifies 
if the file is to be allocated on the head-per-track disc, positioning-arm- 
disc, or the device specified in the Operating System default parameter table, 
or a specific channel or module specified by the third subparameter. It also 
indicates whether or not the file can be allocated without regard to physical 
contiguity on disc. 

Format: The parameter value is a set of four subparameter s separated by 
slashes. The first subparameter value pertains to file allocation and is one 
of the keywords TAPE, DSEC, HPT, PAD, or OPID. The meaning of these 
keywords is: 

TAPE - allocate the file on a 9-track, 1/2-inch, 1600-bpi 
magnetic tape 

DSEC - allocate the file on the device specified in the system de- 
fault parameter file (default table) 

HPT - allocate the file on the head-per-track disc 



7_ -3 c 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



PAD - allocate the file on the positioning-arm-disc 

OPID - allocate the file on the specific channel or module given 
by the third subparameter. 

The second subparameter pertains to physical contiguity on disc of the file 
and its value is one of the keywords NOCNTG or CNTG where: 

NOCNTG - file can be allocated without regard to contiguity. 
This is the default value. 

CNTG - File must be allocated on physically contiguous disc; 

if the file is greater than or equal to a module; alloca- 
tion on each module will be contiguous and the allocation 
will start at the beginning of each module. 

The third subparameter is used in conjunction with the OPID keyword of the 
first subparameter and must be specified if OPID is used. The operator ID 
is a character string indicating a specific device related channel or module. 

Examples: 

"DM0" indicates H/T module 0, channel 

"DCHO" indicates H/T channel 

"PADO" indicates PAD spindle 0, 980-0, and TCC-0 

"PCH0" indicates 980-0, and TCC-0 

The fourth subparameter pertains to the setting of the initial allocation of the 
cataloged copy of the file to the original files current end-of-file or current 
allocation. This subparameter is identified by one of the keywords CEOF or 
CALL where: 

CEOF - means set the initial allocation of the cataloged copy of the 
file to the original file's current end-of-file. 

CALL - means set the initial allocation of the cataloged copy of the 
file to the original file's current allocation. 

Default: The DTYP parameter is optional. When it is omitted, the Operat- 
ing System assumes TAPE and NOCNTG, which indicates the file will be 
allocated on 1/2-inch, 9-track, 1600 bpi magnetic tape and the file may be 
allocated without regard to contiguity. 

Restrictions : If the OPID keyword is used as the first subparameter the 
third subparameter, operator ID, must be specified. Otherwise, the third 
subparameter must not be specified. When the first subparameter is TAPE, 
the second, third, and fourth subparameter s are not valid. 



7 " 3 ° /\ dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CAT 

Examples: 

DTYP=OPID/CNTG/DM0 

DTYP=HPT 

DTYP=/CNTG 

DTYP=OPID//DCH0 

In the first example the file will be contiguous on the head-per- track disc 
module 0. In the second example the file will not necessarily be contiguous 
on the head-per-track disc. In the third example the file will be contiguous 
and on the device specified in the system default parameter table. In the 
fourth example the file will not necessarily be contiguous on the head-per- 
track disc channel 0. 

7-70 RETENTION PERIOD (RE TP) 

When a tape file is cataloged by the CAT statement, the number of days the 
user wants it retained can be specified. The retention period parameter, 
identified by the keyword RETP, specifies the length of retention time. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned constant. 

The Operating System converts the specified number of days to an expiration 
date and records it in the Tape Volume Catalog for both standard labeled 
(SL) and unlabeled (NL) tape volumes. The Operating System also records 
the date on the standard labeled tapes, but not on unlabeled tapes. 

Default : This parameter is optional. If omitted, the parameter is given a 
default value defined by the installation. 

The retention period parameter is valid only for files that are output to tape 
volumes. DTYP=TAPE or in conjunction with SRC=TP or FT. If ; a file will 
remain on the secondary disc, RETP has no meaning. Therefore, if 
DTYP=DSEC, RETP should not be used. 

7-71 SOURCE (SRC) 

Accurate use of the CAT statement hinges on one parameter, the source 
parameter (SRC). The source parameter specifies the source device on 
which the to-be-cataloged file resides. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword SRC. Its value is one 
of the keywords: DSEC, TP or FT, one of which may be selected. The key- 
word DSEC specifies that the file is located on the secondary disc. TP spe- 
cifies a half-inch tape volume and FT specifies a one-inch tape volume (field 
tape) . 



7 "3 7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



Default: If the source parameter is not specified, the Operating System as- 
sumes the default of DSEC (file location is secondary disc). Normal cata- 
log functions are used. 

Besides specifying the source device of the file, SRC flags the cataloging 
function as either normal or special processing. SRC=DSEC indicates normal 
processing. SRC=TP or FT indicates the special feature: the file is cata- 
loged, but is not buffered to disc. It remains on tape. 

7_72 SPECIAL CATALOGING FUNCTION 

The special cataloging function of the CAT statement also creates a node in 
the catalog and catalogs the first version of the file. However, in this spe- 
cial case, the file being cataloged must be a tape file and is never buffered 
to disc for the cataloging activities. 

All of the parameters pertinent to normal cataloging functions are required 
for this special feature except ACNM, DTYP. In addition, the following 
parameters must be considered: 

LABL - label 

FORG - file organization 

EFID - external file identification 



BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



- disc reservation 



DEN - tape density 

TRKS - tracks 

RCTL - recording control 

7-73 FILE ORGANIZATION (FORG) 

The file organization parameter specifies the organization of the file. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword FORG. It consists of 
one subparameter selected from two keywords: PS and DS. 

PS - the file is organized sequentially. 

DS - the file is organized as direct secondary. 

Default: The default value is PS if the parameter is omitted. FORG is valid 
only when the source parameter (SRC) specifies that the to-be-cataloged file 
resides on half-inch or one-inch tape volumes. If SRC is not specified, its 
default value is secondary disc (DSEC); if SRC=DSEC, the parameter speci- 
fies secondary disc. If SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC, the FORG parameter 
is invalid and will be ignored if coded. 



7-38 /\ dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CAT 



7-74 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The keyword EFID identifies the external file identification parameter. It 
specifies the identification numbers of the volumes that contain the cataloged 
file. Identifiers of all tape volumes containing the file must be declared. 
The EFID parameters must be coded in the sequence that the tapes are to be 
read. 

Format; The parameter value is a character string of one to six characters. 
If the string is enclosed in quotation marks, blanks in the string are retained; 
if the string is not so enclosed, any embedded blanks are eliminated. 

Tape identification labels are assigned to volumes by the installation at the 
time they are submitted or generated. The user is informed of the external 
labels of his files at that time. 

Default; If SRC=DSEC or is not specified, the EFID parameter is invalid and 
ignored if coded. 

7-75 LABEL (LABL) 

The label parameter, identified by the keyword LABL, describes character- 
istics of the tape volume on which the file resides. 

Format; The parameter is comprised of two subparameters: label type and 
file position. Both subparameters are positional, but not mandatory. Both 
must be separated by a slash (/), if used. 

The first subparameter (position) specifies the desired position of the file on 
the tape volume. The subparameter value is either 1 or another constant, 
where the range is 1 < n < 255. 

The second subparameter (label type) specifies the type of label on the tape 
volume. The value is either the keyword SL or NL. SL specifies that the 
tape volume has standard labels. NL specifies no labels. 

If SL is specified explicitly or by default and an EFID is specified, the Sys- 
tem requests that the correct tape volume be supplied. If a tape volume can- 
not be verified as standard labeled, the operator must cancel the request. 

If NL is specified and the tape volume cannot be verified as non-labeled, the 
operator must cancel the request. 

The position and label type subparameters are interactive. These interac- 
tions are interpreted as: 

Label Type Position Interpretation 

SL n n = file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is a function of the standard 
label format. 



7 " * " Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



Label Type Position . Interpretation 

NL n n = file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is n-1. 

The LABEL parameter depends on the SRC and DTYP parameters. If SRC= 
DSEC or defaults to DSEC, the LABL parameter has no meaning. If DYTP= 
TAPE, the LABL parameter being specified will cause the operating system 
to abort the process. 

Default; The label parameter is optional and may be omitted. In addition, 
each subparameter is optional. If the entire parameter is omitted, the Op- 
erating System assumes the following values: 

position 1 position to first file on volume 

label type SL standard labels 

If one of the subparameter s is omitted, the Operating System assumes the 
appropriate value from those defined above. If the first subparameter is 
omitted, the separating slash must be used in front of the last subparameter. 
If the second subparameter is omitted, the separating slash should be left 
off. For example: 

position subparameter omitted LABL = /NL 

label type subparameter omitted LABL = 2 

7-76 TAPE DENSITY (DEN) 

The keyword DEN identifies the tape density parameter. DEN specifies the 
recording density in bits-per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes designated 
by the EFID parameters. All tape volumes specified must have the same 
density. 

Format: The parameter value is 1600, 800, 712, 556, 356, or 200. The 
key 1600 specifies the tape density is 1600 bpi; 800 specifies 800 bpi; 712 
specifies 712 bpi; etc. If the source parameter (SRC) specifies that the 
source device is half-inch tape (SRC=TP), either 1600, 800, 556 or 200 can 
be selected. If SRC specifies one -inch tape (SRC=FT), either 712 or 356 
may be selected. 

Default: The tape density parameter is optional. If omitted, the value is 
1600 bpi. 

The DEN parameter is invalid if SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC. 

7-77 TAPE RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) 

The tape recording track parameter, identified by the keyword TRKS, spec- 
ifies if the given tape is a seven-track or a nine-track tape. 



' " A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CAT 



Format: The parameter value is one of the keynumbers 9 or 7 to designate 
either the nine-track or the seven-track tape respectively. 

Default: The tape recording track parameter can be omitted. The default 
is to nine-track tape. If the tape recording track parameter specification 
or default is different than the actual tape configuration the system aborts the 
input /output operation. 

7-78 RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) 

The recording control parameter allows for the specification of a parity, 
translation and data conversion mode. This parameter is applicable only if 
seven-track tape is being processed. It is identified by the keyword RCTL 
and the keyword values are: 

O - odd parity without translation or conversion 

E - even parity without translation or conversion 

T - odd parity with translation but no conversion 

C - odd parity with conversion but no translation 

ET - even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Default: If the RCTL parameter is omitted, and seven-track tape is desig- 
nated, the default is ET or even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Data Translation: Data translation refers to the ability to transform data 
recorded in BCD interchange to EBCDIC and vice versa. Since each BCD 
code is a six-bit value, upon input the six bits are translated into the corre- 
sponding eight-bit EBCDIC value. For output operations the eight-bit 
EBCDIC value is translated into its six-bit BCD representation. 

Data Conversion: The data conversion option makes it possible to: write 
eight-bit binary data on seven-track tape. For output operations, every 
three bytes of data are written as four tape characters. For input operations, 
every four tape characters are written as three bytes of data. Figure 7-2 
illustrates this data conversion. 





DATA BYTE 1 










DATA BYTE 


2 






DATA BYTE 3 







12 3 4 5 


6 


7 





1 


2 


3 4 


5 6 


,|. 


1 


2 


3 4 5 6 


7 


B 


A 8 4 2 1 


B 


A 


8 


4 


2 


ffl 


A 8 


4 2 


1 


F 


A 8 4 2 


1 




TAPE CHAR 1 




TAPE 


CHAR 


2 




TAPE 


CHAR 3 






TAPE CHAR 4 





Figure 7-2. Data Conversion 



7-41 A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CAT 



7-79 DISC RESERVATION (SECT, BAND, WORD OR BYTE) 

The disc space parameter specifies the management of disc space for the 
named file throughout the job when it is assigned. 

Format: The disc space parameter is identified by the keywords SECT, 
BAND, WORD or BYTE. Sector reservations are in units of 64 each. If the 
requested number of sectors is not a multiple of 64, the Operating System 
rounds it to the next higher multiple of 64. 

SECT specifies the parameter in sector units (64 words each). BAND speci- 
fies the parameter in band units (256 sectors each). 

WORD specifies that the parameter value is expressed in word units given 
in thousands (WORD=15 is 15, 000 words). When the value specified is not 
a multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

BYTE specifies that the parameter value is expressed in byte units given in 
thousands (BYTE=12 is 12, 000 bytes). When this value as specified is not 
a multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

The parameter value is an unsigned constant less than 999999 iq and may be 
from one to six digits. 

Default : The parameter is optional. If omitted, an installation-defined 
value is used. The parameter is valid only for special catalog processing. 
It is meaningless if SRC=DSEC or SRC is not specified (SRC defaults to DSEC) 

7-80 PARAMETER INTERACTION SUMMARY 



Parameter specification depends on the source (SRC) parameter. Certain 
parameters apply to normal cataloging functions; others to the special func- 
tion. The following description summarizes which parameters may be used 
for each case, normal and special processing, respectively. 

7-81 SRC = DSEC 

When the source device is secondary disc, the file to be cataloged has been 
created on or buffered to the secondary disc. In cataloging this file, the 
following parameters apply: 

pathname mandatory 

access name (ACNM) mandatory 

versions (MXVR) optional 

catalog security (ACST, RFST, SON, ACIN) optional 

output location (DTYP) optional 

file retention (RETP) optional (valid only 

for tape files) 



7-42 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



7-82 SRC = TP OR FT 

"When the source device is a half-inch or one-inch tape 
be cataloged exists but is not buffered to the secondary 
this file, the following parameters apply: 

pathname 

versions (MXVR) 

catalog security (ACTS, RFST, SON, ACIN) 

file retention (RETP) 

label information (LABL) 

file organization (FORG) 

external file identifier (EFID) 

disc reservation /BAND\ 
[SECT \ 
I WORD I 
\BYTE/ 

tape density (DEN) 

tracks (TRKS) 

recording control (RCTL) 



volume, the file to 
disc. In cataloging 

mandatory 

optional 

optional 

optional 

optional 

optional 

mandatory 

optional 



optional (manda- 
tory for SRC=FT) 

optional 

optional 



7-83 EXAMPLES 



The following examples illustrate the use of the CAT statement for normal 
cataloging functions. 

1. File Source is Secondary Disc 

/ JSL 

s 

I CAT A/B/C/D, ACNM=TFILE, MXVR=3,DTYP=DSEC; 
SRC=DSEC 

$ 

I JSL 



Given Values 
A/B/C/D 



ACNM=TFILE 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node being created. This 
parameter is mandatory. 

TFILE identifies file to the job. This param- 
eter is mandatory. 



7-43 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




Given Values 
MXVR=3 
DTYP=DSEC 
SRC=DSEC 



CAT 



Node can have three versions associated with it. 

File will remain on disc after being cataloged. 

Specifies that the file to be cataloged is cur- 
rently on disc. In this case, SRC could be 
omitted since its default value is DSEC. 



Default Values 
ACST=NO 

RFST=NO 

SON=NO 

ACIN 



Invalid Parameters 
RETP 



FORG 

LABL 

EFID 

DEN 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE 

TRKS 

RCTL 



2. All Defaults Operative 



No access control is established. Any user 
can access the node and read, write and/or 
execute versions of the file at that node. 

No reference control is established. Any user 
may pass through the node during a catalog 
search. 

No son-add control is established. Any user 
may add son nodes to the node being created. 

Only the creator of the node automatically pos- 
sesses all attributes. The creator is the user 
identified by the job block user code specified 
in the job which creates the node. No other 
users are qualified. 



Retention period is invalid for any file remain- 
ing on the secondary disc. 



These parameters apply only when SRC=TP or 
FT. 



/ JSL 

/ CAT Q/R/S, ACNM=THIRSTY 



7-44 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




Given Values 
Q/R/S 



ACNM=THIRSTY 



CAT 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de^- 

t -i v* <a £3 1 /-\r« of i rvn r-\T ir\ r>*r\ a V\ o t t-» rr n vpofprl r ~F l-» n q 

J.1UC0 xuv>Clvi«ju vj. ii<jU^ k/Cixig Li CulCUi -L. ill S 

parameter is mandatory. 

THIRSTY identifies file to the job. This param- 
eter is mandatory. 



Default Values 

The default values are the same as described in the first example 
of file cataloging. The values are summarized in the following list: 

MXVR = 1 

ACST = NO 

RFST = NO 

SON = NO 

ACIN = all attributes for creator of node 

DTYP = TAPE 

RETP = installation-defined value 

SRC = DSEC 

Invalid Parameters 

FORG1 

LABL 

EFID 

DEN 

TRKS 

RCTL 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE 

The following examples illustrate the use of the CAT statement for special 
catalog processing. 

3. Half-Inch Tape Source 

/ JSL 

s 

/ CAT T/R, MXVR=3, SRC=TP, FORG=DS, LABL=2/NL; 
EFID=2340 

5 

/ JSL 



apply only when SRC=TP or FT. 



7-45 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



Given Values 
T/R 

MXVR=3 
SRC=TP 



FORG=DS 
LABL=2/NL 



EFID=2340 



Default Values 

ACST=NO 



RFST=NO 



SON=NO 



ACIN 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node being created. This 
parameter is mandatory. 

Node can have three versions associated with it. 

The source device of the file to be cataloged is 
a nine -track, half -inch, magnetic tape volume. 
This parameter also signifies that special cat- 
alog processing is used. 

The file being cataloged has a direct secondary 
organization. 

When the cataloged file is subsequently input to 
a job, File Management uses this information 
to input the tape file. The parameter specifies 
that positioning is to the second file and that the 
tape volume is unlabeled. For all unlabeled 
tape volumes, a JSL FD statement must be 
used when the file is subsequently assigned to 
a job to specify the file's logical character- 
istics. 

The external volume identifier specifies that 
the file is contained on tape volume 2340. This 
parameter is mandatory when SRC=TP or FT. 



No access control is established. Any user can 
access the node and read, write and/or exe- 
cute versions at that node. 

No reference control is established. Any user 
may pass through the node during a catalog 
search. 

No son-add control is established. Any user 
may add son nodes to the node being created. 

Only the creator of the node possesses all 
attributes. The creator is the user identified 
by the job block user code specified in the job 
which creates the node. No other users are 
qualified. 



7-46 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



Default Values 
RETP 



DEN 

TRKS 
RCTL 

BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



The System assumes an installation-defined 

venue t,c> Dc ^uiivciiiCu n_» oj.4. CApiiaUuu udic. 

The expiration date is written to the Tape 
Volume Catalog, but not to the specified un- 
labeled tapes. 

The System assumes 1600 bpi as the density 
value of the tape volume containing the speci- 
fied file. 

The default value is nine -track tape. 

Recording control is not applicable for nine 
track tape. 

The System assumes an installation-defined 
value for disc space allocation when the cat- 
aloged file is used. 



Invalid Parameters 

ACNM 
DTYP 



These parameters apply only when SRC=DSEC. 



4. One-Inch Tape Source 
/ JSL 

; 

/ CAT S/V, SRC=FT, DEN=712, EFID=10000 
/ JSL 



Given Values 
S/V 



SRC=FT 



DEN=712 
EFID=10000 



The pathname S/V names the cataloged file and 
determines the location of the node being cre- 
ated. This parameter is mandatory. 

A file existing on one-inch magnetic tape must 
be specified as FT on the SRC parameter. 
DSEC designates the source device as secondary 
disc; TP designates half-inch tape. 

The density is specified as 712 bpi; this param- 
eter value is mandatory for one -inch tapes. 

The external file identifier specifies the file is 
contained on tape volume 10000. This param- 
eter is mandatory for SRC = TP or FT. 



7-47 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CAT 



Default Values 



FORG 


= PS 


LABL 


= 1/SL 


MXVR 


= 1 


ACST 


= NO 


RFST 


= NO 


SON 


= NO 


ACIN 


(creator gets all attributes) 


RETP 


(installation defined value) 


BAND 




SECT 
WORD 


•[installation defined values} 


BYTE 




Invalid Parameters 



ACNM 
DTYP 
TRKS 
RCTL 



7 48 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



7-84 THE CATV STATEMENT 

The CAT alog Version (CATV) statement initiates the entry of a version at an 
existing node in the catalog. The statement does not deal with the catalog 
system on a node level; hence, catalog protection must have been established 
previously when the node was constructed. The user must possess the own 
attribute to use the CATV statement. 

The version number assigned to the file being cataloged is calculated by the 
Operating System by adding one to the version number last cataloged with a 
GAT or CATV statement. If the new number equals the current maximum 
number of versions at the node, it is set to zero. Also, if the automatic 
sequencing flag is on in the node, the new version becomes the flagged ver- 
sion. If the automatic sequencing flag is off, the flagged version is not 
changed. 

Like the CAT statement, the CATV statement also serves a specialized func- 
tion: it enables the user to catalog a tape file directly without buffering the 
file to secondary disc. The parameters applicable to this feature are ex- 
clusive; they are not valid for other cataloging functions. 

The CATV statement resembles the CAT statement, except that the param- 
eters dealing with the node structure of the catalog are not a part of CATV. 



7 " ^ 9 A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CATV 



The general form of the CATV statement is: 



I LABEL 
J 



/ I [Symbol] 

J 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 
\ 
I 



T 

I OPERATION 



CATV 



OPERANDS 



pathname [, ACNM=access name] 
TAPE 1 



[,DTYP= 




DSEC 
HPT 
PAD |/ 
^OPID 

Tn /f CEOF f 
operator ID /j^El) 

[, RETP=retention] 



NOCNTG1 
CNTG J 



DSEC 



[, SRC= j TP 
FT 



] 



[, FORG= 
[, LABL=[ 



— ! ] 

DS) J 
( 1 



][/ 



SJL 
NL 



position 
[, EFID=efidl/efid2/. . . /efidn] 
1600 



][TRKS= \j ] 




[,RCTL= 



J[. 



BAND 
I SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



= number ] 



]] 



7-50 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



The horizontal, broken line separating parameters in the operands field in- 
dicates special- function parameters. The parameters above the line are 
used for normal cataloging functions. Those below the line can be used only 
for special catalog processing. 

The verb CATV must appear in the operation field. The label field, if the 
statement is labeled, must be separated from the operation field with at 
least one blank. If the statement is not labeled, the identifying slash (/) 
must be separated from the operation field with at least one blank. The op- 
eration and operands fields must be separated with at least one blank. 

The parameters in the operands field are positional and keyword parameters. 
The positional parameter must be coded as the first parameter and cannot 
be omitted. The keyword parameters are optional and can be coded in any 
convenient order. 

7-85 NORMAL CATALOGING FUNCTIONS 

Under normal circumstances, any file that is to be cataloged has been cre- 
ated on the secondary disc or is present there as a result of transfer actions 
for disc -buffering requirements of the Operating System. The CATV state- 
ment specifies the cataloging function; the Operating System handles any re- 
quired physical transfers to external devices. 

In the normal case, only certain parameters need be considered. The fol- 
lowing list itemizes the applicable parameters: 

pathname 

ACNM - access name 

DTYP - device type 

RETP - retention 

SRC - source 

The remaining parameters apply only to a special function that bypasses 
disc -buffering requirements and should not be used in conjunction with the 
above parameters. 

7-86 PATHNAME 

The new node must be identified to the catalog system. The pathname param- 
eter, a positional, mandatory parameter, specifies the name and location of 
the node in the catalog. 

Format: The parameter value is one to ten edgenames concatenated by 
slashes (/). The first edgename may be a synonym defined in a PD state- 
ment. The pathname also specifies the location of the node in the catalog. 

Default: None. Pathname must be specified. 



' " 5 * Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



7-87 ACCESS NAME (ACNM) 

The access name parameter, identified by the keyword ACNM, identifies to 
the job the file that is to be cataloged as a version at the specified node. 

Format: The parameter value is the name by which the file is accessible to 
the job. Access name is mandatory for all normal cataloging functions. The 
access name must be a valid ASC symbol. 

Default: The only exception to the mandatory status of the ACNM parameter 
is the special cataloging function. When the source parameter is set to the 
value designating the source device as tape (SRC = TP or FT), ACNM be- 
comes optional. In thrs case, it should be omitted. ACNM has no meaning 
if a tape file is being cataloged under the spcial feature. The pathname, 
which is mandatory under all circumstances, identifies the file to be cata- 
loged to the catalog system. 

7-88 DEVICE TYPE (DTYP) 

The device type parameter is identified by the keyword DTYP and specifies 
if the file is to be allocated on the head-per-track disc, positioning-arm- 
disc, or the device specified in the Operating System default parameter 
table, or a specific channel or module specified by the third subparameter. 
It also indicates whether or not the file can be allocated without regard to 
physical contiguity on disc. 

Format: The parameter value is a set of four subparameter s separated by 
slashes. The first subparameter value pertains to file allocation and is one 
of the keywords TAPE, DSEC, HPT, PAD, or OPID. The meaning of these 
keywords is: 

TAPE - allocate the file on a 9-track, 1/2-inch, 1600-bpi 
magnetic tape 

DSEC - allocate the file on the device specified in the system de- 
fault parameter file (default table) 

HPT - allocate the file on the head-per-track disc 

PAD - allocate the file on the positioning-arm-disc 

OPID - allocate the file on the specific channel or module given 
by the third subparameter. 

The second subparameter pertains to physical contiguity on disc of the file 
and its value is one of the keywords NOCNTG or CNTG where: 

NOCNTG - file can be allocated without regard to contiguity. 
This is the default value. 

CNTG - File must be allocated on physically contiguous disc; 

if the file is greater than or equal to a module; allocation 



7 R2 

' " D Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



on each module will be contiguous and the allocation 

Will StetX't etc liic ucgiJ.Jj.u.J.J.g ui cav/ii j.jlj.uu.u.ac 

The third subparameter is used in conjunction with the OPID keyword of the 
first subparameter and must be specified if OPID is used. The operator ID 
is a character string indicating a specific device related channel or module. 

Examples: 

"DM0" indicates H/T module 0, channel 

"DCHO" indicates H/T channel 

"PADO" indicates PAD spindle 0, 980-0, and TCC-0 

"PCH0" indicates 980-0, and TCC-0 

The fourth subparameter pertains to the setting of ithe initial allocation of the 
cataloged copy of the file to the original files current end-of-file or current 
allocation. This subparameter is identified by one of the keywords CEOF 
or CALL where: 

CEOF - means set the initial allocation of the cataloged copy of the 
file to the original file's current end-of-file. 

CALL - means set the initial allocation of the cataloged copy of the 
file to the original file's current allocation. 

Default : The DTYP parameter is optional. When it is omitted, the Operat- 
ing System assumes TAPE and NOCNTG, which indicates the file will be 
allocated on 1/2-inch, 9-track, 1600 bpi magnetic tape and the file may be 
allocated without regard to contiguity. 

Restrictions : If the OPID keyword is used as the first subparameter the 
third subparameter, operator ID, must be specified. Otherwise, the third 
subparameter must not be specified. When the first subparameter is TAPE, 
the second, third, and fourth subparameter s are not valid. 

Examples: 

DTYP=OPID/CNTG/DM0 

DTYP=HPT 

DTYP=/CNTG 

DTYP=OPID//DCH0 

In the first example the file will be contiguous on the head-per- track disc 
module 0. In the second example the file will not necessarily be contiguous 
on the head-per-track disc. In the third example the file will be contiguous 
and on the device specified in the system default parameter table. In the 
fourth example the file will not necessarily be contiguous on the head-per- 
track disc channel 0. 



7 " 5 3 4 dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CATV 



7-89 RETENTION PERIOD (RETP) 

When a tape file is cataloged by the CATV statement, the number of days the 
user wants it retained can be specified. The retention period parameter, 
identified by the keyword RETP, specifies the length of retention time. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned constant. 

The Operating System converts the specified number of days to an expiration 
date and records it in the Tape Volume Catalog for both standard labeled 
(SL) and unlabeled (NL) tape volumes. The Operating System also records 
the date on the standard labeled tapes, but not on unlabeled tapes. 

Default: This parameter is optional. If omitted, the parameter is given a 
default value defined by the installation. 

The retention period parameter is valid only for files that are output to tape 
volumes. DTYP=TAPE or in conjunction with SRC=TP or FT. If a file will 
remain on the secondary disc, RETP has no meaning. Therefore, if 
DTYP=DSEC, RETP should not be used. 

7-90 SOURCE (SRC) 

Accurate use of the CATV statement hinges on one parameter, the source 
parameter (SRC). The source parameter specifies the source device on 
which the to-be-cataloged file resides. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword SRC. Its value is one 
of the keywords: DSEC, TP or FT, one of which may be selected. The 
keyword DSEC specifies that the file is located on the secondary disc. TP 
specifies a half-inch tape volume and FT specifies a one-inch tape volume. 

Default: If the source parameter is not specified, the Operating System as- 
sumes the default of DSEC (file location is secondary disc). Normal catalog 
functions are used. 

Besides specifying the source device of the file, SRC flags the cataloging 
function as either normal or special processing. SRC=DSEC indicates normal 
processing. SRC=TP or FT indicates the special feature; the file is cata- 
loged, but is not buffered to disc. It remains on tape. 

7-91 SPECIAL CATALOGING FUNCTION 

The special cataloging function of the CATV statement also catalogs a version 
at an existing node. However, in this special case, the file being cataloged 
must be a tape file and is never buffered to disc for the cataloging activities. 



7-54 /\ dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CATV 



All of the parameters pertinent to normal cataloging functions are required 

tor tllia BpeuietJ. icaiurc CALcpi. -ryvj.LNJ.Vx euiu l/ i i i ■ jj.x auuinuai, uxx^ j-uiiu vVxjLxg 

parameters must be considered: 
LABL - label 
FORG - file organization 
EFID - external file identification 

BAND 

SECT 

- disc reservation 
WORD 

BYTE 

DEN - tape density 

TRKS - track 

RCTL recording control 

7-92 FILE ORGANIZATION (FORG) 

The file organization parameter specifies the organization of the file. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword FORG. It consists of 
one subparameter selected from two keywords: PS and DS. 

PS - the file is organized sequentially. 

DS - the file is organized as direct secondary. 

The default value is PS if the parameter is omitted. 

Default: FORG is valid only when the source parameter (SRC) specifies that 
to -be -cataloged file resides on half-inch or one-inch tape volumes. If SRC 
is not specified, its default value is secondary disc (DSEC); if SRC=DSEC, 
the parameter specifies secondary disc. If SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC, 
the FORG parameter is invalid and will be ignored if coded. 

7-93 LABEL (LABL) 

The label parameter, identified by the keyword LABL, describes character- 
istics of the tape volume on which the file resides. 

Format: The parameter is comprised of two subparameter s: label type and 
file position. Both subparameter s are positional, but not mandatory. Both 
must be separated by a slash (/), if used. 

The first subparameter (position) specifies the desired position of the file on 
the tape volume. The subparameter value is either 1 or another constant, 
where the range is 1 < n < 255. 



7-55 a dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CATV 



The second subparameter (label type) specifies the type of label on the tape 
volume. The value is either the keyword SL or NL. SL specifies the tape 
volume has standard labels. NL specifies no labels. 

If SL is specified explicitly or by default and an EFID is specified, the Sys- 
tem requests that the correct tape volume be supplied. If a tape volume can- 
not be verified as standard labeled, the operator must cancel the request. 

If NL is specified and the tape volume cannot be verified as non-labeled, the 
operator must cancel the request. 

The position and label type subparameter s are interactive. These interac- 
tions are interpreted as: 

Label Type Position Interpretation 

SL n n = file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is a function of the standard 
label format. 

NL n n = file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is n-1. 

The LABL parameter depends on the SRC and DTYP parameters. If 
SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC, the LABL parameter has no meaning. If 
DTYP=TAPE, the LABL parameter being specified will cause the Operating 
System to abort the process. 

Default: The label parameter is optional and may be omitted. In addition, 
each subparameter is optional. If the entire parameter is omitted, the Op- 
erating System assumes the following values: 

position 1 position to first file on volume 

label type SL standard labels 

If one of the subparameter s is omitted, the Operating System assumes the 
appropriate value from those defined above. If the first subparameter is 
omitted, the separating slash must be used in front of the last subparameter. 
If the second subparameter is omitted, the separating slash should be left 
off. For example: 

position subparameter omitted LABL = /NL 

label type subparameter omitted LABL = 2 

7-94 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The keyword EFID identifies the external file identification parameter. It 
specifies the identification numbers of the volumes that contain the cataloged 



7-56 /\ dvanced Scien tific Computer 




GATV 



file. Identifiers of ail tape volumes containing the file must be declared. 

n-iv _ n-PTFi ~ _ i- _ „ „ ,~, .. «4- 1~~ ** ^A a.A ivy 4-V> a cannanpo fVi af f VlO f2T\PC a T* £» frv 

be read. 

Format: The parameter value is a character string of one to six characters. 
If the string is enclosed in quotation marks, blanks in the string are re- 
tained; if the string is not so enclosed, any embedded blanks are eliminated. 

Tape identification labels are assigned to volumes by the installation at the 
time they are submitted or generated. The user is informed of the external 
labels of his files at that time. 

Default: If SRC=DSEC or is not specified, the EFID parameter is invalid and 
ignored if coded. 

7-95 TAPE DENSITY (DEN) 

The keyword DEN identifies the tape density parameter. DEN specifies the 
recording density in bits-per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes designated 
by the EFID parameters. All tape volumes specified must have the same 
density. 

Format: The parameter value is 1600, 800, 712, 556, 356, or 200. The 
key 1600 specifies the tape density is 1600 bpi; 800 specifies 800 bpi; 712 
specifies 712 bpi; etc. If the source parameter (SRC) specifies that the 
source device is half-inch tape (SRC=TP), 1600, 800, 556 or 200 may be se- 
lected. If SRC specifies- one-inch tape (SRC=FT), either 712 or 356 may be 
selected. 

Default: The tape density parameter is optional. If omitted, the value is 
1600 bpi for nine-track tape and 800 bpi for seven-track tapes. 

The DEN parameter is invalid if SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC. 
7-96 TAPE RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) 

The tape recording track parameter, identified by the keyword TRKS, spe- 
cifies if the given tape is a seven-track or a nine-track tape. 

Format: The parameter value is one of the keynumbers 9 or 7 to designate 
either the nine-track or the seven-track tape respectively. 

Default: The tape recording track parameter can be omitted. The default is 
to nine-track tape. If the tape recording track parameter specification or 
default is different than the actual tape configuration the system aborts the 
input/ output operation. 



7-57 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



7-97 RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) 

The recording control parameter allows for the specification of a parity, 
translation and data conversion mode. This parameter is applicable only if 
seven-track tape is being processed. It is identified by the keyword RCTL 
and the keyword values are: 

O - odd parity without translation or conversion 

E - even parity without translation or conversion 

T - odd parity with translation but no conversion 

C - odd parity with conversion but no translation 

ET - even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Default: If the RCTL parameter is omitted, and seven-track tape is desig- 
nated, the default is ET or even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Data Translation : Data translation refers to the ability to transform data 
recorded in BCD interchange to EBCDIC and vice versa. Since each BCD 
code is a six-bit value, upon input the six bits are translated into the corre- 
sponding eight-bit EBCDIC value. For output operations the eight-bit 
EBCDIC value is translated into its six-bit BCD representation. 

Data Conversion: The data conversion option makes it possible to write 
eight-bit binary data on seven-track tape. For output operations, every 
three bytes of data are written as four tape characters. For input opera- 
tions, every four tape characters represent three bytes of data. Figure 7-2 
illustrates this data conversion. 

7-98 DISC RESERVATION (BAND, SECT, WORD OR BYTE) 

The disc space parameter specifies the management of disc space for the 
named file throughout the job when it is assigned. 

Format: The disc space parameter is identified by the keywords BAND, 
SECT, WORD or BYTE. Sector reservations are in units of 64 each. If the 
requested number of sectors is not a multiple of 64, the Operating System 
rounds it to the next higher multiple of 64. 

BAND specifies the parameter in band units (256 sectors each). SECT spe- 
cifies the parameter in sector units (64 words each). 

WORD specifies that the parameter value is expressed in word units given in 
thousands (WORD=15 is 15, 000 words). When the value specified is not a 
multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

BYTE specifies that the parameter value is expressed in byte units given in 
thousands (BYTE=12 is 12,000 bytes). When this value as specified is not a 
multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 



' " ^ ° A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CATV 



The parameter value is an unsigned constant less than 999999 iq ana m ay be 



from, une to six u.igits, 



Default: The parameter is optional. If omitted, an installation -de fined 
value is used. The parameter is valid only for'special catalog processing. 
It is meaningless if SRC=DSEC or SRC is not specified (SRC defaults to 
DSEC). 

7-99 PARAMETER INTERACTION SUMMARY 

Parameter specification depends on the source (SRC) parameter. Certain 
parameters apply to normal cataloging functions; others to the special func- 
tion. The following description summarizes which parameters may be used 
for each case, normal and special processing, respectively. 

7-100 SRC = DSEC 

When the source device is secondary disc, the file to be cataloged has been 
created on or buffered to the secondary disc. In cataloging this file, the 
following parameters apply: 

mandatory 
mandatory 



pathname 

access name (ACNM) 



output location (DTYP) 
file retention (RETP) 



optional 

optional (valid only 
for tape files) 



7-101 SRC = TP OR FT 

When the source device is a half-inch or one-inch tape volume, the file to be 
cataloged exists but is not buffered to the secondary disc. In cataloging this 
file, the following parameters apply: 



pathname 

file retention (RETP) 

label information (LABL) 

file organization (FORG) 

external file identifiers (EFID) 

disc reservation /BAND \ 
I SECT \ 
I WORD I 

\byte/ 

tape density (DEN) 



mandatory 

optional 

optional 

optional 

mandatory 

optional 



optional (mandatory 
for SRC=FT) 



7-59 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




tracks (TRKS! 



recording control (RCTL) 



CATV 



optional (half-inch 
tape) 

optional (seven-track 
tape) 



7-102 EXAMPLES 



The following examples illustrate the use of the CATV statement for normal 
cataloging functions. 

1. File Source is Secondary Disc 

/ JSL 

$' 

/ CATV A/B/C/D, ACNM=TFILE, DTYP=DSEC, SRC=DSEC 

/ JSL 



Given Values 
A/B/C/D 

ACNM=TFILE 

DTYP=DSEC 
SRC=DSEC 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node. This parameter is 
mandatory. 

TFILE identifies file to the job. This param- 
eter is mandatory. 

TTtIo ixri 1 ] i>pTYiain r\r\ Hi or affpr hpi ■*"> <7 r> af a 1 r»cr <=>rl 

Specifies that the file to be cataloged is cur- 
rently on disc. In this case, SRC could be 
omitted since its default value is DSEC. 



Invalid Parameters 
RETP 

FORG 1 

LABL 

EFID 

TRKS 

RCTL 

DEN 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE J 



Retention period is invalid for any file remain- 
ing on the secondary disc. 



These parameters apply only when SRC = TP or 

FT. 



7-60 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



2. File - All Defaults Operative 
/ JSL 

5 

/ CATV Q/R/S, ACNM=THIRTY 



Given Values 
Q/R/S 



ACNM=THIRTY 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node. This parameter is 
mandatory. 

THIRTY identifies file to the job. This param. 
eter is mandatory. 



Default Values 

The default values are the same as described in the first example 
of file cataloging. The values are summarized |in the following list: 

DTYP = TAPE 

RETP = installation-defined value 

SRC = DSEC 

Invalid Para meters 

FORG 

LABL 

EFID 

TRKS" 

RCTL 

DEN 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE 



apply only when SRC = TP or FT 



The following examples illustrate the user of the CATV statement for special 
catalog processing. 

3. Half- Inch Tape Source 
/ JSL 

I CATV T/R, SRC = TP, FORG=DS, LABL=2/NL, EFID=2340 

s 

/ JSL 



7-61 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



Given Values 
T/R 



SRC=TP 



FORG=DS 



LABL=2/NL 



EFID=2340 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node. This parameter is 
mandatory. 

The source device of the file to be cataloged is 
half-inch, magnetic tape volume. This param- 
eter also signifies that special catalog process- 
ing is used. 

The file being cataloged has a direct secondary- 
organization. 

When the cataloged file is subsequently input to 
a job, File Management uses this information 
to input the tape file. The parameter specifies 
that positioning is to the second file and that the 
tape volume is unlabeled. For all unlabeled 
tape volumes, a JSL FD statement must be 
used when the file is subsequently assigned to 
a job to specify the file's logical character- 
istics. 

The external volume identifier specifies that 
the file is contained on tape volume 2340. The 
parameter is mandatory when SRC = TP or FT. 



Default Values 
RETP 



DEN 

TRKS 

RCTL 

BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



The System assures an installation-defined 
value to be converted to an expiration date. 
The expiration date is written to the Tape 
Volume Catalog, but not to the specified un- 
labeled tapes. 

The System assumes 1600 bpi as the density 
value of the tape volume containing the speci- 
fied file. 

The default is nine track. 

Not applicable for nine track tape. 

The System assumes an installation-defined 
value for disc space allocation when the cata- 
loged file is used. 



Invalid Parameters 

ACNM1 
DTYP J 



These parameters apply only when SRC=DSEC. 



7-62 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATV 



4. One-Inch Tape Source 
/ JSL 

5 

/ CATV S/V, SRC=FT, DEN=712, EFID= 10000 

J 

/ JSL 



Given Values 
S/V 

SRC=FT 

DEN=712 
EFID=10000 

Default Values 



The pathname S/V names the cataloged file and 
defines the location of the node. This param- 
eter, is mandatory. 

A file existing on one-inch magnetic tape must 
be specified as FT on the SRC parameter. TP 
designates half-inch tape. 

The density is specified to be 712 bpi; this 
parameter is mandatory for one-inch tapes. 

The external file identifier specifies the file is 
contained on tape volume 10000. This param- 
eter is mandatory for SRC=TP or FT. 



FORG = PS 

LABL = 1/SL 

mxvr: = i 

ACST = NO 

RFST = NO 

SON = NO 

ACIN (creator gets all attributes) 

RETP 

BAND 

SECT I installation defined value 

WORD 

BYTE , 

Invalid Parameters 

ACNM 

DTYP 

TRKS 

RCTL 



7-63 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




DELV 



7-103 THE DELV STATEMENT 

The DEL ete Version (DELV) statement deletes a specified version of a file 
at an existing node. Through an optional feature, the, statement also deletes 
all versions of a file cataloged at a node. Deletion means that the version 
becomes null. The process does not alter the specified maximum number of 
versions that can be cataloged at the node. In addition, DELV does not 
change the flagged version number and does not affect the version number 
cataloged at the node by a subsequent version- cataloging JSL statement 
(CATV). To use the DELV statement, the user must possess the own attri- 
bute at the named node. If not, the Operating System aborts the operation. 

The general form of the DELV statement is: 



I LABEL 
J 



T 

I OPERATION 
J 



i i 



OPERANDS 



116 



/ I [Symbol] 
I 



I 



DELV 



. pathname [, VERS= version number] 



I . [,OPT= (option code)] 
i I 



The verb DELV must appear in the operation field. The statement may be 
labeled. Each field must be separated by at least one blank. The operands 
field contains three parameters. The positional parameter is mandatory and 
must be coded as the first parameter. The keyword parameters are optional 
and may be coded in any convenient order. 

7-104 PATHNAME 

The catalog node containing the file version to be deleted must be identified 
to the Operating System. The pathname parameter names and locates the 
node in the catalog. 

Format: The pathname consists of one to ten edgenames concatenated by 
slashes (/). The first edgename may be a synonym defined by a JSL PD 
statement in the current job. The pathname must exist by the time the DELV 
statement specifies it. It may be defined in the current job or in a previous 
job. 

Default: None. Pathname must be specified. 

7-105 VERSION NUMBER (VERS) 

The version parameter, identified by the keyword VERS, initiates the deletion 
of a specified version of an existing node. 



7-64 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




DELV 



Format: The parameter value is a signed or unsigned constant, or a signed 

~-*. 1 1 -r\ el n ■« q A T^K Q-r> c /-. i -Pi <- o f ■! r\r\ T annnanro wariaKIp An nnsianprl value rpfg^fi 

to the absolute version number of the file. The absolute version number is 
determined modulo N, where N is the maximum number of versions allowed 
the file. A signed value refers to a version relative to the flagged version. 

The limits for the parameter values are: 

signed integer, i 0<|i|<63 

unsigned integer, i 0^|i|<N-l, 

where N = maximum number of 
versions. 

signed JSL variable, v -2 31 < v < 2 31 -1 

unsigned JSL variable, v < v < N-l, 

where N = maximum number of 
versions. 

The maximum number of versions has been previously specified by the cat- 
alog statements that created the node - CATBLD, CATN or CAT - or has 
been specified by a modifying statement - CHG. The absolute number of the 
current flagged version is a function of either the number of versions cata- 
loged by CATV statements or the number fixed by a CHG statement. 

Default: The version parameter may be omitted. If so, the Operating Sys- 
tem deletes the flagged version. 

7-106 OPTION (OPT) 

The option parameter, identified by the keyword OPT, enables the user to 
delete all versions at a node. 

Format: The parameter value is the alphabetic code A, enclosed in paren- 
theses. 

Default: If the option parameter is omitted, the Operating System deletes 
the version specified by the VERS parameter or by its default, the flagged 
version. 

7-107 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The version parameter overrides the option parameter. Option A is not 
valid if a version number is specified in the version parameter. The speci- 
fied version will be deleted. 

7-108 EXAMPLES 

The following examples illustrate three uses of the DELV statement. 
/ DELV FILEONE/FILETWO/FILETHRE, VERS = 3 



7 " 6 5 Advanced Scientific Computer 




DELV 



The node, identified by the pathname FILEONE/FILETWO/FILETHRE, 
contains the version to be deleted - absolute version number 3. 

/ DELV Q/R/S, OPT=A 

The node, identified by the pathname Q/R/S, contains the file versions to be 
deleted. All versions at that node will be deleted since the version parameter 
has been omitted and option A specified. 

/ DELV Q/R/S 

All defaults are operative. The flagged version cataloged at node Q/R/S will 
be deleted. 



7 A A 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




RPLV 



7-109 THE RPLV STATEMENT 

The Re PLa ce Version statement (RPLV) replaces a specified version of a 
file at an existing catalog node. This statement does not deal with the cat- 
alog system on a node level; therefore, catalog privacy must have been 
established previously when the node was constructed. To use this statement, 
the user must possess the own attribute at the named mode; otherwise, the 
Operating System aborts the operation. Also, if a version does not exist by 
the given number, the new version is added anyway. If a version does exist, 
it is deleted and the new file is cataloged. 

Like the CAT and CATV statements, the RPLV statement also serves a 
specialized function: it enables the user to replace a version with a tape file 
directly without buffering the file to secondary disc. The parameters appli- 
cable to this feature are exclusive; they are not valid for other cataloging 
functions. 



' " " ' Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



The general form of the RPLV statement is: 



LABEL 



i r 



[Symbol] 



I OPERATION 



RPLV 



I 



OPERANDS 



T 



% pathname, [, ACNM = access name] 



[, VERS = version number] 



|[,DTYP= < 



f TAPE 1 
DSEC 
HPT 
PAD 
OPID J 



[ NOCNTG 
ICNTG 



1/ 



/fCEOFK 
/lr,AT jj J 



I operator ID , [CALL 
[,RETP = retention] 



,[,SRC= 



DSEC 



TP 
I FT 



] 



j[,FORG=(ff}] 

|[' LABL= [(^Tliol) ][ 

Ir.EFID = efidl/efid2/. . . /efidn] 
I"' 

I r 1600 



7 



f — 1]] 



j[,DEN=< 



800 
712 
556 
356 
I 200 J 



>] [,TRKS= ||}] 



I [,RCTL= 



fET 
E 
O 
T 

lc 



| [,DEN= < 



BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



= number] 



7-68 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



The horizontal, broken line separating parameters in the operands field 
indicates special- function parameters. The parameters above the line are 
used for normal cataloging functions. Those below the line can be used only 
for special catalog processing. 

The verb RPLV must appear in the operation field. The label field, if the 
statement is labeled, must be separated from the operation field with at 
least one blank. If the statement is not labeled, the identifying slash (/) 
must be separated from the operation field with at least one blank. The op- 
eration and operands fields must be separated with at least one blank. 

The parameters in the operands field are positional and keyword parameters. 
The positional parameter must be coded as the first parameter and cannot 
be omitted. The keyword parameters are optional and can be coded m any 
convenient order. 

7-110 NORMAL CATALOGING FUNCTIONS 

Under normal circumstances, any file that is to be cataloged has been cre- 
ated on the secondary disc or is present there as a result of transfer actions 
for disc-buffering requirements of the Operating System. The RPLV state- 
ment specifies the cataloging function; the Operating System handles any re- 
quired physical transfers to external devices. 

In the normal case, only certain parameters need be considered. The fol- 
lowing list itemizes the applicable parameters: 

pathname 

ACNM - access name 

DTYP - device type 

RETP - retention 

SRC - source 

VERS - version number 

The remaining parameters apply only to a special function that bypasses 
disc -buffering requirements and should not be used. 

7-111 PATHNAME 

The node must be identified to the catalog system. The pathname parameter, 
a positional, mandatory parameter, specifies the name and location of the 
node in the catalog. 

Format; The parameter value is one to ten edgenames concatenated by 
slashes (/). The first edgename may be a synonym defined in a PD state- 
ment. The pathname also specifies the location of the node in the catalog. 

Default: None. Pathname must be specified. 



7 - 6 9 a dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




RPLV 



7-112 ACCESS NAME (ACNM) 

The access name parameter, identified by the keyword ACNM, identifies to 
the job the file that is to be cataloged as a version at the specified node. 

Format: The parameter value is the name by which the file is accessible to 
the job. Access name is mandatory for all normal cataloging functions. The 
access name must be a valid ASC symbol. 

Default: The only exception to the mandatory status of the ACNM parameter 
is the special cataloging function. When the source parameter is set to the 
value designating the source device as tape (SRC = TP or FT), ACNM be- 
comes optional. In this case, it should be omitted. ACNM has no meaning 
if a tape file is being cataloged under the special feature. The pathname, 
which is mandatory under all circumstances, identifies the file to be cata- 
loged to the catalog system. 

7-113 VERSION (VERS) 

The version parameter specifies which version of the file at the node de- 
fined by the pathname is to be replaced. 

Format: The version parameter is identified by the keyword VERS. The 
parameter is a signed or unsigned constant, or a signed or unsigned Job 
Specification Language Variable. An unsigned parameter specifies a ref- 
erence to the absolute version number of the file. A signed parameter spec- 
ifies a reference to a version of the file relative to the flagged version. 
The absolute version number is determined modulo N, where N is the maxi- 
mum number of versions allowed the file. 

Limits : The absolute value of a signed integer, i, must be within the range: 
1 < |i| <63. 

The value of an unsigned integer, i, cannot exceed the maximum number of 
versions, N, minus one; i.e., the value must be within the range: 
< i < N-l. 

The value of a signed Job Specification Language variable may be any value 
within a variable 1 s range; i.e., -2- > ^ < v < 231-1. 

An unsigned Job Specification Language variable is a reference to an abso- 
lute version and its value has the same limits as an unsigned integer; viz. : 

Default: If no version parameter is specified, the flagged version of the file 
is replaced. 

7-114 DEVICE TYPE (DTYP) 

The device type parameter is identified by the keyword DTYP and specifies 
if the file is to be allocated on the head-per-track disc, positioning-arm- 
disc, or the device specified in the Operating System default parameter table, 



7 70 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



or a specific channel or module specified by the third subparameter . It also 
indicates whether or not the file can be allocated without regard to physical 
contiguity on disc. 

Format ; The parameter value is a set of four subparameter s separated by 
slashes. The first subparameter value pertains to file allocation and is one 
of the keywords TAPE, DSEC, HPT, PAD, or OPID. The meaning of these 
keywords is: 

TAPE - allocate the file on a 9-track, 1/2-inch, 1600-bpi 
magnetic tape 

DSEC - allocate the file on the device specified in the system de- 
fault parameter file (default table) 

HPT - allocate the file on the head-per -track disc 

PAD - allocate the file on the positioning -arm -disc 

OPID - allocate the file on the specific channel or module given 
by the third subparameter. 

The second subparameter pertains to physical contiguity on disc of the file 
and its value is one of the keywords NOCNTG or CNTG where: 

NOCNTG - file can be allocated without regard to contiguity. 
This is the default value. 

CNTG - File must be allocated on physically contiguous disc; 

if the file is greater than or equal to a module; alloca- 
tion on each module will be contiguous and the allocation 
will start at the beginning of each module. 

The third subparameter is used in conjunction with the OPID keyword of the 
first subparameter and must be specified if OPID is used. The operator ID 
is a character string indicating a specific device related channel or module. 

Examples: 

"DM0" indicates H/T module 0, channel 

"DCHO" indicates H/T channel 

"PADO" indicates PAD spindle 0, 980-0, and TCC-0 

"PCH0" indicates 980-0, and TCC-0 

The fourth subparameter pertains to the setting of the initial allocation of the 
cataloged copy of the file to the original files current end-of-file or current 
allocation. This subparameter is identified by one of the keywords CEOF or 
CALL where: 

CEOF - means set the initial allocation of the cataloged copy of the 
file to the original file's current end-of-file. 



7-71 Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



CALL - means set the initial allocation of the cataloged copy of the 
file to the original file's current allocation 

Default: The DTYP parameter is optional. When it is omitted, the Operat- 
ing System assumes TAPE and NOCNTG, which indicates the file will be 
allocated on 1/2-inch, 9- track, 1600 bpi magnetic tape and the file may be 
allocated without regard to contiguity. 

Restrictions ; If the OPID keyword is used as the first subparameter the 
third subparameter, operator ID, must be specified. Otherwise, the third 
subparameter must not be specified. When the first subparameter is TAPE, 
the second, third, and fourth subparameter s are not valid. 

Examples: 

DTYP=OPID/CNTG/DM0 

DTYP=HPT 

DTYP=/CNTG 

DTYP=OPID//DCH0 

In the first example the file will be contiguous on the head-per- track disc 
module 0. In the second example the file will not necessarily be contiguous 
on the head-per-track disc. In the third example the file will be contiguous 
and on the device specified in the system default parameter table. In the 
fourth example the file will not necessarily be contiguous on the head-per- 
track disc channel 0. 

7-115 RETENTION PERIOD (RETP) 

When a tape file is cataloged by the RPLV statement, the number of days 
the user wants the new file retained can be specified. The retention period 
parameter, identified by the keyword RETP, specifies the length of reten- 
tion time. 

Format: The parameter value is an unsigned constant. 

The Operating System converts the specified number of days to an expiration 
date and records it in the Tape Volume Catalog for both standard labeled (SL) 
and unlabeled (NL) tape volumes. The Operating System also records the 
date on the standard labeled tapes, but not on unlabeled tapes. 

Default: This parameter is optional. If omitted, the parameter is given a 
default value defined by the installation. 

The retention period parameter is valid only for files that are output to tape 
volumes. DTYP=TAPE or in conjunction with SRC = TP or FT. If a file will 
remain on the secondary disc, RETP has no meaning. Therefore, if 
DTYP=DSEC, RETP should not be used. 



7 72 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



7-116 SOURCE (SRC) 

Accurate use of the RPLV statement hinges on one parameter, the source 
parameter (SRC). The source parameter specifies the source device on 
which the to-be-cataloged file resides. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword SRC. Its value is one 
of the keywords: DSEC, TP or FT. The keyword DSEC specifies that the 
file is located on the secondary disc. TP specifies a half-inch tape volume 
and FT specifies a one -inch tape volume. 

Default: If the source parameter is not specified, the Operating System as- 
sumes the default of DSEC (file location is secondary disc) . Normal cata- 
log functions are used. 

Besides specifying the source device of the file, SRC flags the cataloging 
function as either normal or special processing. SRC=DSEC indicates normal 
processing. SRC=TP or FT indicates the special feature; the file is cata- 
loged, but is not buffered to disc. It remains on tape. 

7-117 SPECIAL CATALOGING FUNCTION 

The special cataloging function of the RPLV statement also replaces a ver- 
sion of the specified file. However, in this special case, the file version 
being cataloged must be a tape file that is never buffered to disc for the 
cataloging activities. 

All of the parameters pertinent to normal version cataloging functions are 
required for this feature except ACNM and DTYP. In addition, the following 
parameters must be considered: 

LABL - label 

FORG - file organization 

EFID - external file identification 

BAND 

SECT 

,,^^-r^ - disc reservation 

WORD 

BYTE 

DEN - tape density 

TRKS - tracks 

RCTL - recording control 

7-118 FILE ORGANIZATION (FORG) 

The file organization parameter specifies the organization of the file. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the keyword FORG. It consists of 
one subparameter selected from two keywords: PS and DS. 



' " ' 3 A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




RPLV 



PS - the file is organized sequentially. 

DS - the file is organized as direct secondary. 

The default value is PS if the parameter is omitted. 

Default: FORG is valid only when the source parameter (SRC) specifies that 
to-be-cataloged file resides on half-inch or one-inch tape volumes. If SRC 
is not specified, its default value is secondary disc (DSEC); if SRC=DSEC, 
the parameter specifies secondary disc. If SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC, 
the FORG parameter is invalid and will be ignored if coded. 

7-119 LABEL (LABL) 

The label parameter, identified by the keyword LABL, describes character- 
istics of the tape volume on which the file resides. 

Format: The parameter is comprised of two subparameters: label type and 
file position. Both must be separated by a slash (/), if used. 

The first subparameter (position) specifies the desired position of the file on 
the tape volume. The subparameter value is either 1 or another constant, 
where the range is 1 ^ n < 255. 

The second subparameter (label type) specifies the type of label on the tape 
volume. The value is either the keyword SL or NL. SL specifies that the 
tape volume has standard labels. NL specifies no labels. 

If SL is specified explicitly or by default and an EFID is specified, the Sys- 
tem requests that the correct tape volume be supplied. If a tape volume can- 
not be verified as standard labeled, the operator must cancel the request. 

If NL is specified and the tape volume cannot be verified as non-labeled, the 
operator must cancel the request. 

The position and label type subparameters are interactive. These interac- 
tions are interpreted as: 

Label Type Position Interpretation 

SL n n = file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is a function of the standard 
label format. 

NL n n = file sequence number. The number of 

physical tape marks to be skipped during 
positioning is n-1. 

The LABL parameter depends on the SRC and DTYP parameters. If SRC = 
DSEC or defaults to DSEC, the LABL parameter has no meaning. If 
DTYP=TAPE, the LABL parameter being specified will cause the Operating 
System to abort the process. 



» ~ ' 4 Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



Default: The label parameter is optional and may be omitted. In addition, 

eacn SUOpoireUXlCUCX" is upuuaax, xx wic cuui c ^oicui^i.'-j. j-t. wj-iixi-^w^, wiv "-'.r' 

erating System assumes the following values: 

position 1 position to first file on volume 

label type SL standard labels 

If one of the subparameters is omitted, the Operating System assumes the 
appropriate value from those defined above. If the first subparameter is 
omitted, the separating slash must be used in front of the last subparameter. 
If the second subparameter is omitted, the separating slash should be left 
off. For example; 

position subparameter omitted LABL = /NL 

label type subparameter omitted LABL = 2 

7-120 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The keyword EFID identifies the external file identification parameter. It 
specifies the identification numbers of the volumes that contain the cata- 
loged file. Identifiers of all tape volumes containing the file must be de- 
clared. The EFID parameters must be coded in the sequence that the tapes 
are to be read. 

Format: The parameter value is a character string of one to six characters. 
If the string is enclosed in quotation marks, blanks in the string are re- 
tained; if the string is not so enclosed, any embedded blanks are eliminated. 

Tape identification labels are assigned to volumes by the installation at the 
time they are submitted or generated. The user is informed of the external 
labels of his files at that time. 

Default: If SRC=DSEG or is not specified, the EFID parameter is invalid 
and ignored if coded. 

7-121 TAPE DENSITY (DEN) 

The keyword DEN identifies the tape density parameter. DEN specifies the 
recording density in bits-per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes designated 
by the EFID parameters. All tape volumes specified must have the same 
density. 

Format: The parameter value is 1600, 800, 712, 556, 356, or 200. The 
key 1600 specifies the tape density is 1600 bpi; 800 specifies 800 bpi; 712 
specifies 712 bpi. If the source parameter (SRC) specifies that the source 
device is half-inch tape (SRC = TP), 1600, 800, 556 or 200 may be selected. 
If SRC specifies one -inch tape fSRC=FT), either 712 or 356 may be selected. 

Default: The tape density parameter is optional. If omitted, the value is 
1600 bpi for nine track tape and 800 bpi for seven track tape. 



? " ^ 5 Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



The DEN parameter is invalid if SRC=DSEC or defaults to DSEC. 

7-122 TAPE RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) 

The tape recording track parameter, identified by the keyword TRKS, spec- 
ifies if the given tape is a seven-track or a nine-track tape. 

Format; The parameter value is one of the keynumbers 9 or 7 to designate 
either the nine-track or the seven-track tape respectively. 

Default: The tape recording track parameter can be omitted. The default 
is to nine-track tape. If the tape recording track parameter specification or 
default is different than the actual tape configuration the System aborts the 
input/ output operation. 

7-123 RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) 

The recording control parameter allows for the specification of a parity, 
translation and data conversion mode. This parameter is applicable only if 
seven-track tape is being processed. It is identified by the keyword RCTL 
and the keyword values are: 

O - odd parity without translation or conversion 

E - even parity without translation or conversion 

T - odd parity with translation but no conversion 

C - odd parity with conversion but no translation 

ET - even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Default: If the RCTL parameter is omitted, and seven-track tape is desig- 
nated, the default is ET or even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Data Translation: Data translation refers to the ability to transform data 
recorded in BCD interchange to EBCDIC and vice versa. Since each BCD 
code is a six-bit value, upon input the six bits are translated into the corre- 
sponding eight-bit EBCDIC value. For output operations the eight-bit 
EBCDIC value is translated into its six-bit BCD representation. 

Data Conversion: The data conversion option makes it possible to write 
eight-bit binary data on seven-track tape. For output operations, every 
three bytes of data are written as four tape characters. For input operations, 
every four tape characters are written as three bytes of data. 

7-124 DISC RESERVATION (SECT, BAND, WORD OR BYTE) 

The disc space parameter specifies the management of disc space for the 
named file throughout the job when it is assigned. 



' " ' " Advanced Scien tific Computer 




RPLV 



Format: The disc space parameter is identified by the keywords SECT or 
BAND. Sector reservations are in units of 64 each. If the requested number 
of sectors is not a multiple of 64. the Operating System rounds it to the next 
higher multiple of 64. 

SECT specifies the parameter in sector units (64 words each). BAND spec- 
ifies the parameter in band units (256 sectors each). 

WORD specifies that the parameter value is expressed in word units given in 
thousands (WORD=15 is 15, 000 words). When the value specified is not a 
multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

BYTE specifies that the parameter value is expressed in byte units given in 
thousands (BYTE=12 is 12, 000 bytes). When this value as specified is not a 
multiple of 64 sectors it is rounded up to the next highest multiple. 

The parameter value is an unsigned constant less than 999999jq and may be 
from one to six digits. 

Default: The parameter is optional. If omitted, an installation-defined 
value is used. The parameter is valid only for special catalog processing. 
It is meaningless if SRC=DSEC or SRC is not specified (SRC defaults to DSEC) 

7-125 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

Parameter specification depends on the source (SRC) parameter. Certain 
parameters apply to normal cataloging functions; others to the special func- 
tion. The following description summarizes which parameters may be used 
for each case, normal and special processing, respectively. 

7-126 SRC = DSEC 

When the source device is secondary disc, the file to be cataloged has been 
created on or buffered to the secondary disc. In cataloging this file, the 
following parameters apply: 

pathname mandatory 

access name (ACNM) mandatory 

version (VERS) optional 

output location (DTYP) optional 

file retention (RETP) optional (valid only for 

tape files) 



7 77 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



7-127 SRC = TP OR FT 

When the source device is a half-inch or one-inch tape volume, the file to be 
cataloged exists but is not buffered to the secondary disc. In cataloging this 
file, the following parameters apply. 



pathname 

version (VERS) 

file retention (RETP) 

label information (LABL) 

file organization (FORG) 

external file identifiers (EFID) 



disc reservation 



BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



mandatory 

optional 

optional 

optional 

optional 

mandatory 

optional 



tape density (DEIST 



tracks (TRKS) 
recording control (RCTL) 
7-128 EXAMPLES 



optional (mandatory for 
SRC=FT) 

optional (half-inch tape) 

optional (seven-track tape) 



The following examples illustrate the use of the RPLV statement for normal 
catalog functions. 

1. File - All defaults Operative 
/ JSL 

/ RPLV A/B/C/D, ACNM=TFILE,DTYP=DSEC, SRC=DSEC, 
VERS=6 

/ JSL 



Given Values 
A/B/C/D 

ACNM=TFILE 
DTYP=DSEC 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node. This parameter is 
mandatory. 

TFILE identifies file to the job. This param- 
eter is mandatory. 

File will remain on disc after being cataloged. 



7-78 



Advanced Scientific Computer 






RPLV 



Given Values 
SRC=DSEC 

VERS 

Invalid Parameters 
RETP 



Specifies that the file to be cataloged is cur- 
rentiy on disc. In this case, d.K.^-' coiiiU »->e 
omitted since its default value is DSEG. 

Version six is replaced. 



Retention period is invalid for any file remain- 
ing on the secondary disc. 



FORG 

LAB.L 

EFID 

DEN 

TRKS 

RCTL 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE J 

2. File - All defaults Operative 

/ JSL 

/ RPLV Q/R/S, ACNM=THIRTY 



These parameters apply only when SRC=TP 
or FT. 



Given Values 
Q/R/S 



ACNM=THIRTY 



Default Values 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node. This parameter is 
mandatory. 

THIRTY identifies file to the job. This par am. 
eter is mandatory. 



The default values are the same as described in the first example 
of file cataloging. The values are summarized in the following 
list: 

DTYP = TAPE 

RETP = installation-defined value 

SRC = DSEC 

VERS = flagged version 



7-79 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




apply only when SRC=TP or FT. 



RPLV 



Invalid Parameters 

FORG 

LABL 

EFID 

DEN 

TRKS 

RCTL 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE 

The following examples illustrate the use of the RPLV statement for special 
catalog processing. 

3. Nine-Track Half- Inch Tape Source 

/ JSL 

/ RPLV T/R, SRC = TP, FORG=DS, LABL=2/NL, EFID=2340 

/ JSL 



Given Values 
T/R 



SRC=TP 



FORG=DS 
LABL=2/NL 



EFID=2340 



pathname - names file being cataloged and de- 
fines location of node. This parameter is 
mandatory. 

The source device of the file to be cataloged is 
nine- track half-inch, magnetic tape volume. 
This parameter also signifies that special cat- 
alog processing is used. 

The file being cataloged has a direct secondary 
organization. 

When the cataloged file is subsequently input to 
a job, File Management uses this information to 
input the tape file. The parameter specifies 
that positioning is to the second file and that the 
tape volume is unlabeled. For all unlabeled 
tape volumes, a JSL FD statement must be 
used when the file is subsequently assigned to a 
job to specify the file's logical characteristics. 

The external volume identifier specifies that the 
file is contained on tape volume 2340. This 
parameter is mandatory when SRC=TP or FT. 



7-80 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




RPLV 



Default Values 
RETP 



DEN 

TRKS 

RCTL 

VERS 

BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



The System assumes an installation- defined 
value to be converted to an expiration date. 
The expiration date is written to the Tape 
Volume Catalog, but not to the specified un- 
labeled tapes. 

The System assumes 1600 bpi as the density 
value of the tape volume containing the speci- 
fied file. 

The Systems assumes nine-track jobs as de- 
fault value. 

Not applicable for nine-track tapes. 

The flagged version is replaced. 

The System assumes an installation-defined 
value for disc space allocation when the cata- 
loged file is used. 



Invalid Parameters 

ACNMT 
DTYP J 

4. One-Inch Tape Source 

/ JSL 

'$ 

/ RPLV S/V, SRC=FT, DEN=712, EFID= 10000, VERS=+1 

/ JSL 



Given Values 
S/V 



SRC=FT 



VERS=+1 
DEN=712 



The pathname S/V names the cataloged file and 
defines the location of the node. This param- 
eter is mandatory. 

A file existing on one-inch magnetic tape must 
be specified as FT on the SRC parameter. 
DSEC designates the source device as secondary 
disc; TP designates half- inch tape. 

The flagged version plus one is replaced. 

The density is specified as 712 bpi; this param- 
eter is mandatory for one -inch tapes. 



7-81 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




Given Values 
EFID=10000 



RPLV 



The external file identifier specifies the byte 
is contained on tape volume 10000. This param- 
eter is mandatory for SRC=TP or FT. 



Default Values 



RETP 

BAND 

SECT 

WORD 

BYTE 



installation defined value 



Invalid Parameters 

ACNM 
DTYP 
TRKS 
RCTL 



7-82 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTION VIII 
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 

8-1 GENERAL 

There are a variety of JSL statements that extend the capabilities of the JSL 
to perform special functions. A group of these JSL statements deal with file 
manipulation. The statements are, in the order discussed, the REL, 
RENAME, MFR and MFRE, and the CNT and CNTE statements. The REL 
statement deactivates a file's linkage with the job and releases the file's al- 
located disc space returning it to the job's allocation. The RENAME state- 
ment enables a user to specify new names under which the files are identified 
to the job. The MFR and MFRE statements provide multi-file requests to 
enable a file or files to be output to a group of magnetic tape volumes. The 
CNT and CNTE statements enable a group of files to be input and processed 
as a single file. 

In addition, the JSL provides the capability to define and enable a job within 
another, and defer its execution for a later time without resubmitting it. 
Four statements implement this function: JOBX, EOJX, CJSL and PJSL. 
The JOBX and EOJX statements delimit the beginning and end of an embedded 
job. The CJSL statement checks the syntax of a job without executing the 
job. The PJSL statement initiates execution of a deferred job. 

JSL also provides, through the SETUP statement, the capability of setting 
up information for the Operating System to use in transfer and scheduling of 
secondary storage files and video tape drives. 



8-2 THE REL STATEMENT 

The RELease statement severs a job's access to a file by the specified ac- 
cess name and specifies that the disc space for the named file or files is to 
be released and returned to the allocation for the current job block. REL 
physically releases only non-resident, non-cataloged files or non-resident, 
cataloged files if there is only one current user. 

The general form of the REL statement is: 



1 

" LABEL 
J 



/ | [symbol] 



t I — r 

1 OPERATION I • 
J i L 



OPERANDS 



I 



REL 



I I 



l£ • access name [,...[, access name]] 



8-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




REL 



The verb REL must appear in the operation field. The identifier slash and 
the label symbol, if the statement is labeled, must be separated from the 
verb with at least one blank. The operation and operands fields must be 
separated with at least one blank. If the statement is, not labeled, only one 
blank need be used between the slash and the verb. 

8-3 ACCESS NAME 

The statement contains one positional, mandatory parameter. Additional 
parameters are optional. If specified, parameters are separated by commas, 
The parameter value is a valid ASC symbol which specifies the access name 
of the file whose disc space is being released. The number of access names 
that can be specified is limited only by practicality. 

Access names which REL specifies must have been defined in the job before 
the REL statement is encountered or processed. Any access name not de- 
fined previously will be ignored. Because the specified files are released 
and delinked from the job when the REL statement is encountered, all named 
files should be ready for release at that time. 



Q O 

° A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




RENAME 



8-4 THE RENAME STATEMENT 

The RENAME statement enables the user to specify a new name for a file. 
The new name replaces the existing name for a file. The file is no longer 
accessible under the former name. The RENAME statement is particularly- 
useful in letting the user specify an access name for standard-access -named 
files accessed by executing CP steps. The standard-access-named files can 
then be accessed by other steps in the job. 

The position of the RENAME statement in the job input stream determines 
when the file name is changed and the old access name delinked from the job. 
The old access name can be used to reference another file as long as the 
reference is made after the RENAME process is completed. The access 
name being replaced must exist prior to incidence of the RENAME specifying 
it. The new access name should not be previously defined. Only one access 
name can be replaced with a new name for each RENAME statement. 

The format of the RENAME statement is: 



/ 



LABEL 



[symbol] 



T 1 — I 

1 OPERATION I I OPERANDS 
J i — I ■ 



t | RENAME . tf , access name 1, access name 2 



The verb RENAME must appear in the operation field. The slash identifier, 
or the label symbol if the statement is labeled, must be separated from the 
operation field by at least one blank. The operation and operand fields also 
must be separated by at least one blank. The operand field contains two 
positional, mandatory parameters separated by a comma. 

8-5 ACCESS NAME 1 

The first parameter is the access name by which the file is currently iden- 
tified to the job. Referred to as old access name, it must be an existing 
access name. The old access name is the name being replaced. It is de- 
linked from the job. 

Access name 1 must be a valid ASC symbol. It is mandatory and cannot be 
omitted. No default is allowed. 

8-6 ACCESS NAME 2 

The second parameter is the new access name by which the file will subse- 
quently be identified to the job. Referred to as the new access name, it 
should not be an existing name prior to its specification. The new name 
links the file to the job. The file is no longer accessible under the old access 
name. The only exception to prior existence of an access name is the name 



O O 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




RENAME 



assigned to a default input file. If the new name is the default name and it 
exists, the existing file is released, then the rename is performed. 

Access name 2 must be a valid ASC symbol. It is mandatory and cannot be 
omitted. No default is allowed. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



8-7 MULTI-FILE REQUESTS 

Multi-file requests enable users to input files from or output files to a group 
of magnetic tape volumes. This technique is applicable only for files input 
from or output to tape. 

The Multi-File Request (MFR) statement is the start delimiter for the files 
requested. It defines the start of included files. The Multi-File Request 
End (MFRE) statement is the end delimiter. It defines the end of included 
files. 

The MFR/MFRE pair may enclose two or more JSL File Management state- 
ments that define the files to input from or output to tape. All enclosed 
statements must specify the same function; i. e. , the statements must be 
either all ASG, FIT, FOT or catalog statements. The allowable JSL state- 
ments are ASG, FIT, FOT, CAT, CATV and RPLV. The process outputs 
the files to tape volumes in the order the statements appear within the 
MFR/MFRE statement pair. 

8-8 THE MFR STATEMENT 

The general form of the MFR statement is; 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[symbol] 



tf 



MFR 



id 

[, EFID=tape id l[/tape id2][/. . . ; 

[, tape idn]]] 

1 



[,LABL=[| 
[/ 



NEW 



ADD 
APNDJ 



position, 
f]]] 



J L InlJ 



]; 



[,DEN= 



1600 
800 
556 
200 



[,TRKS=|||] [,RCTL: 



ET 
E 
O 
T 
C 



[, SVC=scratch volume count] 
[,RETP=retention] 

* [, LO€r=location id] 

• [, DEST=destination code] 



-5 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



The verb MFR must appear in the operation field. The slash identifier, or 
the label symbol if the statement is labeled, must be separated from the 
operation field by at least one blank. The operation and operands field also 
must be separated by at least one blank. 

MFR contains both positional and keyword parameters. The positional 
parameter is mandatory and must be coded as the first parameter in the 
operands field. The keyword parameters are optional and may be coded in 
any convenient order. 

8-9 MULTI-FILE IDENTIFICATION 

The ID parameter is a user-specified identity for the files included in the 
multi-file request. The Operating System lists the labels of tape volumes 
containing output files on the job activity log and identifies them with the 
code. 

Format . The parameter is positional and mandatory. The identifier must 
be a valid ASC symbol. 

Default . None. The parameter must be specified. 

8-10 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The keyword EFID identifies the external file identification parameter which 
specifies the identification numbers of the volumes that contain or will con- 
tain the requested files. 

Format . The parameter value is a character string of one to six characters. 
If the string is enclosed in quotation marks, blanks in the string are retained; 
if the string is not so enclosed, any embedded blanks are eliminated. 

External labels are affixed to the tape volumes to provide visual identifica- 
tion of the volume and its contents. Normal tape volume control requires 
two types of external tape labels. One is a permanent label that identifies 
the volume; the other is a temporary label that identifies the contents. 

The permanent label is affixed when the tape is first received and. should 
contain the sequential volume serial number assigned to the tape. The vol- 
ume serial numbers are used to identify tape volume unique numbers and to 
file the tapes in the tape rack. 

The contents label is used to identify the current contents of a particular 
volume. This temporary label is applied when data is written on the volume 
and contains identifying information to ensure that the contents of the volume 
can be easily distinguishable. The information entered in the label is usually 
furnished partly by the programmer and partly by the operator. 

Default . The EFID parameter is optional. If omitted, the Operating System 
writes the specified file to a scratch volume. After the files have been suc- 
cessfully written, the Operating System informs the user of the external 



o / 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




MFR 



volume identifier(s). If the series contains catalog processing statements, 
scratch volumes must be used. 

8-11 LABEL (LABL) 

The label parameter, identified by the keyword LABL, describes character- 
istics of the tape volume that contain or will contain the requested files. 

Format. The parameter is comprised of three subparameters: label type, 
file position, and new file placement. All three subparameters are posi- 

j^_.„_1 "U--i- — —.1. -i— — ~ J-» *"■*■ — .~ All 4-1-.-»aa will c<4- "k*» o ono -»»o f a A V> tr clacllPC ll\ if 

tlOlla.1, Dui u«_>l laaiiuaiuiy. jo.ii hxxcg j.xxuou u«_ ov^aiwi-v.^ ^ jr ^^,-.w.~ x , ,, — 

used. 

The first subparameter (position) specifies the desired position of the file on 
the tape volume that contains or is to contain it. The subparameter value 
is either 1 or another constant, where the range is l<n<255. 

The second subparameter (label type) specifies the type of label on the tape 
volume. The value is either the keyword SL or NL. SL specifies that the 
tape volume has standard labels. NL specifies no labels. 

The third subparameter (new file placement) applies only to output and spec- 
ifies whether the first file enclosed in an MFR/MFRE pair is placed on a 
new tape, added to an existing tape or appended to an existing file on tape. 
The remainder of the enclosed files are output serially. The placement sub- 
parameter value is one of the keywords NEW, ADD or APND. NEW speci- 
fies that a scratch tape will receive the files. Volume identifiers are re- 
turned to the user after a successful transfer to the scratch tape. ADD 
specifies that the files are added to an existing tape as an additional file. 
APND specifies that the file is written on an existing tape file as an appen- 
dage to the existing file. The Operating System appends the file by erasing 
the current file mark terminating the existing file. 

Appending files with inconsistent formats is not prohibited. However, the 
user must exert caution with the APND option. A mismatch of density, block 
size or record format causes the Operating System to abort the transfer. 

If SL is specified explicitly or by default and an EFID is specified, the Sys- 
tem requests that the correct tape volume be supplied. If a tape volume 
cannot be verified as standard labeled, the operator must cancel the request. 

If NL is specified and the tape cannot be verified as non-labeled, the operator 
must cancel the request. 

The position and label type subparameters are interactive. These interac- 
tions are interpreted as: 

Label Type Position Interpretation 

SL n n = file sequence number. The number 

of physical tape marks to be skipped 



8 - 7 Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



Label Type Position Interpretation 

during positioning is a function of the 
standard label format. 

NL n n = file sequence number. The number 

of physical tape marks to be skipped 
during positioning is n-1. 

Default . The label parameter is optional and may be omitted. In addition, 
each subparameter is optional. If the entire parameter is omitted, the 
Operating System assumes the following values. 

position 1 position to first file on volume 

label type SL standard labels 

placement NEW system scratch volume 

If any of the subparameters are omitted, the Operating System assumes the 
appropriate value from those defined above. If the first and/or second sub- 
parameters are omitted, the separating slashes must be used in front of the 
last subparameter. If the second and/or third subparameters are omitted, 
the separating slashes must be used in front of the last subparameter. If 
the second and/or third subparameters are omitted, the separating slash 
should be left off. For example: 

position subparameter omitted LABL = /NL/ADD 

label type subparameter omitted LABL = 2//APND 

placement subparameter omitted LABL = 2/NL 

or 
two subparameters omitted LABL = 2 

LABL = //ADD 
LABL = /NL 

8-12 TAPE DENSITY (DEN) 

The keyword DEN identifies the tape density parameter. DEN specifies the 
recording density in bits -per-inch-per-track (bpi) for the tape volumes des- 
ignated by the EFID parameter or the scratch volumes indicated or defaulted 
by the LABL or SVC parameters. All tape volumes specified must have the 
same density. 

Format : The parameter value is either 1600, 800, 556, or 200. The key- 
number 1600 specifies the tape density 1600 bpi, the keynumber 800 specifies 
the tape density 800 bpi, etc. 

Default : The tape density parameter is optional. If omitted, the value is 
1600 bpi for nine-track tape and 800 bpi for seven-track tape. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



8-13 TAPE RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) 

l tie tape recording uracil pd.rd.mete.L~, luenuiicu uy uic ^eynuiu j-^j-^, ^.^cv- 
ifies whether or not the given tape is a seven-track or a nine -track tape. 

Format ; The parameter value is one of the keynumbers 9 or 7 to designate 
either the nine-track or the seven-track tape respectively. 

Default : The tape recording track parameter can be omitted. The default 
is to nine -track tape. If the tape recording track parameter specification 
or default is different than the actual tane configuration the System aborts 
the input/ output operation. 

8-14 RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) 

The recording control parameter allows for the specification of a parity, 
translation and data conversion mode. This parameter is applicable only if 
seven-track tape is being processed. It is identified by the keyword RCTL 
and the keyword values are: 

O - odd parity without translation or conversion 

E - even parity without translation or conversion 

T - odd parity with translation but no conversion 

C - odd parity with conversion but no translation 

ET - even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Default : If the RCTL parameter is omitted, and seven-track tape is speci- 
fied, the default is ET or even parity with translation but no conversion. 

Data Translation : Data translation refers to the ability to transform data 
recorded in BCD interchange to EBCDIC and vice versa. Since each BCD 
code is a six -bit value, upon input the six bits are translated into the cor- 
responding eight-bit EBCDIC value. For output operations the eight -bit 
EBCDIC value is translated into its six -bit BCD representation. 

Data Conversion : The data conversion option makes it possible to write 
eight -bit binary data on seven-track tape. For output operations, every 
three bytes of data are written as four tape characters. For input opera- 
tions, every four tape characters are written as three bytes of data. 

8-15 SCRATCH VOLUME COUNT (SVC) 

The scratch volume count parameter, identified by SVC, specifies a maxi- 
mum number of system scratch tape volumes that will contain the requested 
files. 



° " 9 Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



Format . The parameter value is an unsigned constant of one to six digits. 

System scratch volumes are provided by the system. The volume identifiers 
have been assigned by the system and registered in the Tape Volume Catalog 
as scratch volumes. Scratch volumes may have either standard labels or no 
labels. 

Default . The SVC parameter is optional. If omitted, the Operating System 
assumes twelve scratch volumes are available to contain the files output by 
the multi-file request. 

8-16 FILE RETENTION PERIOD (RETP) 

The retention period parameter, identified by the keyword RETP, specifies 
the number of days the file will be retained. 

Format . The parameter value is an unsigned constant. 

The Operating System converts the specified retention period to an expiration 
date which it records in the Tape Volume Catalog for both standard labeled 
(SL) and unlabeled (NL) tape volumes. The converted expiration date is not 
recorded on the tape volume for unlabeled (NL) volumes. 

Default . The RETP parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value is 
an installation-defined value. If the series contains catalog processing 
statements, this parameter is ignored and the RETP coded on the specific 
statement is used. 

8-17 LOCATION (LOC) 

The location parameter specifies the site at which the tape files are output. 

Format . The keyword LOC identifies the parameter. Its value is a string 
of one to eight alphanumeric characters. The central site assigns valid 
identifiers to various terminal installations. 

Default . The LOC parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value is 
the identifier for the central site. The tapes are output at the central site. 

8-18 DESTINATION (DEST) 

The destination parameter, identified by the keyword DEST, specifies a code 
that determines where the tapes are routed after output. 

Format . The parameter value is a string of two alphabetic characters de- 
fined by the central site. The code is transmitted to the external tape level. 

Default . The DEST parameter is optional. If omitted, the default value is 
that defined for the central site. This parameter is ignored by catalog pro- 
cessing statements within the series. 



8-10 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



8-19 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The EFID, LABL. DEN and SVC parameters may be interactive, depending 
on the type of tape volumes desired. The parameters may be used in various 
combinations to achieve a specific request for output. 

• Specifying Private Volumes Only . To output files on private 
volumes only, the user should specify three parameters. 



LABL 



1 



/ 



SL 
NLj 



• /• 



ADD | 
APNDj 



NEW is not allowed. 



I position . 

EFID must be specified 

DEN is optional. 

The SVC parameter cannot be used. 

Specifying Scratch Volumes Only . In specifying system scratch 
volumes, the user may specify the following combination. 



LABL = - 



1 



.position . 
DEN is optional. 



/ 



SL ' 

.NL. 



/ NEW 



SVC is optional. It may be used if a maximum number of 
scratch volumes is required. 

The EFID parameter cannot be used. 

In the above case, all parameters may be omitted. The default values pro- 
vide the proper conditions. 

• Specifying Both Scratch and Private Volumes . In specifying 

both system scratch and private volumes, all three parameters 
should be used. 



LABL = 



1 1 . fSL 1 , f ADD 1 ______ .. A .__ J 

— — \ / • — — ' / ■ A _,_„_,[ NEW is not permitted; 
tionJ INLJ LAPNDj E 



.positio 
it specifies scratch volumes only 



EFID must be specified. 

SVC is optional. If a maximum number of scratch volumes 
is desired, the parameter should be used. 

DEN is optional. 

TRKS is optional. 

RCTL is optional. 



1-11 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



8-20 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The MFR statement interacts with the ASG, FIT, FQT, CAT, CATV, and 
RPLV statements. The files to be input from or output to multiple tape 
volumes are defined and transferred through these statements. The MFR 
statement parameters that may be used depend on which statements are en- 
closed. The positional identification parameter is valid with either type of 
statements. The optional keyword parameters are valid only for FIT and 
FOT statements with one exception: the SVC parameter is valid for the FIT, 
FOT and the catalog statements. The values for the MFR keyword param- 
eters (whether explicitly specified or defaulted) override the specification of 
corresponding parameters on the enclosed FIT and FOT statements with 
one exception: the file position subparameter of the LABL parameter when 
specified on an FIT statement will override the sequence set up by the file 
position subparameter specified on the MFR statement and subsequent FIT 
statements will be processed according to the file position designated if the 
LABL parameter is omitted on these statements. If keyword parameters are 
not specified the conditions established by MFR default values override the 
parameters on the FIT and FOT statements. 

Table 8-1 summarizes MFR statements applicable for the FIT, FOT, and 
the catalog statements. 

8-21 MFR EXAMPLES 

The following example shows the FIT statements embedded within an MFR 
and an MFRE statement and the use of LABL parameter and how it changes. 

/ MFR FILEX,EFID=12, LABL=2 

/ FIT Fl 

/ FIT F2 

/ FIT F3, LABL=5 

/ FIT F4 

/ MFRE 

Files Fl, F2, F3, and F4 are input from private volume 12. Files Fl and 
F2 are the second and third files respectively on volume 12. Files F3, F4, 
and F5 are the fifth, sixth, and seventh files from the same volume. Note 
how the LABL subparameter on the FIT statement overrides the MFR se- 
quence set up. Volume 12 is a standard -labeled, nine -track, 1600-bpi tape 
volume input from the central site and returned at the central site after in- 
put for an installation defined period of time with these values being deter- 
mined by default values on the MFR statement. 



Q ] O 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFR 



Table 8-1. MFR Parameters for Enclosed JSL Statements 



PARAMETER 


ENCODED FIT or FOT • 


ENCLOSED CAT, CATV 
and /or RPLV 


id 


Required. 


Required. 


EFID=tape idl]/tape 
id2...[/...l] 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FIT 
or FOT parameter. 


Not Applicable. 


r 1 ^i 

T A PiT - i . ". 1 / 


rides the FOT parameter. 
The position subparameter 
of the FIT parameter over- 
rides the MFR value at the 
point in sequence where 
specified. 


J. •* \-* U- J. _.£y L*l AlV^ Cfc (^XC . 


i [position J 
JSL} / NEW 
I NLJ ADD 
APND 


116001 
DEN = 1 800 1 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FOT 
parameter. 


Not Applicable. 


SVC= scratch volume 
Count 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault overrides FIT param- 
eter. 


May be used. MFR value 
overrides system defaults 
for CAT, CATV, RPLV 
since this parameter is 
not available on them. 


RETP=retention 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FOT 
parameter. 


Not Applicable. 


LOC=location id 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FIT 
or FOT parameter. 


Not Applicable. 


DEST=destination 
code 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FOT 
parameter. 


Not Applicable. 


TRKS=re cording 
tracks 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FIT or 
FOT parameter. 


Not Applicable. 


RCTL=recoding 
control 


MFR specified value or de- 
fault value overrides FIT or 
FOT parameter. 


Not Applicable. 



8-13 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFRE 



8-22 THE MFRE STATEMENT 



The general form of the MFRE statement is: 



* 



I I 

OPERATION I I OPERANDS 
i i 



MFRE 






MFRE has no parameters. The verb MFRE must appear in the operation 
field. MFRE cannot be labeled. The identifier slash must be separated 
from the operations field by at least one blank. 

MFRE must always be used with the MFR statement. It always appears at 
the end of the JSL statements being enclosed. 

8-23 EXAMPLES 

The following examples illustrate the MFR/ MFRE pair enclosing FOT and 
catalog statements. 

Enclosed Catalog Statements 

/ MFR MULTICAT, SVC = 4 

/ CAT A/B/C,ACNM=ANAME,DTYP=TAPE 

/ CATV A/B/C, ACNM=BNAME,DTYPE=TAPE 

/ MFRE 

Files ANAME and BNAME are output to a system scratch volume tape. The 
volume is a standard labeled, 1600 bpi tape. If additional volumes are re- 
quired to contain both files, the system supplies a maximum of four scratch 
volumes. The file characteristics are obtained from the disc file File In- 
formation Blocks. ANAME is cataloged by the CAT statement; BNAME by 
the CATV statement. The files are output at the central site. 

Enclosed FOT Statements 

/ MFR MULTIOUT,EFID=10/12,LABL=1/NL/ADD,RETP = 14 

/ FOT ANAME, EFID=60,LABJL=2/NL/ADD,RETP=7 

/ FOT BNAME, EFID=10, LABL=1 /SL/ADD, RETP=7 

/ FOT CNAME, EFID=30,LABL=2/NL/ADD,RETP = 10 

/ MFRE 

Files ANAME, BNAME and CNAME are output to private volumes, 10 and 
12. The EFID parameter specified on the MFR statement overrides EFID 
specification on the FOT statements. If additional volumes are required to 



8 14 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MFRE 



contain the files, the system provides scratch volumes (up to default maxi- 
mum of 12) to contain any remaining parts. The files are positioned accord- 
ing to the LABL specifications on the MFR statement: position is 1, label 
type is NL and the placement is ADD. 

These values override those specified on the FOT statements. Similarly, the 
files will be retained for fourteen days according to the MFR statement's 
RETP=14. This value likewise overrides specified FOT values. 

The MFR statement default values apply to the files being output. These 
values are: 

DEN = 1600 bpi tape volumes 

SVC = 12, maximum number of scratch tapes 

LOC = central site 

DEST = central site 

TRKS = nine-track tape 
Enclosed FOT Statements with Defaults Operative on Both 

/ MFR MULTISCR 

/ FOT ANAME 

/ FOT BNAME 

/ FOT CNAME - 

/ MFRE 
Files ANAME, BNAME and CNAME are output to a system scratch volume, 
according to the default values for the MFR statement. If additional volumes 
are required to contain the files, the Operating System provides scratch 
volumes up to the default maximum of twelve. The other default values for 
the MFR statement are: 

LABL parameter 

position = 1 

label type = SL 

placement = NEW 
DEN = 1600 bpi 
TRKS = nine track tape 
RETP = installation-defined value 
LOC = central site 
DEST = central site 



8-15 /\ dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




MFRE 



The values for the enclosed FOT statements, whether explicitly stated or 
defaulted, are overridden by the values for the MFR statement, either ex- 
plicitly stated or defaulted. 



Q 1 L 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CNT 



8-24 CONCATENATION STATEMENTS (CNT and CNTE) 



Concatenation allows two or more input files to be retrieved automatically 
by the Operating System and processed as a single file. This technique is 
applicable only for input files. Sequential files can be concatenated; files 
organized in other ways cannot. 

A File Descriptor Block (FDB) is associated with each concatenated file. 
The access name specified by the CNT/CNTE pair links all of the associated 
FDBs for a set of concatenated files. 

The CNT/CNTE pair may enclose two or more JSL File Management state- 
ments that define the files to be input. The ASG, FIT and FD statements are 
the only JSL statements that can be used in file concatenation. The process 
concatenates the files in the order in which the files are specified within the 
CNT/CNTE pair. 

The CNT statement specifies the access name under which the set of con- 
catenated files can be referenced. The transfer of non-cataloged sequential 
tape files is determined by the File Management statements. The access 
name appearing on the CNT statement can appear as an access only on the 
FOSYS statement for output. 

The general form of the CNT statement is: 



t — r 



' LABEL < 
J L 



1 — r 

OPERATION I I 
- i_L 



OPERANDS 



/ | [Symbol] | 16 



CNT 



I _, I 



16 . access name 



CNT has only one parameter - the mandatory, positional parameter specify- 
ing access name. The access name parameter identifies the set of concate- 
nated files to the job. The access name is a valid ASC symbol. 

The general form of the CNTE statement is: 



T 



T — r 



1 OPERATION I I 



OPERANDS 



CNTE 



I I 
J_L 



None 



CNTE has no parameters. The verb CNTE must appear in the operation 
field. CNTE is the ending delimiter statement for a concatenated input file 
request. It defines the end of the included ASG, FIT or FD statements de- 
fining the files concatenated under the CNT statement's access name. 

CNTE can only be used with the CNT statement. It always appears at the 
end of the enclosed JSL statements. 



8-17 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




CNTE 



8-25 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The CNT statement interacts with the FD, ASG, and FIT statements. The 
files concatenated by the CNT statement are defined and transferred through 
these statements. 

The CNT statement is implicity interactive with the CNTE statement. CNT 
is the beginning delimiter for a concatenated input file request. CNTE is the 
ending delimiter for the concatenated input file request. 

The CNT statement must always be used to define a concatenated set of files. 
It is always used with the CNTE statement. 

8-26 EXAMPLE 

The rules for using the FD, ASG and FIT statements within the CNT/ CNTE 
pair are based on the same conditions for using these statements for non- 
concatenated files. The FD statement must never end the sequence of state- 
ments enclosed in a CNT/CNTE pair. It must always precede an associated 
ASG or FIT statement. The following example shows how to concatenate 
files. 

1. Non-cataloged, Unlabeled, Tape Files. The sequence of JSL 
statements for specifying unlabeled tape files within the CNT/ 
CNTE pair is essentially the same except that an FD statement 
explicitly specifying logical characteristics must precede each 
FT statement. 

/ CNT TFILE 

/ FD AFILE, FORG = PS, LREC = 80, RCFM=FBS, BKSZ=2000 

/ FIT AFILE, EFID=1240,LABL=/NL 

/ FD BFILE,FORG = PS, LREC=80,RCFM=FBS,BKSZ = 2000 

/ FIT BFILE,EFID=1490, LABL=2/NL 

/ CNTE 



8 18 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




JOBX 



8-27 DEFERRED JOB PROCESSING 

It is possible to create a JSL file, check its syntax without executing it. and 
catalog it or output it to an external device for future use. The deferred job 
specification can be retrieved later and inserted in the job input stream for 
execution. The four statements that implement this function are: 

JOBX - Deferred JOB statement 

EOJX - Deferred EOJ statement 

PTOT Q. -„<-«-- ^■U^^-l, J^r^».~«J TCT £11 ~. 

ujojj - ijy iiueiX — ^lic^xv. ucic j. jl cu. u^jj-i inc 

PJSL - Execute deferred JSL file 

8-28 THE JOBX STATEMENT 

The JOBX statement delimits the beginning of a source job specification con- 
tained in a file embedded in another source job specification. Its syntax is 
identical to that of the JOB statement with the exception that the verb is 
"JOBX" instead of " JOB" . 

The format of the JOBX statement is: 



II II 

[ | OPERATION | J OPERANDS 


/ . 16 | JOBX 1^1 jobname, acctnum, user code 

1 1 [, CAT=category] 

. 1 ! [» LOC=location identification] 

, I if, OPT=option] 
1 I 



The JOBX statement's operand field is identical to that of the JOB statement. 
JOBX statements are coded exactly like JOB statements; they perform sim- 
ilar functions for the jobs they introduce. For a discussion of parameter 
coding for the JOB statement and an explanation of its use internal to the 
job it defines, refer to section II. 



8-19 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




EOJX 



8-29 THE EOJX STATEMENT 

The EOJX statement delimits the end of a job specification file input em- 
bedded within the input stream of another job specification. Its syntax is 
identical to that of the EOJ statement with the exception that its verb is 
"EOJX," instead of "EOJ". EOJX is used as EOJ with respect to the 
job statement which it delimits; see section II for a discussion of such use of 
the EOJ statement. 



The format of the EOJX statement is: 



« LABEL 
J 



I 

/ | [symbol] 



T — r 



OPERATION I ■ OPERANDS 
i I — 



EOJX . 16 . none 



8-30 EXAMPLES. A deferred job specification is input through the job 
stream. The following example illustrates the process: 

/ JOB PORTER, 12345, USERNAME 

c 

JSL statement sequence 

$ 

I START ACNM=DEFJOB 

/ JOBX PORTEE1, 12345, USERNAME 

i 

JSL statements for one deferred job 

/ START ACNM=DEFJOBl 

/ JOBX PROTEE2, 12345, USERNAME 

JSL statements for another deferred job 

I EOJX 
/ STOP 



f 



/ EOJX 
/ STOP 
JSL statement sequence 

/ EOJ 

When the System processes job PORTER, it treats the statements encountered 
embedded within the START/STOP pair as any other input file entered through 
the job stream. It removes the records between START and STOP statements 



o 20 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




EOJX 



from the job stream and stores them in a file labeled with the access name 
"DEFJOB." In addition, it recognizes the JOBX and EOJX statements as 
deferred job delimiters and replaces their verbs with "JOB" and " EO J" re- 
spectively, as it reads those records into DEFJOB. Notice that multiple 
deferred job specifications can be entered in the same file, processed in the 
same file, and stored in the same file. 

JOB and EOJ statements cannot be used as delimiters for prospective de- 
ferred jobs. Whenever a JOB statement is encountered in the job input 
stream without an EOJ statement immediately before it, the System assumes 
■*"hat the ^rior ^ob has ended and that the n rior iob' s EOJ statement was 
omitted. Accordingly, the System supplies an EOJ and begins a new job file 
with the current JOB statement. Likewise, whenever an EOJ statement is 
found in the job stream, the System terminates the current job specification 
and prepares to receive the next one. Hence, if JOB and EOJ statements 
were used to delimit a deferred job specification, each one, as it was en- 
countered, would cause a premature termination of its carrier job. 

Since the deferred job specification file is removed from the job stream on 
input and put in a file, its file can be referenced from anywhere in its parent 
job specification. A CJSL statement can be included to syntax-check the de- 
ferred job; the parent job can also order concurrent execution of the defer- 
red job with a PJSL statement. However, all statements that refer to a de- 
ferred job specification do so by file access name. The START statement 
that introduces a deferred job specification must assign it a file access name; 
otherwise, the file exists but cannot be used, because it cannot be found. 

To keep a job specification for future use, its carrier or parent job must 
preserve it in some way. It can be cataloged or output to an external de- 
vice. Cataloged job specification files are executed with PJSL statements. 
Depending on the nature of the external medium on which it is stored, a JSL 
file output to an external device can be executed by reading it directly into 
the job input stream, or by reading it in as a file under a current job speci- 
fication, which, in turn, calls for execution of the deferred job with a PJSL 
statement. 



Q O 1 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




CJSL 



8-31 THE CJSL STATEMENT 

The CJSL statement checks the syntax of a job defined in an external or 
cataloged file without executing the job. The statement is written: 



/ 



r 

LABEL * 



[symbol] . t 



T 



OPERATION I j OPERANDS 



CJSL , % , access name 



I 



It begins with a slash, followed by an optional statement label, a blank, the 
verb CJSL, another blank, and the file access name of its operand field. 

8-32 ACCESS NAME 

The file access name is the local name for the job specification source file 
to be syntax-checked. The access name must be defined in the current job; 
the file it references must contain one or more complete job specifications. 
The access name is mandatory; it cannot be omitted. 

8-33 EXAMPLES 

The sample job specification PARENT below reads in deferred job specifica- 
tion SON, catalogs it, then uses CJSL to syntax-check SON as it resides in 
its cataloged file. 

/ JOB PARENT, 12345, USERNAME 

/ CAT JOBEDGE,ACNM=INFILE 

/ CJSL INFILE 

/ START ACNM=INFILE 

/ JOBX SON, 12345, USERNAME 

s 

Deferred job specification statements 

$ 

/ EOJX 

/ STOP 

/ EOJ 

The System extracts INFILE from the job stream when it is first encountered, 
just like any other file input through the job stream. INFILE, therefore, 
exists as a separate file at the time the JSL code is executed; it can be ref- 
erenced from any where in that code. 



q 22 

A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




PJSL 



8-34 THE PJSL STATEMENT 

The PJSL statement orders processing to begin on the deferred job specifica- 
tion^) residing in the file referenced by its access name parameter. The 
PJSL statement appears as: 



/ 



r 

LABEL » 
L 



[symbol] . tf 



OPERATION 



l — r 
i i 



OPERANDS 



I I 

PJSL , % , access name 



PJSL is written with a slash, an optional label, the PJSL verb flanked by 
blanks, and an access name parameter. 

8-35 ACCESS NAME 

The access name is the local name for the source job specification file to 
be executed. The access name must be a valid ASC symbol defined within 
the current job. 

8-36 EXAMPLE 

The sample job specification below continues the example begun in the prior 
sub-section. It demonstrates the use of the PJSL statement. EX JOB ac- 
cesses a cataloged file containing a deferred job specification and executes 
that specification. 

/ JOB EXJOB, 12345, USERNAME 

/ ASG JOBFILE, JOBEDGE 

/ PJSL JOBFILE 

/ EOJ 

The PJSL statement takes the job residing in the file referenced by its ac- 
cess name parameter and inserts it in the system's job input queue. It does 
not insert the deferred job specification's statements in the current job as, 
for instance, a sequence of statements from a macro definition would be 
inserted. Instead, the current job specification continues execution after its 
PJSL statement is processed. The job file accessed by PJSL is added onto 
the job input stream; it may or may not begin execution concurrently with its 
parent job, depending on the availability of system resources. 



8-23 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SETUP 



8-37 THE SETUP STATEMENT 

The SETUP statement instructs the Operating System to schedule a secondary- 
storage video tape drive. It can also specify serial numbers of registered 
video tape reels to be used, and the number of scratch reels that can be used. 
The SETUP statement is used to setup, through its parameters, information 
necessary to achieve the transfer and scheduling of secondary storage files. 
The SETUP statement appears as: 



LABEL 



s ymbol 



tf 



1 — r 

OPERATION I ! 

' L 



OPERANDS 



SETUP 



1*1 



setup id [, CHAN=ope ration id] 
[,EFID=tape idl][/tape id2] / . . . ; 
[/tape idn]]]] 
1 



| [,svc = 



number J 

YES 



I 



I 



[, PROTECT^— ] 



SETUP is written with a slash, an optional label, the SETUP verb embedded 
in blanks and the parameters in the operands field. The parameters in the 
operands field are both positional and keyword parameters and the positional 
parameter must be coded first with the keyword parameters, that are op- 
tional, appearing in any convenient order. 

8-38 SETUP ID 

The setup id parameter associates a logical name with the storage channel 
that be used for secondary storage transfers. 

Format : This parameter is positional and mandatory. The identifier must 
be a valid ASC symbol. 

Default : None. This parameter must be specified. 
8-39 CHANNEL SPECIFICATION 



The channel specification parameter, identified by the keyword CHAN, spec 
ifies which channel is to be used with the secondary storage transfer. 

Format: The parameter is optional and can be coded in any order with the 
other optional parameters. The identifier must be a valid ASC facility 
''OPID" associated with a secondary storage channel. 



Example : 



CHAN=PCHO 



specifies channel zero. 



8-24 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SETUP 



Default : When CHAN is not specified the Operating System selects a PAD 
channel for the user. 

8-40 EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) 

The external file identification parameter specifies the identification num- 
bers of the video tape volumes that will be used in the secondary storage 
transfers. The order of specification is not required, but it is suggested 
that the user order his volumes sequentially for the most efficient tape us- 
age. If the first operation to be performed is a read from the tape, at least 
one EFID must be specified. 

Format: The keyword EFID designates the external file identification param- 
eter. The tape identifiers must be separated by slashes (/). Each tape 
identifier is a string of from one to six characters. If the identifier is en- 
closed in quotation marks, blanks in the string are retained; if not, embed- 
ded blanks are removed. 

Default : If this parameter is omitted, only scratch volumes will be asso- 
ciated with this storage channel. 

8-41 SCRATCH VOLUME COUNT (SVC) 

The scratch volume count parameter specifies a maximum number of system 
scratch tape volumes that are to contain files or members. 

Format : This parameter is identified by the keyword SVC and is an unsigned 
constant value of from one to six digits. 

System scratch' volumes are provided by the System. The volume identifiers 
have been assigned by the System and registered in the Tape Volume Catalog 
as scratch volumes. 

The parameter specifies the maximum number of scratch volumes required. 
It can be used with the EFID parameter if both scratch volumes and user- 
specified volumes will be used to contain the files. 

Default : If the scratch volume count parameter is omitted, the default value 
of one scratch volume is assumed. 

8-42 WRITE PROTECTION (PROTECT) 

The PROTECT parameter specifies whether or not write protection is to be 
invoked for the VSNs specified. 

Format : This parameter is identified by the keyword PROTECT and has the 
value of one of the keywords: YES or NO. YES instructs the System to pro- 
tect the contents of the tapes w ho s e EFI Da are listed in the EFID parameter. 
The System will abort any attempt by the user to modify the contents of these 



° " ^ 5 Advanced Scientific Computer 




SETUP 



tapes. Scratch tapes will not be protected. NO means that protection will 
not be enforced for tapes scheduled by that SETUP statement. 

Default: The parameter may be omitted. The default value is YES. 



° ~ ^ 6 A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




B A TINT 



8-43 THE BATINT STATEMENT 



The BATINT statement transforms a batch job into an interactive job, per- 
forms any preprocessing IJSL and puts the job in a suspended state by the 
interactive session start time. The batch job can be submitted at either a 
remote terminal or the central facility, but the terminal at which the inter- 
active session is to take place must be specified. A presession start time 
must also be given to ensure that the job completes all processing and is in 
the suspended state by the session start time. There is currently a 20- 
minute minimum lapse required between the presession start time and the 
session start time, however, the interactive may be started at any time 
after the job enters the suspended state. In particular, this means that the 
session can be started before the targeted session start time if the presession 
processing for the job takes less than 20 minutes. It must be remembered 
that the BATINT statement is the last verb processed in the batch mode and 
therefore should be the last statement before the EOJ control card. The 
BATINT statement appears as: 



LABEL 



symbol 



T 



T — r 



1 OPERATION I I 
J 1 L 



OPERANDS 



t | BATINT 



:«! 

J L 



PST = day:hour:min, SST=day: 
hour:min, SDU=min, TMID=RTn 



BATINT is written with a slash, an optional label, the BATINT verb flanked 
by blanks, and the appropriate parameters in the operands positions. The 
parameters are all keyword parameters and must be supplied, however 
they may be given in any order. 

8-44 PRESESSION START TIME (PST) 

The presession start time parameter (PST) specifies the time by which the 
job must have started into active processing. It must be later than the time 
that the batch job is read in and earlier than the session start time by a sys- 
tem defined amount of time (currently 20 minutes). 

Format : The keyword is PST and is set equal to the time given in days, 
hours, and minutes separated by colons. The day is the Julian day. 

Default : None, the parameter must be supplied. 

8-45 SESSION START TIME (SST) 

The session start time parameter (SST) specifies the time by which the inter^ 
active session is to ©tart* It must be greater than the presession start time 
by a system defined amount of time, (currently 20 minutes). 



8-27 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




BATINT 



Format ; The keyword is SST and is set equal to the time given in days, 
hours, and minutes separated by colons. The day is the Julian day 

Default : None, the parameter must be supplied. 

8-46 SESSION DURATION (SDU) 

The session duration parameter (SDU) represents the number of minutes 
that the session is to last. It is currently not used but still must be given 
for the proper IJSL frame to be built. 

Format : The keyword is SDU and is set equal to the number of minutes the 
session is to last. It is restricted to a positive number between 1 and 999999. 

Default : None, the parameter must be given. 

8-47 TERMINAL IDENTIFIER (TMID) 

The terminal identifier parameter (TMID) is the id of the terminal at which 
the interactive session is to take place. It must be a terminal operating 
under" TOS. 

Format : The keyword is TMID and is set equal to an 8-character facility 
id of a remote terminal. 

Default : None, the parameter must be given. 

8-48 PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 

The SST parameter must exceed the PST parameter by a system default (cur- 
rently 20 minutes), and must exceed the time the job is read in by a system 
default value (also 20 minutes). The presession start time must be greater 
than the time at which the job enters the Operating System. 

8-49 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The BATINT statement should only occur in batch jobs. Its processing 
causes an end-of-file marker to be placed behind the BATINT verb in the 
IJSL file to keep the batch job from going to termination. This causes all 
IJSL frames after the BATINT verb to be lost. Therefore, BATINT should 
be the last statement before an EOJ control card. 

8-50 USER INTERFACE 

Processing of the BATINT statement has several possible interfaces with the 
user. The normal situation is for the message PREPROCESSING 
COMPLETE (job - jobname) to appear at the terminal requested by the 
BATINT statement when all preprocessing for the batch job is completed and 



8 28 

A dvanced Scien tific Computer 




BATINT 



the job has been turned into an interactive job in the suspended state ready- 
to be signed on as an interactive session. 

Should a conflict arise with- the BATINT parameters, one of the following 
messages will appear in the job activity file which appears at the batch job 
site. 

BATINT: SS less than PST 

BATINT: SST - PST less than default 

BATINT: PST less than present time 

BATINT: invalid term id or request. 

In such a case, no message appears at the remote terminal requested on the 
BATINT statement to indicate that the preprocessing is complete. 

8-51 OPERATOR INTERFACE 

The processing of the BATINT verb provides for a message to the ASC oper- 
ator to inform him that the presession start time for the job has past and the 
job has still not entered the active state. He can then take installation de- 
fined steps to ensure that the job goes active as soon as possible. The mes- 
sage has the form: 

BATINT pretime, JID=Job, JN = Jobname 



8-29/8-30 Advanced Scien tific Computer 




SECTION IX 
THE MACRO LANGUAGE 



9-1 INTRODUCTION 

The JSL macro language provides the capability to reduce the amount of JSL 
coding in large jobs containing repeated sequences of intrinsic JSL state- 
ments. The macro language enables the user to specify a macroname (verb) 
and associate it with a sequence of JSL statements so that subsequent refer- 
ences to that name result in the sequence of JSL statements being used. 
This process comprises three steps: macro definition, call and expansion. 

A macro may generate a sequence of intrinsic JSL statements containing ex- 
actly the same parameters each time it is called; or, each macro call may 
specify various parameters to be placed in the expanded code. A macro may 
generate the same sequence of JSL each time it is called, or it may be di- 
rected to produce optional segments of its code in response to successive 
calls of its name. 

9-2 TERMINOLOGY 

The following definitions summarize special terms used in describing the 
macro language. 



Macro definition 



Macro body 
Macro call 
Macro expansion 

Macro model statement 



- MACRO and MEND (macro end) state- 
ment pair, BUILD, GEN, Model state- 
ments PRESET and INC, and all intrin- 
sic JSL statements between the pair. 

The JSL statements in a macro between 
the MACRO and the MEND statements. 

Use of a macro name as the verb in a 
JSL statement. 

Sequence of JSL statements generated 
by the macro processor from a macro 
call. 

Statement in a macro body that may be 
expanded into an intrinsic JSL state- 
ment in a macro expansion. 



9-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACROS 



Formal parameter 



Actual parameter 



Qualified parameter 



Intrinsic JSL 



Macro directives 



Macro-local label 



Positional parameter 



Tagged parameter 



Concatenated parameter 



Parameter in a macro statement that is 
replaced by an actual value whenever 
the parameter is referenced during 
macro expansion. The parameter may- 
be written as a qualified, positional, 
tagged or status parameter. 

Parameter in a macro definition state- 
ment that is unaltered in macro expan- 
sion. 

A tagged or positional parameter fol- 
lowed by a colon and a modifier that 
specifies what the parameter can rep- 
resent. The modifiers are V for binary 
value of the parameter, S for character 
string, A for attribute, and L for length 
of character string. 

All existing JSL, including predefined 
macros, but not the macro language. 

The subset of JSL that is valid for the 
macro language only. 

A label in parentheses. The label is 
valid for that macro only. 

Formal parameters defined on a 
MACRO statement. These parameters 
are positional relative to the set of po- 
sitional parameters specified in the 
macro. The parameter is a character 
string preceded by an ampersand. 

A formal parameter identified by a key- 
word followed by an equals sign. The 
keyword is preceded by an ampersand. 
The value of the parameter appears to 
the right of the equals sign. The value 
can be a character string or a quoted 
character string. Character strings 
may be any combination of alphabetic 
or numeric characters. 

Combinations of formal parameters, or 
of actual and formal parameters, that 
are replaced by a single character 
string in the corresponding statements 
of the expanded macro. 



9-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACROS 



Status parameter - Formal parameter that is a digit or a 

character preceded by an exclamation 
point. The parameter specifies a spe- 
cial condition within the macro during 
expansion. These parameters may- 
have predefined meanings or may be 
user-defined. 

9-3 MACRO LANGUAGE STATEMENTS 

The macro facility consists of three areas: macro file definition and manip 
ulation, macro definition, and special functions. In support of these func- 
tions, the macro language supplies three kinds of statements: 

1. Macro File Definition and Manipulation Statements 

MACBLD 
MACASG 

2. Macro Definition Statements 

• Macro Delimiting Statements 

MACRO 
MEND 

• Macro Generation Statements 

BUILD 

GEN 

Model statement 

• Macro Sequence Control Statements 

JUMP 

• Parameter Modification Statements 

PRESET 
INC 

3. Special Function Statements 

VERBSYN 
DMACRO 

9-4 MACRO PROCESSING 

When a macro definition is encountered in the processing of a job specifica- 
tion, it is entered in a Macro Definition Table. The macro definition is 
valid for subsequent macro calls within the job specification until another 



9-3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACROS 



macro definition of the same name supersedes it, or until a deactivate macro 
(D MACRO) statement explicitly deactivates it. The DMACRO statement re- 
activates the most recent definition before the current one; i. e. , same- 
named macro definitions constitute a stack. 

Macro definitions may be entered into the job specification by specifying a 
macro file via the MACASG statement or by physically placing them in the 
source job file or by both. Macro definitions in a macro file specified on a 
MACASG statement are entered into the job's Macro Definition Table when 
the MACASG statement appears in the job input stream. Macro definitions 
that occur in the source job file are entered into the Macro Definition Table 
in the order in which they are encountered. 

A macro call statement in the job specification calls the Macro Processor to 
search the job's Macro Definition Table for a definition having the name 
called. 

If there are several macro definitions with the same name the one which was 
most recently entered into the stack is the one chosen for expansion. 

The Macro Processor expands all macro model statements in the body of a 
macro definition into intrinsic JSL statements according to the Macro Gen- 
eration and Control statements, if any, that occur in the macro body. The 
statements generated for the macro expansion contain all the actual param- 
eters specified by their respective macro model statement in the macro 
body. All formal parameters of the respective macro model statements are 
replaced (in the expanded macro statements) by actual values specified in 
formal parameters in the macro call statement or, in default, by actual 
values specified in formal parameters in the beginning MACRO statement or 
PRESET statement. 

Upon completion, the macro expansion occupies the relative position that 
was occupied by the macro call which initiated the expansion. 

A macro name must be defined or assigned within a job specification before 
the first macro call of that name. Macro calls are permitted within macro 
definitions when the expansion satisfies this condition. 

Every formal parameter processed during macro expansion must be supplied 
an actual value, either by parameters in the initiating macro call statement 
or by parameters in the MACRO, PRESET, or INC statements; otherwise, 
the formal parameter is undefined, and an error condition results. 

9-5 MACRO PARAMETERS 

In the macro language, there are two categories of parameters: formal and 
actual. Formal parameters are replaced by actual values when the param- 
eters are referenced during macro expansion. Actual parameters are actual 
values; they are unaltered in macro expansion. 



9 -4 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACROS 



9-6 FORMAL PARAMETERS 

A formal parameter may appear in a macro model statement as a single 
parameter, in a list of parameters or may be concatenated with other param- 
eters. Each formal parameter must be assigned an actual value at expansion 
time. The value is assigned in a macro call that initiates expansion of an 
existing macro, in a MACRO statement that begins the definition of a macro, 
in a PRESET statement specified within the body of a macro, or in an INC 
statement within the body of a macro. Formal parameters may be positional, 
tagged, qualified or status parameters. The positional and tagged param- 
eters are written as &<character string>. Positional parameters are defined 
as such in the MACRO statement. Positional and tagged parameters are 
considered to be composed of four components: the character string (or 
actual value) associated with the parameter; the length of the character 
string; the binary value associated with the parameter; and the attributes of 
the parameter. Each component of a parameter can be accessed by using a 
qualified parameter reference. The qualified parameter is written as: 




&; <character string> 

where: S is the character string component of the parameter 

V is the binary value component of the parameter 

L is the length (number of characters) of the character string 
component 

A is the attribute component of the parameter. 

Notice that an unqualified reference to a parameter yields the "S" compo- 
nent. References to "A", "V M , and "L" yield integers. If the "S" compo- 
nent is constant, V is the binary value of the integer; otherwise, the "V" 
component is zero unless modified by an INC statement. The values asso- 
ciated with the attribute (A) component is a bit vector. The bits are defined 



as: 



Bit Meaning if set 

31 No S component associated with parameter 

30 Defined as a positional parameter 

29 Defined as a local label 

28 Value for parameter appears on the macro 

call line 

27 Parameter has a value specified in the macro 

definition by a MACRO or PRESET 



9-5 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




Bit 
23 

22 



MACROS 



Meaning if set 

S component of parameter was enclosed in 
quotes (the string does not contain them now) 

S component begins with a digit (i. e. , is an 
integer constant) 



The status parameter is written as: 

j character } 
' I digit J 

Status parameters are defined as: 



Status Variable 


Type 


Meaning 


!A 


Read Only 


1 = default data file 




Integer 


follows macro call 
line in input. 

= JSL card follows 


!B 


Read Only 
Integer 


Nesting level 


!C 


Read Write 
Integer 


Next BUILD position 


!D 


Read Only 


Start position of last 




Integer 


BUILD statement 
(i.e., previous !C) 


!E 


Read Only 


Number of positional 




Integer 


parameters on macro 
call line 


!F 


Read Only 


Number of parameters 




Integer 


on macro call line 


!G 


Read Only 


Number of statements 




Integer 


generated by this macro 


!H 


Read Only 
Character 
String 


Macro name /synonym 


!0-!9 


Read Write 
Integer 


User defined 



9-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACROS 



9-7 ACTUAL PARAMETERS 

An actual parameter specifies a symbol, constant, or character string that 
is to remain unaltered in the macro expansion of the statement in which it 
appears. 

An actual parameter may appear in a macro model statement alone, in a list, 
or in a concatenated parameter. It must be all or part of a basic parameter 
valid for the JSL statement to be generated at macro expansion. 

An actual parameter terminates at the first comma encountered that is not 
embedded in quotation marks. An actual parameter is no more than a single 
operand field; it may be less than a single operand field. To avoid confusion 
with other sorts of parameters, an actual parameter may not contain an am- 
persand (&) or an at sign (@) unless they are enclosed in quotation marks. 

9-8 MACRO FILE DEFINITION AND MANIPULATION 

There are two files of importance to the macro user: the system macro file 
and the user macro file. The system macro file contains system-defined 
macros that are automatically made available to a job for its duration. No 
assignment process is required. This file is disc resident. The second file 
of interest to the user contains macros defined by the user, placed in the 
file by him, and subsequently made available to the user's job through an 
assignment process specified by him. This file must be a cataloged, disc- 
resident file. Both types of files are made available at translation time. 
Any manipulation and file definition is done at translation time, not when the 
job is in the active state. 

The macro statements that define and manipulate the macro file specifically 
apply to the user macros since the system macro file is automatically linked 
to the job. The user has the capability to define a macro file via the 
MACBLD statement and manipulate macro files through the MACBLD and 
MACASG statements. 



9-7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 



ST %P> 



MACBLD 



9-9 THE MACBLD STATEMENT 

The MACBLD statement builds or modifies a macro file. All macros de- 
fined between the MACBLD statement and either the next MACBLD statement 
or the EOJ statement are written to the macro file defined by the specified 
access name. If the macro file is to be retained for future use, it must be 
cataloged through JSL statements. . MACBLD -created files are opened for 
allocation when the MACBLD scope is terminated. 

The general form of the MACBLD statement is: 



T 

I LABEL 

J 



I OPERATION 
J 



I 



OPERANDS 



* 



I 



MACBLD 



T 

■[access name , BASE = access name] 

I 



The MACBLD statement contains both positional and keyword parameters. 
The positional parameter is mandatory and must appear as the first param- 
eter. The keyword parameter is optional. The MACBLD statement may not 
be labeled since it has no execution time processing. 

9-10 ACCESS NAME 

The macro file being constructed must be named to be accessible to the job. 
JSL statements referencing the file within the job use the specified access 
name to access the file. The access name is mandatory and must appear 
first in the operands field. 

Format: The access name must be a valid ASC symbol. For the job in 
which it is referenced, the access name originates with the MACBLD state- 
ment specifying it. 

Default: None. Access name must be specified. 

9-11 BASE PARAMETER 

The BASE parameter enables the user to append newly defined macros to an 
existing macro file. The existing macro must have been linked to the job 
previously through a MACASG statement. This parameter provides the up- 
date of any existing macro file or the creation of a new file. Macro defini- 
tions appearing within the scope of the MACBLD are appended to the BASE 
file. 

Format: The parameter is identified by the tag, BASE. The parameter 
value is an access name that must be a valid ASC symbol. The access name 
originates with a previously specified MACASG statement. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACBLD 



Specification: If names of macro definitions are repeated in both files, the 

c» **r e? +■ £\i-v-\ I s\s*k\r- c* -i vi r\s\4-\i -ft loo *> mr-i n o Ck o -f-l-i.es. In of qv-i^*-*-i-ii'-i4*o"»*Q'*"1 "*-v* *-*/«» i*/-* /-I £^-f -i v% -i 4--I /\v> 

The other macro copies are purged from the macro directory and are no 
longer accessible by that name. 

Default: If the BASE is omitted, a new macro file as specified by the posi- 
tional parameter is created. No update is performed. 

9-12 PARAMETER INTERACTION 

The positional access name may be specified and the BASE parameter omit- 
ted. If so, the macro definitions following the MACBLD and up to the next 
MACBLD or the end of the job are placed in a newly constructed file identi- 
fied by that name. Once the MACBLD has been issued, the file may be ref- 
erenced by subsequent JSL statements by the access name within that job. 

When the BASE parameter is used, it specifies an existing file to which the 
macro definitions within the scope of MACBLD are to be appended. 

9-13 STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

The MACBLD statement interacts with the MACASG and catalog management 
statements. The conditions of this interaction follow: 

• If the BASE parameter is specified on MACBLD, a MACASG or 
a MACBLD statement specifying the same access name must 
appear in the job input stream prior to the occurrence of the 
MACBLD statement referencing the file. 

• If the BASE parameter is omitted on MACBLD, a MACASG 
statement is not necessary. 

• The issuance of a MACBLD statement does not make the speci- 
fied file a cataloged file. A JSL CAT, CATV or RPLV state- 
ment, specifying the same access name, must be used to cata- 
log the file so that it is not lost when the job ends. The CAT, 
CATV or RPLV statement may be specified anywhere in the job 
input stream because the MACBLD statement, processed at 
translation time, establishes the macro file prior to execution 
of the JSL statements. 

9-1 3A MACBLD EXAMPLES 

/tfMACBLDtf MACROS 

All macros defined after the MACBLD statement until the next MACBLD or 
EOJ will be built into a macro file with an access name of macros. 

/tfMACBLDtfMACROS,BASE= MAC FILE 



9-9 

Advanced Scientific Computer 



Jti 




MACASG 



All macros defined following the MACBLD statement until the next MACBLD 
or EOJ statement will be appended to the existing macro file called 
MACFILE. 

9-14 THE MACASG STATEMENT 

The MACASG statement assigns a macro file for use by the JSL translator. 
The statement makes the cataloged, disc- resident macro file available to 
the job in which it occurs. Like the MACBLD statement, the MACASG 
statement is processed at translation time, not at execution time. Thus, 
the MACASG statement must appear in the job input stream before any- 
macro statement references a macro is the file stipulated by MACASG. 
Files specified by MACASG are opened immediately after being assigned. 
All macro files are closed, but not released, at termination of translation. 
They may be re-opened during subsequent translator activations if subse- 
quently referenced. In adddition, files assigned by MACASG are available 
in a shared mode only. 

The general form of the MACASG statement is: 



/ I 
I 
I 



V 



t — r 



I LABEL | I OPERATION | , 
J U ' 



OPERANDS 



t 



MACASG |tf access name, pathname 
| [, VERS = version] 



The MACASG statement contains both positional and keyword parameters. 
The positional parameters are mandatory and must appear as the first and 
second parameters, in the order shown. The keyword parameter is optional, 
The MACASG statement may not be labeled. 

9-15 ACCESS NAME 

The macro file being assigned must be named to be accessible to the job. 
JSL statements referencing the file within the job use the specified access 
name to access the file. Access name is mandatory and must appear first 
in the operands field. 



9-10 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACASG 



Format: The access name must be a valid ASC symbol. For the job in which 
it is referenced, the access name originates with the MACASG statement. 

Default: None. Access name must be specified. 
9-16 PATHNAME 

The pathname parameter identifies the file being accessed to the catalog sys- 
tem. The pathname is a positional mandatory parameter that must appear as 
the second parameter. The pathname must exist in the catalog prior to ex- 
ecution of the job containing the MACASG statement. 

Format: Pathname is one to ten edgenames concatenated by slashes. The 
first edgename cannot be a synonym. Each edgename must be a valid ASC 
symbol. The pathname originates as the result of a previous cataloging ac- 
tivity performed before the job containing the MACASG statement is executed. 

Default: None. Pathname must be specified. 
9-17 VERSION NUMBER 

The version number parameter, VERS, specifies which version of the file 
identified by the pathname is to be assigned to the job. The version param- 
eter is optional; it may be omitted. 

Format: The version parameter is identified by the tag: VERS. The param- 
eter value is a signed or. unsigned constant. An unsigned constant ranging 
from to N-l (N=number of versions possible) specifies an absolute version 
number. A signed constant ranging from -63 to +63 specifies a version rela- 
tive to the flagged version. 

Default: If VERS is omitted, the System assigns the flagged version to the 
job. 

9-1 7A MACASG EXAMPLES 

/tfMACASGtfFILEl,A/B/C, VERS=2 

The macro file at pathname A/B/C and version 2 will be assigned to the user 
job, therefore, making all macros defined on that file available to the user 
with access name FILE1. 



9-11 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACRO DEFINITION 



9-18 MACRO DEFINITION 



The macro language provides four types of statements for defining a macro: 
macro delimiting statements, macro generation statements, macro sequence 
control statement, and parameter modification statements. This set of 
macro statements enable the user to define macros and control the environ- 
ment in which the macro must exist. 

9-19 MACRO DELIMITING STATEMENTS 

The MACRO and MEND statements are the delimiting statements that spec- 
ify the boundaries of a MACRO. A macro definition must begin with a 
MACRO statement and must end with a MEND statement. Macro definitions 
can use any JSL statements in the macro body to govern processing when the 
macro is called and expanded. These JSL statements are used within the 
MACRO/MEND pair. 

9-20 MACRO GENERATION STATEMENTS 

The BUILD, GEN and model statements comprise the subset of macro gen- 
eration statements. The BUILD statement constructs a buffer in card image 
of parameter values to be input to the translator. The GEN statement clears 
the BUILD-generated buffer by outputting the contents to the translator. 
Model statements are statements in a macro body that may expand into JSL 
statements in a macro expansion. 

9-21 MACRO SEQUENCE CONTROL STATEMENT 

The JUMP statement is the macro sequence control statement. JUMP en- 
ables the user to control the sequence of statement execution in a macro 
through either a conditional or unconditional transfer during a macro ex- 
pansion. 

9-22 PARAMETER MODIFICATION STATEMENTS 

There are two parameter modification statements: PRESET and INC. The 
PRESET statement establishes default values for positional and/or tagged 
formal parameters appearing in the macro being defined. The INC statement 
increments the specified formal parameter by one. 



9-12 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACRO 



9-23 THE MACRO STATEMENT 



The MACRO statement starts a macro definition, names the macro, defines 
positional parameters and default values for tagged parameters omitted on 
the macro call line. If a macro name has been defined previously, the cur- 
rent definition takes precedence at expansion time. 

The general form of the MACRO statement is: 



T 



I LABEL i l OPERATION 
J 1 1 



OPERANDS 



/ I macro 
I name 

J 
I 
I 
I 
I 



Itf I 

I " 

I 

1 



J. 



MACRO 



y> 



n & positional parameter 



& tagged parameter=default value 



,R 



& positional parameter 
& tagged parameter = default 

value 



J. 



The MACRO statement contains a macro name and positional and/or tagged 
parameters. 

9-24 MACRO NAME 

The macro name is mandatory and must appear in the label field immediately 
following the slash (with no intervening blanks permitted). The macro name 
must be a valid ASC symbol. Any macro name associated with a valid macro 
definition is a valid verb for a macro call statement. 

9-25 PARAMETERS 

The positional and/or tagged parameters provided for the MACRO statement 
specify default values for any formal parameters in the macro body and not 
specified on a macro call statement or PRESET statements. When the 
macro is expanded, the values specified by these parameters appear in the 
expanded code in the place where the formal parameter occurs in the macro 
definition. These parameters are overridden by those specified on macro 
call statements or PRESET statements, if specified in both places. 

Format: Each positional or tagged parameter must be preceded by an am- 
persand (&). Tagged parameters are followed by an equal sign and a value. 
The value may be either a character string or a quoted character string. 

Specification: Positional parameters are positional relative to their appear- 
ance in the MACRO statement. The order of the positional parameters on 
the MACRO statement determine where the string values are placed when the 



9-13 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MACRO 



macro is called and expanded. Because these parameters are relative, there 
is no restriction upon placing other parameters on the MACRO statement be- 
tween them. 

Anytime a statement in a macro is expanded, values for its formal param- 
eters must be supplied by expansion time through the MACRO statement, 
PRESET statements, or the call to the macro containing the statement. 

Default: All parameters on the MACRO statement are optional and may be 
omitted. If omitted, the parameters specified by PRESET statements estab- 
lish default values for the macro definition. If PRESET statements are not 
used, the parameters specified on the call statement to the macro define the 
values for the formal parameters occurring in the macro body between the 
MACRO/MEND pair. 

9-26 MACRO EXAMPLE 

/COMPILEtfMACROtf&ACNM, &MEM, &CIFER=*, &NPIPE=4, ; 
&MACHINE=4 

This is the beginning of a macro called COMPILE. &ACNM and &MEM are 
positional parameters and &CIFER, &NPIPE, and &MACHINE are keyword 
parameters. &CIFER will be initialized to *, &NPIPE to 4 and &MACHINE 
to 4. 



9-14 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MEND 



9-27 THE MEND STATEMENT 

The MEND statement delimits the end of the macro definition initiated by the 
MACRO statement. The MEND statement can be used only with the MACRO 
statement. 



The general form of the MEND statement is: 



t r 

I LABEL | 
I I 



/ I (symbol)) j 

i ! 

_-J ;_1 



OPERATION 



MEND 



T 



OPERANDS 



y> . [macro name] 



9-28 LABEL 

The MEND statement may be labeled with a macro-local label. This capa- 
bility enables the user to transfer expansion to the MEND statement when 
the macro is called and expanded. The macro-local label is valid only for 
the macro in which it appears. 

Format: The macro-local label must be a valid ASC symbol enclosed in 
parentheses. No other type of label is permitted. 

Specification: The macro-local label may be the same as the label specified 
by a call to the macro; the two labels are exclusive. The parentheses en- 
casing the label identify it as local. 

9-29 MACRO NAME 

The macro name is an optional parameter that is treated as a comment con- 
cerning the macro defined by the MACRO/MEND pair. The macro name 
must be a valid ASC symbol. If omitted, no comment regarding the macro 
being defined is made. 

9-30 MEND EXAMPLE 

/(EXIT)tfMENDbXYZ 
This macro statement terminates the definition for the macro XYZ. 

/tfMEND 
This macro statement terminates the definition of the current macro. 



9-15 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




BUILD 



9-31 THE BUILD STATEMENT 



The BUILD statement constructs a buffer in card image of parameter values 
to be input to the translator. BUILD is a macro definition statement that 
generates all or part of the body of the macro. Multiple BUILD statements 
without an intervening GEN or model statement construct a macro model 
statement. 

The general form of the BUILD statement is: 



T 

I LABEL 

J 



/ 1 1 [(label)] 

I 

1 



1 



OPERATION | 



tf , BUILD 

I 
I 



OPERANDS 



[[position] substitution string>] 
[ , [position] < substitution string >] 



The BUILD statement contains optional positional parameters. In addition, 
the BUILD statement may be labeled with a macro-local label. Other labels 

-^■v.^5 -^-v. ^'U, 'K-; 4-s±A 'T'V.^ ir,c»v1-> "RTTTT.'Tl Tv-i-p C3+- oi~»t>oot» in tno nnoraHnna fiolrl 

CLJ.C Ul UlUUXI/CUa iH^- V V, J. u J-J *±J J-a ' i * xa.xU.wi. «_». £y £• ^ u. x. xxx uxxv u^/v/j. u.v»v/"u ^.j.^,—^.. 

9-32 POSITION PARAMETER 

The position parameter specifies the column number at which the parameters 
defined as the substitution string are placed in the buffer. 

Format: The position parameter may be either a constant or a formal param- 
eter that is an integer. The position parameter takes the form 

J constant 1 

Iformal parameter] 

Default: The position parameter is optional. It may be omitted. If omitted, 
any specified substitution string begins at the next available position in the 
buffer. 

9-33 SUBSTITUTION STRING 

The substitution string parameter is a list of parameters to be placed in the 
buffer. 

Format: The substitution string parameter is a string of parameters that 
may be a combination of an actual parameter, formal parameter and/or con- 
catenation of formal and actual parameters. The substitution string param- 
eter takes the form 

n _ , j _ [formal parameter 1 

[character string] formal parameter r/S11 - , , . (substitution! 

L 6J L r J UgH character string I . 

L L J °J ^string J 



9-16 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




BUILD 



Default: The substitution string parameter may be omitted. If so, the 
BUILD statement clears the buffer and resets the buffer position to column 
one. 

9-34 BUILD EXAMPLES 

/^BVIL^^</MMWM^QTMMSYS. LMOD, CPOPT = (A, Z)> 
/(A)tfBUILDtf l</>, 1 1<XQT>, 18<SYS. LMOD, CPOPT=(A, Z)> 

Either of the two above BUILD statements will construct the JSL statement: 

I 11 is 

column / XQT sys> LMOD ^ CPOPT = (A, Z) 



q 17 

7 " Advanced Scientific Computer 




GEN 



9-35 THE GEN STATEMENT 

The GEN statement clears the BUILD -generated buffer by outputting the con- 
tents to the translator. A GEN statement placed at the end of a series of 
BUILD statements terminates the card image buffer constructed by the 
BUILD statements. The buffer is cleared and the buffer position reset to 
column one. 



The general form of the GEN statement is: 



T 

I LABEL 
J 



I OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



/ I [(label)] 
I 



GEN 



[[position] substitution string >] 
f, [position] < substitution string >] 



The GEN statement contains optional position parameters. In addition, the 
GEN statement may be labeled with a macro-local label; other labels are 
prohibited. The verb GEN must appear in the operations field. 

9-36 POSITION PARAMETER 

The position parameter specifies the point at which the parameters defined 
as the substitution string are placed in the buffer. 

Format: The position parameter may be either a constant or a formal 
parameter that is an integer. The position parameter takes the form 

! constant J 

formal parameter! 

Default: The position parameter is optional. It may be omitted. If omitted, 
any specified substitution parameters begin at the next available free posi- 
tion in the buffer. 

9-37 SUBSTITUTION STRING 



The substitution string parameter is a list of parameters to be placed in the 
buffer. 

Format: The substitution string parameter is a string of parameters that 
may be a combination of an actual parameter, formal parameter and/or con- 
catenation of formal and actual parameters. The substitution string param- 
eter takes the form 



[character string] 



formal parameter 



formal parameter 
[@] character string 



"substitution" 
string 



9-1: 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




GEN 



Default: The substitution string parameter may be omitted. If so, the GEN 
statement outputs any previous information in the buffer. 

9-38 GEN EXAMPLES 

/tfGEN 

This statement clears the BUILD -generated buffer by outputting any previous 
information in the buffer and resetting the buffer position to column one. 

/tfGENtf<)> 

This statement places a close parenthesis in the next available free position 
in the BUILD -generated buffer, outputs the information, then resets the buf- 
fer position to column one. 



9-19 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




MODEL STATEMENTS 



9-39 MACRO MODEL STATEMENTS 

A macro model statement is any statement in a macro body that may be ex- 
panded into a Job Specification Language statement in a macro expansion. 
The format of a macro model statement is that of an intrinsic JSL statement, 
with macro parameters substituted for the JSL statements' label and param- 
eters. Macro model statements containing intrinsic JSL verbs generate sin- 
gle intrinsic JSL statements at macro expansion. Macro model statements 
which are themselves macro call statements generate multiple intrinsic JSL 
statements at macro expansion. 

The general form of a macro model statement is: 



I LABEL 
J 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



/ I label 
I (label) 
I 



y> 



verb 



v> 



substitution string 



The label of a macro model statement can be an actual label, a formal label, 
or a macro-local label; that is, it can be respectively a valid ASC symbol, a 
formal parameter or substitution string, or a valid ASC symbol enclosed in 
parentheses. A label parameter that is a valid ASC symbol specifies an 
actual label generated on the corresponding JSL statement of the macro ex- 
pansion, or, if the macro model statement is a macro call statement, the 
label of the first statement in the resultant macro expansion. A label param- 
eter that is a formal parameter or substitution string specifies a formal 
label replaced, on the corresponding JSL statement of the macro expansion, 
by an actual value assigned to the formal parameter. A label parameter that 
is a valid ASC symbol enclosed in parentheses specifies a macro-local label 
that is not to be generated in the macro expansion and is used only for se- 
quence control purposes. Such labels are used only in conjunction with the 
JUMP statement. Notice that a macro-local label may be used in a state- 
ment modeled on intrinsic JSL statement which itself does not allow a label. 
Macro model statements do not require labels; if no label is specified, none 
is carried forward to the expanded code. 

9-40 VERB 

The verb of a macro model statement is any expression other than a macro 
definition statement. A macro model statement must have a verb. It may 
be a formal parameter or substitution string. If the model statement's verb 
is a macro name, the definition of the called macro must be entered in the 
job specification prior to the expansion of the model statement. 



9-20 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




MODEL STATEMENTS 



9-41 SUBSTITUTION STRING 

The substitution string is a list of parameters to be placed in the expanded 
macro. 

Format: The substitution string parameter is a string of parameters that 
may be a combination of an actual parameter, formal parameter and/or 
concatenation of formal and actual parameters. The parameter takes the 
form 



[character string] [formal parameter 



formal parameter 
[@] character string_ 



f substitution' 
[string 



If a model statement is to be expanded into a single intrinsic JSL statement, 
the actual, formal, and concatenated parameters in its operand field must be 
arranged in such a way as to construct properly the operand field of the gen- 
erated statement. The macro parameters used, when expanded, must result 
in an operand field of valid format for the intrinsic JSL statement being built. 
If the intrinsic JSL statement has mandatory parameters, they must be pro- 
vided; if it has positional parameters, they must appear in the correct order. 

Default: None. Parameters must be specified. 
9-42 MODEL EXAMPLES 

/#XQTtf&ACNM,ADDMEM=&ADDMEM, CPTIME=&CPTIME 
/tfASGtf&ACNM, &PATH@/M$XX, USE=SHR 

The above statements are the same as in intrinsic translator with possible 
substitution. 



9 21 

7 " A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




JUMP 



9-43 THE JUMP STATEMENT 

The JUMP statement enables the user to control the sequence of statements 
in a macro through either a conditional or an unconditional transfer of the 
generation sequence during a macro expansion. 

The general form of the JUMP statement is: 



LABEL 



I 



1 

• OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



/ [ [(label)] 
I 



JUMP 



U 



(label) [, boolean expression] 



The JUMP statement contains both mandatory and optional positional param- 
eters. In addition, the JUMP statement may be labeled with a macro-local 
label; other labels are prohibited. The verb JUMP must appear in the op- 
erations field. 

9_44 LABEL 

The label parameter in the operands field specifies the label of a statement 
to which the generation sequence may pass. 

Format: The label must be a macro-local label and must be enclosed in 
parentheses. The label is mandatory and must appear as the first parameter. 
The label must be a valid ASC symbol. It must be the macro-local label of 
a statement in the macro body or the macro-local label of the MEND state- 
ment. 

Default: None. A macro-local label must be specified. 
9-45 BOOLEAN EXPRESSION 



The boolean expression is the condition parameter of the JUMP statement. 
It specifies the condition under which sequence control is transferred to the 
label specified by the label parameter. If the boolean expression is TRUE, 
the jump is taken; if the boolean expression is FALSE, execution proceeds 
to the next sequential statement. 



Format: The boolean expression takes the form: 



(formal parame 
(actual paramet 




EQ.\ ( formal parameter 
actual parameter 



)i 



( TRUE n 

\falsejj 



9-22 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




JUMP 



The meaning of the relational operators (EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, and LE) for 
integers is the usual arithmetic relation. 

However, for character strings and the autribuue \.n/ component, Oj. a xormaj. 
parameter, slightly different definitions apply: 

Character String Comparison 

Operation Meaning 

. EQ. Two character strings have the same number of 

characters and identical characters. 

, NE. The character strings do not satisfy the . EQ. 

requirements. 

.GT. The left operand's character string has more 

characters than the right operand's and the 
leftmost substring of the left operand is iden- 
tical to the right operand's character string. 

. LT. The left operand's character string has fewer 

characters than the right operand's and the 
leftmost substring of the right operand is 
identical to the left operand's character string. 

. GE. The character strings satisfy either the . EQ. 

or the .GT. requirements. 

. LE. The character strings satisfy either the . EQ. 

or the .LT. requirements. 

Attribute (A) - Set Comparison 

The two operands are considered to be algebraic sets, the 
members of which are the bits in the respective words. 
The relationships are thus in terms of set comparisons. 

Operation Meaning 

. EQ. The sets are identical 

. NE. The sets do not satisfy the . EQ. require- 

ment. 

.GT. The left set contains the right set but 

. EQ. does not hold. 

. LT. The left set is contained in the right 

set but . EQ. does not hold. 

. GE. The sets satisfy either the . EQ. or the 

. GT . r equi rements . 

. LE. The sets satisfy either the . EQ. or the 

. LT. requirements. 



9-23 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




JUMP 



9-46 TRUE or FALSE . The TRUE or FALSE subparameter provides a 
NOT capability for the boolean expression. 

If TRUE is specified, the value of the boolean expression is as described. 
If FALSE is specified, the inverse of the boolean expression is taken; i. e. , 
4. LE. 3, FALSE has the boolean value TRUE. 

If the subparameter is omitted, the- default is TRUE. 

Default: If the boolean expression is omitted, the jump is unconditional to 
the statement specified by the macro-local label. 

4-47 JUMP EXAMPLES 

/tfJUMPtf(LABEL) 
This is an unconditional branch to the macro-local label (LABEL). 

/tfJUMPtf (LABEL), &A.EQ. ABC 
In this case if A is equal to ABC then branch to macro-local label (LABEL) 



q ?4 

7 " Advanced Scien ti fie Co mputer 




PRESET 



9-48 THE PRESET STATEMENT 

The PRESET directive establishes default values for positional and/or tagged 
formal parameters appearing in the macro being defined. The PRESET 
statement must be used only between a MACRO/MEND pair. There is no 
limit on the number of PRESET statements that can be used, If more than 
one PRESET statement specifies values for the same parameters, the last 
PRESET encountered determines the values to be used during expansion. 
PRESET statements are not execution-time statements. They are global to 
the macro definition. 

Parameter default values specified on a PRESET statement override the 
values specified on the MACRO statement for the same parameters. Param- 
eter values specified on the call line override both MACRO and PRESET. 

The PRESET statement is formatted as: 



1 I OPERATION | , OPERANDS 


/ ' M> ! PRESET 1 # , & formal parameter=actual value 
* • 1 1 [, & formal parameter= actual value] 

i i. ! i [••••] 

1 1 



The PRESET statement cannot be labeled. 



4-49 PARAMETERS 



The parameters on the PRESET are default values for positional and/or 
tagged parameters. When the macro is expanded, the specified values ap- 
pear in the expanded code in the place where the formal parameter occurs 
in the macro definition. 

At least one formal parameter and its value must be specified. The remain- 
ing parameters are optional and may be omitted. 

Format: Each formal parameter must be preceded by an ampersand. The 
parameter is followed by an equals sign and a default value. The value is a 
character string or a quoted character string. 

Specification: Multiple PRESET statements may be used to specify the de- 
sired values. The PRESET's values for tagged parameters override the 
values specified by the same tagged parameters on the MACRO statement. 

Restriction: PRESET statements are the subset of JSL that are valid only 
for the macro language. PRESET statements are definitional parts of a 



9-25 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




PRESET 

macro body and can be used only between a MACRO/MEND pair. If more 
than one PRESET specifies the same parameter value, the last encountered 
PRESET statement takes precedence. 

9-50 PRESET EXAMPLES 

/tfPRESETtf &A=A, &B = B 
This statement sets the value of formal parameters &A to A and &B to B. 



Q 2 A 

~~ Advanced Scientific Computer 




INC 



9-51 THE INC STATEMENT 

The INC statement increments the binar^ value of the specified formal 
parameter by one. 

The general form of the INC statement is: 



1 LABEL ! I OPERATION j ! OPERANDS 
I i 1 , 


1 ' 1 i 

1 1 1 \iaOeJLM • p iiNV^i j p . luniiai paioiiicucr 

1 • ! 1 

. ._. 1 1 1 1 ■ — ' 



The INC statement contains a mandatory parameter. In addition, the INC 
statement may be labeled with a macro-local label; no other labels are al- 
lowed. The verb INC must appear in the operations field. 

9-52 FORMAL PARAMETER 

One formal parameter may be specified; multiple parameters are prohibited, 
The formal parameter may take the form of a positional, tagged or status 
parameter. The action taken for a positional or tagged parameter and a sta- 
tus parameter differs. For a positional or tagged parameter, the statement 
increments only the V (value) component. For a status parameter, the 
statement increments only those status parameters that are not defined as 
read only. 

Default; None.. A parameter must be specified. 

9-53 INC EXAMPLES 

/tflNCtf&A 
The above example increments the value component of A by 1. 

/tflNCtf ! 1 
This example increments the user variable ! 1 by 1. 



9-27 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 



9-54 SPECIAL FUNCTION STATEMENTS 

There are two statements that enable the user to perform special functions. 
The DMACRO statement deactivates the most recently entered macro defini- 
tion of a specified name, and at the same time reactivates a prior definition 
of a macro of that name. The VERBSYN statement allows a macro, synonym 
or a JSL verb to be referenced by another name. These special functions 
provide the user with a great deal of flexibility in handling and referencing 
the macros he defines and uses. 



q or 

7 " Advanced Scientific Computer 




DMACRO 



9-55 THE DMACRO STATEMENT 

The DMACRO statement deactivates the most recently entered macro defini- 
tion of a specified name, and reactivates a prior definition of a macro of that 
name. The DMACRO statement works on a job's Macro Definition Table. It 
searches the Macro Definition Table for the most recent macro definition 
whose label is the same as DMACRO' s operand parameter and, finding it, 
deletes that entry from the table. The macro by the same name that imme- 
diately precedes the deactivated macro is reactivated. 

The general form of the DMACRO statement is; 



I LABEL 
J 



I OPERATION 
I 



OPERANDS 



/ I [symbol] 
I 



M> [ DMACRO Itf 



macro name 



The macro name parameter specifies the macro definition to be deactivated. 
If there is a preceding macro definition of the same name in the Macro Def- 
inition Table, that definition becomes the current one. If there is no prior 
macro of the same name in the Macro Definition Table, the current definition 
is destroyed, and the job can no longer call the macro specified. If the 
Macro Definition Table does not contain a single entry labeled like 
DMACRO's macro name parameter, no error results. 

Since the DMACRO statement operates on a job's Macro Definition Table, its 
results are only valid for the job in which it occurs. To use the DMACRO 
statement for maintenance of a macro file, transfer the file into the Macro 
Definition Table by MACASGing it to the current job, operate on it within the 
job, then recatalog it. 

9-56 DMACRO EXAMPLES 

/tfDMACROtfXYZ 
This DMACRO statement deactivates the macro XYZ. 



9-29 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




VERBSYN 



9-57 VERB SYNONYM STATEMENT (VERBSYN) 

The verb synonym statement allows a macro, synonym or a JSL verb to be 
referenced by another name. Subsequent redefinitions of the specified op- 
erand do not change the definition of the synonym. 

The general form of the VERBSYN statement is: 



1 1 

I LABEL i 



I 



X 



I ' synonym # 
I » 

i \ 



OPERATION | 



VERBSYN H 
I 
I 
I 



OPERANDS 



macro name 
synonym 
verb 



The VERBSYN statement contains mandatory parameters in both the label and 
operands fields. The verb VERBSYN must appear in the operations field. 

9-58 SYNONYM 

The synonym is the new name by which a JSL verb, macro, or other synonym 
can be referenced. 

Format: The synonym must appear in the label field. It follows the slash 
with no intervening blanks. At least one blank must separate the synonym 
from the verb. The synonym must be a valid ASC symbol. 

Default: None. A name must be specified. 
9-59 OPERAND 

The operand is the macro, synonym or JSL verb that is being redefined. 

Format: The operand may be the name of an existing macro, a defined syn- 
onym or a JSL verb. The operand must be specified. Only one entity may 
be specified. 

Default: None. A macro name, a synonym or a JSL verb must be specified. 

9-60 VERBSYN EXAMPLES 

/XYZtfVERBSYNtfXQT 

The above example redesignates XYZ as XQT. Therefore, anytime the JSL 
translator encounters XYZ in the operation field it will do an XQT. 



9-30 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




9-61 MACRO EXAMPLES 

The following example shows a macro written to execute the Fortran com- 
piler. Each statement is numbered and the numbers are used to explain the 
purpose of the individual statements. 



&FTNOPT = (K, M, O), &FADDMEM=4K, ; 
&VSPACE=ANY, &FTNTIME=1000, ; 
&SPACE=4096 

S$FCPCH1, S$SYSCAT/S$LPPTCH/; 
S$FCPCH1, USE=SHR 

S$FCPCH2, S$SYSCAT/S$LPPTCH/; 
S$FCPCH2, USE=SHR 

S$FCPCH3, S$SYSCAT/S$LPPTCH/; 
S$FCPCH3, USE=SHR 

S$FCPCH4, S$SYSCAT/S$LPPTCH/; 
S$FCPCH4, USE=SHR 

S$FTN, S$SYSCAT/S$FTN, USE=SHR 

(F10),&IN:A. GE. 8 

(F20), IA.EQ.0 

SYS. IN, SYS. FIN 

(F20) 

&IN, SYS. FIN 

(F30), &LIST:A. GE. 8, FALSE 

&LIST,SYS.PRT 

SYS. PRT, BAND=&LISTSIZE 

</ XQT S$FTN, ; 

LTP=(1, 1, &SPACE),> 

<ADDMEM=&FADDMEM, ; 
CPTIME=&FTNTIME, > 

(F40), &VSPACE. EQ. ANY 

<RTP=(&VSPACE),> 

<CPOPT = &FTNOPT, OPT = (A, I, P) > 



1) 


/FTN 


MACRO 


2) 


/ 


PRESET 


3) 


/ 


ASG 


4) 


/ 


ASG 


5) 


/ 


ASG 


6) 


/ 


ASG 


7) 


/ 


ASG 


8) 


/ 


JUMP 


9) 


/ 


JUMP 


10) 


/ 


RENAME 


11) 


/ 


JUMP 


12) 


/(F10) 


RENAME 


13) 


/(F20) 


JUMP 


14) 


/ 


RENAME 


15) 


/(F30) 


FD 


16) 


/ 


BUILD 



17) / 



BUILD 



18) 


/ 


JUMP 


19) 


/ 


BUILD 


20) 


/(F40) 


BUILD 


21) 


/ 


GEN 



9-31 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




22) 


/ 


JUMP 


(F50), &LIST:A.GE.8 


23) 


/ 


FOSYS 


SYS.PRT 


24) 


/ 


JUMP 


(F60) 


25) 


/(F50) 


RENAME 


SYS.PRT, &LIST 


26) 


/(F60) 


REL 


S$FCPCH1, S$FCPCE 
S$FCPCH4,S$FTN 


27) 


/ 


JUMP 


(F70), &IN:A.GE.8 


28) 


/ 


JUMP 


(F80), !A. EG. 


29) 


/ 


RENAME 


SYS. FIN, SYS. IN 


30) 


/ 


JUMP 


(F80) 


31) 


/(F70) 


RENAME 


SYS. FIN, &IN 


32) 


/(F80) 


MEND 


FTN 



The description of the above macros statement by statement, follows: 

1) This statement begins the definition of the macro to be called 

FTN. 

2) This statement sets the default values for certain parameters. 

3-6) This group of statements assign the patch files that are used 
by the Fortran compiler. 

7) This statement assigns the Fortran compiler. 

8) When the formal parameter &IN is specified on the call line 
then a change of control is executed to label (F10) (statement 
12); because when a parameter is specified on the call line it 
will have an attribute greater than or equal to 8. 

9) A change of control occurs to (F20) (statement 13) if a default 
SYS. IN file is not available on the next macro call statement. 

10) There is a default SYS. IN file behind the macro call, there- 
fore, it must be renamed SYS. FIN, which is the standard ac- 
cess name for the Fortran source statement file. 

11) This statement is an unconditional transfer of control to the 
statement with the macro local label (F20) (statement 13). 

12) Control comes to this statement only if &IN was specified and 
must be renamed to SYS. FIN. 

13) Control is changed to statement macro local label (F30) 
(statement 15) if &LIST was not specified by the macro call. 



9-32 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




14) Control comes here only if &LIST was specified and will be 
renamed SYS.PRT, which is the standard access name for the 
compiler output listing- 

15) This statement causes the generation of an FD statement for 
the SYS.PRT file specifying a band size of &LISTSIZE which 
is 1/8/1 unless overridden on the macro call line. 

16 - 17) These statements build an XQT statement for the Fortran 

compiler that supplies ADDMEM, CPTIME, and LTP either 
from default values or macro call line override values. 

18) Control is changed to macro local label (F40) (statement 20) 
if the formal parameter &VSPACE is equal to "ANY". 

19) When &VSPACE does not equal "ANY" then add an RTP for 
&VSPACE to the XQT statement for the Fortran compiler. 

20) This statement adds the CPOPT and OPT parameters to the 
XQT statement for the Fortran program. 

21) This statement terminates the BUILD for the XQT statement 
above. 

22) Control is transferred to macro local label (F50) (statement 
25) if &LIST was specified on the macro call line. 

23) When &LIST is not specified by the macro this statement will 
dispose of the SYS. PRT file by sending it to the printer. 

24) This statement causes an unconditional change of control to 
•macro local label (F60) (statement 26). 

25) This statement renames SYS.PRT to &LIST, since the user 
will expect to find his listing under the access name &LIST. 

26) This statement releases all the patch files and the Fortran 
compiler that were previously assigned in the macro. 

27) If &IN was specified on the macro call line control is trans- 
ferred to the macro local label (F70) (statement 31), other- 
wise, the next statement in sequence will be executed. 

28) If a default SYS. IN does not exist for this macro then control 
is transferred to macro local label (F80) (statement 32). 

29) This statement renames the Fortran input file, SYS. FIN, to 
SYS. IN, since the Operating System will automatically gen- 
erate a release for SYS. IN. 

30) This statement causes an unconditional transfer of control to 
macro local label (F80). 



9-33 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




31) This statement is executed because & IN was specified on the 
macro call line, and it renames SYS. FIN to &IN. 

32) This statement declares the end of the FTN macro definition. 

The following shows another macro example that allows the printing of a file 
to FOSYS. 

&ACNM, &TYPE 

< /tftfb^FOS YStftftftf &ACNM > 

(PRT1), &TYPE:A. GE. 8, FALSE 

<,TYPE=&TYPE> 



1) 


/PRINT 


MACRO 


2) 


/ 


BUILD 


3) 


/ 


JUMP 


4) 


/ 


BUILD 


5) 


/(PRT1) 


GEN 


6) 


/ 


MEND 



The following paragraphs describe or explain the macro statements corre- 
spondingly numbered above: 

1) This statement begins the definition of the macro PRINT spec- 
ifying two positional parameters ACNM and TYPE. 

2) This statement begins to build the FOSYS statement with a "/" 
in column one and FOSYS beginning in column six and the access 
name beginning in column fifteen. 

3) This statement checks to see if TYPE was specified on the 
macro call line, and, if it was not, control is transferred to 
macro local label (PRT1) (statement 5). 

4) This statement receives control only if TYPE was specified and 
it adds it to the FOSYS statement. 

5) This statement terminates the BUILD statements ). 

6) This statement signifies the end of the PRINT macro definition. 



9-34 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX A 
STATEMENT SUMMARIES 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX A 
STATEMENT SUMMARIES 



A-l GENERAL 

Appendix A shows the complete format for all JSL statements and includes a 
summary of the operands for each statement. The statements are arranged 
in alphabetical order. 

A-2 ASSIGN STATEMENT (ASG) 



The general form of the ASG statement is: 



LABEL 



OPERATION | 



t 



OPERANDS 



Symbol 



y> 



ASG 



v> 



access name, pathname 

[, VERS = version] [, USE = |f|f} ] 



A-3 ASG STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File identity 


Access name 


Identifies the assigned file to the job. 
Access name exists only for the duration 
of the job. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Pathname 


Specifies the name of the file in the 
catalog system. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Version specifi- 
cation 


Version 
VERS= vers ion 


Specifies the number of the desired ver- 
sion of the file being assigned. 


K 


The flagged version is as- 
signed. 


File Use 


Use parameter 


Specifies whether the assigned file on disc 
is to be shared among jobs or is exclu- 
sively reserved for the current job. 


K 


Exclusive use mode is as- 
sumed. 


P = POSITIONAL 


K = KEYWORD 









A-l 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-3A BATCH JOB INTO INTERACTIVE JOB STATEMENT (BATINT) 



The general form of the BATINT statement is: 



LABEL 



symbol 



T 



1 OPERATION I 

—I L— 

| I 

t | BATINT . 16 
I 



OPERANDS 



PST = day:hour:min, SST = day: 
hour:min, SDU=min, TMID=RTn 



A-3B BATINT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Session informa- 
tion 


Presession start 

PST = day: hour: 
min 


Specifies the time by which the job must 
have started into active processing. It 
must be later than the time that the batch 
job is read in and earlier than the ses- 
sion start time by a system defined 
amount of time. 


P 


None. It must be given. 


Session start 

SST = day: hour: 
min 


Specifies the time by which the inter- 
active session is to start. It must be 
greater than the presession start time by 
a system defined amount of time. 


P 


None. It must be given. 


Session duration 
SDU = min 


Specifies the number of minutes that the 
session is to last (a positive value be- 
tween 1 and 999999). 


P 


None. It must be given. 


Terminal identi- 
fication 


Terminal id 
TMED = RTn 


Specifies the terminal ID of the terminal 
at which the interactive session is to take 
place. It must be a terminal operating 
under TOS. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 

■ 


1 











A-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-4 CATALOG NODE AND VERSION STATEMENT (CAT) 
The general form of the CAT statement is: 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[Symbol] 



CAT 



pathname [, ACNM=access name] 
[, MXVR=maximiim number of ver- 
sions] 



[■ 



, ACST= 



NO 



PART 

FULU 



[' RFST ={f§n)] 



[, SON= {f§Jj}J [» ACIN=access con- 
trol information] 



(TAPE) 



, DTYP=< 



DSEC 
HPT 
PAD 
LOPID J 



[ NOCNTG 1 
ICNTG J 



. ., J.CEOF1 
operator id J^^j 



[,RCTL= 



ET ] 

T 

LC , 



[,TRKS-{|)] 



[, RETP=retention] 
DSEC 






SRC= 



TP 
FT 







[■—(H)] 
'[•"«- Dsabl lt'Bfc}]] 



| [, EFID= eHdl/efid2/, . . /efidn] 
~~ 1600 ~* 



I 



, DEN= M 



800 
556 
356 
200 



,< 



num- 



BAND 
SECT 

WORDfber 
BYTE 



A-3 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-5 CAT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



Catalog name 



File name 



PARAMETER 



Pathname 



ACNM = access 
name 



Maximum num- MXVR = maxi- 

ber of versions mum number of 

versions 



Creating catalog 
security 



Destination de- 
vice 



FUNCTION 



Identifies the catalog to contain the new 
node and its associated file. Specifies 
the identity and location of the node being 
created. 



Identifies the file to the job. Access 
name exists only for the duration of the 
job. Valid only for normal catalog pro- 
cessing. 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



None. Always mandatory. 



Specifies the maximum number of file 
versions that exist simultaneously at the 
node being created. 



Access control 
state 

NO 



ACST ={ PART 
FULL 



Reference con- 
trol state 

(NO 1 

RFST iJmZ] 



Son-add control 
state 

(NO 1 

SON -\¥mZ\ 



Specifies the degree of control the Op- 
erating System will maintain over access 
to the node. 



Specifies whether the Operating System 
will control users' attempt to pass 
through the node during a catalog search. 



Specifies the degree of control exercised 
by the Operating System over the addition 
of son nodes to the node. 



Mandatory when SRC = DSEC 
or when SRC defaults to DSEC. 
Not valid for SRC = TP or FT. 



One version. 



NO; no access control. 



Access control 
information 
ACIN = access 
control informa- 
tion 



Identifies valid users and specifies the 
actions each may take (attributes). The 
parameter is a set of subparameter s 
(separated by slashes) each of which 
consists of a user code appended by a 
series of alphabetic characters denoting 
activity attributes. The user code is 
separated from attributes by an asterisk; 
each character also is separated by an 
asterisk. Allowable characters are E,F, 
O, R, S and/or W. 

Only ten user codes can be specified in 
this parameter. 



NO; any user may pass through 
the node. 



NO; any user can add son nodes 



Creation of the node as de- 
fined by user code specified 
most recently on a JOB or 
LIMIT statement in the job 
creating the node. Creator 
automatically possesses all 
attributes. 



DTYP 



TAPE ) 

DSEC 

HPT 

PAD 

OPID 



fNOCNTGl 
' ICNTG I 



/operator id/ 



CEOF 
CALL 



Specifies whether the file being cataloged 
will be output to 1/2" magnetic tape 

1600 bpi) or remain on secondary disc, 
allocated on head-per-track disc, position- 
arm-disc or specific channel or module 
given by the third subparameter. 

Specifies whether the file may be allo- 
cated with or without regard to physical 
contiguity on disc. 

Specifies specific device related channel 
or module used in conjunction with OPID 
in first subparameter. 

Specifies whether initial allocation of 
cataloged copy of file is set to the original 
file's current end of file or to the original 
file's current allocation. 



TAPE. The operating system 
will place the cataloged file on 
magnetic tape. For SRC = TP 
|or FT, the parameter is in- 
alid. 



No contiguity required. 



None. 



[nitial allocation set to file's 
current end of file. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-4 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-5 CAT STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED; 



TYPE 



Retention period 



Source location 
of file 



.PARAMETER 



RETP = reten- 
tion 



SRC 



DSEC1 



TP 
FT 



■^TTT■^ 1 T,r■' , 



5N 



Specifies the length of time a cataloged 
file is to be retained. The number of 
days is converted to an expiration date 
that is written in the Tape Volume Cata- 
log and the label for standard -labeled 
tapes. The parameter is not meaningful 
for files on secondary disc. 



Specifies the source device on which to- 
be-cataloged file resides. DSEC speci- 
fies secondary disc; TP half-inch mag- 
netic tape volume; and FT one-inch tape 
volume. SRC also indicates whether 
normal cataloging functions or special 
processing will occur. SRC=DSEC indi- 
cates normal processing. SRC=TP or 
FT means special catalog processing. 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



An installation-defined value. 
Not valid for DTYP = DSEC. 



DSEC. Normal catalog pro- 
cessing occurs. 



The following parameters apply only to special catalog processing in which the file to be cataloged exists on tape 
and is not buffered to secondary disc for processing. 



File organization 



Volume specifi- 
cation 



forg= '(dI} 



External file 
identification 

EFID = tape idl 
/tape id2 

/tape idn 



Label 
LABL: 



posi- 
tion 



Density 



Specifies the organization of the cata- 
loged file. Organization can be one of 
two types: PS, physical sequential; DS, 
direct secondary. The source parameter 
must be set to TP or FT. 



Specifies the identification numbers of 
the source volumes containing the file to 
be cataloged. All identifiers must be 
declared and must appear in the sequence 
that the tape volumes are to be read. 



Describes characteristics of the tape 
volume that will contain the files speci- 
fied. The parameter is comprised of a 
set of two subparameters separated by 
slashes, each of which is positional and 
optional: 

Position 

Label type 



PS. If SRC is not specified or 
is set to DSEC, the parameter 
is meaningless. 



DEN = 



f lfcOO 
800 
712 
556 
356 
200 



Track parameter 
TRKS= j^} 



Specifies the recording density in bits- 
per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes 
designated by the EFID parameter. The 
parameter is valid only for special cata- 
log processing. 1600 and 800 bpi per- 
tain to half -inch, 9 track tape. 800, 556 
and 200 bpi pertain to half-inch 7 track 
tape. 712 and 356 bpi pertain to one- 
inch tape. 



Specifies whether the half-inch tape is 
9 track or 7 track. 



Mandatory if SRC=TP or FT. 
If SRC is not specified or is 
set to DSEC, the parameter is 
meaningless. 



If omitted, the default values 
are 1 and SL. If SRC is not 
specified or is set to DSEC, 
the parameter is not meaning- 
ful. 

1 
SL 



1600 bpi for SRC=TP and 
TRKS=9 or defaulted. 800 bpi 
for SRC=TP and TRKS=7. If 
SRC is not specified or is set 
to DSEC the DEN parameter 
is meaningless. 



If omitted, 9 track is assumed. 



A-5 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



A- 5 CAT STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 




Recording con- 


Specifies recording control for parity, 


K 


If omitted and TRKS=7 ET is 




trol parameter 


translation, and data conversion for 7 




assumed. If TRKS=9 or de- 




/ ET \ 


track tape 




faulted this parameter does 




\ E~~ 1 


O - odd parity, no translation, no con- 




not apply. 




RCTL = (O \ 
/T \ 


version. 
E - even parity, no translation, no con- 








' c ! 


version. 








T - odd parity, translation, no conver- 










sion. 










C - odd parity, no translation, no con- 










version. 










ET - even parity, no translation, con- 










version. 






Managing secon- 


/BANEK 
JSECT' 


Manages disc space for the to-be- 


K 


An installation-defined value. 


dary disc space 


cataloged file during subsequent assign- 




If SRC is not specified or is 




Word. numDei 


ment to a job. The parameter value is 




set to DSEC, the disc param- 




vbyte; 


an unsigned constant less than 999999 




eter is invalid. 



A-b CATBLD STATEMENT 



The general form of the CATBLD statement is: 



1 LABEL 




I OPERATION 




OPERANDS 


/ '[Symbol] 


'* ■ 


CATBLD 


ifc , 


edgename [, MXVR=maximum number 
of versions] 










, ACST= 


NO )" 
PART 
.FULLJ. 


[, SON= 


[NO n 
i FULLjJ 










, RFST= 


NO n 

FULLjJ 








1 


, ACIN=access control information] 



A-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-7 CATBLD SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/'K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog name 


Edgename 


Identifies the catalog being defined to the 
catalog system. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 


Maximum num- 


MXVR = maxi- 


Specifies the maximum number of file 


K 


If omitted OS assumes only 


ber of versions 


mum number of 
versions 


versions to exist simultaneously at the 
node. 




1 version. 


Access control 
state 


ACST = 


f NO 1 


Specifies the degree of control system 
will maintain over access to node 


K 


If omitted NO access control 
will be maintained. 


PART 






[ FULL J 


NO - all users may read, write or 










execute 










PART - all users read and execute 










FULL - access to qualified users only 






Son-add control 


— M 


Specifies degree of control exercised by 


K 


If omitted NO son-add control 


state 


OS over the addition of nodes to the root 




will be maintained. 






node. 










NO - any user can add sons to the 










specified node 










FULL - only qualified users can add son 










nodes 






Reference control 


»« ■ fe] 


Specifies whether OS will control users' 


K 


If omitted NO reference control 


state 


attempt to pass through node during a 




will be maintained. 






catalog search. 










NO - any user can pass through node 










FULL - only qualified users can pass 










through node 






Access control 


ACIN = access 


Provides security measures for catalog 


K 


If omitted only creator of node 


information 


control infor- 
mation 


being built. Establishes valid users and 

actions each may take through attributes 

given: 

E - execute 

F - reference 

O - own 

R - read 

S - son add 

W - write 




possesses all attributes. 



A-7 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-8 CATN STATEMENT 



The general form of the CATN statement is: 



i r 

LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[Symbol] 



CATN 



pathname [, MXVR=maximum number 
of versions] 



[, ACST= 
[,RFST= 



f NO 
PART 
FULLJ 



"• SON =(f§ L Jl 



full! ][. ACIN = access 

control informa- 
tion] 



A- 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-9 CATN SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog node 
name 


pathname 


Specifies the location and name of the 
new node in the catalog. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 


Maximum num- 
ber of versions 


MXVR = maxi- 
imum number 
of versions 


Specifies the maximum number of ver- 
sions at this node. 


K 


If omitted only one version is 
allowed. 


Access control 
state 


ACST = 


[NO 1 

part} 

FULL J 


Specifies the degree of control system 
will maintain over access to node 
NO - all users can read, write or 

execute 
PART - all users can read and execute 
FULL r access only to qualified users 


K 


If omitted default is to NO. 


Son-add control 
state 


*»■ mn.} 


Specifies degree of control exercised by 
OS over the addition of nodes to this node. 
NO - any user can add to the specified 

node 
FULL - only qualified users can add son 

nodes 


K 


If omitted default is to NO. 


Reference con- 
trol state 


""■{SSll} 


Specifies whether OS will control users' 
attempt to pass through this node during 
a catalog search 

NO - any user can pass through node 
FULL - only qualified users can pass 
through node 


K 


If omitted default is to NO. 


Access control 
information 


ACIN = access 
control infor- 
mation 


Provides security measures for node 

being built. Establishes valid users and 

actions each may take through attributes 

given. 

E - execute 

F - reference 

O - own 

R - read 

W - write 

S - son add 


K 


If omitted only creator of node 
possesses all attributes. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-9 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 10. THE CATALOG VERSION STATEMENT (CATV) 
The general form of the CATV statement is: 



LABEL 



[Symbol] 



OPERATION 



CATV 



OPERANDS 



pathname [, ACNM=access name] 
f TAPEl 



[,DTYP= 



DSEC 
HPT 
PAD 
OPID 

/ceof) - 
cHZ) 

[, RETP=retention] 

I DSEC ) 
[, SRC= TP ] 

\ * j. / 



f NOCNTG ] 
ICNTG J 



[.FORG= |g| ] 



[, LABL=[ 



1 ) lf/ ISL 
position) JL/ I NL 



]] 



[, EFID=efidl/efid2/. . . /efidn] 

1600 
800 

[,DEN=/712 \ ][TRKS= jyj] 
556 
356 
200 



[,RCTL= 



ET 

E 

O 

T 



J[. 



BAND 
SECT 
WORD 
BYTE 



= number ] 



A- 10 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-ll CATV STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog name 


Pathname 


Identifies the catalog to contain the new 
file. Specifies the identity and location 
of the node containing the file. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


File name 


ACNM = access 
name 


Identifies the file to the job. Access 
name exists only for the duration of the 
job. Valid only for normal catalog pro- 
cessing. 


K 


Mandatory when SRC=DSEC 
or when SRC defaults to DSEC. 
Not valid for SRC=TP or FT. 


Destination de- 
vice 


/TAPE I 
\DSEC f 
DTYP = ^HPT \ 
/PAD V 
\OPID I 

(NOCNTG , 
1 ICNTG ' 

/operator id/ 
CEOF , 

'call 


Specifies whether the file being cata- 
loged will be output to half -inch mag- 
netic tape (1600 bpi) or remains on sec- 
ondary disc, allocated on head-per-track 
disc, position-arm-disc, or specific 
channel or module given by the third 
subparameter. 

Specifies whether the file may be al- 
located with or without regard to physi- 
cal contiguity on disc. 

Specifies specific device related channel 
or module used in conjunction with OPID 
in first subparameter. 

Specifies whether initial allocation of 
cataloged copy of file is set to the origi- 
nal files current end of file or to the 
original files current allocation. 


K 


TAPE. The Operating System 
will place the cataloged file on 
magnetic tape. For SRC = TP 
or FT, the parameter is in- 
valid. 

No contiguity required. 

None. 

Initial allocation set to file's 
current end of file. 


Retention period 


RETP = reten- 
tion 


Specifies the length of time a cataloged 
file is to be retained. The number of 
days is converted to an expiration date 
that is written in the Tape Volume Cata- 
log and the label for standard -labeled 
tapes. The parameter is not meaningful 
for files on secondary disc. 


K 


An installation-defined value. 
Not valid for DTYP=DSEC. 


Source location 
of file 


SRC = 


[ DSEC 1 




Specifies the source device on which to- 
be-cataloged file resides. DSEC speci- 
fies secondary disc; TP half-inch mag- 
netic tape volume; and FT one-inch tape 
volume. SRC also indicates whether 
normal cataloging functions or special ; 
processing will occur. SRC=DSEC in- 
dicates normal processing. SRC=TP or 
FT means special catalog processing. 


K 


DSEC. Normal catalog pro- 
cessing occurs. 


TP 
FT 


The following parameters apply only to special catalog processing in which the file to be cataloged exists 
on tape and is not buffered to secondary disc for processing. 


File organiza- 
tion 


™°-(S} 


Specifies the organization of the cata- 
loged file. Organization can be one of 
two types: PS, physical sequential; DS, 
direct secondary. The source param- 
eter must be set to TP or FT. 


K . 


PS. If SRC is not specified or 
is set to DSEC, the parameter 
is meaningless. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-ll 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 11 catv (continued; 



TYPE 



PARAMETER 



FUNCTION 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



Volume specifi- 
cation 



External file 
identification . 

EFID = tape idl 
/tape id2 

/tape idn 



Specifies the identification numbers of 
the source volumes containing the file 
to be cataloged. All identifiers must be 
declared and must appear in the sequence 
that the tape volumes are to be read. 



Mandatory if SRC=TP or FT. 
If SRC is not specified or is 
set to DSEC, the parameter 
is meaningless. 



Label 
LABL: 



IpositionJ/ 

(— 1 
iNLj 



DEN = 



Managing sec- 
ondary disc 
space 



Density 



1600 
800 
712 
556 
356 
200 



Track parameter 
TRKS = (|| 



Recording control 
parameter 

ET 



RCTL 



'BAND\ 
SECT ( 

iWORDf number 
•BYTE* 



Describes characteristics of the tape 
volume that will contain the files speci- 
fied. The parameter is comprised of a 
set of two subparameters separated by 
slashes, each of which is positional and 
optional: 

Position value is 1 < n < 255 

Label type value is either SL or NL 



Specifies the recording density in bits- 
per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes 
designated by the EFID parameter. The 
parameter is valid only for special cata- 
log processing. 1600 and 800 bpi per- 
tain to half-inch 9 -track tape; 800, 556 
and 200 bpi pertain to half-inch 7-track 
tape; 712 and 356 to one-inch tape. 



Specifies whether the half-inch tape is 
9 track or 7 track. 



Specifies recording control for parity, 

translation, and data conversion for 7 

track tape 

O - odd parity, no translation, no 
conversion. 

E - even parity, no translation, no 
conversion. 

T - odd parity, translation, no 
conversion. 

C - odd parity, no translation, con- 
version. 

ET - even parity, translation, no 
conversion. 



Manages disc space for the to-be- 
cataloged file during subsequent assign 
ment to a job. The parameter value is 
an unsigned constant less than 999999 



10" 



If omitted, the default values 
are 1 and SL. If SRC is not 
specified or is set to DSEC, 
the parameter is not mean- 
ingful. 

1 
SL 



1600 bpi for SRC = TP and 
TRKS=9 or defaulted. 800 bpi 
for SRC=TP and TRKS=7. 



If omitted, 9 track is 
assumed. 



If omitted and TRKS=7 ET is 
assumed. If TRKS=9 or de- 
faulted this parameter does not 
apply. 



An installation-defined value. 
If SRC is not specified or is set 
to DSEC, the disc parameter is 
invalid. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A- 12 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-12 CHG STATEMENT 



The general form of the CHG statement is: 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[Symbol] 



CHG 



pathname [, MXVR=maximum number 

of versions] 

[, FLVR=flagged version number] 



[, ACST= 



NO 

FULL 

PART 



H-^-liLJ J 



[. RFST= {f§ LL } ][, ACIN=access 

control informa- 
tion] 

[, RETP=retention[, VERS=version 

number]] 



[.**HS?Fh 



A-13 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-13 CHG SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog node 
name 


Pathname 


Specifies to the catalog system the node 
being changed. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 


Maximum num- 
ber of versions 


MXVR = maxi- 
mum number of 
versions 


Specifies the maximum number of ver- 
sions at the node. 


K 


If omitted the current maxi- 
mum number is retained. 


Flagged version 


FLVR = flagged 
version number 


Specifies the absolute number of a new 
flagged version. 


K 


If omitted the current flagged 
version does not change. 


Access control 
state 


ACST = 


NO 

FULL 

PART 




Specifies the degree of control the OS 
maintains over access to this node 
NO - all users can read, write or 

execute 
PART - all users can read and execute 
FULL - only qualified users have 

access 


K 


If omitted the current access 
control is retained. 


Son-add control 
state 


«™-|^xJ 


Specifies degree of control exercised by 
OS over addition of nodes to this node 
NO - any user can add to the speci- 
fied node 
FULL - only qualified users can add son 
nodes 


K 


If omitted, the son -add state 
remains unchanged. 


Reference 
control state 


RFST = P° 1 
IFULLJ 


Specifies whether OS will control users' 
attempts to pass through this node 
NO - any user can pass through node 
FULL - only qualified users can pass 
through node 


K 


If omitted, the reference state 
remains unchanged. 


Access control 
information 


ACIN = access 
control informa- 
tion 


Specifies additions to the access control 

List, modification of attributes of users 

currently in list or deletions of users 

from the Access Control List 

E - execute 

F - reference 

O - own 

R - read 

S - son add 

W - write 


K 


If omitted, the contents of the 
access control list remain 
unchanged. 


Tape file 
retention period 


RETP = retention 
VERS = version 
number 


Specifies number of days the tape file 
version indicated by the VERS subparam- 
eter will be retained. Not applicable 
to disc files. 


K 


If VERS omitted, the flagged 
version is retained the number 
of days specified. 


Automatic 
sequencing 


""»■&} 


Specifies change in sequencing 
ON - activates 
OFF - deactivates 


K 


If omitted sequencing remains 
unchanged. 



POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A- 14 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



P 




V) 



A-14 CJSL STATEMENT 



The general form of the CJSL statement is: 



' LABEL 



/ [symbol] 



t 



1 — r 

OPERATION I ! 



OPERANDS 



CJSL "# access name 
I I 



A- 15 CJSL STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Job specification 
source file 


Access name 


Specifies the name of the file containing 
job specification source to be syntax 
checked. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A- 16 CNT STATEMENT 



The general form of the CNT statement is: 



1 — r 

OPERATION I I 
i_L 



LABEL 



OPERANDS 



[Symbol] 



16 



I | 

CNT , 16 , access name 



A- 17 CNT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Access name 
of concatenated 
file 


Access name 


Identifies the set of concatenated files 
to the job. ASG, FIT and FD statements 
are the only statements that can be used 
in file concatenation. These appear be- 
tween the CNT and CNTE statements. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-15 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-18 CNTE STATEMENT 



The general form of the CNTE statement is 



l r 

OPERATION I I 
i L 



OPERANDS 



16 



CNTE 



• I 



None 



A-19 DEL STATEMENT 



The general form of the DEL statement is: 



T 1 1 

I LABEL i l OPERATION 
J 1 I 



/ . [Symbol] | ]6 I DEL 

! . i 

___i i : 



tf I 



OPERANDS 



pathname 



A-20 DEL STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog node 
name 


Pathname 


Initiates deletion of terminal node and 
associated files from a catalog. 


P 


None. It must be specified 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-21 DELETE VERSION STATEMENT (DELV; 
The general form of the DELV statement is: 



T 

I LABEL 

J 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



/ [symbol] 



y> 



DELV 



v> 



pathname [, VERS = version number] 
[, OPT = (option)] 



A-16 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-22 DELV STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog node 
name 


Pathname 


Identifies the node in the catalog at 
which the specified version is to be 
deleted. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Specifying the 
version 


VERS = version 
number 


Specifies the number of the version to 
be deleted. Overrides option parameter. 


K 


Flagged version will be de- 
leted. 


OPT = (option) 


Permits the deletion of all versions 
cataloged at the specified node. Only 
option code A may be used at the present 
time. This parameter is valid only if the 
VERS parameter is not specified. 


K 


Version specified by VERS 
parameter or its default, the 
flacfed version. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-23 END -OF- JOB STATEMENT (EOJ) 



The general form of the EOJ statement is: 



LABEL 



/ .[symbol] 
I 

i 



I OPERATION 



y> 



EOJ 



tf 



OPERANDS 



None 



A-24 EOJX STATEMENT 



The general form of the EOJX statement is: 



■ LABEL 



i 



/ | [symbol] 



tf 



1 — T 

OPERATION I I 
I L 



EOJX 



, 16 . none 



OPERANDS 



A- 17 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-25 FILE DESCRIPTION STATEMENT (FD' 



The general form of the FD statement is: 



LABEL 



[Symbol] 



tf 



OPERATION 



FD 



ti 



OPERANDS 



access name 

(SECT \ 

r J BAND ( . . 

[ ' ) WORD/ = lm 

' 1 increment] 



initial / maximum/ 

VV WJ*.Ui 

I BYTE 
[,FORG = |^|] [, BKSZ = number] 



[, LREC = number] 
(ACC) 

[,EROP = jsKP> ] 
(ABE) 

[, RCFM = 



r F»l 

LS J 



(A) 
(Ml 



V LS J 

U 



[, BFTK = S] [,BFAL = <D? ] 

[, BUFL = number] 
[, BUFN = number] 



[, DTYP = 



DSECl 



HPT 
PAD 
OPID 
/ [operator id] 
[, SETUP = set up id] 



3/C 



[NOCNTG 



ICNTG 



■b 



A-18 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-26 FD STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



File information 



File logical 
characteristics 



Buffer manage- 
ment 



Access name 



PARAMETER 



Disc reservation 

/SECT \ = initial/ 
)BAND f maxi- 
WORD? mum/ 
BYTE/ incre- 
ment 



Position 

[NEW] 

pos Mmod1 



forg= {d1] 



FUNCTION 



Identifies the file to the job. Used by 
other JSL statements referencing the 
file. 



Manages disc space for the specified 
file for the duration of the job. 

There are three subparameters: 

Initial 

Maximum 

Increment 



Specifies the initial position of the file 
during file opening. 

NEW specifies that the file is posi- 
tioned at its beginning. 

MOD specifies that the file is posi- 
tioned at its end. 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



None. Always mandatory. 



Installation-defined values. 



The entire set of subparam- 
eters must be coded or the 
set defaulted. 



File organization Specifies the organization of the file on 
disc: 

PS sequential 

DS direct secondary 



Record length 
LREC = number 



Block size 
BKSZ = number 



Record format 





B 1 


RCFM=F 


BS 




is J 




B l 


V 


BS 




S 



Km} 



M 



Specifies the maximum number of bytes 
in a block within the specified file. 



Specifies the maximum length in bytes of 
any logical record within the specified 
file. 



Specifies the format of the logical rec- 
ords within the specified file. 

Allowable combinations: 



(m! 
(m) 



NEW if value not previously 
specified. If previously speci- 
fied, the condition does not 
change. 



No system supplied values. 
May be supplied by catalog 
entry, default values of FIT, 
or through the file open pro- 
cess. 



No system- supplied values. 
May be supplied by tape labels. 



No system supplied values. 
May be supplied by tape labels, 



«(m! 



Buffering type 
BFTK = S 



Buffer alignment 
Fl 



BFAL 



Buffer length 
BUFL = number 



Buffer number 
BUFN = number 



Defines the type of buffering to be used 
during CP step usage of specified file. 
Only simple buffering can be specified. 



Defines the alignment wanted for each 
buffer used during CP step access for 
the specified file. 

F = fullword alignment 
D = doubleword alignment 
O = octet alignment 



Defines the length in bytes of each buffer 
used during CP step processing of the 
specified file. 



Defines the number of buffers desired For 
processing the specified file during CP 
step execution. 



No system supplied values. 
May be supplied by tape labels. 

If RCFM is specified, sub- 
parameter defaults are: 

length : invalid if not coded. 

blocking : none 

structure : no spanning or 
not standard. 

control character : none 
present. 



Depends on access method. 



Depends on access method. 



K Depends on access method. 



Depends on access method. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-19 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-26 FD STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED; 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


System specifica- 


Error option 


Specifies the action to be taken by the 


K 


No system supplied values. 


tions 


fACCl 


System if an uncorrectable input /output 




May be supplied by tape labels. 




EROP = 


SKP 
ABE 




error occurs. 

ACC - accept the block causing the 










error. 










SKP - skip the block causing the 










error. 










ABE - terminate the step. 






Destination 


/DSEC\ 


Specifies if file is to be allocated on 


K 


If omitted OS assumes DSEC 


device 


DTYP J HPT V 


head-per-track disc, position-arm-disc 




and file will be allocated on 




pAD r 


device specified in OS default parameter 




device specified in the system 




VOPID ) 


table or a specific channel or module 
specified by the third subparameter. 




default parameter table. 




.NOCNTG. 


Specifies whether the file may be allo- 




No contiguity required. 




CNTG 


cated with or without regard to physical 
contiguity on disc. 








/operator id/ 


Specifies specific device related 




None 




,CEOF 


Specifies whether initial allocation of file 




Initial allocation set to file's 




^AIjJj 


is set to the original file's current end of 
file or to the original file's current al- 




current end of file. 






location 






SETUP = setup id 


Specifies reference to a SETUP statement 


K 


If omitted there is no default 






through use of the SETUP statement , 




value. The location of the file 






label and the file defined by the FD state- 




is determined by the DTYP 






ment will be allocated on the same chan- 




parameter or its default value. 






nel selected by the SETUP statement. 






Log of events 


-iOE = access 


Specifies the access name of a file to be 




If omitted no log is compiled. 




lame 


used as a log-of-error events for the file 
specified. 




As a result, termination of file 
transfer can result upon error 
detection. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-20 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A _27 FILE INPUT FROM A HALF -INCH MAGNETIC TAPE (FIT; 
The general form of the FIT statement is: 



LABEL 



Symbol 



OPERATII 



FIT 



tf 



OPERANDS 



access name 

[EFID=tape idl[/tape id2[/. . . 
[/tape id n]]] 

'SL 



[, LABL = [ rr. 1 

L LpositionJ 

[,RTRY=number] I, 

1600 X 
800 

556 
200 



/ 



PRTY= 



NL 
IBLPJ 

ABEll 



, DEN = 



[ACC 



fj 



[,TRKS={||] 

[, LOC = dest code] 



ET 

E 

,RCTL=( O 

T 

C 



A-21 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-28 FIT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



PARAMETER 



FUNCTION 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



File access 
name 



Access name 



Specifies the name associated with the 
file to be transferred. 



None. Always mandatory. 



Tape volume 
description 



External file 
identification 

EFID = tape idl 
[/tape 
id 2] 



Specifies the identifiers of volumes con- 
taining the file. When the FIT statement 
occurs in an MFR/MFRE group this 
parameter is overridden by the MFR 
statement specifications. 



None. At least one identifier 
must be specified. 



Label parameter 
LABL: ' 1 



I— J 1 

{position}/ 



1—1 
iNLj 



Specifies the type of labels on volumes 
containing the specified file and desig- 
nates the initial positioning of the first 
volume before the data is transferred. 
The two subparameters are positional 
but not mandatory. When the FIT state- 
ment occurs in an MFR/MFRE group and 
the LABL parameter is specified on the 
FIT statement the file position subparam- 
eter will override the sequence set up by 
the file position subparameter specified 
on the MFR statement or its default and 
subsequent FIT statements will be pro- 
cessed according to the file position 
designated if the LABL parameter is 
omitted on these statements. 



LABL = 1/SL 



Tape density 
parameter 

1600 
800 
712 
556 
356 
200 



DEN = 



Specifies the recording density in bits- 
per-inch per track for the tape volume 
designated by the EFID parameter. 1600 
and 800 bpi pertain to half-inch, 9 track 
tape. 800, 556 and 200 bpi pertain to 
half-inch, 7 track tape. 712 and 356 
pertain to one-inch tape. When the FIT 
statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group 
this parameter is overridden by the MFR 
statement specification. 



1600 bpi for SRC = TP and 
TRKS=9 or defaulted 
800 bpi for SRC = TP and 
TRKS=7. If SRC is not speci- 
fied or is set to DSEC the DEN 
parameter is meaningless. 



Track parameter 
ITRKS = {!} 



Specifies whether the half-inch tape is 
9 track or 7 track. When the FIT state- 
ment occurs in an MFR/MFRE group 
this parameter is overridden by the MFR 
statement specification 



If omitted, 9 track is assumed. 



Recording control 
parameter 



RCTL 



ET 

E 

O 

T 

C 



Specifies recording control for parity, 
translation and data conversion for 7 
track tape 

O odd parity, no translation, no 

conversion 
E even parity, no translation, no 

conversion 
T odd parity, translation, no 

conversion 
C odd parity, no translation, 

conversion 
ET even parity, translation, no 

conversion. 
When the FIT statement occurs in an 
MFR/MFRE group this parameter is 
overridden by the MFR statement speci- 
fication. 



If omitted and TRKS=7 ET is 
assumed. If TRKS=9 or de- 
faulted this parameter does 
not apply. 



POSITIONAL 



K = KEYWORD 



J\ — &£• 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-28 FIT STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Error processing 


Retry parameter 

RETRY = num- 
ber 


Specifies the maximum number of times 
the System attempts to read a record 
that has a parity error before the error 
becomes permanent. 


K 


RTRY = 5 


Parity error 
option parameter 

PRTY = !^i|i 


Specifies the action taken if a permanent 
error occurs. 

ABE - abort the file transfer at this 

point. 
ACC - accept the error and continue 

processing. 


K 


PRTY = ABE 


Destination 
specifications 


LOC = destina- 
tion code 


Specifies the site at which the tape file is 
to be input. The parameter value is in 
string of one to eight alphanumeric char- 
acters designating the site. When the 
FIT statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE 
group, the LOC parameter is overridden 
by the MFR specifications. 


K 


Central site code 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-29 FILE OUTPUT TO SYSTEM STATEMENT (FQSYS) 
The general form of the FOSYS statement is: 



I LABEL i I OPERATION j , OPERANDS 


/ , [symbol] | \!> 1 FOSYS jtf 1 access name [, TYPE = {p^!^r}] 

j \ y \ \ [, EXID = external file ID] 

' ' 1 [, LOC = location ID] 

I | | 1 I [, FORM = [special forms ID] / 

1 1 . * 1 [carriage control tape 

i • ] j i m 

1 | 1 ' [,PRTS = line spacing] [, COPIES = 
■ ' j II aa] 

, | 1 j j [, OPT = (R)] 
1 1 1 1 



A-23 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-30 FOSYS STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File identifica- 


Access name 


Identifies the file to the job. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


tion 










File type 


_„__ fPRINT 1 


Specifies whether the file is to be placed 
on the print or punch output chain. 


K 


PRINT. The file is spooled on 
the print output chain. 


TlPE " (punch) 


Output location 


LOC = location 


Specifies the installation at which the 


K 


The location specified on the 




ID 


file is output. 




JOB statement. If JOB does 
not specify a location identifier, 
the default is the installation 
where the job was submitted. 


Output name 


EXID = external 


Specifies the name of the output file on 


K 


No identifying message on 




file identifier 


printouts or cards. For print files, the 
print image is preceded by a special line 
with the external file identifier. For 
punch files, a card containing the exter- 
nal file identifier precedes each deck. 




printout or punched card will 
be output preceding the output 
file information. 


Special forms 


FORM = special 


The parameter consists of two subparam- 


K 


Installation-assigned identi- 




forms ID/car- 


eters. 




fiers. 




riage control 


The special forms identifier specifies 


P 






i. TT\ 


special, paper anu loriris xor uotu print 
and punch files. 

The carriage control tape identifier 
specifies a carriage control tape for 
print files. 


P 




Printer spacing/ 


PRTS = line 


Specifies the line spacing by the printer 


K 


For print or punch files, 


stacker selection 


spacing or 
stacker selection 
characters 


between lines of code or the card stacker 
receiving the punched cards. 




PRTS = 1. 


Disposition of 


OPT = (R) 


Specifies that the file has been spooled to 


K 


OPT = R 


disc space 




the system print or punch output chains 
and that the disc space previously oc- 
cupied may be reassigned for other use. 






Number of 


COPIES = aa 


Specifies the number of copies of the 


K 


One copy is output. 


copies 




specified file to be output at the desig- 
nated device. The parameter value is an 
unsigned constant from 1 to 99. 






NO! 


n E: The OPT para 


meter has been designed so that future opti 


one m 


ay be added. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-24 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-31 FILE OUTPUT TO HALF-INCH MAGNETIC TAPE (FOT) 
The general form of the FOT statement is: 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



Symbol 



y> 



FOT 



[ 



access name 
", EFID=tape idl [/tape id2 [/. . .] ] ] 

'•■^fei-Dt'lH 

/ [{add IJ J J J 

APND 
, SVC=scratch volume count J 

N 1 
,OPT=(-)J 

[, RETP=retention] |, RTRY={ ~— , 

L L (.number] 

• PRTY ^ccll [' LOC=location id 1 
j DEST=destination code] 
[1600 

•°™ llll 

: { 200 J J 

r ET 

E 
i O 

T 



I 



[,TRKS=[|]] 



, RCTL= 



A-25 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-32 FOT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File access name 


Access name 


Specifies the name associated with the 
file to be transferred. The name must 
be a valid ASC symbol. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Error processing 




f 5 ) 




Specifies the number of times the Op- 


K 


RTRY = 5 


specification 


RTRY = 


num- 
ber 




erating System is to attempt to write a 
block to the tape if a parity error occurs. 




Five attempts will be made. 






The value of the parameter is an unsigned 










constant ranging from to 15. 






— ■ ird 


Specifies the action the Operating System 


K 


PRTY = ABE 




takes if the number of write -error re- 










tries is exceeded. One of two actions 










can be specified: 










ABE - abort the file transfer at this 










point. 










ACC - accept the error and continue 










processing. 






Tape volume de- 


EFID = tape idl 


Specifies the identification numbers of the 


K 


The file is written to a system 


scription 


[/tape id2 

[/tape 
idn]]] 


tape volumes that are to contain the file. 

When the FOT statement occurs in an 
MFR/MFRE group, this parameter is 
overridden by the MFR statement speci- 
fications . 




scratch volume. 




1 1 




Specifies the type of labels on the volumes 


K 


LABL = 1/SL/NEW 




LABL = 


posi- 
tion 




to contain the specified file, designates 
the position of the file on the volume, and 








C) 


specifies the placement of the new file. 








The parameter consists of three sub- 








parameters, each separated by a slash. 










NEW 




The three subparameters are positional, 








/ 


ADD 
APND 


J 


but not mandatory. 

When the FOT statement appears in 










an MFR/MFRE group, the LABL param- 










eter is overriden by the MFR specifica- 
tion. 








1 1600V 


Specifies the recording density in bits- 


K 


DEN = 1600 




I 800 1 


per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes 




1600 bpi for SRC = TP and 




■»•■ )llt\ 


designated by the EFID parameter. 1600 




TRKS = 9 or defaulted. 800 bpi 




and 800 bpi pertains to half-inch 9-track 




for SRC = TP and TRKS = 7. If 




I 356 l 


tape. 800, 556 and 200 bpi pertain to 




SRC is not specified or is set 




\ 200 / 


half-inch, 7-track tape. 712 and 356 bpi 
pertain to one -inch tape. When the FOT 
statement occurs in an MFR/MFRE group 
the parameter is overriden by the MFR 
statement specification. 




to DSEC, the DEN parameter 
is meaningless. 



A-26 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 32 FOT STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 




Track parameter 


Specifies whether the half-inch tape is 


K 


If omitted, 9-track is assumed. 




f 9 1 


9-track or 7 -track. When the FOT state- 










TRKS =|y| 


ment occurs in an MFR/MFRE group, 
this parameter is overriden by the MFR 
statement specification. 








Recording con- 


Specifies recording control for parity, 


K 


If omitted and TRKS = 7, 


ET 




trol parameter 


translation and data conversion for 7 




is assumed. If TRKS = 9 


or 




RCTL =/ ET\ 


track tape. 




defaulted, this parameter 


does 




) E I 


O - odd parity, no translation, no con- 




not apply. 






) w I 


version. 










T 


E - even parity, no translation, no con- 










\c J 


version. 
T - odd parity, translation, no conver- 
sion. 
C - odd parity, no translation, conver- 
sion. 
ET - even parity, translation, no conver- 
sion. 
When the FOT statement occurs in an 
MFR/MFRE group, this parameter is 
overriden by the MFR statement speci- 
fication. 










SVC = scratch 


Specifies a maximum number of system 


K 


SVC = 12 






volume 


scratch tape volumes that are to contain 










count 


the file or its parts. The parameter val- 
ue is an unsigned constant of one to six 
digits. If the FOT statement occurs in 
an MFR/MFRE group, the SVC param- 
eter is overriden by the MFR specifica- 
tion. 








Disc space man- 


OPT = fNl 


Specifies the disposition of the disc space 


K 


OPT = N 




agement 


IRI 


upon successful completion of the file 
transfer. 

N specifies that the disc file is not 
to be released at this time. R specifies 
that the disc file is to be released and the 
disc space returned to the job's disc al- 
location. 








File retention 


RETP = retention 


Specifies the number of days the tape file 
will be retained. The parameter value is 
an unsigned constant denoting days. 

When the FOT statement occurs in an 
MFR/MFRE group, the RETP parameter 
is overriden by the MFR specifications. 


K 


Installation -defined value. 




Destination spec- 


LOC = location id 


Specifies the site at which the tape file is 


K 


Central site identifier. 




ifications 




to be output. The parameter value is a 
string of one to eight alphanumeric char- 
acters designating the site. 

When the FOT statement occurs in an 
MFR/MFRE group, the LOC parameter is 
overriden by the MFR specifications. 









A-27 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-32 FOT STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 




DEST = destina- 
tion code 


Specifies the code that is transmitted to 
the external tape label for use in routing 
the tape volume after the transfer has 
been completed. The parameter value is 
a character string of two alphabetic 
characters defined by the central site. 
When the FOT statement occurs in 
an MFR/MFRE group, the DEST param- 
eter is overriden by the MFR specifica- 
tions . 


K 


Central site code. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-33 GOTO STATEMENT 

The general form of the GOTO statement is: 



LABEL 



• OPERATION 
I 



OPERANDS 



/ [ [Symbol] 



% I GOTO t I label 



A-34 GOTO STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Transfer label 


Label 


Specifies JSL statement to which execu- 
tion is to be transferred unconditionally. 


P 


None. 


It must be specified. 


P = POSITIONAL 


K = KEYWORD 











A-35 IF STATEMENT 



The general form of the IF statement is 



I LABEL 
J 



/ . [Symbol] 



I OPERATION 



* I 



FT 
I I 

i— r 



OPERANDS 



IF . t | condition, label 



A-21 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A -36 IF STATEMENT SUMMARY 



Typr 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Transfer condi- 
tion 


Condition 


Specifies condition under which transfer 
of execution is to be made. a. op.b 
where: a and b may be a constant, JSL 
variable or job specification indicator 
and .op. is one of the six relational op- 
erators . 


P 


None. It must be specified. 


Transfer label 


Label 


Specifies label of JSL statement to trans- 
fer to when condition parameter is 
. TRUE . (If condition parameter is 
• FALSE., transfer is to next JSL state- 
ment in line) 


P 


None. It must be specified. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-37 JOB STATEMENT (JOB) 



The general form of the JOB statement is 







OPERATION 




!" 

1 
1 


OPERANDS 


/ 


* 


JOB 




1 

1 

1 

1 
l 


job name, acctnum, user code 

[, CAT = category] 

[, LOC = location identification] 








I 
1 


J 

1 

-4- 


[, OPT = (option codes)] 



A-29 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-38 JOB STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Job name 


Job name 


Identifies the name of the job. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Installation ac- 
counting infor- 
mation 


Acctnum 


Supplies the account to which charges for 
the job are to be billed. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Catalog access 
security infor- 
mation 


User code 


Specifies a valid user and legal uses of 
the catalog system. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


Execution infor- 
mation 


CAT = category 


Specifies the priority of service and ex- 
ecution characteristics of the job within 
framework defined by installation. 


K 


Default category defined by 
the installation is assumed if 
parameter is omitted. 


Output location 


LOC = location 
identifi- 
cation 


Specifies the installation at which the out- 
put for the job will be produced. Loca- 
tion identifiers are assigned by the cen- 
tral installation. 


K 


If parameter is omitted, the 
job output is produced at in- 
stallation where job is sub- 
mitted. 


Restart option 

jGu processing 
option 


OPT = (option 
codes ) 


R - specifies whether to restart an ac- 
tive step after a system failure. 

C - specifies whether job processing is 
to continue normally following ab- 
normal termination of any CP step 
in the job. 


K 


If the parameter is omitted, 
the step cannot be restarted 
and only FOSYS statements 

step terminated abnormally 
unless option C is specified on 
XQT control card for that step. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-39 JOBX STATEMENT 



The general form of the JOBX statement is: 



tf 



I — r 

OPERATION I I 
1 L 



OPERANDS 



« ., I 



JOBX 16 jobname, acctnum, user code 

[, CAT=category] 

• [, LOC=location identification] 

I ' [, OPT=option] 
I 



A-30 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-40 JOBX STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Job identification 


Jobname 


Specifies the name of the job. Each job 
must have a name. 


P 


None. It is required. 


Billing informa- 
tion 


Acctnum 


Specifies account number to which job 
charges are billed. 


P 


None. It is required. 


Catalog use 


User code 


Identifies and qualifies a user to the 
catalog system. 


P 


None. It is required. 


Priority- 


CAT = category 


Specifies priority of service and execu- 
tion characteristics of job. 


K 


If omitted, an installation de- 
fined priority is assigned. 


Output location 


LOC = loc id 


Specifies installation at which output will 
be produced for the job. 


K 


If omitted, the location is 
where the job was submitted. 


Processing con- 
trol options 


OPT = (options) 


Specifies the options that are available 
to the user for processing control for the 
job. 

C - specifies job processing is to con- 
tinue normally following abnormal ter- 
mination of step. 

R - specifies an active step is to be 
restarted after a system failure. 


K 


If C is omitted, only FOSYS 
statements processed after 
CP step that terminate ab- 
normally . 

If R is omitted - an active step 
will not be restarted following 
|alsystem failure. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-41 LIMIT STATEMENT 



The general form of the LIMIT statement is 





I LABEL | 


i OPERATION 


1 
1 


OPERANDS 


/ 


, [Symbol] , 1& 


1 LIMIT 


!• 

1 
1 

1 1 
1 1 

1 I 
1 1 
1 . 
1 


[ACCT=account number][,USCO=user 

code] 

| r ( SECT ) J . . n 
[, \ = disc space reservation] 

j l-> A.1N ±J v 

j WORD 
( BYTE ) 

[ '|min) =time] 




1 ' 




1 ' 
— 1 1 





A-31 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-42 LIMIT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



Account number 



User code 



Managing sec- 
ondary disc space 



Central proces- 
sor time 



PARAMETER 



ACCT = acct no. 



USCO = user 
code 



BAND\ disc 
ISECT f_ space 
\WORDT reser- 
>BYTe) vation 



{min} = time 



FUNCTION 



Provides accounting information for the 
block. It may be different from that 
specified on the JOB statement or pre- 
vious LIMIT statement. 



Identifies a specific user to the system 
for the job block. It may be different 
from that specified on the JOB statement 
or previous LIMIT statement. 



Manages disc space for job block. Speci- 
fies maximum space allocated. The 
parameter value is an unsigned constant 
less than 999999.. 



Specifies maximum cumulative amount of 
CP execution time allowed for the job 
block. It is an unsigned constant of 1 to 
4 digits not to exceed 30 hours . 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



If omitted, the last account 
number specified on a JOB 
statement or previous LIMIT 
statement is billed. 



If omitted, the last user code 
specified on a previous LIMIT 
statement or the JOB state- 
ment is used. 



An installation defined value 
if no disc reservation has been 
previously specified. 



Installation defined amount of 
time for the block. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-43 MFR STATEMENT 



The general form of the MFR statement is 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[symbol] 



MFR 



I I 



id 



[,EFID=tape id l[/tape id2][/. . .; 
[, tape idn]]] 



[,LABL=[j 



1 



fNEW 



[/ 



ADD 

IAPNDJ 



position. 



"'{&]' 



1600 
800 



[.DEN={ 556 >] 

200 



[,TRKS=|y|] [,RCTL = 



ET 
E 
O 
T 
C 



[, SVC = scratch volume count] 

[,RETP = retention] 

[, LOC=location id] 

[, DEST=destination code] 



A-32 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-44 MFR STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



Multi-file identi- 
fication 



Tape volume 
description 



PARAMETER 



id 



EFID = tape idl 
/tape id2 



label parameter 
LABL = f 1 
<posi 
Ition 



NEW 
^ ADD 
APND 



FUNCTION 



Specifies identity for files included in the 
muiti-file request. 



Specifies the identification numbers of 
the volumes that will contain the re- 
quested files. 



Describes characteristics of tape volume 
that will contain the files. The sub- 
parameters are positional but not man- 
datory. The third subparameter applies 
only to output. 



Tape density 

parameter 

DEN = / 1600 \ 
) 800 ( 
\ 556 ( 
' 200 J 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



None. It must be specified. 



If omitted, the OS writes the 
specified files to a scratch 
volume. 



If omitted, 

LABL = 1/SL/NEW 



Track parameter 
TRKS= {!} 



Recording 

control 

RCTL = / ET 
E 
O 
T 
C 



Specifies the recording density in bits 
per in. per track for tape volumes on 
EFID parameter or scratch volumes in- 
dicated or defaulted. 



Specifies whether the tape volumes are 
9 track or 7 track. 



Scratch volumes 
SVC = scratch 

volume 

count 



Retention period 



RETP = retentior be retained 



Location param- 
eter 
LOC = loc.id 



Specifies recording control when 7 track 

tape is specified (for parity, translation 

and data conversion) 

O - odd parity, no translation, no con- 
version. 

E - even parity, no translation, no con- 
version. 

T - odd parity, translation, no conver- 
sion. 

C - odd parity, no translation, conver- 
sion. 

ET - even parity, translation, no con- 
version. 



If omitted, 1600 for TRKS = 
or default. 800 if TRKS = 7. 



If omitted, 9 track is assumed, 



Specifies a maximum number of scratch 
tape volumes that will contain the re- 
quested files. 



Specifies the number of days the file will 



Specifies where the tapes are output. 



Destination code 
DEST = dest. 
code 



Specifies where tapes are routed after 
output. 



If omitted and TRKS = 7, then 
ET is assumed. If TRKS = 9 
or defaulted, this parameter 
does not apply. 



If omitted, OS assumes 12 
scratch volumes. 



If omitted, an installation de- 
fined value will apply. 



If omitted, central site is 
assumed. 



If omitted, the central site is 
assumed. 



A-33 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-45 MFRE STATEMENT 



The general form of the MFRE statement is: 



* 



OPERATION 



T — r 
i i 

J L 



OPERANDS 



MFRE 



I I 
J I 



A-46 PATH DEFINITION STATEMENT (PD) 
The general form of the PD statement is: 




A-47 PD STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



Synonym defini- 
tion 



Catalog name 



PARAMETER 



Synonym 



Pathname 



FUNCTION 



Specifies the symbolic name by which the 
pathname is known to the job. 



Specifies an existing pathname to be given 
the synonymous name. Only the first 
edgename may be previously-defined syn- 
onym. 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



None. Always mandatory. 



None. Always mandatory. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-48 PJSL STATEMENT 



The general form of the PJSL statement is: 



LABEL 



[symbol] 



* 



' I — r 

OPERATION -I I 
1 L 



OPERANDS 



I | 

PJSL # , access name 



A-34 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-49 PJSL STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 



Job specification 
source file 



PARAMETER 



Access name 



FUNCTION 



Specifies the job specification source 
file to be executed. Processing is to 
begin on the deferred job(s) in the file. 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



None. It must be specified. 



A-50 PRINT STATEMENT (PRINT) 

The general form of the PRINT statement is: 



! LABEL ! I OPERATION j j OPERANDS 


~ { 1 * I 

/ [Symbol] t j PRINT j 16 | [JSLV= variable 1 [/variable 2[/. . . 
1 1 j 1 [/variable n]]]] 
■| i 1 i \ [, MESG=message] 
[ 1 ' | | [, OPT= (options)] 



A- 51 PRINT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Variable names 


JSLV = variable 1 


Specifies variables whose values are to 


K 


If omitted, none will be printed 


to print 


/variable2/. . . 
/variablen 


be printed in decimal. 




unless OPT = (A) or OPT = 
(A, H) is used. 


Message to print 


MESG = message 


Specifies user-supplied message for out- 
put in job activity file. 




If omitted, no message is out- 
put. 


Options 


OPT = (Options) 


Specifies whether all variables or only 
specified variables are printed and what 
notation is used. 

A - all variables printed in decimal. 
H - all JSLV parameter values in 

hexadecimal. 
A, H - all variables in hexadecimal. 




If omitted, only JSLV param- 
eter values are printed in 
decimal. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-35 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-52 RELEASE STATEMENT (REL) 

The general form of the REL statement is: 



LABEL 



1 — r 

OPERATION I ' 
I L 



OPERANDS 



[symbol] 



I 



II 



REL . # * access name [»•••[» access name]] 



A-53 REL STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File identifica- 
tion 


Access name 


Identifies to the job the file whose disc 
space is to be released. The job's ac- 
cess to the identified file is severed. 
Only non-resident files can be released. 
There is no limit on number of files 
specified. Note that the release will 
occur at the same time for all specified 
files. 


P 


None. One access name is 
always mandatory. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-54 RENAME FILE STATEMENT (RENAME 



The general form of the RENAME statement is: 



LABEL 



OPERATION 



OPERANDS 



[symbol] 



M> 



RENAME 



tf . access name., access name« 



A-55 RENAME STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Old file name 


Access name 


Specifies the existing name of the file 
to be renamed. The file is accessible 
to the job by this name. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


New file name 


Access name. 


Specifies the name by which the file will 
be accessed. This name replaces the 
existing name. Access by the old name 
is severed and is replaced by the new 
name. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-36 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-56 REPLACE VERSION STATEMENT (RPLV; 
The general form of the RPLV statement is: 



I LABEL I 


1 | 

l OPERATION | 


! OPERANDS 


/ 1 [Symbol] 1 tf 


1 RPLV \l/> 


pathname, [, ACNM = access name] 
.[, VERS = version number] 


I t 


! 1 


|[,DTYP= < 


r TAPE ] 


/ . / 

/ [NOCNTGl / 

/ ICNTG J/ 


DSEC 

HPT 

PAD 








^OPID , 


/ 






I /fCEOFl -, 
I operator ID /{ CALL }J 






[,RETP = retention] 






I f ] 
|[,SRC= ' 


DSEC 


• ] 


rp 






I ^ ] 


FT 




[,FORG= 


I— I I 
DS J J 






,[,LABL= 


rl l ] ir/f s -1 


■]] 


4 position J JL ' iNLJ 






[[, EFID = efidl/efid2/. . . /efidn] 






' 


1600] 




800 






j[,DEN=< 


712 

556 


] [,TRKS= (| 


] 








356 








■ v 


200 J 

'ET 
E 








I [,RCTL= 


< O 
T 

. c 


•] 








'band' 






, i 


I [,DEN= 


4 SECT 
' WORD 


> = number] 




i i 




BYTE 





A-37 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 57 RPLV STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Catalog name 


Pathname 


Identifies the catalog containing the ver- 
sion to be replaced. Specifies the iden- 
tity and location of the node being ac- 
cessed. 


P 


None. Always mandatory. 


File name 


ACNM = access 


Identifies the file to the job. Access 


K 


Mandatory when SRC = DSEC 




name 


name exists only for the duration of the 
job. Valid only for normal catalog pro- 
cessing. 




or when SRC defaults to DSEC. 
Not valid for SRC = TP or FT. 


Version speci- 


VERS = version 


Specifies which version of the file at the 


K 


The flagged version is re- 


fication 


number 


specified node is to be replaced. Valid 
only for normal catalog processing. 




placed if version number is 
not specified. 


Destination 


DTYP =; 


TAPE\ 


Specifies whether the file being cataloged 


K 


TAPE. The Operating System 


device 




DSEC / 


will be output to 1/2" magnetic tape 




will place the cataloged file on 






HPT > 


(1600 BPI), or remain on secondary disc, 




magnetic tape. For SRC = TP 






PAD I 


allocated on head-per -track disc, posi- 




or FT, the parameter is in- 






OPID I 


tion-arm-disc or specific channel or 




valid. 






module given by the third subparameter. 








.JNOCNTGl . 
' 1 rNTr. 1 ' 


Specifies whether the file may be allo- 




No contiguity required. 




rofaH wi J-Vt r*i" wrifVir»nf ra(TAi<^ f«-» WKirot^^l 










contiguity on disc. 








/ op id / 


Specifies specific device related channel 
or module. Used in conjunction with 
OPID, first subparameter. 




None. 




. CEOF 
CALL 


Specifies whether initial allocation of 




Initial allocation set to origi- 




cataloged copy of file is set to the origi- 




nal file's current end of file. 






nal files current end of file or to the 










original file's current allocation. 






Retention period 


RETP = reten- 


Specifies the length of time a cataloged 


K 


An installation-defined value. 




tion 


file is to be retained. The number of 
days is converted to an expiration date 
that is written in the Tape Volume Cata- 
log and the label for standard-labeled 
tapes. The parameter is not meaningful 
for files on secondary disc. 




Not valid for DTYP = DSEC. 


Source location 
of file 


[DSEC 




Specifies the source device on which to- 
be-cataloged file resides. DSEC speci- 


K 


DSEC. Normal catalog pro- 
cessing occurs . 


SRC = 1 1 


"P 




Ift J 




fies secondary disc; TP half-inch mag- 










netic tape volume; and FT one-inch tape 










volume. SRC also indicates whether nor- 










mal cataloging functions or special pro- 










cessing will occur. SRC = DSEC indi- 










cates normal processing. SRC = TP or 










FT means special catalog processing. 






The following pa 


rameters apply on] 


y_ to special catalog processing in which the 


file to be cataloged exists on tape 


and is not buffer 


ed to secondary die 


c for processing. 





A-38 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 57 RPLV STATEMENT SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



File organiza- 
tion 



Volume specifi- 
cation 



External file 
identification 

EFID =>tape idl 
/tape id2 

/tape idn 



fAKAMt'i'JiK 



FORG 



-®\ 



Label 



LABL 



posi- 
tion 

f— ) 
INLJ 



Tape density- 
parameter 

1600 
800 
712 
556 
356 
200 



DEN 



Track param- 
eter 



TRKS 



I!) 



Recording con- 
trol parameter 

RCTL = | ET' 

E 

jo 

T 
C 



r uiNv-. nv^iN 



Specifies the organization of the cata- 
loged file. Organization can be one of 
two types: PS, physical sequential; DS, 
direct secondary. The source parameter 
must be set to TP or FT. 



Specifies the identification numbers of 
the source volumes containing the file 

i_ l — 4.«i~.~g*4 All identifiers must bs 

declared and must appear in the se- 
quence that the tape volumes are to be 
read. 



Describes characteristics of the tape 
volume that contains the files specified. 
The parameter is comprised of a set of 
two subparameters separated by slashes, 
each of which is positional and optional: 

Position value is 1 < n< 255 

Label type value is either SL or NL 



Specifies the recording density in bits- 
per-inch-per-track for the tape volumes 
designated by the EFID parameter. The 
parameter is valid only for special cata- 
log processing. 1600 and 800 bpi pertain 
to 1/2-inch, 9-track tape. 800, 556 and 
200 bpi pertain to 1/2-inch, 7-track tape. 
712 and 356 bpi pertain to one-inch tape. 



Specifies whether the 1/2" tape is 9-track 
or 7-track. 



Specifies recording control for parity, 

translation and data conversion for 7- 

track tape. 

O - odd parity, no translation; no con- 
version. 

E - even parity, no translation, no con- 
version. 

T - odd parity, translation, no conver- 
sion. 

C - odd parity, no translation, conver- 
sion. 

ET - even parity, translation, no conver- 
sion. 



PS. If SRC is not specified 
or is set to DSEC, the pa- 
rameter is meaningless. 



Mandatory if SRC = TP or FT. 
If SRC is not specified or is 
set to DSEC the parameter is 
meaningless. 



If omitted, the default values 
are 1 and SL. If SRC is not 
specified or is set to DSEC, 
the parameter is not meaning- 
ful. 

1 

SL 



1600 bpi for SRC = TP and 
TRKS = 9 or defaulted. 
800 bpi for SRC = TP and 
TRKS = 7. If SRC is not 
specified or is set to DSEC 
the DEN parameter is mean- 
ingless. 



If omitted, 9-track is assumed. 



If omitted and TRKS = 7, ET 
is assumed. If TRKS = 9 or 
defaulted, this parameter does 
not apply. 



Managing secon- 
dary disc space 



!BAND\ 
SECT ( 
WORDf num - 
BYTE ' 



ber 



Manages disc space for the to-be-cata- 
loged file during subsequent assignment 
to a job. Specifies maximum space allo- 
cated. The parameter value is an un- 
signed constant less than 999999, Q . 



An installation-defined value. 
If SRC is not specified or is 
set to DSEC, the disc param- 
eter is invalid. 



POSITIONAL 



K = KEYWORD 



A-39 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 58 SET STATEMENT (SET) 

The general form of the SET statement is: 



1 LABEL | 
1 1 


OPERATION J 


OPERANDS 


/ [ [Symbol] , 16 


SET 


!» 


variable 


= [±]n [±m] 



A-59 SET STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


JSL variable 


variable = [±]n 


Specifies a JSL variable and the value to 


P 


If a JSL variable is not 


assignment 


[±m] 


be assigned that variable. 

n - a signed or unsigned constant. 

a signed or unsigned JSL variable, 
a signed or unsigned job'specifica- 
tion indicator (TERM or STATUS). 

til - a constant or null. 




assigned a value by a SET 
statement or step, it has a 
zero value. 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A-60 SETUP STATEMENT (SETUP) 

The general form of the SETUP statement is: 



1 • I II 

1 LABEL ' » OPERATION 1 ' OPERANDS 
i it it 


/ | symbol { H> j SETUP V> setup id [, CHAN=operation id] 
| | I [,EFID=tape idl][/tape id2]/. ..; 
| | 1 ' [/tape idn]]]] 
1 1 ' ' , r <?vr- l 1 


1 1 | | I number J 
1 1 j 1 | [, PROTECT-^] 



A-40 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-61 SETUP STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Storage channel 
association 


Setup id 


Associates a logical name with the stor- 
age channel that will be used for sec- 
ondary storage transfer. 


P 


None. It must be specified. 


Channel 

CHAN = operator 
id 


Describes which channel is to be used 
with the secondary storage transfer. 
Must be a valid ASC facility "OPID" as- 
sociated with a secondary storage chan- 
nel. 


K 


If not specified the system will 
select a PAD channel for the 
user. 


Tape Volume 
description 


EFID = tape idl 
[/tape id2 
[...[/tape 
idn]]] 


Specifies the identification numbers of the 
tape volumes that will be used in the sec- 
ondary storage transfers. 


K 


If omitted only scratch tape 
volumes will be associated 
with this storage channel. 


SVC = scratch 
volume 
count 


Specifies a maximum number of system 
scratch volumes that are to contain files 
or members. 


K 


If omitted only one scratch 
volume is assumed. 


Protection 
parameter 


PROTECT = 


YES 


Specifies whether or not write protection 
is to be invoked for the VSN's specified. 


K 


YES. Write protection is in- 
voked. 


NO 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A _ 62 JOB INPUT FILE STATEMENT (START 
The general form of the START statement is: 



LABEL 



% 



OPERATION 



START 



I 



OPERANDS 



tf [ACNM = access name] 
[, BKSZ = number] 
' - (SECT 



JBANDi initia i / max i mu m/ 
WOR ° increment 

_ [byte J 



,FORG 



■®i] 



A-41 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-63 START STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File name 


ACNM = access 


Identifies the file to the job and specifies 


K 


If ACNM is omitted, an un- 




name 


the file as job local. 




named file embedded in the 
job input stream immediately 
following a JSL execution step 
statement is assumed as input 
for that step. 


Disc reservation 


/SECT\ initial/ 


Manages disc space for the embedded file 


K 


Value specified on LIMIT 




J BAND ( maxi- 


for the duration of the job. There are 




statement or, by LIMIT'S de- 




)WORD( mum/ 


three subparameters: 




fault, installation-defined value, 




VBYTE/ incre- 










ment 


Initial 


P 


The entire set of subparam- 






Maximum 


P 


eters must be coded or the 






Increment 


P 


set defaulted. 


Logical charac- 


Block size 


Specifies the maximum number of bytes 


K 


4000 bytes 


teristics 


BKSZ = number 


in a block within the specified file. Must 
be a multiple of record length (80 bytes). 

BKSZ is interactive with FORG 
parameter. 






File organiza- 


FORG = PS, BKSZ must be specified if 


K 


Default is PS; sequential 




tion 


4000 byte default is not acceptable. 




organization. 




FORG = £| 


FORG = DS, BKSZ has no meaning. 








JJO 


uo not code. Specifies the organization 
of the file on disc. 




- 



P = POSITIONAL K = KEYWORD 



A- 64 INPUT FILE STOP STATEMENT (STOP) 
The general form of the STOP statement is: 



t 1 — r 

1 OPERATION 1 I 
-L_ i_J_ 



OPERANDS 



I 



STOP 



I I 



None 



A-42 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A- 65 EXECUTE LOAD MODULE STATEMENT (XQT; 



The general form of the XQT statement is: 



— I 1 1 1 \ 

j LABEL | | OPERATION | [ OPERANDS 


/ j [symbol] . % \ XQT . tf . access name 

1 1 ' I 1 [» LTP = (load time parameters)] 

! ! i 

j . | 1 ' [, RTP = (run time parameters)] 

1 1 * * , [, OPT = (options )][, CPOPT = (CP op- 
1 1 ' 1 . tions)] 

■ it 1 [, CPTIME = central processor ex- 
II 1 ecution time] 

| || j * [, ADDMEM = size][, CHAR = char- 
1 | | • acter 
I | 1 '1 strings] 

1 ! ' i ' 
{ i i ii 



A-43 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A-66 XQT STATEMENT SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Load module 
identification 


Access name 


Identifies to the job the direct secondary P 
file, or member of partitioned direct 
secondary user file JOBLIB, or member 
of the system partitioned direct secondary 
file containing the load module to be ex- 
ecuted. 


None. Always mandatory. 


Load time spe- 
cification 


LTP = (load time 
param- 
eters) 


Specifies (1) number of Fortran I/O files 
required, (2) number of Fortran I/O 
errors allowed before termination, (3) 
memory allocation and passes any initial 
values to the load module. Values for 
number (3) are provided through the 
Fortran PROGRAM statement. 


K 


No load time parameters are 
passed to the loader 99 Fortran 
I/O files are allocated and 10 
Fortran I/O errors are allowed 
before termination. 


Run time speci- 
fications 


RTP = (run time 
param- 
eters) 


Specifies the values that the load module 
is to obtain when a CP S$RUNV service 
call is issued. 


K 


No run time parameters are 
passed to the load module. 


CPOPT = (cp op- 
tions) 


Specifies the values to be accessed by 
the load module with the CP S$OPTN ser- 
vice call. 


K 


Cp options word is zero filled 
and passed to load module. 


CHAR = character 
strings 


Specifies arbitrary character strings to 
be passed to the load module. The mod- 
ule obtains these strings through the 
S$CHRV service call. 


K 


No character strings are 
passed. 


Operating System 
specifications 


OPT = options 


Specifies 1) whether OS should take dump 
at termination of load module, 2) how to 
preload the memory module, 3) if a page 
load message is desired, and 4) whether 
job is to continue upon abnormal step 
termination. 


K 


No post mortem dump is taken. 
Memory retains coincidental 
data until overwritten. 
Upon abnormal termination of 
step, only FOSYS statements 
following the CP step are ex- 
ecuted. No page load message 
is given. 


CPTIME = t 


Specifies the amount of CP execution 
time allowed for the step. < t < 231-1, 
expressed in hundredths of seconds, not 
to exceed 30 hours. 


K 


An installation -defined value. 


Memory specifi- 
cations 


ADDMEM = size 


Specifies the number of additional words 
of central memory to be reserved for the 
step. This size should include any re- 
quired space for I/O buffers; however, 
it does not pertain to the size of the load 
module and variable-dimensioned arrays, 
This space is accessed by the step 
through a GETMAIN procedure. 
NOTE: If a size is specified, the user 
cannot assume that the default value for 


K 


An installation-defined value 
for additional memory. 


buffers is automatically added to the 
amount being specified. The amount 
specified must make allowance for 
buffers - the default value is exclusive and 
is never included in the specification. 











A-44 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX Al 
SYSTEM MACRO(S) SUMMARY 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASM 



Al-1 EXECUTING THE ASC ASSEMBLER WITH THE ASM MACRO (ASM) 
The general form of the ASM macro is: 



LABEL 



[symbol] 



OPERATION 



ASM 



* 



OPERANDS 



[lN=access name] [, LIST=access 
name] [,OBJ=access name] 

r -tto-^t „ - _ ^ _ _ _ l r a CAA-ni3T- 

L, uorij=accesb ncmiej ^, x^o-Lvxv^a. j. - 

cp option] 

[, AADDMEM=address] [, ASMTIME= 
cp time ] 

[, OB JFILE= {|gj?} ] [, OB JSIZE. 

band allocation] [, PRTSIZE= 
band allocation] [, MEMOBJ= 
member name] [, UOBJLIB = 
access name] 



Al-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASM 



A 1-2 ASM MACRO SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File specifica- 


IN = access 


Specifies the source input file to the As- 


K 


An unnamed file embedded in 


tion 


name 


sembler. The access name SYS.AIN 
must not exist for another file in the 
same job. The source input file must be 
previously assigned to the job prior to 
execution of the Assembler. The access 
name must be a valid ASC symbol. 




the input stream immediately 
following the ASM macro call. 


LIST = access 


Specifies the print output file for As- 


K 


None. If LIST is omitted, the 




name 


sembler output. The access name must 
be a valid ASC symbol. Automatic 
stacking of output is provided. The print 
file is opened with POS=MOD. The ac- 
cess name SYS. PRT must net exist for 
another file in the same job. 




content of SYS. PRT are output 
on the printer. 


OBJ = access 


Specifies the output file that contains the 


K 


None. If OBJ is omitted, the 




name 


object module output by the Assembler. 
This file must be capable of being re- 
named SYS. OMOD. 




object module appears on 
SYS. OMOD. 


USPL = access 


Specifies the user source program li- 


K 


None. If USPL is omitted, no 




name 


brary that is to be searched for defini- 
tions of procedures referred in the pro- 
gram being assembled. 




user libraries are searched. 


OBJFILE = 


Specifies the initial position of the object 


K 


New 




JNEW1 


module output file when files are to be 








IMODJ 


appended to it. NEW specifies that the 
output file is positioned to its beginning; 
MOD specifies that appendages begin at 
the end of the current SYS. OMOD. 






PRTSIZE = 


Specifies the band allocation for the print 


K 


1/8/1 




band allocation 


file output by the Assembler. The 
parameter must be coded in the form: 
initial/maximum/increment where the 
values are positive constants specifying 
the number of bands in each case. 






OBJSIZE = 


Specifies the band allocation for the ob- 


K 


1/8/1 




band allocation 


ject module file output by the Assembler. 
The parameter must be coded in the form: 
initial/maximum/increment where the 
values are positive constants specifying 
the number of bands in each case. 






Assembler 


ASMOPT = 


Specifies the Assembler options available 


K 


A source listing, cross- 


specification 


cp option 


to the user. The parameter value is a 
string of alphabetic characters separated 
by commas with the entire string en- 
closed in parentheses. The characters 
have the following meanings: 

C assemble ASC CP program 

D produce no object module 

O list object module on assembly 
listing 

P assemble ASC PP program 

T produce symbol table as part of 
object module 

X do not produce a cross-reference 




reference listing and object 
module are produced; no sym- 
bol table or object module 
listing is produced. 






as part of assembly listing 


1 



Al-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASM 



A 1-2 ASM MACRO SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYjfJs; 


PARAMETER 


■g- t t *j r*n* t r\-\t 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 




ASMTIME = 
cp time 


Specifies the cp time parameter for the 
execution of the compiler. The value is a 
positive constant coded in thousandths of 
seconds. 


K 


18000 (180 seconds) 


AADDMEM = 
additional mem- 
ory size 


Specifies the amount of additional mem- 
ory required by the Assembler. This 
space is used as an input buffer area when 
reading the source input file. The re- 
mainder is used for a procedure and sym- 
bol table. The parameter value is a 
positive constant, a positive constant 
followed by K (K denotes thousands), or 
a JSL variable. 


K 


30K 


PDS specification 


MEMOBJ = 
member name 


Specifies that the object module output by 
the Assembler is to be put into a Parti- 
tioned Direct Secondary file with the 
member name specified. The member 
name must be a valid ASC symbol. 


K 


None. If omitted, the PDS up- 
date is bypassed. 


UOBJLIB = 
access name 


Specifies the access name of the PDS 
library into which the object module will 
be placed if MEMOBJ was explicitly 
coded. The access name must be a valid 
ASC symbol. 


K 


OBJLIB 













Al-3 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASML 



Al-3 ASSEMBLE AND LINKAGE EDIT WITH THE ASML MACRO (ASML) 



LABEL 



[symbol] 



I OPERATION 



tf 



ASML 



OPERANDS 



[lN=access name] [, LIST= 
access name ][, USPL=access name] 

[,ASMOPT=cp options ][, ASMTIME= 
cp time] [, AADDMEM=addmem] 

[, CONTROL=access name][, LOAD = 
access name] [, LNKOPT=cp option] 

[,LNKTIME=cp time] 
[, LADDMEM=addmem] 



Al-4 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASML 



A 1-4 ASML MACRO SUMMARY 



The following parameters which are used in the assembly step 
are the same as in the ASM macro. For descriptions of these 
parameters, see the ASM macro statement. The parameters 
are the following: 

IN USPL ASMTIME 

LIST ASMOPT AADDMEM 



The following parameters which are used in the link edit step 
are the same as in the LNK macro. For descriptions of these 
parameters, see the LNK macro statement. These parameters 
are the following: 

CONTROL LOAD LNKTIME 
LNKOPT LADDMEM 



A 1 5 

A dvanced Scien ti fie Computer 




ASMLX 



Al-5 ASSEMBLE, LINKAGE EDIT, AND EXECUTE USING THE ASMLX 
MACRO (ASMLX) 



1 LABEL | i OPERATION j [ OPERANDS 


/ 1 [symbol] J M> ASMLX |tf [lN=access name] [, LIST=access 
1 j 1 | name] 

| • 1 J | 1 [, USPL=access name] [, ASMOPT= 
1 1 * I 1 cp options] 

■ 1 . . [, ASMTlME=cp time] [,AADDMEM= 

■ . 1 • addmem] 

1 1 . | [, CONTROL^ access name] [, LOAD= 
1 1 • | access name] [, LNKOPT=cp 
| 1 I | options] 

1 | II [,LNKTIME=cp time][, LADDMEM= 
1 ' | 1 1 addmem] [, any tagged parameters 
1 1 j i j which are legal on the XQT state - 
1 1 . || ment 

1 * ! 1 _.. 



Al-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




ASMLX 



Al-6 ASMLX MACRO SUMMARY 



The following parameters which, are used in the assembly sten are 
the same as in the ASM macro. For descriptions of these param- 
eters, see the ASM macro statement. These parameters are the 
following: 

IN USPL ASMTIME 

LIST ASMOPT AADDMEM 



The following parameters which are used in the link edit step are 
the same as in the LNK macro. For descriptions of these param- 
eters, see the LNK macro statement. These parameters are the 
following: 

CONTROL LOAD LNKTIME 

LIST LNK OPT LADDMEM 



The following parameters are used in the execution of the load 
module produced by the previous link edit. They are any tagged 
parameter which is legal on the XQT statement. For descrip- 
tions of these parameters, see the XQT statement. These param- 
eters are the following: 

LTP OPT CPTIME CHAR 

RTP CPOPT ADDMEM MEMRY 



A 1 7 

' Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTN 



Al-7 EXECUTING THE ASC FORTRAN COMPILER WITH THE FTN 
MACRO (FTN) 

The general form of the FTN macro is: 



! LABEL | 


I OPERATION 


| | OPERANDS 


/ | [symbol] • tf 


| FTN 


■ ty |[, IN=access name] [, LIST=access 
I | name] 

1 [,OBJ=access name] [,FTNOPT= 
cp options] 

|[, FTNTIME=cp time] [, FADDMEM= 
• addmem] 

,[,SPACE=space] [, VSPACE= I ANY 1] 
« (yspacej J 






.'•°™-{moo] 


] 






.[, OBJSIZE=band aUocation] 






l[, PRTSIZE=band allocation] 






• [, MEMOB J= number name] 






[, UOBJLIB=access name] 


1. 1 1 







A1-, 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTN 



Al-8 FTN MACRO SUMMARY 



TYPE 



File specifica- 
tion 



PARAMETER 



IN=access name 



LIST : 
name 



OBJ = access 
name 



OBJFILE = 
fNEW"! 

{mod J 



FUNCTION 



Specifies the source input file to the 
FORTRAN compiler. The access name 
must be a valid ASC symbol. 



Specifies the print output file for Com- 
piler output. The access name must be 
a valid ASC symbol. Automatic stacking 
is provided for print output files. The 
print file is opened with POS=MOD. 



Specifies the output file to contain the 
object module output by the FORTRAN 
compiler. The access name must be a 
valid ASC symbol. 



OBJSIZE = 
band allocation 



Fortran specifi- 
cation 



PRTSIZE = 
band allocation 



FTNOPT = 
CP options 



Specifies the initial position of the object 
module output file. NEW specifies that 
the initial position of the file is at its 
beginning. MOD specifies the initial 
position at the end of the file. 



P/K 



DEFAULTS 



An unnamed file embedded in 
the input stream immediately 
following the FTN macro call. 



None. If LIST is omitted, the 
contents of SYS. PRT are out- 
put on the printer. 



Specifies the band allocation for the ob- 
ject module file output by the compiler. 
The parameter must be coded in the form: 
initial/maximum/increment where the 
values are positive constants specifying 
the number of bands. 



Specifies the band allocation for the print 
file output by the compiler. The param- 
eter must be coded in the form: 
initial/maximum/increment where the 
Values are positive constants specifying 
the number of bands in each case. 



Specifies the Fortran compiler options 
available to the user. The parameters 
value is a string of alphabetic characters 
separated by commas with the entire 
string enclosed in parentheses. The 
characters have the following meanings: 

A syntax check only; do not produce 
object code 

B terminate compilation for irre- 
coverable errors during source 
scan 

C do not interrupt program execu- 
tion for arithmetic exceptions 

D produce subprogram references 
for debugging 

E include only statements in error 
or containing warning messages 
in source listing 



None. If OBJ is omitted, the 
object module appears on 
SYS.OMOD 



NEW 



1/8/1 



1/8/1 



suppress warning messages 

do not generate implicit calls to 
FIO 

compile at level 1 

compile at-level Z 



(K, M, O) 



Al-9 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTN 



Al-8 FTN MACRO SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 






K compile at level 3 










L compile at level 4 










M produce a program map 










N object module is not needed 










O produce an object listing 










P instructions are for execution 










only 










Q instructions are provided execute 










and read protection 










R instructions are provided execute, 










read and write protection 










S override all protection, the en- 










tire module may be executed, 










read and written. 










T suppress source listing 






FTNTIME = 


Specifies the CP time for the execution 


K 


30000 (300 seconds) 




CP time 


of the compiler. The value is a positive 
constant coded in thousandths of seconds. 






FADDMEM = 


Specifies the amount of additional mem- 


K 


4K 




addmem 


ory required by the ASC Fortran com- 
piler. The parameter value is a posi- 
tive constant, or a constant followed by 
K (K denotes thousands), or a JSL 
variable. 






SPACE = space 


Specifies the load time parameter passed 


K 


Space = 4096 






to the compiler determining the amount 










of internal list space in words to be al- 










located with the compiler load module. 










It is an unsigned integer ranging from 










to 224.1. 






VSPACE = 


Specifies the maximum number of words 


K 


ANY 




f ANY | 
IvBpace J 


available for allocation as vector tempo- 








rary space within the object modules pro- 










duced by the Fortran compiler. The 










value is either an unsigned integer con- 










stant or the keyword ANY. ANY speci- 










fies that vector temporary space can be 










increased as required during compila- 










tion. VSPACE can be an unsigned integer 










ranging from to 224_i, 






Partitioned 


MEMOBJ - 


Specifies the access name of the Parti- 


K 


None. If omitted, the Parti- 


Direct Secondary 


member name 


tioned Direct Secondary library into 




tioned Direct Secondary update 


specifications 




which the object module will be placed 
if MEMOBJ was explicitly coded. The 
access name must be a valid ASC symbol. 




is bypassed. 


UOBJLIB = 


Specifies the access name of the Parti- 


K 


OBJLIB 




access name 


tioned Direct Secondary library into 
which the object module will be placed 
if MEMOBJ was explicitly coded. The 
access name must be a valid ASC 
symbol. 







ALIO 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTNL 



Al-9 COMPILE AND LINKAGE EDITOR WITH THE FTNL MACRO (FTNL) 



TV. 



a a e*r\(* 



tp! form of the FTNL macro is: 



1 LABEL 


t l OPERATION 


j OPERANDS 


/ 1 [symbol] 


1 M> * FTNL 


y> ,[lN=access name] [, LIST=access 
. name] [,FTNOPT = cp options] 

i \ [, FTNTIME=cp time ] [, FADDMEM= 
I addmem] [, SPACE= space] 

[ [, VSPACE=vspace] [, CONTROL^ 

access name] [, LNKOPT=cp options] 
1 [, LNKTIME=cp time] 

j [, LADDMEM= addmem] 




j 


1 [, LOAD=access name] 



Al-11 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTNL 



Al-10 FTNL MACRO SUMMARY 



The following parameters which are used in the compile step 
are the same as in the FTN macro. For descriptions of these 
parameters, see the FTN macro statement. The parameters 
are the following: 

IN FTNOPT FADDMEM VSPACE 

LIST FTNTIME SPACE 



The following parameters which are used in the link edit step 
are the same as in the LNK macro. For descriptions of these 
parameters, see the LNK macro statement. The parameters 
are the following: 

CONTROL LNKOPT LADDMEM 
LOAD LNKTIME 



Al - 12 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTNLX 



Al-11 COMPILE, LINKAGE EDIT AND EXECUTE WITH THE FTNLX 



if a r+ t> r~\ /TT ,r mvTT -v\ 



The general form of the FTNLX macro is: 



' LABEL [ ■ 


OPERATION 


1 1 
1 1 
i 


OPERANDS 


/ i [symbol] . V> | 


FTNLX 


• 


[IN = access name][, LIST = access 

name] 






1 
1 
1 


[, FTNOPT = cp options] 
[, FTNTIME = cp time] 
[, FADDMEM = addmem] 






1 
1 
1 


1 [, SPACE = space] 
[, VSPACE = vspace] 






1 


[, CONTROL = access name] 






J 
1 
1 
I 
1 

1 

1 
i 


[, LNKTIME = cp time] 

[, LNKOPT = cp options] 

[, LADDMEM = addmem] 

[, DATA = access name] 

' [, GO = access name][,Any tagged 
parameter legal on XQT statement] 



Al-13 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTNLX 



Al-12 FTNLX MACRO SUMMARY 



The following parameters which are used in the compile step are the 
same as in the FTN macro. For description of these parameters, 
see the FTN macro statement. These parameters are the following: 

IN FTNOPT FADDMEM VSPACE 

LIST FTNTIME SPACE 



The following parameters which are used in the link edit step are the 
same as in the LNK macro. For description of these parameters, 
see the LNK macro statement. These parameters are the following: 

CONTROL LNKOPT 

LNKTIME LADDMEM 



The following parameters are used in the execution of the FORTRAN 
load module produced. For descriptions of these parameters, see 
the FXQT macro statement. These parameters are the following; 

GO LTP OPT CPTIME CHAR 
DATA RTP CPOPT ADDMEM MEMRY 



" Advanced Scientific Computer 




FXQT 



Al-13 EXECUTING A FORTRAN LOAD MODULE WITH THE FXQT MACRO 
(FXQT) 

The general form of the FXQT macro is: 



— 1 II II 

I LABEL ■ ■ OPERATION 1 * OPERANDS 
l i lit 


/ j [symbol] ! V> | FXQT tf [GO = access name ][, DATA = 

, .1 access name"J[, LIST = access name] 

' i ' ' r 

| 1 | |, Any tagged parameters which are 
j 1 ' • legal on the XQT statement] 

, i 1 i • 



Al-14 FXQT MACRO SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File specifica- 
tions 


GO = access 
name 


Specifies the access name that refers to 
a direct secondary organized file which 
contains the load module to be executed. 
The access name must be a valid ASC 
symbol. The load module must use 
Fortran I/O for reading its job stream 
card file and for printing to output file. 
The input file must be referenced by use 
of a READ or READ(5) statement; the 
output file must be referenced by use of 
a PRINT or WRITE (6) statement. 


K 


GO = SYS.LMOD 


DATA = access 
name 


Specifies the access name that refers to 
the input file of the Fortran load module. 
The access name must be a valid ASC 
symbol. The file so named is the file 
that is accessed when the Fortran load 
module issues a READ. 


K 


An unnamed file embedded in 
the job input stream immedi- 
ately following the FXQT macro 
call. 


LIST = access 
name 


Specifies the access name of the print 
output file to contain the load modules 
output. The access name must be a valid 
ASC symbol. Automatic stacking of out- 
put is provided. FT06F001 is specified 
with POS = MOD. 


K 


None. If no file is specified 
the contents of FT06F001 are 
output to the printer. 


Any tagged 
governed b 
see the XQ 

Note: No d 


parameter that is 
y the same restric 
T statement. Thee 

] 
1 

efault values are s 


legal on the basic XQT statement may be u 
tions carried by the XQT statement. For d 
se parameters are the following: 

LTP OPT CPTIME CHAR 
*TP CPOPT ADDMEM MEMRY 

upplied for these parameters, except ADD1 


sed on 
escrip 

tfEM v 


the FXQT. Their use is 
itions of these parameters, 

vhich has a default of 2K. 



Al-15 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LNK 



Al-15 EXECUTING THE ASC LINKAGE EDITOR WITH THE LNK MACRO 

(LNK) 



The general form of the LNK macro is: 





LABEL 




OPERATION 




1 


OPERANDS 


/ 


[symbol] 


\y> 


LNK 




M>\ 


[CONTROL = access name] 

[, LIST = access name] 

[, OBJ = access name] 

[, LOAD = access name] 

[, LNKOPT = cp options] 

[, LNKTIME = cp time] 

[, LADDMEM = addmem] 

[, MEMLOAD = member name] 




i 






J 
1 


• 
















_ 



Al-16 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LNK 



Al-16 LNK MACRO SUMMARY 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


File specifica- 


CONTROL = 


Specifies the access name of the ASC 


K 


An unnamed file embedded in 


tion 


access name 


Linkage Editor's input file. The access 
name must be a valid ASC symbol. 




the job input stream immedi- 
ately following the LNK macro 
call. 




LIST = access 


Specifies the access name of the file to be 


K 


The ASC Linkage Editor uses 




name 


used as the Linkage Editor's print output 
file. The access name must be a valid 
ASC symbol. Automatic stacking is pro- 
vided. The print file is opened with 
PCS = MOD. 




the standard system print file 
(SYS. PRT) as its print output 
file. 




OBJ = access 


Specifies the access name of the input file 


K 


None. If OBJ is not specified, 




name 


from which the ASC Linkage Editor ac- 
cesses object modules after it has read 
the input file. The access name must be 
a valid ASC symbol. 




the Linkage Editor does not in- 
put any object modules in its 
input file (CONTROL). 




LOAD = access 


Specifies the file to be used by the Link- 


K 


None. If LOAD is omitted, the 




name 


age Editor to write the output load mod- 
ule. This file must have direct secondary 




Linkage Editor writes the load 
module to SYS. LMOD. 


Link 




organization. 






Link Editor 


LNKOPT = 


Specifies the Linkage Editor options avail- 


K 


(M, X, A, S, F, L, Q) 


specification 


CP option 


able to the user. The parameter value is 
a string of alphabetic characters sepa- 
rated by commas with the entire string 
enclosed in parentheses. The characters 
have the following meanings: 

M produce a memory allocation 
listing. 

N do not produce a memory alloca- 
tion listing. 

X produce an external symbol 
cross-reference with memory 
allocation listing. 

Y do not produce an external sym- 
bol cross-reference 

A search user -specified libraries 
to resolve external references. 

B do not search user -specified 
libraries . 

S search system object module 
library to resolve external ref- 
erences. 

T do not search system object mod- 
ule library. 

E mark the produced load module 
as executable even if an error 
occurs during linkage editing. 

F mark the load module as not ex- 
ecutable if an error occurs dur- 
ing linkage editing. 

K do not list the load module pro- 
duced. 

L list the load module produced. 
Listing appears in SYS. PRT. 







Al-17 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LNK 



Al-16 LNK MACRO SUMMARY (CONTINUED) 



TYPE 


PARAMETER 


FUNCTION 


P/K 


DEFAULTS 


Link Editor 

specification 

(continued) 




P promote common blocks auto- 
matically to the highest level 
necessary to consolidate all oc- 
currences . 

Q. do not automatically promote 
common blocks 






LNKTIME = 
CP time 


Specifies the cp time parameter for the 
execution of the ASC Linkage Editor. 
The value is a positive constant coded in 
thousandths of seconds. 


K 


30000 


LADDMEM = 
addmem 


Specifies the amount of additional memory 
required by the ASC Linkage Editor. The 
parameter value is a positive constant, a 
constant followed by K (K denotes thou- 
sands), or a JSL variable. 


K 


8K 


Partitioned 
Direct Secondary 
specification 


MEMLOAD = 
member name 


Specifies that the load module output by 
the Linkage Editor is to be put into a 
Partitioned Direct Secondary file with the 
member name specified. The member 
name must be a valid ASC symbol. 


K 


None. If omitted, the Parti- 
tioned Direct Secondary update 
is bypassed. 


LOADLIB = 
access name 


Specifies the access name of the Parti- 
tioned Direct Secondary library in 
which the load module will be placed 
if MEMLOAD was explicitly coded. 
The access name must be a valid ASC 
symbol. 


K 


LOADLIB 



Al-1. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LNKX 



Al-17 EXECUTING THE ASC LINKAGE EDITOR AND THE RESULTING 

TAAn nmnTTTT WTTU TT-TTT TAT"K"V \AAT.Tin /T.NTCY) 



1 — r 

LABEL » ■ 



OPERATION 



[symbol] . M> 

I 
I 
i 

I 
i 



LNKX 



M> 



OPERANDS 



[, CONTROL = access name] 

[, LIST = access name] 

[, OBJ = access name] 

[, LOAD = access name] 

[, LNKOPT = cp options] 

[, LNKTIME = cp time] 

[, LADDMEM = addmem][, Any tagged 
• parameters which are legal on the 
j XQT statement] 



Al-19 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LNKX 



Al-18 LNKX MACRO SUMMARY 



The following parameters, which are used in the link edit step, are 
the same as in the LNK macro. For descriptions of these param- 
eters, see the LNK macro statement. These parameters are the 
following: 



CONTROL 


OBJ 


LNKOPT 


LIST 


LOAD 


LNK TIME 
LADDMEM 



The following parameters are used in the execution of the load 
module produced by the previous link edit. They are any tagged 
parameter which is legal on the XQT statement. For descriptions 
of these parameters, see the XQT statement. These parameters 
are the following: 

LTP OPT CPTIME CHAR 

RTP CPOPT ADDMEM MEMRY 



A 1 -20 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX A2 
MACRO EXAMPLES 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX A2 
MACRO EXAMPLES 

A2-1 ASM MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (Unnamed file all defaults operative) 
/ JOB 

/ ASM 

i 

Assembler source code 

/ FOSYS SYS.OMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 
/ EOJ 

2. Card Input (Named File) 
/ JOB 

/ START ACNM=INFILE 

Assembler Source Code 

/ STOP 

/ ASM IN=INFILE 

/ FOSYS SYS.OMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 

/ EOJ 

3. Cataloged File Input 
/ JOB 

/ ASG INFILE,A/B/C/D,USE=SHR 
/ ASM IN=INFILE 

/ FOSYS SYS.OMOD,TYPE = PUNCH 
/ EOJ 



A ^ " 1 Advanced Scientific Computer 




4. Card Input (Unnamed File - Specify Parameters) 
/ JOB 

/ ASG MODFILE, PATH/NAME 

/ ASM LIST = PRINTOUT,OBJ=MODFILE,OBJFILE = MOD 

Assembler source code 

I FOSYS MODFILE, TYPE=PUNCH 
/ FOSYS PRINTOUT 
/ EOJ 

5. Partitioned Direct Secondary File Update 
/ JOB 

/ ASG MYLIB, P/D/S/LIBRARY 
/ START ACNM=INPUT 

f 

Assembler source code 

/ STOP 

/ ASM IN=INPUT, 3VtE MOB J= MODI, UOB JLIB = MYLIB 
/ CATV P/D/S/LIBRARY, ACNM=MYLIB 
/ EOJ 



A2-2 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-2 ASML MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input 

/ JOB 

/ START ACNM=SRCFILE 

? 

Assembler source code 

S 

I STOP 

/ ASML IN=SRCFILE, AADDMEM=15K, ASMOPT = (P), ; 
CONTROL=SYS. LEIN, LOAD=LMOD 

/ START ACNM=SYS. LEIN 

\ 

Linkage Editor control directives 
/ STOP 

/ FOSYS LMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 
/ EOJ 

2. Alternate Card Sequence for Example i 

/ JOB 

/ START ACNM=SRCFILE 

Assembler source code 

i 

I STOP 

/ ASM IN=SRCFILE,AADDMEM=15K,ASMOPT = (P) 

/ START ACNM=SYS.LEIN 

f 

Linkage Editor control directives 

/ STOP 

/ LINK CONTROL^SYS.LEIN, LOAD-LMOD 

/ FOSYS LMOD, TYPE=PUNCH 

/ EOJ 



A2-3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-3 ASMLX MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (Parameter Specified) 

/ JOB 

/ ASG MYSRC,A/B/C/D, USE=SHR 

/ START ACNM=SYS.AIN 

Assembler source code 

/ STOP 

/ ASMLX IN=SYS.AIN, USPL=MYSRC, CPTIME=3000, ADDMEM=65K 

/ FOSYS SYS.LMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 

/ EOJ 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-4 FTN MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (All defaults) 
/ JOB 

/ FTN 

f 

FORTRAN Source program 
/ FOSYS SYS. OMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 
/ EOJ 

2. Card Input (Parameters Specified) 
/ JOB 

/ START ACNM=FORTPROG 

FORTRAN source program 
/ STOP 

/ FTN IN=FORTPROG, LIST=PRTFILE, FTNOP=(I, M), ; 
SPACE=4096, PRTSIZE = 10/30/5 

/ FOSYS PRTFILE,COPIES=5 

/ FOSYS SYS. OMOD, TYPE=PUNCH 

/ EOJ 

3. Partitioned Direct Secondary File Update 
/ JOB 

/ ASG OBJLIB, MY/PATH/NAME 

/ FTN MEMOBJ=SUB45, OB J=OB JMOD, VSPACE=6000 

/ CATV MY/PATH/NAME, ACNM=OB JLIB, DTYP=DSEC 

/ CATV MY/OBJECTS, ACNM=OBJMOD 

/ START ACNM=SYS.FIN 

FORTRAN source program 

/ STOP 
/ EOJ 



A2-5 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-5 FTNL MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (All defaults operative) 
/ JOB 

/ FTNL 

/ START ACNM=SYS.FIN 

f 

FORTRAN source program 

f 

/ STOP 

/ FOSYS SYS. LMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 

/ EOJ 

2. Alternate Card Sequence for Example 1 
/ JOB 

/ START ACNM=SYS.FIN 

FORTRAN source program 

/ STOP 

/ FTN 

/ LNK 

/ FOSYS SYS. LMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 

/ EOJ 

3. All Defaults 
/ JOB 

/ FTNL FTNOPT = (I, M, O), LADDMEM=8K, LOAD=LMOD 
/ CATV MY/LOAD/MODS, ACNM=LMOD 
/ EOJ 



A2-6 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-6 FTNLX MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input 

/ JOB 

/ FTNLX 

FORTRAN source cards 
/ START ACNM=FT05F001 

? 

data file 

/ STOP 
/ EOJ 

2. Cataloged File Input (Parameters Specified) 
/ JOB 

/ ASG SRCPROG, ALPHA/DAD 

/ ASG LINKDIR, BETA/ TIGER 

/ ASG DA TAFIL, GAMMA/ONE/TWO 

/ FTNLX IN=SRCPROG, CONTROL=LINKDIR,DATA=DATAFIL 

/ EOJ 

3. Tape Input (Parameters Specified) 
/ JOB 

/ ASG LINKDIR, BETA/TIGER 

/ FIT DTFILE,EFID=10210 

/ FTNLX CONTROL=LINKDIR,DATA=DTFILE 

f 

FORTRAN source program 
/ EOJ 



A2 7 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-7 FXQT MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (Default input file) 
/ JOB 

/ ASG SYS.LMOD,A/B/C/D 
/ FXQT 

$ 

data file 

f 

/ EOJ 

2. Tape Input (Parameters Specified) 
/ JOB 

/ FIT LOADMOD, EFID=3300 

/ FIT DATAFILE,EFID= 11440 

/ FXQT GO=LOADMOD, DATA=DATAFILE,LIST=OUTFILE 

/ FOT OUTFILE 

/ EOJ 



A2-8 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-8 LNK MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (All Defaults Operative) 
/ JOB 

/ LNK 

Linkage Editor control file 

/ CATV A/B/C/D,ACNM=SYSLMOD 
/ EOJ 

2. Card Input (Parameters Specified) 
/ JOB 

/ START ACNM=OBJMOD 

f 

object module 

/ STOP 

/ LNK LNKTIME = 50000,LOAD=DECK6,OBJ=OBJMOD 

Control Directives 

/ FOT DECK6 
/ EOJ 

3. Cataloged Input (Parameters Specified) 
/ JOB 

/ ASG MYLOADS,R/S/T 

/ ASG SYS. OMOD, OBJECT/LIBRARY 

/ START ACNM=LINKCTL 

Linkage Editor Control Directives 

? 

/ STOP 

/ LNK CONTROL=LINKCTL, MEMLOAD^LODMODl, ; 
LOADLIB^MYLOADS, LOAD=LODMODl 

/ CATV R/S/T,ACNM=MYLOADS 

/ FOSYS LODMODl,TYPE = PUNCH 

/ EOJ 



A 9 Q 

7 Advanced Scientific Computer 




A2-9 LNKX MACRO EXAMPLES: 

1. Card Input (All defaults operative) 

/ JOB 
/ LNKX 

Linkage Editor Control Directives 

/ FOSYS SYS.LMOD, TYPE = PUNCH 
/ FOSYS OUTPUT 
/ EOJ 

2. Card Input 
/ JOB 

/ ASG OBJMOD, M/N/O, USE=SHR 
/ START ACNM=GGG 

c 

( 

Linkage Editor Control Directives 

f 

I STOP 

/ START ACNM=DATA 

data for load module program 

i 

I STOP 

/ LNKX OBJ=OBJMOD, CONTROL=GGG,LIST = LISTING, ; 
CPTIME=4000, ADDMEM=5K 

/ FOSYS LISTING 

/ FOSYS OUTPUT 

/ EOJ 



A2 - 10 A^ ^O ■ ■<■ ^ 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 
GLOSSARY OF JSL TERMS 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



APPENDIX B 
GLOSSARY OF JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE (JSL) TERMS 

ACCESS CONTROL 

The control invoked when a node is in the access control state. This control 
is further categorized as full, partial, or no access control. 

ACCESS CONTROL LIST 

A list constructed at a catalog node containing a list of potential users of the 
node and their node and file access attributes. 

ACCESS CONTROL STATE 

One of the three possible states of a node which are defined by the user's in- 
tent at that node. 

ACCESS NAME 

The access name is the local name for a file. It is the name by which a file 
is identified within a job.- 

ACCOUNT NUMBER 

The account number is a string of alphanumeric characters up to sixteen 
characters in length. 

ATTRIBUTE 

One of six specifiable attributes for a user in the Access Control List of a 
node. These are the read, write, execute, own, reference, and son-add 
attributes. 

BAND 

256 sectors on disc. 

BLOCK, FILE 

A set of records treated as a unit. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



BLOCK, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

Within a job, the LIMIT statement will initiate a Job Specification Language 
block. This block will be terminated by a new LIMIT statement or an EOJ 
statement. A job with no LIMIT statements is considered to be one Job Spec 
ification Language block. 

CATALOG 

A tree structure whose nodes contain information pertinent to the storage, 
retrieval, and security of user files. 

COUPLED STATEMENTS 

Statements which have a relationship such that they must occur in pairs, 
e.g., JOB/EOJ, statements which are related in that their functions are the 
opposite of one another, e.g., CAT/DEL. 

CP 

Central Processor. 

DATA EXCEPTION 

A mechanical malfunction on input or output operations, e.g., parity errors. 

DEFAULT 

A value or meaning which is assumed in the absence of an explicit specifica- 
tion. 

EDGE NAME 

A name assigned to an edge of a tree -structured catalog. 

FIELD, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

In a Job Specification Language statement, a specified area used for a par- 
ticular category of data. 

FILE 

An organized collection of data stored in a manner to facilitate the retrieval 
of each individual datum. 



B 2 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



FILE, CATALOGED 



A file cataloged by a previously executed job. It is made accessible through 
the ASG statement. A. file whose name, location, and security characteris- 
tics are stored in the system catalog. 

FILE, JOB LOCAL 

A file which is created by a step within a job and which exists until that job is 
terminated. A job local file can be cataloged during the job. 

FILE, NON-CATALOGED 

A file which is not cataloged in the ASC system; i.e., it is not a job local 
file, or a cataloged file. 

IJSL 

Internal Job Specification Language. 

INPUT STREAM, (JOB) 

The sequence of specification statements and data submitted to the Operating 
System on an input device especially activated for this purpose. 

JOB 

A total computer process (application) which consists of one or more related 
process programs (steps). A job is specified by a sequence of Job Specifica- 
tion Language statements. 

JSL 

Job Specification Language. 

KEYWORD 

A word which is selected from a prescribed list of words defined internally 
to the system. 

LABEL, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

A symbol that identifies a specification statement. It must immediately fol- 
low the Job Specification Language statement identifier. 



B " 3 Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



LABELED TAPE 



The first data block of the first file on tape is preceded by a standard label 
record provided by the Operating System. 

LOAD MODULE 

A unit of output, created by the Link Editor, from one or more object mod- 
ules. (A Load Module is used as input to the ASC loader and is not relocat- 
able within the virtual address space. ) 

LOAD TIME BOUND MEMORY 

The load time bound memory is the Central Memory requirement calculated 
at load time, this includes the load time request for array sizes. 

LOAD TIME PARAMETERS 

Load time parameters are integer values supplied by the assembly language 
— — „w „^ ^a^x L o exi.e«_L memory allocation and initial values in the load 
module. 

LOADER 

A component of the Operating System which processes load modules created 
by the Link Editor. 

NAME, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

A one -to eight-character name, beginning with an alphabetic character that 
identifies a file, a program, or a specification statement. 

NODE 

The components of the vector n which together with a set of unilateral asso- 
ciations define a directed graph. The vector n is called a node vector. 

NODE, ROOT 

The node of a catalog that is accessible through the catalog directory. 



B-4 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



OBJECT MODULE 

A unit of relocatable output, comprising one or more control sections, which 
can be input to the Link Editor to produce a Load Module or another Object 
Module. (An Object Module is usually produced by a compiler, or assem- 
bler. ) 

OPERAND, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

The operand consists of a list of parameters which are determined by and 
follow a Job Specification Lanaguage verb. 

OPERATION, (JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE) 

A Job Specification Language operation consists of a Job Specification Lan- 
guage verb possibly followed by options. 

OWN 

An access control list attribute which when on for a user in the access con- 
trol list specifies that user as an owner of the node. 

OWNER, FILE (NODE) 

A user is an owner when -his name appears in the access control list for that 
node with the own attribute. The creator of a node is automatically made an 
owner . 

PARAMETER 

An entry in the operand of a Job Specification Language statement. A vari- 
able that is given a constant value for a specific purpose or process. 

PARAMETER, TAGGED 

A parameter which must be preceded by an identifying word and separated 
from this word by an equal sign ( = ); e.g., ACCT = account number. 

PARAMETER, POSITIONAL 

A parameter which must be ordered in a prescribed way relative to other 
such parameters so that its function may be correctly interpreted. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



APPENDIX B 



PATH NAME 

A D-dimension vector which specifies a node N at a level D in the file man- 
agement tree. Its Ith component is the edge name of the edge entering the 
node at level I on the path from the root node to the node N. 

POST MORTEM DUMP 

A user requested dump at the end of a step. 

PP 

Peripheral Processor 

RECORD 

A user oriented logical way of breaking down a block of data. 

REFERENCE CONTROL 

Tue control invokeu wxien a node is in tne reference state with respect to a 
given user. This control is further categorized as full or no reference con- 
trol. 

REFERENCE STATE 

One of the two possible states of a node which are defined by the user's in- 
tent at that node. A node is in the reference state when a user desires to 
utilize the son list at that node in a catalog search operation for higher level 
nodes in the catalog tree. 

RESTART 

To reestablish the execution of a job, using the data recorded at a check 
point. 

RUN TIME PARAMETERS 

Run time parameters are integer values or Job Specification Language vari- 
ables which can be transmitted from the Job Specification Language state- 
ment to the user at execution time. 

SECTOR 

64 words on disc. 



R 6 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



SERVICE 

A component of a job which performs a service necessary for the completion 
of a job. 

SEQUENCING VERSIONS 

As versions of a file are cataloged, they are assigned sequential version 
numbers modulo the maximum number of versions set by a node owner. 

SON 

A node accessible from another node in a tree with a path length equal to one. 

SOURCE LANGUAGE 

A language that is the input to a given translation process. 

STATEMENT, SPECIFICATION 

An element of the Job Specification Language (JSL). It begins with the Job 
Specification Language identifer (/) in column one, and it contains at least a 
verb in the operation field. 

STEP 

A component of a job which is a processing program. 

SUBFIELD 

Within the operand, a finer division of a field. The delimiters used to sep- 
arate subfields are the slash (/) and the asterisk (*) in the finest division; 
e.g., SECT = initial/maximum/limit. 

SUBFILE 

(1) A facility that divides a file into distinct entities. A file mark on tape 
causes a subfile to be defined on disc storage. 

(2) One of the distinct divisions of a file. 

SUBTREE 

A tree consisting of a root node which can be any node of another tree and all 
nodes of that tree reachable from the root node. 



"R 7 
~ ' Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX B 



SYMBOL, (ASC) 

A symbol is a string of from one to eight characters, the first of which must 
be alphabetic. The remaining characters may be any sequence of alpha- 
numeric characters. 

TASK 

A task is the most primitive program unit which performs a basic system 
service . 

TREE 

(1) A directed graph which contains no circuits and which has at most one 
edge (branch) entering each node. 

(2) A finite set of one or more nodes, wherein: 

(a) there is one specially designated node called the root of the tree, 
and 

(b) the remaining nodes are partitioned into disjoint sets, and each of 
these sets in turn is a tree. These trees are called subtrees of the 
root. 

USER CODE 

A sequence of one to eight alphanumeric characters which identify a specific 
user . 

VARIABLE, JOB SPECIFICATION 

A user may equate a numeric value to an alphabetic character which may be 
referenced in Job Specification Language dependency structure or by the 
user program. The variable value may change dynamically to direct various 
sequences to be executed in the Job Specification Language or the user pro- 
gram. 

VERB 

A word or abbreviation which specifies the function of a Job Specification 
Language statement. The verb must always be preceded by a blank. 



"R ft 

A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




APPENDIX B 



VERSION 

One of the copies of the file cataloged at a node. 

VERSION, FLAGGED 

That version of the file cataloged at a node which is assigned to a user job 
when no other specific version number has been specified by the user. 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX C 
WORDS, SECTORS, BANDS CONVERSIONS 



Advanced Scientific Computet 



APPENDIX C 



APPENDIX C: WORDS, 


SECTORS, 


BANDS 


CONVERSIONS 






WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


Q 


o 


0.0 


204800 


3200 


12,50 


409600 


6400 


25,00 


4096 


64 


0.25 


208896 


3264 


12.75 


413696 


6464 


25.25 


8192 


128 


0.50 


212992 


3328 


13.00 


417792 


6528 


25.50 


12288 


192 


0.75 


217088 


3392 


13.25 


421888 


6592 


25.75 


16384 


256 


1.00 


221184 


3456 


13.50 


425984 


6656 


26.00 


20480 


320 


1.25 


225280 


3520 


13.75 


430080 


6720 


26.25 


24576 


384 


1.50 


229376 


3584 


14.00 


434176 


6784 


26.50 


28672 


448 


1.75 


233472 


3648 


14.25 


438272 


6848 


26.75 


32768 


512 


2.00 


237568 


3712 


14.50 


442368 


6912 


27.00 


36864 


576 


2.25 


241664 


3776 


14.75 


446464 


6976 


27.25 


40960 


640 


2.50 


245760 


3840 


15.00 


450560 


7040 


27.50 


45056 


704 


2.75 


249856 


3904 


15.25 


454656 


7104 


27.75 


49152 


768 


3.00 


253952 


3968 


15.50 


458752 


7168 


28.00 


53248 


832 


3.25 


258048 


4032 


15.75 


462848 


7232 


28.25 


57344 


896 


3.50 


262144 


4096 


16.00 


466944 


7296 


28.50 


61440 


960 


3.75 


266240 


4160 


16.25 


471040 


7360 


28.75 


65536 


1024 


4.00 


270336 


4224 


16.50 


475136 


7424 


29.00 


69632 


1088 


4.25 


274432 


4288 


16.75 


479232 


7488 


29.25 


73728 


1152 


4.50 


278528 


4352 


17.00 


483328 


7552 


29.50 


77824 


1216 


4.75 


282624 


4416 


17.25 


487424 


7616 


29.75 


81920 


1280 


5.00 


286720 


4480 


17.50 


491520 


7680 


30.00 


86016 


1344 


5.25 


290816 


4544 


17.75 


495616 


7744 


30.25 


90112 


1408 


5.50 


294912 


4608 


18.00 


499712 


7808 


30.50 


94208 


1472 


5.75 


299008 


4672 


18.25 


503808 


7872 


30.75 


98304 


1536 


6.00 


303104 


4736 


18.50 


507904 


7936 


31.00 


102400 


1600 


6.25 


307200 


4800 


18.75 


512000 


8000 


31.25 


106496 


1664 


6.50 


311296 


4864 


19.00 


516096 


8064 


31.50 


110592 


1728 


6.75 


315392 


4928 


19.25 


520192 


8128 


31.75 


114688 


1792 


7.00 


319488 


4992 


19.50 


524288 


8192 


32.00 


118784 


1856 


7.25 


323584 


5056 


19.75 


528384 


8256 


32.25 


122880 


1920 


7.50 


327680 


5120 


20.00 


532480 


8320 


32.50 


126976 


1984 


7.75 


331776 


5184 


20.25 


536576 


8384 


32.75 


131072 


2048 


8.00 


335872 


5248 


20.50 


540672 


8448 


33.00 


135168 


2112 


8.25 


339968 


5312 


20.75 


544768 


8512 


33.25 


139264 


2176 


8.50 


344064 


5376 


21.00 


548864 


8576 


33.50 


143360 


2240 


8.75 


348160 


5440 


21.25 


552960 


8640 


33.75 


147456 


2304 


9.00 


352256 


5504 


21.50 


557056 


8704 


34.00 


151552 


2368 


9.25 


356352 


5568 


21.75 


561152 


8768 


34.25 


155648 


2432 


9.50 


360448 


5632 


22.00 


565248 


8832 


34.50 


159744 


2496 


9.75 


364544 


5696 


22.25 


569344 


8896 


34.75 


163840 


2560 


10.00 


368640 


5760 


22.50 


573440 


8960 


35.00 


167936 


2624 


10.25 


372736 


5824 


22.75 


577536 


9024 


35.25 


172032 


2688 


10.50 


376832 


5888 


23.00 


581632 


9088 


35.50 


176128 


2752 


10.75 


380928 


5952 


23.25 


585728 


9152 


35.75 


180224 


2816 


11.00 


385024 


6016" 


23.50 


589824 


9216 


36.00 


184320 


2880 


11.25 


389120 


6080 


23.75 


593920 


9280 


36.25 


188416 


2944 


11.50 


393216 


6144 


24.00 


598016 


9344 


36.50 


192512 


3008 


11.75 


397312 


6208 


24.25 


602T12 


9408 


36.75 


196608 


3072 


12.00 


401408 


6272 


24.50 


606208 


9472 


37.00 


200704 


3136 


12.25 


405504 


6336 


24.75 


610304 


9536 


37.25 



C-l 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



V 














APPENDIX C 


i 

WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


614400 


9600 


37.50 


819200 


12800 


50.00 


1024000 


16000 


62.50 


618496 


9664 


37.75 


823296 


12864 


50.25 


1028096 


16064 


62.75 


622592 


9728 


38.00 


827392 


12928 


50.50 


1032192 


16128 


63.00 


626688 


9792 


38.25 


831488 


12992 


50.75 


1036288 


16192 


63.25 


630784 


9856 


38.50 


835584 


13056 


51.00 


1040384 


16256 


63.50 


634880 


9920 


38.75 


839680 


13120 


51.25 


1044480 


16320 


63.75 


638976 


9984 


39.00 


843776 


13184 


51.50 


1048576 


16384 


64.00 


643072 


10048 


39.25 


847872 


13248 


51.75 


1052672 


16448 


64.25 


647168 


10112 


39.50 


851968 


13312 


52.00 


1056768 


16512 


64.50 


651264 


10176 


39.75 


856064 


1 3376 


52.25 


1060864 


16576 


64.75 


655360 


10240 


40.00 


860160 


13440 


52.50 


1064960 


16640 


65.00 


659456 


10304 


40.25 


864256 


13504 


52.75 


1069056 


16704 


65.25 


663552 


10368 


40.50 


868352 


13568 


53,00 


1073152 


16768 


65.50 


667648 


10432 


40.75 


872448 


13632 


53.25 


1077248 


16832 


65.75 


671744 


10496 


41.00 


876544 


13696 


53.50 


1081344 


16896 


66.00 


675840 


10560 


41.25 


880640 


13760 


53.75 


1085440 


16960 


66.25 


679936 


10624 


41.50 


884736 


13824 


54.00 


1089536 


17024 


66.50 


684032 


10688 


41.75 


888832 


13888 


54.25 


1093632 


17088 


66.75 


688128 


10752 


42.00 


892928 


13952 


54.50 


1097728 


17152 


67.00 


692224 


10816 


42.25 


897024 


14016 


54.75 


1101824 


17216 


67.25 


696320 


10880 


42.50 


901120 


14080 


55.00 


1105920 


17280 


67.50 


700416 


10944 


42.75 


905216 


14144 


55.25 


1110016 


17344 


67.75 


704512 


11008 


43.00 


909312 


14208 


55.50 


1114112 


17408 


68.00 


708608 


11072 


43.25 


913408 


14272 


55.75 


1118208 


17472 


68,25 


712704 


11136 


43.50 


917504 


14336 


56.00 


1122304 


17536 


68.50 


716800 


11200 


43.75 


921600 


14400 


56.25 


1126400 


17600 


68.75 


720896 


11264 


44.00 


925696 


14464 


56.50 


1130496 


17664 


69.00 


724992 


11328 


44.25 


929792 


14528 


56.75 


1134592 


17728 


69.25 


729088 


11392 


44.50 


933888 


14592 


57.00 


1138688 


17792 


69.50 


733184 


11456 


44.75 


937984 


14656 


57.25 


1142784 


17856 


69.75 


737280 


11520 


45.00 


942080 


14720 


57.50 


1146880 


• 17920 


70.00 


741376 


11584 


45.25 


946176 


14784 


57.75 


1150976 


17984 


70.25 


745472 


11648 


45.50 


950272 


14848 


58.00 


1155072 


18048 


70.50 


749568 


11712 


45.75 


954368 


14912 


58.25 


1159168 


18112 


70.75 


753664 


11776 


46.00 


958464 


14976 


58.50 


1163264 


18176 


71.00 


757760 


11840 


46.25 


962560 


15040 


58,75 


1167360 


18240 


71.25 


761856 


11904 


46.50 


966656 


15104 


59.00 


1171456 


18304 


71.50 


765952 


11968 


46.75 


970752 


15168 


59.25 


1175552 


18368 


71.75 


770048 


12032 


47.00 


974848 


15232 


59.50 


1179648 


18432 


72.00 


774144 


12096 


47.25 


978944 


15296 


59.75 


1183744 


18496 


72.25 


778240 


12160 


47.50 


983040 


15360 


60.00 


1187840 


18560 


72.50 


782336 


12224 


47.75 


987136 


15424 


60.25 


1191936 


18624 


72.75 


786432 


12288 


48.00 


991232 


15488 


60.50 


1196032 


18688 


73.00 


790528 


12352 


48.25 


995328 


15552 


60.75 


1200128 


18752 


73.25 


794624 


12416 


48.50 


999424 


15616 


61.00 


1204224 


18816 


73.50 


798720 


12480 


48.75 


1003520 


15680 


61.25 


1208320 


18880 


73.75 


802816 


12544 


49.00 


1007616 


15744 


61.50 


1212416 


18944 


74.00 


806912 


12608 


49.25 


1011712 


15808 


61.75 


1216512 


19008 


74.25 


811008 


12672 


49.50 


1015808 


15872 


62.00 


1220608 


19072 


74.50 


815104 


12736 


49.75 


1019904 


15936 


62.25 


1224704 


19136 


74.75 



C-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



V 














APPENDIX C 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


i££8ouu 




/O.UU 


IH-OOOUU 


oo xt\r\ 

£<:4uu 


Of .OU 


1638400 


orfrtft 
£DOUU 


1 e\t\ r\r\ 
IUU.UU 


1232896 


19264 


75.25 


1437696 


22464 


87.75 


1642496 


25664 


100.25 


1236992 


19328 


75.50 


1441792 


22528 


88.00 


1646592 


25728 


100.50 


1241088 


1 *7 w«/l 


/ W O / %J 


1445888 


22592 


88.25 


1650688 


25792 


100.75 


1245184 


19456 


76.00 


1449984 


22656 


88.50 


1654784 


25856 


101.00 


1249280 


19520 


76.25 


1454080 


22720 


88.75 


1658880 


25920 


101.25 


1253376 


19584 


76.50 


1458176 


22784 


89.00 


1662976 


25984 


101.50 


1257472 


19648 


76.75 


1462272 


22848 


89.25 


1667072 


26048 


101.75 


1261568 


19712 


77.00 


1466368 


22912 


89.50 


1671168 


26112 


102.00 


1265664 


19776 


77.25 


1470464 


22976 


89.75 


1675264 


26176 


102.25 


i^69/ou 


19840 


//.ou 


i t t/4oou 


^3u^u 


90.00 


io/93ou 


26240 


1 rto rn 
\U£..DU 


1 273856 


19904 


77.75 


1478656 


23104 


90.25 


1683456 


26304 


102.75 


1277952 


19968 


78.00 


1482752 


23168 


90.50 


1687552 


26368 


103.00 


1282048 


20032 


78.25 


1486848 


23232 


90.75 


1691648 


26432 


103.25 


1286144 


20096 


78.50 


1490944 


23296 


91.00 


1695744 


26496 


103.50 


1290240 


20160 


78.75 


1495040 


23360 


91.25 


1699840 


26560 


103.75 


1294336 


20224 


79.00 


1499136 


23424 


91.50 


1703936 


26624 


104.00 


1298432 


20288 


79.25 


1503232 


23488 


91.75 


1708032 


26688 


104.25 


1302528 


20352 


79.50 


1507328 


23552 


92.00 


1712128 


26752 


104.50 


1306624 


20416 


79.75 


1511424 


23616 


92.25 


1716224 


26816 


104.75 


1310720 


20480 


80.00 


1515520 


23680 


92.50 


1720320 


26880 


105.00 


1314816 


20544 


80.25 


1519616 


23744 


92.75 


1724416 


26944 


105.25 


1318912 


20608 


80.50 


1523712 


23808 


93.00 


1728512 


27008 


105.50 


1323008 


20672 


80.75 


1527808 


23872 


93.25 


1732608 


27072 


105.75 


1327104 


20736 


81.00 


1531904 


23936 


93.50 


1736704 


27136 


106.00 


1331200 


20800 


81.25 


1536000 


24000 


93.75 


1740800 


27200 


106.25 


1335296 


20864 


81.50 


1540096 


24064 


94.00 


1744896 


27264 


106.50 


1339392 


20928 


81.75 


1544192 


24128 


94.25 


1748992 


27328 


106.75 


1343488 


20992 


82.00 


1548288 


24192 


94.50 


1753088 


27392 


107.00 


1347584 


21056 


82.25 


1552384 


24256 


94.75 


1757184 


27456 


107.25 


1351680 


21120 


82.50 


1556480 


24320 


95.00 


1761280 


27520 


107.50 


1355776 


21184 


82.75 


1560576 


24384 


95.25 


1765376 


27584 


107.75 


1359872 


21248 


83.00 


1564672 


24448 


95.50 


1769472 


27648 


108.00 


1363968 


21312 


83.25 


1568768 


24512 


95.75 


1773568 


27712 


108.25 


1368064 


21376 


83.50 


1572864 


24576 


96.00 


1777664 


27776 


108.50 


1372160 


21440 


83.75 


1576960 


24640 


96.25 


1781760 


27840 


108.75 


1376256 


21504 


84.00 


1581056 


24704 


96.50 


1785856 


27904 


109.00 


1380352 


21568 


84.25 


1585152 


24768 


96.75 


1789952 


27968 


109.25 


1 384448 


21632 


84.50 


1589248 


24832 


97.00 


1794048 


28032 


109.50 


1388544 


21696 


84.75 


1593344 


24896 


97.25 


1798144 


28096 


109.75 


1392640 


21760 


85.00 


1597440 


24960 


97.50 


1802240 


28160 


110.00 


1396736 


21824 


85.25 


1601536 


25024 


97.75 


1806336 


28224 


110.25 


1400832 


21888 


85.50 


1605632 


25088 


98.00 


1810432 


28288 


110.50 


1404928 


21952 


85.75 


1609728 


25152 


98.25 


1814528 


28352 


110.75 


1409024 


22016 


86.00 


1613824 


25216 


98.50 


1818624 


28416 


111.00 


1413120 


22080 


86.25 


1617920 


25280 


98.75 


1822720 


28480 


111.25 


1417216 


22144 


86.50 


1622016 


25344 


99.00 


1826816 


28544 


111.50 


1421312 


22208 


86.75 


1626112 


25408 


99.25 


1830912 


28608 


111.75 


1425408 


22272 


87.00 


1630208 


■ - fcifJ-^fr#-^4»> 


99^50 


1835008 


28672 


112.00 


1429504 


22336 


87.25 


1634304 


25536 


99.75 


1839104 


28736 


112.25 



C-3 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



V 














APPEK 


IDIX C 


J 

WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


1843200 


28800 


112.50 


2048000 


32000 


125.00 


2252800 


35200 


137.50 


1847296 


28864 


112.75 


2052096 


32064 


125.25 


2256896 


35264 


137.75 


1851392 


28928 


113.00 


2056192 


32128 


125.50 


2260992 


35328 


138.00 


1855488 


28992 


113.25 


2060288 


32192 


125.75 


2265088 


35392 


138.25 


1859584 


29056 


113.50 


2064384 


32256 


126.00 


2269184 


35456 


138.50 


1863680 


29120 


113.75 


2068480 


32320 


126.25 


2273280 


35520 


138.75 


1867776 


29184 


114.00 


2072576 


32384 


126.50 


2277376 


35584 


139.00 


1871872 


29248 


114.25 


2076672 


32448 


126.75 


2281472 


35648 


139.25 


1875968 


29312 


114.50 


2080768 


32512 


127.00 


2285568 


35712 


139.50 


1880064 


29376 


114.75 


2084864 


32576 


127.25 


2289664 


35776 


139.75 


1884160 


29440 


115.00 


2088960 


32640 


127.50 


2293760 


35840 


140.00 


1888256 


29504 


115.25 


2093056 


32704 


127.75 


2297856 


35904 


140.25 


1892352 


29568 


115.50 


2097152 


32768 


128.00 


2301952 


35968 


140.50 


1896448 


29632 


115.75 


2101248 


32832 


128.25 


2306048 


36032 


140.75 


1900544 


29696 


116.00 


2105344 


32896 


128.50 


2310144 


36096 


141.00 


1904640 


29760 


116.25 


2109440 


32960 


128.75 


2314240 


36160 


141.25 


1908736 


29824 


116.50 


2113536 


33024 


129.00 


2318336 


36224 


141.50 


1912832 


29888 


116.75 


2117632 


33088 


129.25 


2322432 


36288 


141.75 


1916928 


29952 


117.00 


2121728 


33152 


129.50 


2326528 


36352 


142.00 


1921024 


30016 


117.25 


2125824 


33216 


129.75 


2330624 


36416 


142.25 


1925120 


30080 


117.50 


2129920 


33280 


130.00 


2334720 


36480 


142.50 


1929216 


30144 


117.75 


2134016 


33344 


130.25 


2338816 


36544 


142.75 


1933312 


30208 


118.00 


2138112 


33408 


130.50 


2342912 


36608 


143.00 


1937408 


30272 


118.25 


2142208 


33472 


130.75 


2347008 


36672 


143.25 


1941504 


30336 


118.50 


2146304 


33536 


131.00 


2351104 


36736 


143.50 


1945600 


30400 


118.75 


2150400 


33600 


131.25 


2355200 


36800 


143.75 


1949696 


30464 


119.00 


2154496 


33664 


131.50 


2359296 


36864 


144.00 


1953792 


30528 


119.25 


2158592 


33728 


131.75 


2363392 


36928 


144.25 


1957888 


30592 


119.50 


2162688 


33792 


132.00 


2367488 


36992 


144.50 


1961984 


30656 


119.75 


2166784 


33856 


132.25 


2371584 


37056 


144.75 


1966080 


30720 


120.00 


2170880 


33920 


132.50 


2375680 


37120 


145.00 


1970176 


30784 


120.25 


2174976 


33984 


132.75 


2379776 


37184 


145.25 


1974272 


30848 


120.50 


2179072 


34048 


133.00 


2383872 


37248 


145.50 


1978368 


30912 


120.75 


2183168 


34112 


133.25 


2387968 


37312 


145.75 


1982464 


30976 


121.00 


2187264 


34176 


133.50 


2392064 


37376 


146.00 


1986560 


31040 


121.25 


2191360 


34240 


133.75 


2396160 


37440 


146.25 


1990656 


31104 


121.50 


2195456 


34304 


134.00 


2400256 


37504 


146.50 


1994752 


31168 


121.75 


2199552 


34368 


134.25 


2404352 


37568 


146.75 


1998848 


31232 


122.00 


2203648 


34432 


134.50 


2408448 


37632 


147.00 


2002944 


31296 


122.25 


2207744 


34496 


134.75 


2412544 


37696 


147.25 


2007040 


31360 


122.50 


2211840 


34560 


135.00 


2416640 


37760 


147.50 


2011136 


31424 


122.75 


2215936 


34624 


135.25 


2420736 


37824 


147.75 


2015232 


31488 


123.00 


2220032 


34688 


135.50 


2424832 


37888 


148.00 


2019328 


31552 


123.25 


2224128 


34752 


135.75 


2428928 


37952 


148.25 


2023424 


31616 


123.50 


2228224 


34816 


136.00 


2433024 


38016 


148.50 


2027520 


31680 


123.75 


2232320 


34880 


136.25 


2437120 


38080 


148.75 


2031616 


31744 


124.00 


2236416 


34944 


136.50 


2441216 


38144 


149.00 


2035712 


31808 


124.25 


2240512 


35008 


136.75 


2445312 


38208 


149.25 


2039808 


31872 


124.50 


2244608 


35072 


137.00 


2449408 


38272 


149.50 


2043904 


31936 


124.75 


2248704 


35136 


137.25 


2453504 


38336 


149.75 



C-4 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



¥> 














APPENDIX C 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


2457600 


38400 


150.00 


2662400 


41600 


1 ft\ i-/\ 

I0£. ou 


£O0/£UU 


A AQAA 

HH-OUU 


T "7C r\r\ 

l/J.UU 


2461696 


38464 


150.25 


2666496 


41664 


162.75 


2871296 


44864 


175.25 


2465792 


38528 


150.50 


2670592 


41728 


163.00 


2875392 


44928 


175.50 


2469888 


38592 


150.75 


2674688 


47192 


163.25 


2879488 


44992 


175.75 


2473984 


38656 


151.00 


2678784 


41856 


163.50 


2883584 


45056 


176.00 


2478080 


38720 


151.25 


2682880 


41920 


163.75 


2887680 


45120 


176.25 


2482176 


38784 


151.50 


2686976 


41984 


164.00 


2891776 


45184 


176.50 


2486272 


38848 


151.75 


2691072 


42048 


164.25 


2895872 


45248 


176.75 


2490368 


38912 


152.00 


2695168 


42112 


164.50 


2899968 


45312 


177.00 


2494464 


38976 


152.25 


2699264 


42176 


164.75 


2904064 


45376 


177.25 


2498560 


39040 


152.50 


2703360 


42240 


165.00 


2908160 


AC A Aft 

H-bttu 


177.50 


2502656 


39104 


152.75 


2707456 


42304 


165.25 


2912256 


45504 


177.75 


2506752 


39168 


153.00 


27711552 


42368 


165.50 


2916352 


45568 


178.00 


2510848 


39232 


153.25 


2715648 


42432 


165.75 


2920448 


45632 


178.25 


2514944 


39296 


153.50 


2719744 


42496 


166.00 


2924544 


45696 


178.50 


2519040 


39360 


153.75 


2723840 


42560 


166.25 


2928640 


45760 


178.75 


2523136 


39424 


154.00 


2727936 


42624 


166.50 


2932736 


45824 


179.00 


2527232 


39488 


154.25 


2732032 


42688 


166.75 


2936832 


45888 


179.25 


2531328 


39552 


154.50 


2736128 


42752 


167.00 


2940928 


45952 


179.50 


2535424 


39616 


154.75 


2740224 


42816 


167.25 


2945024 


46016 


179.75 


2539520 


39680 


155.00 


2744320 


42880 


167.50 


2949120 


46080 


180.00 


2543616 


39744 


155.25 


2748416 


42944 


167.75 


2953216 


46144 


180.25 


2547712 


39808 


155.50 


2752512 


43008 


168.00 


2957312 


46208 


180.50 


2551808 


39872 


155.75 


2756608 


43072 


168.25 


2961408 


46272 


180.75 


2555904 


39936 


156.00 


2760704 


43136 


168.50 


2965504 


46336 


181.00 


2560000 


40000 


156.25 


2764800 


43200 


168.75 


2969600 


46400 


181.25 


2564096 


40064 


156.50 


2768896 


43264 


169.00 


2973696 


46464 


181.50 


2568192 


40128 


156.75 


2772992 


43328 


169.25 


2977792 


46528 


181.75 


2572288 


40192 


157.00 


2777088 


43392 


169.50 


298188 


46592 


182.00 


2576384 


40256 


157.25 


2781184 


43456 


169.75 


2985984 


46656 


182.25 


2580480 


40320 


157.50 


2785280 


43520 


170.00 


2990080 


46720 


182.50 


2584576 


40384 


157.75 


2789376 


43584 


170.25 


2994176 


46784 


182.75 


2588672 


40448 


158.00 


2793472 


43648 


170.50 


2998272 


46848 


183.00 


2592768 


40512 


158.25 


2797568 


43712 


170.75 


3002368 


46912 


183.25 


2596864 


40576 


158.50 


2801664 


43776 


171.00 


3006464 


46976 


183.50 


2600960 


40640 


158.75 


2805760 


43840 


171.25 


3010560 


47040 


183.75 


2605056 


40704 


159.00 


2809856 


43904 


171.50 


3014656 


47104 


184.00 


2609152 


40768 


159.25 


2813952 


43968 


171.75 


3018752 


47168 


184.25 


2613248 


40382 


159.50 


2818048 


44032 


172.00 


3022848 


47232 


184.50 


2617344 


40896 


159.75 


2822144 


44096 


172.25 


3026944 


47296 


184.75 


2621440 


40960 


160.00 


2826240 


44160 


172.50 


3031040 


47360 


185.00 


2625536 


41024 


160.25 


2830336 


44224 


172.75 


3035136 


47424 


185.25 


2629632 


41088 


160.50 


2834432 


44288 


173.00 


3039232 


47488 


185.50 


2633728 


41152 


160.75 


2838528 


44353 


173.25 


3043328 


47552 


185.75 


2637824 


41216 


161.00 


2842624 


44416 


173.50 


3047424 


47616 


186.00 


2641920 


41280 


161.25 


2846720 


44480 


173.75 


3051520 


47680 


186.25 


2646016 


41344 


161.50 


2850816 


44544 


174.00 


3055616 


47744 


186.50 


2650112 


41408 


161.75 


2854912 


44608 


174.25 


3059712 


47808 


186.75 


2654208 


41472 


162*40 


2S&9008 


44672 


174-50 


3Q6i38Q8 


47872 


187.00 


2658304 


41536 


162.25 


2863104 


44736 


174.75 


3067904 


47936 


187.25 



C-5 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



v 














APPENDIX C 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


WORD 


SECT 


BAND 


3072000 


48000 


187.50 


3276800 


51200 


200.00 


3481600 


54400 


212.50 


3076096 


48064 


187.75 


3280896 


51264 


200.25 


3485696 


54464 


212.75 


3080192 


48128 


188.00 


3284992 


51328 


200.50 


3489792 


54528 


213.00 


3084288 


48192 


188.25 


3289088 


51392 


200.75 


3493888 


54592 


213.25 


3088384 


48256 


188.50 


3293184 


51456 


201.00 


3497984 


54656 


213.50 


3092480 


48320 


188.75 


3297280 


51520 


201.25 


3502080 


54720 


213.75 


3096576 


48384 


189.00 


3301376 


51584 


201.50 


3506176 


54784 


214.00 


3100672 


48448 


189.25 


3305472 


51648 


201.75 


3510272 


54848 


214.25 


3104768 


48512 


189.50 


3309568 


51712 


202,00 


3514368 


54912 


214.50 


3108864 


48576 


189.75 


3313664 


51776 


202.25 


3518464 


54976 


214.75 


3112960 


48640 


190.00 


3317760 


51840 


202.50 


3522560 


55040 


215.00 


3117056 


48704 


190.25 


3321856 


51904 


202.75 


3526656 


55104 


215.25 


3121152 


48768 


190.50 


3325952 


51968 


203.00 


3530752 


55168 


215.50 


3125248 


48832 


190,75 


3330048 


52032 


203.25 


3534848 


55232 


215.75 


3129344 


48896 


191.00 


3334144 


52096 


203.50 


3538944 


55296 


216.00 


3133440 


48960 


191.25 


3338240 


52160 


203.75 


3543040 


55360 


216.25 


3137536 


49024 


191.50 


3342336 


52224 


204.00 


3547136 


55424 


216.50 


3141632 


49088 


191.75 


3346432 


52288 


204.25 


3551232 


55488 


216.75 


3145728 


49152 


192.00 


3350528 


52352 


204.50 


3555328 


55552 


217.00 


3149824 


49216 


192.25 


3354624 


52416 


204,75 


3559424 


55616 


217.25 


3153920 


49280 


192.50 


3358720 


52480 


205.00 


3563520 


55680 


217.50 


3158016 


49344 


192.75 


3362816 


52544 


205.25 


3567616 


55744 


217.75 


3162112 


49408 


193.00 


3366912 


52608 


205.50 


3571712 


55808 


218.00 


3166208 


49472 


193.25 


3371008 


52672 


205.75 


3575808 


55872 


218.25 


3170304 


49536 


193.50 


3375104 


52736 


206.00 


3579904 


55936 


218.50 


3174400 


49600 


193.75 


3379200 


52800 


206.25 


3584000 


56000 


218.75 


3178496 


49664 


194.00 


3383296 


52864 


206.50 


3588096 


56064 


219.00 


3182592 


49728 


194.25 


3387392 


52928 


206.75 


3592192 


56128 


219.25 


3186688 


49792 


194.50 


3391488 


52992 


207.00 


3596288 


56192 


219.50 


3190784 


49856 


194.75 


3395584 


53056 


207.25 


3600384 


56256 


219.75 


3194880 


49920 


195.00 


3399680 


53120 


207.50 


3604480 


56320 


220.00 


3198976 


49984 


195.25 


3403776 


53184 


207.75 


3608576 


56384 


220.25 


3203072 


50048 


195.50 


3407872 


53248 


208.00 


3612672 


56448 


220.50 


3207168 


50112 


195.75 


3411968 


53312 


208.25 


3616768 


56512 


220.75 


3211264 


50176 


196.00 


3416064 


53376 


208.50 


3620864 


56576 


221.00 


3215360 


50240 


196.25 


3420160 


53440 


208.75 


3624960 


56640 


221.25 


3219456 


50304 


196.50 


3424256 


53504 


209.00 


3629056 


56704 


221.50 


3223552 


50368 


196.75 


3428352 


53568 


209.25 


3633152 


56768 


221.75 


3227648 


50432 


197.00 


3432448 


53632 


209.50 


3637248 


56832 


222.00 


3231744 


50496 


197.25 


3436544 


53696 


209.75 


3641344 


56896 


222.25 


3235840 


50560 


197.50 


3440640 


53760 


210.00 


3645440 


56960 


222.50 


3239936 


50624 


197.75 


3444736 


53824 


210.25 


3649536 


57024 


222.75 


3244032 


50688 


198.00 


3448832 


53888 


210.50 


3653632 


57088 


223.00 


3248128 


50752 


198.25 


3452928 


53952 


210.75 


3657728 


57152 


223.25 


3252224 


50816 


198.50 


3457024 


54016 


211.00 


3661824 


57216 


223.50 


3256320 


50880 


198.75 


3461120 


54080 


211.25 


3665920 


57280 


223.75 


3260416 


50944 


199.00 


3465216 


54144 


211.50 


3670016 


57344 


224.00 


3264512 


51008 


199.25 


3469312 


54208 


211.75 


3674112 


57408 


224.25 


3268608 


51072 


199.50 


3473408 


54272 


212.00 


3678208 


57472 


224.50 


3272704 


51136 


199.75 


3477504 


54336 


212.25 


3682304 


57536 


224.75 



C-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX D 

STATEMENT USES 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX D 



APPENDIX D 
STATEMENT USES 



The following is a brief description of all JSL statements. The flagged stat 
ments (*) are those which are macros; the remainder are JSL statements. 



e- 



Statement 
ASG 



'ASM 



*ASML 



*ASMLX 



BATINT 
BUILD 

CAT 

CATBLD 

CATN 



Purpose 

The ASG statement informs the system that the specified 
version of a cataloged file is to be accessible to the current 
job by the name specified in the statement. 

The ASM statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Assembler. The ASM macro produces the XQT 
statement, and optional supporting JSL statements for file 
definitions and renaming, required to execute the ASC As- 
sembler. 

The ASML statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Assembler and the ASC Linkage Editor. The ASML 
macro produces the XQT statements, and optional support- 
ing JSL statements for file definition and renaming, required 
to execute the ASC Assembler and Linkage Editor. 

The ASMLX statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Assembler, the ASC Linkage Editor and the load 
module produced. The ASMLX macro produces the XQT 
statements, and optional supporting JSL statements and re- 
naming, required to execute the ASC Assembler, Linkage 
Editor, and the load module produced. 

The BATINT statement specifies the change of a batch job to 
an interactive job. 

The BUILD statement is a macro language directive that con- 
structs a buffer in card image of parameter values to be in- 
put to the Translator. 

The CAT statement initiates concurrently the entry of a node 
into a catalog and the entry of the first version of the file at 
that node. 

The CATBLD statement initiates the entry of a new catalog 
into the system. 

The CATN statement initiates the entry of a node into a cat- 
alog. 



D-l 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX D 



Statement 
CATV 

CHG 

*CJSL 

CNT 



CNTE 



COM 



DEL 



DELV 
DMACRO 



EOJ 



EOJX 



FD 



Purpose 

The CATV statement initiates the entry of a version of a file 
at an existing node. 

The CHG statement initiates specified changes in the char- 
acteristics of a node. 

The CJSL statement initiates a check of the syntax of a job 
that is defined in an external or cataloged file. 

The CNT statement is the start delimiter for a concatenated 
input file request. Each concatenated input file request re- 
sults in associating two or more ASG, FIT, or FD statements 
under the CNT's access name as concatenated files. 

The CNTE statement is the end delimiter for a concatenated 
input file request. CNTE defines the end of the associated 
ASG, FIT, or FD statements defining the files to be con- 
catenated under the CNT's access name. 

The COM statement specifies narrative comments that are 
to be entered into the Job Specification Language source 
listing of the system output file. 

The DEL statement initiates the deletion of a terminal node 
from a catalog. 

The DELV statement initiates the deletion of a specified 
version of the file at an existing node. 

The DMACRO statement initiates the deactivation of the most 
recently activated macro definition of the specified name and 
initiates the reactivation of the next preceding macro defini- 
tion of the specified name. The deactivated definition is re- 
moved from the stack. 

The EOJ statement indicates the end of statements and data 
associated with a job during job input, and initiates job 
termination when the statement is processed during job ex- 
ecution. 

The EOJX statement specifies the end of statements and data 
associated with a deferred job. 

The FD statement defines the characteristics of a job local 
file -- logical I/O characteristics and disc allocation. The 
FD statement is associated with a file on secondary disc. 
Multiple FD statements within the same job for the same ac- 
cess name allow modification of logical file characteristics 
from step to step within the job. 



D-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX D 



Statement 



FIT 



FOSYS 



FOT 



*FTN 



*FTNL 



*FTNLX 



*FXQT 



GEN 



GOTO 



IF 



JOB 



Purpose 

The FIT statement initiates a call to read a file from a half- 
incn magnetic tape and place that file on disc. 

The FOSYS statement places the specified file into either the 
job's print or punch output file chain. The print or punch 
files are output at the termination of the associated job. 

The FOT statement initiates a call to have a specified disc 
file written to half-inch magnetic tape. 

The FTN statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Fortran Compiler. The FTN macro produces the 
XQT statement, and optional supporting JSL statements for 
file definition and renaming required to execute the ASC 
Fortran Compiler. 

The FTNL statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Fortran Compiler and the ASC Linkage Editor. The 
FTNL macro produces the XQT statements, and optional 
supporting JSL statements for file definition and renaming 
required to execute the ASC Fortran Compiler and Linkage 
Editor. 

The FTNLX statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Fortran Compiler, Linkage Editor, and resulting 
load module. The FTNLX macro produces the XQT state- 
ments, and optional supporting JSL statements for file de- 
finition and renaming required to execute the ASC Fortran 
Compiler, Linkage Editor and load module. 

The FXQT statement is a macro that specifies the execution 
of Fortran load modules using Fortran I/O. The FXQT 
eases the naming of the input file and the printing of the out- 
put print file. 

The GEN statement is a macro language directive that clears 
the BUILD-generated buffer by outputting the buffer contents 
to the Translator. 

The GOTO statement specifies an unconditional forward 
branch of execution to a specified step within a job block, or 
specifies an unconditional forward branch of execution to an- 
other job block. 

The IF statement specifies a conditional forward branch of 
execution to a specified step within a job block or to another 
job block. 

The JOB statement defines the beginning of a job. 



D-3 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX D 



Statement 
JOBX 



JUMP 



LIMIT 



=LNK 



*LNKX 



MACASG 



MACBLD 



MACRO 



MEND 

MACRO CALL 

MACRO 
MODEL 

MFR 



Purpose 

The JOBX statement defines the beginning of a source job 
specification contained in a file embedded in another source 
job specification file (a source job specification in a file de- 
fined by a START/ STOP statement pair). 

The JUMP statement specifies either a conditional or an un- 
conditional transfer of the generation sequence during the 
expansion of a macro definition. 

The LIMIT statement defines the beginning of a job block 
within a job. 

The LNK statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Linkage Editor. The LNK macro produces the XQT, 
the optional supporting JSL statements for file definition and 
renaming, required to execute the ASC Linkage Editor. 

The LNKX statement is a macro that specifies execution of 
the ASC Linkage Editor and resulting load module. The 
LNKX macro produces the XQT statements, the optional 
supporting JSL statements for file definition and renaming, 
required to execute the ASC Linkage Editor and load module 
produced. 

The MACASG statement defines the use of a macro file to the 
JSL Translator. 

The MACBLD statement creates or modifies a macro file. 
All macros defined between the MACBLD and either the cur- 
rent end of input file, or the next MACBLD statement, are 
written to the specified access name. 

The MACRO statement initiates the definition of a macro, 
specifies the name of the macro to be defined, and specifies 
the default values of the formal parameters in the macro 
body. 

The MEND statement marks the end of the macro definition 
with which it is associated. 

A Macro Call statement initiates the expansion of a macro 
whose name is used as the verb of that macro call statement. 

A Macro Model statement is any statement in a macro body 
that may be expanded into one or more basic Job Specifica- 
tion Language statements in a macro expansion. 

The MFR statement is the start delimiter for a multi-file 
reel request. All file statements included must be of one 
type. 



D-4 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




APPENDIX D 



Statement 



MFRE 



PD 



PJSL 



PRINT 



REL 



RENAME 



RPLV 

SET 

SETUP 
* 
START 

STOP 

VERBSYN 

XQT 



Purpose 

The MFRE statement is the end delimiter for a multi-file 
reex request. MFRE defines the end of the included files 
following the MFR statement. 

The PD statement defines a synonym for the pathname of a 
catalog node that exists at the time the synonym is referenced. 

The PJSL statement initiates the entry of a job that is de- 
fined in an external or cataloged file into the system input 

strpam fr> T-i<=» nnpnprl fr\y ovoriih'rv" 

The PRINT statement specifies that the current value (s) of 
one or more of the twenty- seven JSL variables and/or a 
message to be entered into the system output file at the time 
of execution of PRINT. 

The REL statement specifies that the disc space for the 
named file or files is to be released and returned to the 
allocation for the current job block. 

The RENAME statement specifies the correspondence be- 
tween the standard access name and a user-defined access 
name. The new access name replaces the existing access 
name for the file; i. e., the new name destroys any former 
name in the job database. 

The RPLV statement initiates the replacement of a specified 
version of a file at an existing node. 

The SET statement assigns an integer value to a Job Speci- 
fication Language variable. 

The SETUP statement instructs the system to schedule a 
secondary storage file on video tape. 

The START statement initiates the input of a file within the 
source job specification file (a file embedded in the job input 
stream). 

The STOP statement is the terminator of a file that is con- 
tained within the source job specification file. 

The VERBSYN statement is a macro language directive that 
enables the user to redefine an intrinsic JSL verb function. 

The XQT statement initiates the execution of a load module. 
The ASC Fortran Compiler, ASC Assembler, and ASC Link- 
age Editor may be executed through an XQT statement. The 
JSL statements needed to define all input and output files ex- 
pected by the Compiler, Assembler or Linkage Editor must 
be included within the JSL program preceding the XQT state- 
ment. 



D-5/D-6 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




INDEX 
JSL REFERENCE MANUAL 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




I N E X 
JSL REFERENCE MANUAL 



ACCESS CONTROL 

ACCESS CCNTROL, CATALOG SYSTEM 

ACCESS CONTROL INFORMATION (ACIN) PARAMETER - SEE ACIN 

ACCESS CONTROL LIST, CATALOG SYSTEM 

a<~i~ccc rriirnni c- t a t r- i x r- t- t \ /» r- 1- »#-«-■»■ 

muucoj llNiKul OIMIC IHt^l I -3CC AU5I 

ACCESS NAME - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
ASG 
CAT 
CATV 
CJSL 
FD 

FIT 

FCSYS 

FOT 

MACASG 

MACBLD 

PJSL 

REL 

RENAME 

RPLV 

START 

XOT 

- CATALOG SYSTEM 

ACCOUNT NUMBER 
ACIN PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 

CATBLO 
CATN 
CHG 

ACIN ANO ACST PARAMETER INTERACTION - 

- FGR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 

CATBLO 
CATN 
CHG 

ACIN ANO RFST PARAMETER INTERACTION - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 

CATBLO 
CATN 
CHG 



B-l 
7-6 

B-i, 7-4 

APPENDIX A 



APPENDIX A t B-l 

6-3 
7-31 
7-52 
8-22 

5-8 

6-10 
6-32 
6-32 
9-10 
9-8 

8-23 

8-2 

8-3 

7-70 

5-28 

3-1 

7-3 

B-l, 2-2, 2-11 



7-33 
7-13 
7-16 
7-24 



7-34 
7-12 
7-17 
7-25 



7-34 
7-11 
7-18 
7-25 



1-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 






ACIN AND SON PARAMETER INTERACTICN - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 

CATBLD 

CATN 

CHG 

ACNM PARAMETER - 

- FGR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 

CATV 
RPLV 
START 

ACST PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 

CATBLD 

CATN 

CHG 

ACTUAL PARAMETER, HACRO 

ADDITIONAL MEMORY SIZE (ADDMEMI PARAMETER, 

ASEQ PARAMETER, CHG STATEMENT 



XQT STATEMENT 



9-2 



Abb y 



ASM 

ASML 

ASMLX 



ATEMENT 

PARAMETER 

STATEMENT 



INTERACTIONS 
INTERACTIONS 



A-l, 



7-35 
7-13 
7-18 
7-26 



7-3i 
7-52 

7-70 
5-28 



7-32 
7-iO 
7-15 
7-23 

9-7 

3-4 

7-22 

6-3 
6-8 
6-5 



ATTRIBUTE 

ATTRIBUTES, CATALOG -SEE CATALOG ATTRIBUTES 

AUTOMATIC VERSION SEQUENCING (ASEJ), CHG STATEMENT 



Al-l, C-l 
Al-4, D-l 
Al-6, D-l 

B-l 

7-22 



BAND 
BAND 



PARAMETER - 
- FOR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 
CATV 
FD 

KPLV 
START 



BANDS CONVERSION 

BATCH-INTERACTIVE (6ATINT) STATEMENT 

BATINT STATEMENT 

BASE PARAMETER, MACBLC STATEMENT 

BFAL PARAMETER, FD STATEMFNT 
BFTK PARAMETER, FD STATEMENT 
BKSZ PARAMETER - 

- FOR: 

BLOCKS 



B-l, 2-13 



7-42 
7-58 
5-6 
7-76 
5-27 

APPENDIX C 

8-27 

A-2, 8-27 

9-8 

5-13 
5-12 



B-l, 2-1 



1-2 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FD STATEMENT 
START STATEMENT 

BLOCK, FILE 

BLOCK, JSL 

BLOCK SIZE PARAMETER (BKSZ) - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

FD 

START 



BUILD STATEMENT 

POSITION PARAMETER 



BYTE 



CATALOG 

ACCESS CCNTPCL 



MANAGEMENT 
NODE CREATION 
PRIVACY 



5-10 
5-28 

3-1 
B-2 



5-10 
5-28 



BOOLEAN EXPRESSION, JUMP STATEMENT 9-22 

BUFFER ALIGNMENT PARAMETER CBFAL), FO STATEMENT 5-13 

BUFFER LENGTH PARAMETER (BUFD, FD STATEMENT 5- 11 

BUFFERING TYPE (BFTK), FD STATEMENT 5- { 2 

BUFFER NUMBER (BUFNJ, FD STATEMENT 5 13 

BUFL PARAMETER, FD STATEMENT 5 I } t 

BUFN PARAMETER, FD STATEMENT 5 _ J3 



9-16 

SUBSTITUTION STRING |lj^ 

2-13 



CARD IMAGE FORMAT RESTRICTIONS 1 _7 

CAT STATEMENT A _ 3 ? _ ' 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS ' 7 _ 34 



B-2 

ATTRIBUTES, EXECUTE 7 ~t 

ATTRIBUTES, CfcN 7 _5 



ATTRIBUTES, READ OR EXECUTE 7 _ 5 

ATTRIBUTES, REFERENCE 7 _ 5 

ATTRIBUTES, SCN-ADD 7 „ 5 

ATTRIBUTES, URITE 7 _ 5 



7-1 

7-30 

REFERENCE CGNTROL 7 l£ 



SCN-ADU CONTROL 

STRUCTURE 

SYSTEM 



7-7 
7-1 

TREE STRUCTURE, GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION 7-? 

USER CUSCOJ 2 _ 12 

CATALOGED FILE ASSIGNMENT (INPUT) 6 _ 2 

CATALOGED FILE INPLT, FD STATEMENT 5-19 

CATALOGING FUNCTICNS, CAT STATEMENT 7 _ 30 

CATALOG I MG FUMCT LGJ*£» CAT V STA TEMENT 7 w 5l 

CATBLD STATEMENT A _ 6 7 _ 9 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS * 7 _ 12 



1-3 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




CATEGORY (CAT) PARAMETER 2-3 

CATN STATEMENT A-8, 7-14 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 7-17 

CATV STATEMENT A-10, 7-49 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 7-59 

SPECIAL CATALGGING FUNCTIONS 7-54 

CENTRAL PROCESSOR TIME (CPTIME) 

LIMIT STATEMENT 2-14 

XOT STATEMENT 3-4 

CHANNEL SPECIFICATION, SETUP STATEMENT 8-24 

CHARACTER SET l-l 

CHARACTER STRINGS 1-2 

CHG STATEMENT A-13, 7-20 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 7-25 

CJSL STATEMENT A-15, 8-22 

CNT STATEMENT A-15, 8-17 

CNTE STATEMENT A-16, 8-18 

STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 8-18 

COMMENTS STATEMENT (CCM) 1-8 

CONCATENATED PARAMETERS, MACRO 9-2 

CONCATENATION STATEMENTS, CNT & CNTE 8-17 

CONDITION, IF STATEMENT 4-5 

CONSTANTS 1-2 

CONTINUATION LINES 1-7 

CONVENTION FOR DESCRIBING LANGUAGE STATEMENTS 1-7 

CONVERSION, DATA - FIG 6-1 6-14 

COPIES PARAMtTER, FCSYS STATEMENT 6-36 

COUPLED STATEMENTS B-2 

CP B-2 

CP OPTIONS, XQT STATEMENT 3-4 

CP TIME PARAMETER - 
- FOR: 

LIMIT 2-11 

XUT STATEMENT 3-4 



D 

DATA CONVERSION - FIG 6-1 6-14 

DATA EXCEPT ION B-2 

DEFAULT B-2 

DEFERRED JUB PROCESSING 8-19 

DEFINING JOB BLOCKS IN JUd INPUT STREAM 2-9 

DEFINITIONS, CATALOG SYSTEM 7-1 

DEL STATEMENT A-16, 7-27 

DELIMITERS 1-5, 1-6 

DELIMITING STATEMENTS, MAOKC 9-12 



I" 4 Advanced Scientific Computer 




DELV STATEMENT A- 16 , 7-64 

EXAMPLES GF 7=65 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 7-65 



DEN PARAMETER - 



- FCR 


STATEMENTS: 


CAT 




CATV 




FIT 




FOT 




MFR 




RPLV 




ESTINATICN 


PARAMETER (DEST) - 


- FCR 


STATEMENTS: 


FOT 




MFR 





7-40 
7-57 
6-13 
6-27 
8-8 
7-75 



6-27 
8-10 



DEVICE TYPE PARAMETER (DTYP) - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-35 

CATV 7-52 

FD 5-15 

RPLV 7-70 

DISC RESERVATION ( S ECT , BAND, WORD , BYTE ) PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-42 

CATV 7-58 

FD 5-8 

LIMIT 2-12 

RPLV 7-76 

START 5-28 

DMACRO STATEMENT 9-29 
DTYP PARAMETER - 

- FCR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-35 

CATV 7-52 

FD 5-15 

RPLV 7-70 



EDGENAME B-2 , 7-1 

EDGENAME PARAMETER, CATBLC STATEMENT . 7-9 

EFID PARAMETERS - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

7-39 
7-56 
6-10 
6-22 

6-32 

8-6 

7-75 

8-25 



CAT 


CATV 


FIT 


FOT 


FOSYS 


MFR 


RPLV 


SETUP 



1-5 Advanced Scientific Computer 




ENCLCSED JSL STATEMENTS, MFR 
EQJ, END OF JOB STATEMENT 

STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 

EOJX STATEMENT 

ERROR OPTION (EROP) PARAMETERt FC STATEMENT 



EXAMPLES OF - 

ACCOUNT NUMBERS 

ACCOUNT NUMBERS AND USER CCDES, LIMIT STATEMENT 

ASG STATEMENT 

BLILO STATEMENT 

CAT STATEMENT 

CATALOG STRUCTURE 
CATV STATEMENT 
CJSL STATEMENT 
CNTE STATEMENT 
DELV STATEMENT 

DISC RESERVATION PARAMETER 
DMACRO STATEMENT 
EOJ STATEMENT 
EOJX STATEMENT 



8- 13 

A-17, 2-8, 8-20 

2-8 



A-17, 8-20 
5-14 



2-3 
2-12 

6-9 

9-17 

7-43, 7-48 



7-2 

7-60, 7-63 

8-22 

8-18 

7-65 

2-12, 2-13 
9-29 

2-8 
8-20 



FD AND ASG STATEMENT 
FIT PARAMETEW 
FORM PARAMETE* 
FOSYS STATEMENT 

FOT STATEMENT 

GEN STATEMENT 

INC STATEMENT 

JOB BLOCKS 

JOB NAME PARAMETER 

JOB STATEMENT 
JOBX STATEMENT 
JUMP STATEMENT 
LIMIT STATEMENT 
LQC PARAMETER 

MACASG STATEMENT 

MACBLD 

MACRO MODEL 

MACROS 

MFR STATEMENT 

MFRE STATEMENT 
OPT PARAMETER 
PJSL STATEMENT 
PRESET STATEMENT 
PRINT STATEMENT 

RPLV STATEMENT 
SET STATEMENT 
SETUP STATEMENT 



d-o, O-Ldt D-15, 5-i6 

6-5 
6-16 
6-34 
6-32, 6-36 

6-23, 6-36 

9-19 

9-27 

2-10 

2-2 

2-6 

8-19 

9-24 

2-13 

2-4 

9-11 
9-9 
9-21 
9-14, APPENDIX A2 

8-12 

8-14 
2-6 
8-23 
9-26 
4-10 

7-78, 7-82 

4-3 

8-25 



1-6 



A dvanced Scien tific Co mputer 




START STATEMENT 5-30 

USER CODES 2-3 

VER85YN STATEMENT 9-30 

EXECUTE LOAD MODULE CXQT) STATEMENT 3-i 

EXECUTE ATTRIBUTE 7-5 

EXID PARAMETER, FOSYS STATEMENT A-23, 6-32 

EXTERNAL FILE IDENTIFICATION (EFID) - SEE EFID 7-56 



FALSE PARAMETER, JUfP STATEMENT 9-22 

FCB 5- 6 

FD A-18, 5-6 

FC AND ASG STATEMENTS, JOB STREAM PLACEMENT 5-22 

FD AND FIT STATEMENTS, JOB STREAM PLACEMENT 5-24 

FD STATEMENT 5-6 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 5-17 

RESERVING FILE ACCESS NAME FOR CP STEP EXECUTION 5-19 

STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 5-18 

FDB 5-7 

FIB 5 - 6 

FIELD, JSL B -2 

FILE 6-2, B-l 

CATALOGED B-3, 6-2 

DEFINITION AND MANIPULATION MACRO 9-7 

DESCRIPTION, INTRODUCTION 5-1 

ACCESS NAME 5-8 

DISC RESERVATION 5-8 

BUFFERING 5-12 

DEVICE IYPE 5-15 

ERROR OPTION 5-14 

LOG OF EVENTS <LQE) 5-17 

ORGANIZATION 5-10 

POSITION 5-14 

RECORD FORMAT 5-11 

RECORD LENGTH 5-10 

SETUP 5-17 

1NPLT AND OLTPUT 6-1 

PARAMETER INTERACTION 5-17 

SPECIFICATION 5-1 

STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 5-18 

FILE IN TAPE STATEMENT (FIT) 6-9 

FILENAME 5-1 
FILE, ORGANIZATION PARAMETER IFCRG) - SEE FORG 

FILE OUT TAPE (FQTi STATEMENT 6-21 

FILE RETENTION PERIOD (RETPJ PARAMETER, MFR STATEMENT 8-10 

FILE LSE (USE) PARAMETER, ASG STATEMENT 5-5 

FILES, STANDARD-ACCESS-NAMED 5-3 



^ " ' Advanced Scien tific Compu ter 



ff 



FIT STATEMENT 


A- 


-21 


, 6-9 


PARAMETER INTERACTION 






6-14 


STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 






6-15 


FLAGGEO VERSION (FLVR* PARAMETER. CHG STATEMENT 






7-21 


FORG PARAMETER - 








- FOR STATEMENTS: 








CAT 






7-38 


CATV 






7-55 


FD 






5-10 


RPLV 






7-73 


START 






5-29 


FORM PARAMETER, FCSYS STATEMENT 






6-33 


FORMAL PARAMETER 








INC STATEMENT 






9-27 


MACRO 


9- 


-2, 


9-5 


FORMAT STATEMENT 






1-4 


FQSYS STATEMENT 


A-; 


23, 


6-31 


FOT STATEMENT 


a-; 


25, 


6-21 


PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 






6-28 


STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 






6-29 


FTN 


Al-8, 


, 0-3 


FTNL 


Al- 


-U, 


, D-3 


FTNLX 


Ai- 


-13, 


. 0-3 


FXOT 


Al- 


-15 


r D-3 



GEN STATEMENT 9-18 

GEN MACRO SUBSTITLTIUN STRINGS 9-18 

GENERATION STATEMENTS, MACRO 9-12 

GLOSSARY OF TERMS APPENDIX B 

ACCESS CONTRCL B-l 

ACCESS CONTRCL LIST B-i 

ACCESS CCNTROL STATE B-l 

ACCESS NAME B-l 

ACCOUNT NUMBEP £-* 

ATTRIBUTE B-i 

BANC B-l 

BLOCK, FILE B-i 

BLOCK, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE B-2 

CATALOG B-2 

COUPLED STATEMENTS B-2 

CP B-2 

DATA EXCEPTION B-2 

DEFAULT B-2 

ECGE NAME B-2 

FIELD, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE B-2 

FILE B-2 

FILE, CATALOGED B-3 

IJSL B-3 



T 8 

Advanced Scientific Computer 




INPUT STREAM, JOB 

JOB 

J3L 

KEYWORD 

LABEL, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

LABELED TAPE 

LOAD MODULE 

LOAD TIME BOUND MEMORY 

LOAO TIME PARAMETERS 

LOADER 

NAME, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

NODE 

NODE, ROOT 

OBJECT MODULE 

OPERAND, JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE 

OPERATION, JOB SPEC IFICATI CN LANGUAGE 

OWN 

OWNER, FILE (NODE! 

PARAMETER 

PARAMETER, POSITIONAL 

PARAMETER, TAGGED 

PATH NAME 

POST MORTEM DUMP 

PP 

RECORD 

REFERENCE CCNTKOl 

REFERENCE STATE 

RESTART 

RUN TIME PARAMETERS 

SECTOR 

SEQUENCING VERSICNS 

SERVICE 

SCN 

SOURCE LANGUAGE 

STATEMENT, SPECIFICATION 

STEP 

SUBFIELD 
SUBFILE 
SUBTREE 
SYMBOL, ASC 
TASK 

TREE 

USER CODE 

VARIABLE, JOB SPECIFICATION 

VERB 

VERSION 

VERSION, FLAGGED 



GOTO STATEMENT 



Br3 

B-3 
B-3 
B-3 
B-3 
B-4 

B-4 
B-4 
B-4 
B-4 
B-4 

B-4 
B-4 
B-5 
B-5 
B-5 

B-5 
B-5 
B-5 
B-5 
B-5 

B-6 
B-6 
B-6 
B-6 
B-6 

B-6 
B-6 
B-6 
B-6 
B-7 

B-7 

B-7 
B-7 
B-7 
B-7 

B-7 
B-7 
B-7 
B-8 
B-8 

B-8 
B-8 
B-8 
B-8 

a-9 

B-9 
A-28, 4-7 



1-9 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




IDENTIFIER/LABEL FIELD 1-5 

IF STATEMENT A-28, 4-5 

RELATIONAL OPERATORS 4-6 

I JSL B-3 

ILLUSTRATIONS* LIST OF XIV 

INC STATEMENT 9-27 

INDICATORS, JSL 1-4 

INPUT OF CATALOGED FILES, FD STATEMENT 5-19 
INPUT OF NON-CATALGGED FILES - 

FD 5-20 

PIT 5-20 

INPUT STREAM, JCB B-3 

INTRINSIC JSL . 9-2 



JOB 2-1, A-29, B-3 

JOB BLOCKS 2-9, 4-2 

JOB BLOCK DEFINITION 2-9 

JOB CATEGORY 2-3 

inn kiamp ?_•> 

www .«».••_ 4L ~ *. 

JOB SPECIFICATICN INDICATORS 1-4 

JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE STATEMENT IDENTIFIER 1-5 
JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE STATEMENTS - SEE STATEMENT SUMMARIES 

JOB SPECIFICATION VARIABLES 1-3, 4-2 

JOB STATEMENT UOB) 2-1 

STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 2-6 

JQBX STATEMENT A-30, 8-19 

JSL B-3 

JSL ENCLOSED STATEMENTS, MFR PARAMETERS 8-13 

JUMP STATEMENT 9-22 

BCOLEAN PARAMETER FORMAT 9-22 



KEYWORC B-3 

KEYWCRD PARAMETERS -SEE TAGGED PARAMETERS 1-6 



LABEL B-3, 1-5 

LABEL FIELD l-b 

LABEL 4LABL) PARAMETERS - 
- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-39 

CATV 7-55 

FIT 6-11 

FOT 6-23 



1-10 A dvanced Scien tific Compu ter 




GOTO 4-7 

IF 4-6 

JUMP 9-22 

MEND 9-15 

MFR 8-7 

RPLV 7-74 

LABELED TAPE b-4 

LANGUAGE ELEMENTS 1-1 

LANGUAGE STATEMENT CONVENTIONS 1-7 
LIMIT STATEMENT A-31, 2-10 

LISTS 1-4 

LNK Al-16, D-4 

LNKX Al-19, D-4 

LOAD MODULE B-4 

LOADER B-4 

LOAD TIME BOUND MEMCRY B-4 

LOAD TIME PARAMETERS B-4 

LOAD-TIME PARAMETERSt XQT STATEMENT 3-2 

LOCATION (LOG) PARAMETER - 
- FOR STATEMENTS: 

FIT 6-14 

FOSYS 6-33 

FOT 6-26 

JOB 2-4 

MFR 8-10 

LOCAL LABEL, MACRO 9-2 

LREC PARAMETER, FD STATEMENT 5-10 

LTP PARAMETER, XQT STATEMENT 3-2 



MACASG STATEMENT 9-10 

MACeLD STATEMENT 9-8 

PARAMETER INTERACTION 9-9 

STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 9-9 

MACRO EXAMPLES APPENDIX A2 

MACRC LANGUAGE 9-1 

ACTUAL PARAMETER 9-2, 9-7 

BODY . 9-1 

CALL 9-1 

CONCATENATED PARAMETERS 9-2 

DEFINITION 9-1 

DELIMITING STATEMENT 9-12 

DIRECTIVES 9-2 

EXPANSION 9-1 

FILE DEFINITION AND MANIPULATION 9-7 

FORMAL PARAMETER 9-2 f 9-5 

GENERATION STATEMENTS 9-12 

INTRINSIC JSL 9-2 



I" 1 1 Advanced Scientific Computer 



V 



LANGUAGE TERMINOLOGY 
LANGUAGE STATEMENTS 

LOCAL LABEL 

MCDEL STATEMENT 

MODEL STATEMENT SUBSTITUTION STRING 

NAME, MACRO STATEMENT 

PARAMETER MODIFICATION STATEMENT 

PARAMETERS 

POSITIONAL PARAMETER 
PROCESSING 
QUALIFIED PARAMETER 
SEQUENCE CONTROL STATEMENT 

STATUS PARAMETER 
TAGGED PARAMETER 

MACRO MOCEL STATEMENT, VERB 
MACRO NAME, MEND STATEMENT 

MACRO STATEMENT 

EXAMPLES 

SYSTEM, SUMMARY 

MACRO STATEMENT PARAMETERS 
MACRO STATEMENT — EXAMPLES 

BUILD (BUFFER CCNSTRUCT - PARAMETERS) 

DMACRO (DEACTIVATE MACRO) 

GEN (CLEAR BUILD - OUTPUT) 

INC (INCREMENT PRESET PARAMETER) 

JUMP (SEQUENCE CCNTRGL) 

MACASG (ASSIGN MACRO FILE) 

MACBLO (BUILC/MODIFY MACRO) 

MACRO (BEGIN MACFO) 

MEND (END MACRO) 

PRESET (SET DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES) 

MACROS 

QUALIFIED PARAMETERS 
MAXIMUM VERSIONS (PXVR) - SEE MXVR 
MEND STATEMENT 

MESSAGE PARAMETER (MESG), PRINT STATEMENT 
MFR PARAMETERS FOR ENCLOSED JSL STATEMENTS 



9-1 
9-3 

9-2 

9-1, 9-20 

9-21 

9-13 

9-12 

9-4 
9-2 
9-3 
9-2 
9-12 



9-3, 



9-6 
9-2 



MFR STATEMENT 

PARAMETER 
STATEMENT 

MFRE STATEMENT 

MIN PARAMETER, LIPIT 



INTERACTIONS 
INTERACTIONS 



STATEMENT 



MULTI-FILE IDENTIFICATION, 
MULTI-FILE REQUESTS 
MXVR PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 

CATBLO 

CATN 

CHG 



MFR STATEMENT 



9-20 

9-15 

9-13 

APPENDIX A2 

APPENDIX Al 

9-13 

9-16 
9-29 
9-18 
9-27 

9-22 
9-10 
9-8 
9-15 
9-15 
9-25 

9-1 
9-2 

9-15 

4-8 

8-13 

A-32, 8-5 

8-11 

8-12 

A-34,8-14 

2-14 

8-6 
8-5 



7-31 
7-10 
7-15 
7-21 



1-12 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




NAME, JSL B-4 

NOOE - NCCE ROOT B-4 

NON-CATALOGED FILE INPUT - 5-20 

FRCM TAPE 6-9 

- FCR STATEMENTS: 

FD 5-18 

FIT 5-20 

NON-CATALOGED FILE OUTPUT - 5-21 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

FD 5-21 

FOT 6-21 

NORMAL CATALOGING FUNCTIONS - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CATV 7-51 

RPLV 7-69 

NORMAL NOCE CREATION AND CATALOGING FUNCTION, CAT STATEMENT 7-30 



OBJECT MCDULE B-5 

OPERAND, JSL B-5 

OPERAND, VERBSYN STATEMENT 9-30 

OPERANDS FIELD 1-5 

OPERATION FIELD 1-5 

OPERATICN, JSL B-5 

OPERATOR INTERFACE FOR BATINT STATEMENT 8-29 

OPTICN (UPT) PARAMETER - 
- FCR STATEMENTS: 

DELV 7-65 

FOSYS 6-36 

FOT 6-25 

JCB 2-5 

PRINT 4-9 

XCT 3-3 

GPTICNAL LABEL 1-5 

OUTPUT OF NUN-CAT ALCGED FILES, FC STATEMENT 5-21 

OUTPUT TO SYSTEM (FCSYSI STATEMENT 6-31 

QtfN B-5 

OWN ATTRIBUTE 7-5 

OWNER, FILE (NODE J B-5 



1-13 

Advanced Scientific Computer 



s 



,c n 



PARAMETER 

PARAMETER INTERACTICN SUMMARY - 

- FCR STATEMENTS: 

BAT INT 

CAT 

CATBLD 

CATN 

CATV 



B-5 



8~ 28 
7-34, 7-34,7-42 
7-12 
7-17 
7-59 



CFG 

DELV 

FD 

FIT 

FOT 

MACfiLD 

MFR 

PRINT 

RPLV 

START 

PARAMETER MODIFICATION STATEMENTS, MACRO 

PARAMETER, POSITIONAL 

PARAMETERS, MACRO STATEMENT 

PARAMETERS, TAGGED 

PARITY ERROR OPTICN (PRTYJ - SEE PRTY 



7-25 
7-65 
5-17 
6-14 
6-28 

9-8 
8-11 

4-9 
7-77 
5-29 

9-12 

B-5 

9-13 

1-6, B-5 



PATH 


DEFINITION 


(PC) 


STATEMENT 


PATHNAME - 








- FOR STATEMENTS: 




ASG 








CAT 








CATN 








CATV 








CHG 








OEL 








DELV 








MACASG 








PD 








RPLV 







PATHNAME £ NODENAME 

PATHNAME PARAMETER, PD STATEMENT 

PD 

PJSL STATEMENT 

POS PARAMETER, FD STATEMENT 

POSITION PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

BUILD 

FD 

GEN 

POSITIONAL PARAMETERS 
MACRO 



6-7 
B-6, 7-1 

6-3 
7-31 
7-14 
7-51 
7-21 

7-27 
7-64 

9- 1 1 

6-7 

7-69 

7-1 

6-7 

A-34, 6-7 

A-34, 8-23 

5-14 



9-16 
5-14 
9-18 

1-6 
9-2 



1-14 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




POST MORTEM DUMP B-6 

PP B-6 

PRESET STATEMENT 9-25 

PARAMETERS 9-25 

PRESESSION START TIME (PST) PARAMETER, BATINT STATEMENT 8-27 

PRINT SPACE (PRTS1, FQSYS STATEMENT 6-35 

PRINT STATEMENT 4-8 

PRINTABLE SPECIAL CHARACTERS 1-2 

PROGRAM FLOW SPECIFICATION, GENERAL 4-1 

PROGRAM PROCESSING, GENERAL 3-1 

PROTECT PARAMETER, SETUP STATEMENT 8-25 

PRTS PARAMETER, l-CSYS STATEMENT 6-35 

PRTY PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

FIT 6-12 

FOT 6-26 

PST PARAMETER, BATINT STATEMENT 8-27 



OUALIFIEC PARAMETER, MACROS 9-2 



RCFM PARAMETER, FC STATEMENT 5-11 

RCTL PARAMETERS - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-41 

CATV 7-58 

FIT 6-13 

FOT 6-28 

MFR 8-9 

RPLV 7-76 

READ OR EXECUTE ATTRIBUTE 7-5 

RECORD B-6 

RECORD FORMAT, FD STATEMENT 5-11 
RECORDING CONTROL (RCTL) - SEE RCTL 

RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) - SEE TAPE RECORDING TRACKS 

RECORD LENGTH PARAMETER (LREC), FD STATEMENT 5-10 

REFERENCE ATTRIBUTE 7-5 

REFERENCE CONTROL, CATALOG SYSTEM B-6, 7-6 

REFERENCE CONTROL STATE PARAMETER (RFST) - SEE RFST 

REFERENCE STATE B-6 

REL STATEMENT A-36, 8-1 

RENAME STATEMENT A-36, 8-3 

REPLACE VERSION (RPLV) STATEMENT - SEE RPLV 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



it 



,£ n 



RESTART B-6 
RETENTION PERIOD PARAMETER (RETP) - SEE RETP 

RESERVING FILE ACCESS NAME - CP STEP EXECUTION, FD STATEMENT 5-19 

RETP, VERS PARAMETER, CHG STATEMENT 7-21 

RETP PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-37 

CATV 7-54 

POT 6 -25 

MFR 8-10 

RPLV 7-72 
RETRY (RTRY) PARAMETERS - SEE RTRY 

RFST PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-32 

CATBLD 7-H 

CATN 7 - 16 

CHG 7-23 

RFST, ACST AND SON PARAMETER INTERACTION - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-35 

CATBLD 7-13 

CATN 7-19 

CFG 7-26 

RPLV STATEMENT A-37, 7-67 

NORMAL CATALCGING FUNCTICNS 7-69 

PARAMETER INTERACTIONS 7-77 

SPECIAL CATALCGING FUNCTIONS 7-73 

RTP PARAMETER 3-3 
RTRY PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

FIT 6-1? 

FOT 6-25 

RUN TIME PARAMETERS B-6 

RUN TIME PARAMETERS, XGT STATEMENT 3-3 



SCRATCH TAPE VOLUMES, SPECIFYING 6-32 

SCRATCH VCLUME CCLNT PARAMETER (SVC) - SEE SVC 

SOU PARAMETER, FOR BATINT STATEMENT 8-28 

SECT PARAMETER - 

- FCR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-42 

CATV 7-58 

FD 5-6 

LIMIT STATEMENT 2-11 

RPLV 7-76 

START 5-28 



1-16 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SECTOR B _ 6 

SECTORt CCNVERSIGN OF APPENDIX r 

SEQUENCE CONTROL STATEMENT, MACRC 9-12 

SEQUENCING VERSIONS g_ 7 

SERVICE B _ 7 

^ C ^ ^ A L, nl UUf\Ml.£t«JI\! f w L* w J ?AKMrltTtt\# £5 A 1 £ vm I STATEMENT A«» 7fi 

SET STATEMENT A-40, 4-3 



VALUES 



4-4 



SETUP STATEMENT A-40, 8-24 

SETUP PARAMETER, FD STATEMENT 5-17 



SON 



CATBLD 

CATN 

CHG 



- FCR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 



RPLV 

SPECIAL CATALOGING FUNCTIGN 
- FCR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 



RPLV 



RPLV 



1-17 



B-7 



SON PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7-33 

CATBLD 7 _ u 

CATN 7 _ 16 

CfcG 7 _23 

SON-ADD CCNTROL, CATALOG SYSTEM 7-7 

SON-ADD CONTROL STATE (SUNI PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
CAT 7 . 33 



7-11 
7-16 
7-23 



SOURCE LANGUAGE B _ 7 

SOURCE (SRC) PARAMETER - 



7-37 



CATV 7 . 54 



7-73 



7-38 



CATV 7 _ 54 



7-73 



SPECIAL CHARACTERS, PRINTABLE 1-2 

SPECIAL FLNCTICNS, GENERAL 8-1 

SPECIAL FUNCTION STATEMENTS 9-28 

SRC PARAMETER - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7 . 37 

CATV 7 _ 5A 

RPLV 7 _77 

SRC=DSEC PARAMETER INTERACTION - 

- FCR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 7 . 42 

CATV 7 _59 



7-77 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




SRC=TP OR FT PARAMETER INTERACTION 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
! CAT 

CATV 

RPLV 
SST PARAMETER, BATINT STATEMENT 



7-43 
7-59 
7-78 
8-27 



STAND/RO-ACCESS-NAMED FILES 

START STATEMENT 

PARAMETER INTERACTION 
STATEMENT INTERACTIONS 



5-3 

A-41, 5-27 

5-29 

5-29 



STATEMENT FORMAT 
STATEMENT INTERACTIONS - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 

ASG 

BATINT 

CNT 

EOJ 

FD 

FIT 

FOT 

MACLBD 

MFR 
PRINT 
START 
XGT 

STATEMENT SPECIFICATION 

STATEMENT SUMMARIES 

ASG (ASSIGN FILE) 

BATINT (TRANSFORM BATCH TO INTERACTIVE) 

CAT (CATALOG NODE + VERSICN) 

CATBLD (CATALCG STRUCTURE DEFINITION) 

CATN (NODE ENTRY - CATALOG) 
CATV (ENTER VERSION - NODE) 
CHG (CHANGE NODE) 
CJSL (SYNTAX-CHECK JOBX) 

CNT (CONCATENATEC FILES ACCESS) 

CNTE (END OF CNT) 

OEL (DELETE NODE/FILES) 

DELV (DELETE VERSION - AT NODE) 

EOJ (END CF JOB) 
EOJX (DEFERREC EOJ) 
FD (FILE DESCRIPTION) 
FIT (FI-1/2 INCH TAPE) 

FOSYS (FO TO SYSTEM) 
FOT (FO-l/2 INCH TAPE) 
GOTO (UNCONDITIONAL BRANCH) 
IF (CONDITIONAL BRANCH) 

JOB (JOB BEGINNING) 
JOBX (DEFERREC JOB) 



1-4 





6-5 




8-28 




8-18 




2-8 




5-18 




6-15 




6-29 




9-9 




8- 12 




4-9 




5-29 




3-6 




B-7 


APPENDIX A 


6-3, 


, A-l 


8-27, 


, A-2 


7-28, 


, A-3 


7-9, 


r A-6 


7-14, 


, A-8 


7-49, 


A- 10 


7-20, 


A- 13 


8-22, 


A- 15 


8-17, 


A- 15 


8-18, 


A- 16 


7-27, 


A- 16 


7-64, 


A- 16 


2-8, 


A- 17 


8-20, 


A- 17 


5-6, 


A- 18 


6-9, 


A-21 


6-31, 


A- 23 


6-21, 


A-25 


4-7, 


A-28 


4-5, 


A- 28 


2-1, 


A- 29 


8-19, 


A- 30 



1-1 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




LIMIT UOB BLCCKS) 

MFR (MULTI-FILE REQUESTS! 

MFRE (ENO OF MFR ) 
PD (PATH DEFINITION) 
PJSL (EXECUTE EOJX) 
PRINT (FIX PRINT VALUES) 
REL (RELEASE! 
RENAME (RENAME FILE) 

RPLV (REPLACE VERSICN) 

SET (SET VALUE OF VARIABLE) 

SETUP (SCHEDULE SECONDARY STORAGE DEVICE) 

START (INITIATE FILE INPUT) 

STOP (INPUT FILE DELIMITER) 
VERBSYN (VERB SYNONYM) 
XQT (EXECUTE LOAC MODULE) 



STATEMENT USES 
STATEMENTS! MACRO 
STEP 

STCP STATEMENT 

SUBFIELD 

SUBFILE 



2-10, 


A-31 


8-5, 


A-32 


8-14, 


A- 34 


6-7, 


A- 34 


8-23, 


A— 34 


4-8, 


A- 35 


8-1, 


A- 36 


8-3, 


A-36 


7-67, 


t A-37 


4-3, 


A- 40 


8-24, 


A-40 


5-27, 


A-41 


5-32, 


A-42 




9-30 


3-1, 


A-43 


APPENDIX D 




9-3 




B-7 


A-42, 


5-32 




B-7 




B-7 



SUBSTITLTICN STRING - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
BUILD 

GEN 

MACRO MODEL 

SUBTREE 

SUMMARIES, STATEMENT 

MACROS 

MACRO EXAMPLES 

SVC PARAMETERS - 

- FOR STATEMENTS: 
FCT 

MFR 
SETUP 

SYMBCL, *SC 

SYNONYM 

SYNONYM PARAMETER, PD STATEMENT 

SYNONYM PARAMETER, VtKbSYN STATEMENT 
SYSTEM, STANOARC-ACCESS-NAME 

SYSTEM MACRO(S) SUMMARY 
ASM 

EXAMPLES 
ASML 

EXAMPLES 
ASMLX 

EXAMPLES 
CJSL 



A2-1 
A2-3 
A2-4 



9-16 
9-18 
9-21 

B-7 

APPENDIX A 

APPENDIX Al 

APPENDIX A2 





8-9 




8-25 


e-8, 


L-l 




7-3 




6-7 




9-30 




5-3 


APPENDIX Al 


Al-1, 


D-l 


A 1-4, 


D-i 


Al-6, 


D-l 


A15, 


D-2 



1-19 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




FTN 
FTNL 
FTNLX 
FXQT 

LNK 
LNKX 



EXAMPLES 
EXAMPLES 
EXAMPLES 
EXAMPLES 
EXAMPLES 
EXAMPLES 



A2-5 
A2-6 
A2-7 
A2-8 
A2-9 
A2-10 



Al-8, D-3 

Al-11, D-3 

Al-13, D-3 

Al-15, D-3 

Al-16, D-4 

Al-19, D-4 



TAGGED PARAMETERS 

MACRO 
TAPE OENSITY PARAMETER (DEN) - SEE DEN 

TAPE INPUT, NON-CATALOGED FILE 

TAPE RECORDING TRACKS (TRKS) PARAMETER - SEE TRKS 

TASK 

TERMINAL IDENTIFIER (TMID) PARAMETER, BATINT STATEMENT 

TERMINOLCGYt THE M*CRO LANGUAGE 

TERMS - SEE GLOSSARY OF TERMS 

TREE 

TREE STRLCTURE, CATALCG 

TRKS PARAMETER - 

- FCR STATEMENTS: 

CAT 

CATV 

FIT 

FOT 
MFR 
RPLV 

TRUE PARAMETER, JL^F STATEMENT 
TYPE, FOSYS STATEMENT 



1-6 
9-2 



6-9 

B-8 
8-28 

9-1 

B-8 
7-2 



7-40 
7-57 
6-13 

6-27 

8-9 

7-76 

9-24 
6-32 



USCO (CATALOG LSER) 

USE PARAMETEK, ASG STATEMENT 

USER CODE 

USER INTERFACE, BATINT STATEMENT 

USES, STATEMENTS 



2-12 

6-5 

B-8, 2-3 

8-28 

APPENDIX D 



VALID ASC SYMBOLS 



1-1 



1-20 



Advanced Scientific Computer 




VARIABLE 

JOB SPECIFICATION 
PRINT STATEMENT 



B-8, 1-3 



4-2 
4-8 



VERB 

MACRO MODEL STATEMENT 
VERBSYN STATEMENT 
VERSION - VERSION, FLAGGED 



B-8, 1-4 

9-20 

9-30 

B-9 



VERSICN (VERS) PARAMETERS - 
- FOR STATEMENTS: 
ASG 
DELV 
MACASG 
RPLV 

VERSIONS, CATALOG STRUCTURE 

VERSION RETENTION PERIOD (RETP,VERS) CHG STATEMENT 



6-4 
7-64 
9-11 
7-70 

7-4 
7-21 



WORD 2-13 

HOROS, SECTORS, BANCS CCNVERSICNS APPENDIX C 

WRITE PRCTECTICN (PROTECT) PARAMETER, SETUP STATEMENT 8-25 



XCT STATEMENT 

STATEMFNT INTERACTIONS 



A-43, 3-1 
3-6 



1-21 11-22 



Advanced Scientific Computer 



Texas Instruments 

INCORPORATED 

EQUIPMENT GROUP 
AUSTiN , TEXAS 



PUBLICATION UPDATE 



TYPE OF CHANGE 



D (MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY OR 
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE/FAILURE) 

□ ROUTINE ___ 

(BATCH PROCESSED) 



PUBLICATION 



PROGRAM ASC PUBLICATION NO. 930038-2 

Job Specification Language 
- Reference Manual 



r.v, > .-"■ 1 Q^4 — - *.~ 1 Q4-R 



SUBMITTED BY 



NAME 



PHONE 



ADDRESS 



MAiL STATION 



DATE 



LIST PAGE AND 



PARAGRAPH OR FIGURE NUMBERS AND DESCRIBE RECOMMENDED CHANGES 



FORWARD CHANGES BY FOLDING THIS SHEET AND STAPLING. RETURN ADDRESS IS ON BACK OF SHEET, 



9PIZ NOIJ.VJ.S -IIVW 

HONvwa vxva -?voinho3j. :noixn3Xjlv 

L9LQL SVX3X * NlXSflV 
6062 xog * O'd 

dnoyo XN3Wdino3 

Q3±VaOddO0NI SJ.N3WnajLSNI SVX3X 



Texas Instruments 

INCORPORATED 

EQUIPMENT GROUP 
AUSTIN , TEXAS 



APPLICATION FOR AUTOMATIC UPDATE 



PUBLICATION 



PROGRAM ^ PUBLICATION nn 930038 



title JOB SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE REFERENCE MANUAL 



SUBMITTED BY 



NAME PHONE DATE 



ADDRESS 



MAIL STATION NO. OF COPIES ORDERED 



ON RECEIPT OF THIS REQUEST, WE WILL ENTER YOUR NAME 
ON THE AUTOMATIC UPDATE LIST. IF YOUR ADDRESS IS CURRENT, 
YOU WILL RECEIVE ANY UPDATED MATERIAL THAT IS PUBLISHED 
REGARDING THIS MANUAL. 



FOLD AND STAPLE THIS SHEET. RETURN ADDRESS IS ON REVERSE SIDE 



9fr \Z NOI-LV.LS "IIVW 
HONVHS VJ.VQ HV0INH03J. 



NOI1N311V 



f 



L9L2JL SVX3± 'NIXSOV 

6062 xoa 'O'd 

dflOUQ JLN3Wdin©3 

a31VMOdyODNI 

SXN3JNHHXSMI SVX3X 





m